This is a modern-English version of The Practice and Science of Drawing, originally written by Speed, Harold. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

THE
PRACTICE & SCIENCE
OF
DRAWING

BY

HAROLD SPEED

Associé de la Société Nationale des Beaux-Arts, Paris; Member of the Royal Society of Portrait Painters, &c.


With 93 Illustrations & Diagrams


LONDON
SEELEY, SERVICE & CO. LIMITED
38 GREAT RUSSELL STREET
1913


Plate I. FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF SAME MONOCHROME PAINTING IN DIFFERENT STAGES ILLUSTRATING A METHOD OF STUDYING MASS DRAWING WITH THE BRUSH

Plate I.

Plate 1.

FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF SAME MONOCHROME PAINTING IN DIFFERENT STAGES ILLUSTRATING A METHOD OF STUDYING MASS DRAWING WITH THE BRUSH

FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME MONOCHROME PAINTING IN DIFFERENT STAGES ILLUSTRATING A METHOD OF STUDYING MASS DRAWING WITH THE BRUSH


v

PREFACE

Permit me in the first place to anticipate the disappointment of any student who opens this book with the idea of finding "wrinkles" on how to draw faces, trees, clouds, or what not, short cuts to excellence in drawing, or any of the tricks so popular with the drawing masters of our grandmothers and still dearly loved by a large number of people. No good can come of such methods, for there are no short cuts to excellence. But help of a very practical kind it is the aim of the following pages to give; although it may be necessary to make a greater call upon the intelligence of the student than these Victorian methods attempted.

First, I want to address the disappointment of anyone who picks up this book hoping to find "secrets" for drawing faces, trees, clouds, or anything else; quick tips for achieving great drawing, or any of the tricks that drawing instructors from the past used and that many still cherish today. Such methods are ineffective, as there are no shortcuts to true skill. However, the goal of the following pages is to provide practical help, though it may require more intelligence and effort from the student than the approaches used in the past.

It was not until some time after having passed through the course of training in two of our chief schools of art that the author got any idea of what drawing really meant. What was taught was the faithful copying of a series of objects, beginning with the simplest forms, such as cubes, cones, cylinders, &c. (an excellent system to begin with at present in danger of some neglect), after which more complicated objects in plaster of Paris were attempted, and finally copies of the human head and figure posed in suspended animation and supported by blocks, &c. In so far as this was accurately done, all this mechanical training of eye and hand was excellent; but it was not enough. And when with an eye trained to the closest mechanical viaccuracy the author visited the galleries of the Continent and studied the drawings of the old masters, it soon became apparent that either his or their ideas of drawing were all wrong. Very few drawings could be found sufficiently "like the model" to obtain the prize at either of the great schools he had attended. Luckily there was just enough modesty left for him to realise that possibly they were in some mysterious way right and his own training in some way lacking. And so he set to work to try and climb the long uphill road that separates mechanically accurate drawing from artistically accurate drawing.

It wasn't until some time after completing my training in two of our top art schools that I really understood what drawing meant. What we learned was to faithfully copy a series of objects, starting with the simplest shapes, like cubes, cones, cylinders, etc. (a great way to begin, though it risks neglect today). After that, we tried more complex objects made of plaster of Paris, and finally we made copies of the human head and figure posed in still positions and supported by blocks, etc. While this mechanical training of eye and hand was excellent as far as accuracy went, it wasn't enough. When I finally visited galleries on the Continent and studied the drawings of the old masters with my eye trained for precision, it quickly became clear that either my understanding or theirs about drawing was off. Very few drawings were "like the model" enough to win any awards at the major schools I had attended. Thankfully, I still had enough humility to realize that perhaps they were somehow right and that my training was lacking. So, I set out to work on bridging the gap between mechanically accurate drawing and artistically accurate drawing.

Now this journey should have been commenced much earlier, and perhaps it was due to his own stupidity that it was not; but it was with a vague idea of saving some students from such wrong-headedness, and possibly straightening out some of the path, that he accepted the invitation to write this book.

Now this journey should have started much earlier, and maybe it was his own foolishness that delayed it; but with a general idea of helping some students avoid such misguided thinking, and possibly clarifying some of the issues, he agreed to write this book.

In writing upon any matter of experience, such as art, the possibilities of misunderstanding are enormous, and one shudders to think of the things that may be put down to one's credit, owing to such misunderstandings. It is like writing about the taste of sugar, you are only likely to be understood by those who have already experienced the flavour; by those who have not, the wildest interpretation will be put upon your words. The written word is necessarily confined to the things of the understanding because only the understanding has written language; whereas art deals with ideas of a different mental texture, which words can only vaguely suggest. However, there are a large number of people who, although they cannot viibe said to have experienced in a full sense any works of art, have undoubtedly the impelling desire which a little direction may lead on to a fuller appreciation. And it is to such that books on art are useful. So that although this book is primarily addressed to working students, it is hoped that it may be of interest to that increasing number of people who, tired with the rush and struggle of modern existence, seek refreshment in artistic things. To many such in this country modern art is still a closed book; its point of view is so different from that of the art they have been brought up with, that they refuse to have anything to do with it. Whereas, if they only took the trouble to find out something of the point of view of the modern artist, they would discover new beauties they little suspected.

When discussing any topic related to experience, like art, the chances for misunderstanding are huge, and it’s alarming to think about the credit that might be mistakenly attributed to someone because of those misunderstandings. It’s similar to describing the taste of sugar; only those who have tasted it will truly understand, while those who haven’t will interpret your words in the wildest ways. Written language is limited to topics that can be understood because only understanding has written language, while art engages with concepts of a different nature that words can only barely hint at. However, there are many people who, although they can't be said to have fully experienced any works of art, definitely have a strong desire that, with a little guidance, could lead them to a deeper appreciation. That’s why books about art are helpful. Although this book is mainly for students actively working in the field, it’s also hoped that it will interest the growing number of people who, worn out from the hurried pace of modern life, seek refreshment in artistic endeavors. For many in this country, modern art remains a mystery; its perspective is so different from the art they grew up with that they completely dismiss it. Yet, if they took the time to learn about the point of view of modern artists, they would uncover new beauties they never imagined existed.

If anybody looks at a picture by Claude Monet from the point of view of a Raphael, he will see nothing but a meaningless jargon of wild paint-strokes. And if anybody looks at a Raphael from the point of view of a Claude Monet, he will, no doubt, only see hard, tinny figures in a setting devoid of any of the lovely atmosphere that always envelops form seen in nature. So wide apart are some of the points of view in painting. In the treatment of form these differences in point of view make for enormous variety in the work. So that no apology need be made for the large amount of space occupied in the following pages by what is usually dismissed as mere theory; but what is in reality the first essential of any good practice in drawing. To have a clear idea of what it is you wish to do, is the first necessity of any successful performance. But our exhibitions are viiifull of works that show how seldom this is the case in art. Works showing much ingenuity and ability, but no artistic brains; pictures that are little more than school studies, exercises in the representation of carefully or carelessly arranged objects, but cold to any artistic intention.

If anyone looks at a painting by Claude Monet from the perspective of a Raphael, they'll see nothing but a confusing mix of wild brushstrokes. And if someone views a Raphael through the lens of a Claude Monet, they'll likely only perceive rigid, lifeless figures in a setting lacking the beautiful atmosphere that usually surrounds forms seen in nature. The differences in perspectives in painting are immense. In how we treat form, these varying viewpoints create a tremendous variety in the artwork. Therefore, there’s no need to apologize for the significant amount of space taken up in the following pages by what is often dismissed as mere theory; it's actually the essential foundation for any good drawing practice. Having a clear understanding of what you want to achieve is the first requirement for any successful execution. Yet, our exhibitions are viiifull of works that illustrate how rare this is in art. They feature pieces that demonstrate a lot of skill and creativity but lack any real artistic thought; paintings that are little more than school projects, exercises in representing carefully or haphazardly arranged objects, but lacking any genuine artistic intent.

At this time particularly some principles, and a clear intellectual understanding of what it is you are trying to do, are needed. We have no set traditions to guide us. The times when the student accepted the style and traditions of his master and blindly followed them until he found himself, are gone. Such conditions belonged to an age when intercommunication was difficult, and when the artistic horizon was restricted to a single town or province. Science has altered all that, and we may regret the loss of local colour and singleness of aim this growth of art in separate compartments produced; but it is unlikely that such conditions will occur again. Quick means of transit and cheap methods of reproduction have brought the art of the whole world to our doors. Where formerly the artistic food at the disposal of the student was restricted to the few pictures in his vicinity and some prints of others, now there is scarcely a picture of note in the world that is not known to the average student, either from personal inspection at our museums and loan exhibitions, or from excellent photographic reproductions. Not only European art, but the art of the East, China and Japan, is part of the formative influence by which he is surrounded; not to mention the modern science of light and colour that has had such an influence on technique. It is no wonder that a period of artistic indigestion is upon us. Hence the student has need ixof sound principles and a clear understanding of the science of his art, if he would select from this mass of material those things which answer to his own inner need for artistic expression.

Right now, it’s especially important to have some principles and a clear intellectual understanding of what you’re trying to achieve. We don’t have established traditions to guide us. The days when a student would adopt their master’s style and blindly follow it until they found their own identity are over. Those conditions belonged to a time when communication was difficult, and the artistic landscape was limited to just one town or region. Science has changed all that, and while we may miss the local flavor and single-minded focus that came from art being confined to separate areas, it’s unlikely we’ll see those conditions again. Fast travel and affordable reproduction methods have brought global art right to our doorsteps. Where the artistic resources available to a student used to be limited to a few local paintings and some prints, now there’s hardly a significant artwork in the world that the average student doesn’t know about, either from personally seeing it in museums and exhibitions or through high-quality photographic reproductions. Not only European art, but also art from the East, including China and Japan, plays a crucial role in shaping the environment around them; plus, modern techniques of light and color have greatly influenced artistic methods. It’s no surprise that we’re experiencing a period of artistic overload. Therefore, students need strong principles and a clear grasp of the science behind their art if they want to filter through all this material and find what truly resonates with their personal need for artistic expression.

The position of art to-day is like that of a river where many tributaries meeting at one point, suddenly turn the steady flow to turbulence, the many streams jostling each other and the different currents pulling hither and thither. After a time these newly-met forces will adjust themselves to the altered condition, and a larger, finer stream be the result. Something analogous to this would seem to be happening in art at the present time, when all nations and all schools are acting and reacting upon each other, and art is losing its national characteristics. The hope of the future is that a larger and deeper art, answering to the altered conditions of humanity, will result.

The state of art today is like a river where many tributaries converge at one point, causing the steady flow to become turbulent, with various streams bumping into each other and different currents pulling in different directions. Over time, these new forces will adjust to the changed situation, resulting in a larger, more refined stream. Something similar seems to be happening in art right now, as all nations and schools influence each other, and art is losing its national traits. The hope for the future is that a broader and richer art, reflecting the changed conditions of humanity, will emerge.

There are those who would leave this scene of struggling influences and away up on some bare primitive mountain-top start a new stream, begin all over again. But however necessary it may be to give the primitive mountain waters that were the start of all the streams a more prominent place in the new flow onwards, it is unlikely that much can come of any attempt to leave the turbulent waters, go backwards, and start again; they can only flow onwards. To speak more plainly, the complexity of modern art influences may make it necessary to call attention to the primitive principles of expression that should never be lost sight of in any work, but hardly justifies the attitude of those anarchists in art who would flout the heritage of culture we possess and attempt a new start. Such attempts however when sincere are interesting xand may be productive of some new vitality, adding to the weight of the main stream. But it must be along the main stream, along lines in harmony with tradition that the chief advance must be looked for.

Some people think about escaping this scene of conflicting influences and going to some bare, primitive mountaintop to start fresh. While it might be important to give the original mountain waters that started all streams a more significant role in the new flow ahead, it's unlikely that trying to escape the turbulent waters, go back, and start over will lead to much; they can only continue to flow forward. To put it simply, the complexity of modern art influences may make it essential to highlight the fundamental principles of expression that should never be forgotten in any work, but that doesn't justify the viewpoint of those anarchists in art who dismiss our cultural heritage and try to make a new beginning. Yet, such attempts, when sincere, are intriguing xand may bring some new energy, contributing to the overall current. But the primary progress should be sought along the main stream, in ways that align with tradition.

Although it has been felt necessary to devote much space to an attempt to find principles that may be said to be at the basis of the art of all nations, the executive side of the question has not been neglected. And it is hoped that the logical method for the study of drawing from the two opposite points of view of line and mass here advocated may be useful, and help students to avoid some of the confusion that results from attempting simultaneously the study of these different qualities of form expression.

Although it has seemed important to spend a lot of time trying to identify principles that underlie the art of all nations, the practical aspect of the issue hasn't been overlooked. It is hoped that the logical approach to studying drawing from the two contrasting perspectives of line and mass proposed here will be beneficial, helping students avoid some of the confusion that arises from trying to study these different qualities of form expression at the same time.


xi

CONTENTS


xii

LIST OF PLATES

I. SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM THE LIFE IN DIFFERENT STAGES
II. DRAWING BY LEONARDO DA VINCI
III. STUDY FOR "APRIL"
IV. STUDY FOR THE FIGURE OF "BOREAS"
V. FROM A STUDY BY BOTTICELLI
VI. STUDY BY ALFRED STEPHENS
VII. STUDY FOR THE FIGURE OF APOLLO
VIII. STUDY FOR A PICTURE
IX. STUDY BY WATTEAU
X. EXAMPLE OF XVTH CENTURY CHINESE WORK
XI. LOS MENENAS. BY VELAZQUEZ
XII. STUDY ATTRIBUTED TO MICHAEL ANGELO
XIII. STUDY BY DEGAS
XIV. DRAWING BY ERNEST COLE
XV. FROM A PENCIL DRAWING BY INGRES
XVI. STUDY BY RUBENS
XVII. A DEMONSTRATION DRAWING AT THE GOLDSMITHS' COLLEGE
XVIII. STUDY ILLUSTRATING METHOD OF DRAWING
XIX. xiiiILLUSTRATING CURVED LINES
XX. STUDY FOR THE FIGURE OF "LOVE"
XXI. STUDY ILLUSTRATING TREATMENT OF HAIR
XXII. STUDY FOR DECORATION AT AMIENS
XXIII. DIFFERENT STAGES OF THE PAINTING FROM A CAST (1)
XXIII. DIFFERENT STAGES OF THE PAINTING FROM A CAST (2)
XXIV. DIFFERENT STAGES OF THE PAINTING FROM A CAST (3)
XXIV. DIFFERENT STAGES OF THE PAINTING FROM A CAST (4)
XXV. ILLUSTRATING SOME TYPICAL BRUSH STROKES
XXVI. DIFFERENT STAGES OF THE SAME STUDY (1)
XXVII. DIFFERENT STAGES OF THE SAME STUDY (2)
XXVIII. DIFFERENT STAGES OF THE SAME STUDY (3)
XXIX. DIFFERENT STAGES OF THE SAME STUDY (4)
XXX. A STUDY FOR A PICTURE OF "ROSALIND AND ORLANDO"
XXXI. ILLUSTRATIONS FROM BLAKE'S "JOB" (PLATES I., V., X., XXI.)
XXXII. ILLUSTRATIONS FROM BLAKE'S "JOB" (PLATES II., XI., XVIII., XIV.)
XXXIII. FÊTE CHAMPÊTRE
XXXIV. BACCHUS AND ARIADNE
XXXV. LOVE AND DEATH
XXXVI. SURRENDER OF BREDA
XXXVII. xivTHE BIRTH OF VENUS
XXXVIII. THE RAPE OF EUROPA
XXXIX. BATTLE OF S. EGIDIO
XL. THE ASCENSION OF CHRIST
XLI. THE BAPTISM OF CHRIST
XLII. PORTRAIT OF THE ARTIST'S DAUGHTER
XLIII. MONTE SOLARO, CAPRI
XLIV. PART OF THE "SURRENDER OF BREDA"
XLV. VENUS, MERCURY, AND CUPID
XLVI. OLYMPIA
XLVII. L'EMBARQUEMENT POUR CYTHÈRE
XLVIII. THE ANSIDEI MADONNA
XLIX. FINDING OF THE BODY OF ST. MARK
L. FROM A DRAWING BY HOLBEIN
LI. SIR CHARLES DILKE
LII. JOHN REDMOND, M.P.
LIII. THE LADY AUDLEY
LIV. STUDY ON BROWN PAPER
LV. FROM A SILVER POINT DRAWING
LVI. STUDY FOR TREE IN "THE BOAR HUNT"

xv

LIST OF DIAGRAMS


17

THE PRACTICE AND SCIENCE OF DRAWING

I
INTRODUCTION

The best things in an artist's work are so much a matter of intuition, that there is much to be said for the point of view that would altogether discourage intellectual inquiry into artistic phenomena on the part of the artist. Intuitions are shy things and apt to disappear if looked into too closely. And there is undoubtedly a danger that too much knowledge and training may supplant the natural intuitive feeling of a student, leaving only a cold knowledge of the means of expression in its place. For the artist, if he has the right stuff in him, has a consciousness, in doing his best work, of something, as Ruskin has said, "not in him but through him." He has been, as it were, but the agent through which it has found expression.

The best parts of an artist’s work rely heavily on intuition, which is why some believe that artists should steer clear of overanalyzing their own artistic processes. Intuitions can be delicate and tend to vanish when examined too closely. There’s definitely a risk that too much knowledge and training might overshadow a student’s natural intuitive sense, leaving behind just a clinical understanding of how to express themselves. For an artist, if they have the right qualities, their best work reflects something, as Ruskin put it, “not in them but through them.” They serve, in a way, as a channel for that expression.

Talent can be described as "that which we have," and Genius as "that which has us." Now, although we may have little control over this power that "has us," and although it may be as well to abandon oneself unreservedly to its influence, there can be little doubt as to its being the business of the artist to see to it that his talent be so developed, that he 18may prove a fit instrument for the expression of whatever it may be given him to express; while it must be left to his individual temperament to decide how far it is advisable to pursue any intellectual analysis of the elusive things that are the true matter of art.

Talent is what we have, and Genius is what has us. While we might have little control over this force that possesses us, and it may even be wise to fully embrace its influence, there’s no doubt that it’s the artist’s responsibility to develop their talent so that they can become a suitable instrument for expressing whatever they are meant to convey. At the same time, it's up to each artist's personality to decide how far they should go in analyzing the elusive elements that truly make up art.

Provided the student realises this, and that art training can only deal with the perfecting of a means of expression and that the real matter of art lies above this and is beyond the scope of teaching, he cannot have too much of it. For although he must ever be a child before the influence that moves him, if it is not with the knowledge of the grown man that he takes off his coat and approaches the craft of painting or drawing, he will be poorly equipped to make them a means of conveying to others in adequate form the things he may wish to express. Great things are only done in art when the creative instinct of the artist has a well-organised executive faculty at its disposal.

If the student understands this, and that art training is only about improving the way to express oneself while the true essence of art is deeper and cannot be taught, then he can't have too much training. Although he must always have a childlike wonder before the inspiration that moves him, if he approaches painting or drawing without the knowledge of an adult, he won't be well-prepared to convey his thoughts effectively to others. Great art happens only when an artist's creative instinct is supported by a well-organized skill set.


Of the two divisions into which the technical study of painting can be divided, namely Form and Colour, we are concerned in this book with Form alone. But before proceeding to our immediate subject something should be said as to the nature of art generally, not with the ambition of arriving at any final result in a short chapter, but merely in order to give an idea of the point of view from which the following pages are written, so that misunderstandings may be avoided.

Of the two main aspects of the technical study of painting—Form and Color—this book focuses solely on Form. However, before diving into our main topic, it’s important to discuss the nature of art in general. The goal isn't to reach a definitive conclusion in a brief chapter but simply to provide a perspective on how the following pages are written, helping to avoid any misunderstandings.

The variety of definitions that exist justifies some inquiry. The following are a few that come to mind:

The different definitions out there make it worth looking into. Here are a few that come to mind:

"Art is nature expressed through a personality."

"Art is nature shown through an individual's personality."

19But what of architecture? Or music? Then there is Morris's

19But what about architecture? Or music? Then there’s Morris's

"Art is the expression of pleasure in work."

"Art is the joy of expressing oneself through work."

But this does not apply to music and poetry. Andrew Lang's

But this doesn’t apply to music and poetry. Andrew Lang’s

"Everything which we distinguish from nature"

"Everything that we separate from nature"

seems too broad to catch hold of, while Tolstoy's

seems too broad to grasp, while Tolstoy's

"An action by means of which one man, having experienced a feeling, intentionally transmits it to others"

"An action where one person, after feeling something, intentionally shares that feeling with others."

is nearer the truth, and covers all the arts, but seems, from its omitting any mention of rhythm, very inadequate.

is closer to the truth and encompasses all the arts, but it appears quite insufficient since it fails to mention rhythm.


Now the facts of life are conveyed by our senses to the consciousness within us, and stimulate the world of thought and feeling that constitutes our real life. Thought and feeling are very intimately connected, few of our mental perceptions, particularly when they first dawn upon us, being unaccompanied by some feeling. But there is this general division to be made, on one extreme of which is what we call pure intellect, and on the other pure feeling or emotion. The arts, I take it, are a means of giving expression to the emotional side of this mental activity, intimately related as it often is to the more purely intellectual side. The more sensual side of this feeling is perhaps its lowest, while the feelings associated with the intelligence, the little sensitivenesses of perception that escape pure intellect, are possibly its noblest experiences.

Now, the facts of life are picked up by our senses and passed on to our awareness, sparking the thoughts and feelings that make up our real lives. Thought and feeling are closely intertwined; few of our mental impressions, especially when they first appear, come without some emotion. However, we can generally separate them: on one end is what we call pure intellect, and on the other is pure feeling or emotion. The arts, I believe, serve as a way to express the emotional aspect of this mental activity, which is often closely linked to the more purely intellectual side. The more sensory aspect of this feeling might be its most basic level, while the feelings connected to intelligence—those subtle perceptions that slip past pure intellect—are possibly its most profound experiences.

Pure intellect seeks to construct from the facts brought to our consciousness by the senses, an accurately 20measured world of phenomena, uncoloured by the human equation in each of us. It seeks to create a point of view outside the human standpoint, one more stable and accurate, unaffected by the ever-changing current of human life. It therefore invents mechanical instruments to do the measuring of our sense perceptions, as their records are more accurate than human observation unaided.

Pure intellect aims to build an accurately 20measured world of phenomena based on the facts presented to our consciousness through our senses, free from personal biases. It strives to develop a perspective beyond the human experience, one that is more stable and precise, untouched by the constantly shifting nature of human life. Therefore, it creates mechanical instruments to measure our sensory perceptions, as their results are more reliable than unassisted human observation.

But while in science observation is made much more effective by the use of mechanical instruments in registering facts, the facts with which art deals, being those of feeling, can only be recorded by the feeling instrument—man, and are entirely missed by any mechanically devised substitutes.

But while in science, observation becomes much more effective through the use of mechanical instruments for recording facts, the facts that art focuses on—those of feeling—can only be captured by the feeling instrument: man. These facts are completely lost on any mechanically created substitutes.

The artistic intelligence is not interested in things from this standpoint of mechanical accuracy, but in the effect of observation on the living consciousness—the sentient individual in each of us. The same fact accurately portrayed by a number of artistic intelligences should be different in each case, whereas the same fact accurately expressed by a number of scientific intelligences should be the same.

The artistic intelligence doesn't focus on mechanical accuracy; instead, it emphasizes how observation impacts our living consciousness—the aware individual within each of us. The same fact accurately depicted by different artistic intelligences should vary in each instance, while the same fact accurately conveyed by various scientific intelligences should remain consistent.

But besides the feelings connected with a wide range of experience, each art has certain emotions belonging to the particular sense perceptions connected with it. That is to say, there are some that only music can convey: those connected with sound; others that only painting, sculpture, or architecture can convey: those connected with the form and colour that they severally deal with.

But in addition to the feelings that come from various experiences, each art form has specific emotions tied to the particular senses involved. In other words, there are some emotions that only music can express, linked to sound; and others that only painting, sculpture, or architecture can convey, connected to the forms and colors they each focus on.

In abstract form and colour—that is, form and colour unconnected with natural appearances—there is an emotional power, such as there is in music, the sounds of which have no direct connection with 21anything in nature, but only with that mysterious sense we have, the sense of Harmony, Beauty, or Rhythm (all three but different aspects of the same thing).

In abstract shapes and colors—meaning shapes and colors that aren't tied to real-life appearances—there’s an emotional strength similar to music, whose sounds don’t have a direct link to anything in nature, but only to that mysterious sense we have, the sense of Harmony, Beauty, or Rhythm (all three are just different aspects of the same thing).

This inner sense is a very remarkable fact, and will be found to some extent in all, certainly all civilised, races. And when the art of a remote people like the Chinese and Japanese is understood, our senses of harmony are found to be wonderfully in agreement. Despite the fact that their art has developed on lines widely different from our own, none the less, when the surprise at its newness has worn off and we begin to understand it, we find it conforms to very much the same sense of harmony.

This inner awareness is quite an interesting phenomenon and can be observed to some extent in everyone, especially among all civilized cultures. When we take the time to understand the art of distant cultures like the Chinese and Japanese, we discover that our senses of harmony align remarkably well. Even though their art has evolved in ways that are quite different from ours, once the initial surprise of its uniqueness fades and we start to grasp its meaning, we find that it follows a similar sense of harmony.

But apart from the feelings connected directly with the means of expression, there appears to be much in common between all the arts in their most profound expression; there seems to be a common centre in our inner life that they all appeal to. Possibly at this centre are the great primitive emotions common to all men. The religious group, the deep awe and reverence men feel when contemplating the great mystery of the Universe and their own littleness in the face of its vastness—the desire to correspond and develop relationship with the something outside themselves that is felt to be behind and through all things. Then there are those connected with the joy of life, the throbbing of the great life spirit, the gladness of being, the desire of the sexes; and also those connected with the sadness and mystery of death and decay, &c.

But aside from the feelings tied directly to how we express ourselves, there seems to be a lot in common among all the arts in their deepest expressions; they all connect to a shared core in our inner lives. This core probably holds the fundamental emotions that all humans experience. The sense of community, the deep awe and reverence people feel when contemplating the great mystery of the Universe and their own smallness in its immense presence—the longing to connect and form relationships with something beyond themselves that feels to be present in everything. Then there are the emotions related to the joy of life, the vibrancy of the great life force, the happiness of existing, the attraction between the sexes; and also those tied to the sorrow and mystery of death and decay, etc.

The technical side of an art is, however, not concerned with these deeper motives but with the 22things of sense through which they find expression; in the case of painting, the visible universe.

The technical aspect of art doesn't focus on these deeper motives but on the 22sensory elements through which they are expressed; for painting, this means the visible world.

The artist is capable of being stimulated to artistic expression by all things seen, no matter what; to him nothing comes amiss. Great pictures have been made of beautiful people in beautiful clothes and of squalid people in ugly clothes, of beautiful architectural buildings and the ugly hovels of the poor. And the same painter who painted the Alps painted the Great Western Railway.

The artist can be inspired to create by anything they see, no matter what; nothing is off-limits for them. Amazing artworks have been created of gorgeous people in stunning outfits, as well as of struggling people in unattractive clothes, of striking buildings, and of the shabby homes of the less fortunate. And the same painter who captured the Alps also painted the Great Western Railway.

The visible world is to the artist, as it were, a wonderful garment, at times revealing to him the Beyond, the Inner Truth there is in all things. He has a consciousness of some correspondence with something the other side of visible things and dimly felt through them, a "still, small voice" which he is impelled to interpret to man. It is the expression of this all-pervading inner significance that I think we recognise as beauty, and that prompted Keats to say:

The visible world is like a stunning garment to the artist, sometimes showing him the Beyond, the Inner Truth that exists in everything. He has a sense of a connection with something beyond what is visible and can barely feel it through what he sees, a "still, small voice" that drives him to share it with others. It’s this deep inner significance that I believe we identify as beauty, which inspired Keats to say:

"Beauty is truth, truth beauty."

"Beauty is truth; truth is beauty."

And hence it is that the love of truth and the love of beauty can exist together in the work of the artist. The search for this inner truth is the search for beauty. People whose vision does not penetrate beyond the narrow limits of the commonplace, and to whom a cabbage is but a vulgar vegetable, are surprised if they see a beautiful picture painted of one, and say that the artist has idealised it, meaning that he has consciously altered its appearance on some idealistic formula; whereas he has probably only honestly given expression to a truer, deeper vision than they had been aware of. The commonplace is not the true, but only the shallow, view of things.

And that’s why the love of truth and the love of beauty can coexist in an artist's work. Seeking this inner truth is the same as seeking beauty. People whose perspective doesn’t go beyond the narrow confines of the ordinary, and who see a cabbage as just a common vegetable, are shocked when they see a beautiful painting of one. They say the artist has idealized it, implying that he intentionally changed its appearance based on some lofty standard; when in reality, he probably just expressed a truer, deeper vision than they were aware of. The ordinary isn’t the real; it’s just a superficial way of looking at things.

Plate II. DRAWING BY LEONARDO DA VINCI FROM THE ROYAL COLLECTION AT WINDSOR Copyright photo, Braun & Co.

Plate II.

Plate 2.

DRAWING BY LEONARDO DA VINCI FROM THE ROYAL COLLECTION AT WINDSOR

DRAWING BY LEONARDO DA VINCI FROM THE ROYAL COLLECTION AT WINDSOR

Copyright photo, Braun & Co.

Copyright photo, Braun & Co.

23

Fromentin's

Fromentin's

"Art is the expression of the invisible by means of the visible"

"Art is the expression of the unseen through the seen."

expresses the same idea, and it is this that gives to art its high place among the works of man.

expresses the same idea, and this is what elevates art to its esteemed position among human creations.

Beautiful things seem to put us in correspondence with a world the harmonies of which are more perfect, and bring a deeper peace than this imperfect life seems capable of yielding of itself. Our moments of peace are, I think, always associated with some form of beauty, of this spark of harmony within corresponding with some infinite source without. Like a mariner's compass, we are restless until we find repose in this one direction. In moments of beauty (for beauty is, strictly speaking, a state of mind rather than an attribute of certain objects, although certain things have the power of inducing it more than others) we seem to get a glimpse of this deeper truth behind the things of sense. And who can say but that this sense, dull enough in most of us, is not an echo of a greater harmony existing somewhere the other side of things, that we dimly feel through them, evasive though it is.

Beautiful things seem to connect us with a world whose harmonies are more perfect and bring a deeper peace than this imperfect life can provide on its own. I believe our moments of peace are always linked to some form of beauty, that spark of harmony within us connecting to some infinite source outside. Like a mariner's compass, we are restless until we find rest in this one direction. In moments of beauty (because beauty is, in essence, a state of mind rather than a trait of specific objects, although some things are more likely to trigger it than others), we seem to catch a glimpse of a deeper truth behind the things we perceive. And who can say that this sense, often dull in most of us, isn't an echo of a greater harmony existing somewhere beyond what we see, which we vaguely feel through them, even if it remains elusive?

But we must tread lightly in these rarefied regions and get on to more practical concerns. By finding and emphasising in his work those elements in visual appearances that express these profounder things, the painter is enabled to stimulate the perception of them in others.

But we need to be careful in these elevated areas and move on to more practical issues. By identifying and highlighting in his work those aspects of visual appearances that convey these deeper ideas, the painter can inspire others to perceive them.

In the representation of a fine mountain, for instance, there are, besides all its rhythmic beauty of form and colour, associations touching deeper chords in our natures—associations connected with its size, age, and permanence, &c.; at any rate we have more feelings than form and colour of themselves 24are capable of arousing. And these things must be felt by the painter, and his picture painted under the influence of these feelings, if he is instinctively to select those elements of form and colour that convey them. Such deeper feelings are far too intimately associated even with the finer beauties of mere form and colour for the painter to be able to neglect them; no amount of technical knowledge will take the place of feeling, or direct the painter so surely in his selection of what is fine.

When depicting a beautiful mountain, there are, in addition to its rhythmic beauty of form and color, connections that resonate with deeper aspects of our nature—connections related to its size, age, permanence, etc. Ultimately, we experience more emotions than can be stirred by form and color alone 24. The painter must feel these things, and their artwork must be created under the influence of those feelings if they are to instinctively choose the elements of form and color that express them. These deeper emotions are too closely tied to even the finest beauties of form and color for a painter to overlook; no amount of technical skill can replace feeling or guide the painter as surely in selecting what is beautiful.

There are those who would say, "This is all very well, but the painter's concern is with form and colour and paint, and nothing else. If he paints the mountain faithfully from that point of view, it will suggest all these other associations to those who want them." And others who would say that the form and colour of appearances are only to be used as a language to give expression to the feelings common to all men. "Art for art's sake" and "Art for subject's sake." There are these two extreme positions to consider, and it will depend on the individual on which side his work lies. His interest will be more on the aesthetic side, in the feelings directly concerned with form and colour; or on the side of the mental associations connected with appearances, according to his temperament. But neither position can neglect the other without fatal loss. The picture of form and colour will never be able to escape the associations connected with visual things, neither will the picture all for subject be able to get away from its form and colour. And it is wrong to say "If he paints the mountain faithfully from the form and colour point of view it will suggest all those other associations to those who want them," unless, as is possible with a simple-minded painter, he 25be unconsciously moved by deeper feelings, and impelled to select the significant things while only conscious of his paint. But the chances are that his picture will convey the things he was thinking about, and, in consequence, instead of impressing us with the grandeur of the mountain, will say something very like "See what a clever painter I am!" Unless the artist has painted his picture under the influence of the deeper feelings the scene was capable of producing, it is not likely anybody will be so impressed when they look at his work.

Some people might say, "This is all nice, but the painter's focus is on form, color, and paint, and nothing beyond that. If he paints the mountain accurately from that perspective, it will evoke all these other associations for those who are looking for them." Others argue that the form and color of what we see are just tools to express the feelings we all share. "Art for the sake of art" and "Art for the sake of the subject." These are two opposing views to consider, and it will depend on the individual where their work fits. Their focus could be more on the aesthetic aspects, in the feelings tied directly to form and color, or on the mental associations that come with appearances, depending on their temperament. But neither perspective can ignore the other without significant loss. A work focused on form and color can never fully escape the associations tied to what we see, and a piece aimed solely at the subject can't disregard its form and color. It's incorrect to claim, "If he paints the mountain accurately from the form and color perspective, it will suggest all those other associations to those who want them," unless, as might happen with a simple-minded painter, he 25is unconsciously driven by deeper feelings and compelled to pick significant elements while being aware only of his paint. However, the reality is that his painting will likely reflect the thoughts he had, and instead of impressing us with the mountain's grandeur, it will come across as "Look how skilled I am!" Unless the artist creates his work under the influence of the deeper emotions the scene could inspire, it’s unlikely anyone will feel truly moved when they view his art.

And the painter deeply moved with high ideals as to subject matter, who neglects the form and colour through which he is expressing them, will find that his work has failed to be convincing. The immaterial can only be expressed through the material in art, and the painted symbols of the picture must be very perfect if subtle and elusive meanings are to be conveyed. If he cannot paint the commonplace aspect of our mountain, how can he expect to paint any expression of the deeper things in it? The fact is, both positions are incomplete. In all good art the matter expressed and the manner of its expression are so intimate as to have become one. The deeper associations connected with the mountain are only matters for art in so far as they affect its appearance and take shape as form and colour in the mind of the artist, informing the whole process of the painting, even to the brush strokes. As in a good poem, it is impossible to consider the poetic idea apart from the words that express it: they are fired together at its creation.

And the painter, deeply inspired by high ideals about the subject matter, who ignores the form and color through which he expresses them, will find that his work fails to convince. The immaterial can only be expressed through the material in art, and the painted symbols in the picture must be very precise if subtle and elusive meanings are to be communicated. If he can't capture the everyday aspect of our mountain, how can he expect to portray any expression of its deeper significance? The truth is, both positions are incomplete. In all good art, the content and the way it is expressed are so closely intertwined that they become one. The deeper associations related to the mountain are relevant for art only to the extent that they influence its appearance and take shape as form and color in the artist's mind, informing the entire painting process, down to the brush strokes. Just like in a good poem, it's impossible to separate the poetic idea from the words that convey it; they are created together.

Now an expression by means of one of our different sense perceptions does not constitute art, or 26the boy shouting at the top of his voice, giving expression to his delight in life but making a horrible noise, would be an artist. If his expression is to be adequate to convey his feeling to others, there must be some arrangement. The expression must be ordered, rhythmic, or whatever word most fitly conveys the idea of those powers, conscious or unconscious, that select and arrange the sensuous material of art, so as to make the most telling impression, by bringing it into relation with our innate sense of harmony. If we can find a rough definition that will include all the arts, it will help us to see in what direction lie those things in painting that make it an art. The not uncommon idea, that painting is "the production by means of colours of more or less perfect representations of natural objects" will not do. And it is devoutly to be hoped that science will perfect a method of colour photography finally to dispel this illusion.

Now, just expressing ourselves through one of our different senses doesn’t make something art, or 26the boy yelling joyfully at the top of his lungs and making a terrible noise wouldn’t be considered an artist. For his expression to effectively convey his feelings to others, it needs some structure. The expression must be organized, rhythmic, or whatever term best captures the idea of those conscious or unconscious abilities that choose and arrange the sensory elements of art to create the strongest impact by connecting with our natural sense of harmony. If we can come up with a broad definition that encompasses all the arts, it will help us understand what makes painting an art form. The common notion that painting is "creating more or less perfect representations of natural objects using colors" falls short. It’s sincerely hoped that science will eventually develop a method of color photography that finally puts this misconception to rest.

What, then, will serve as a working definition? There must be something about feeling, the expression of that individuality the secret of which everyone carries in himself; the expression of that ego that perceives and is moved by the phenomena of life around us. And, on the other hand, something about the ordering of its expression.

What would be a good working definition? There has to be something about feeling, the expression of that individuality that everyone keeps within themselves; the expression of that ego that observes and is affected by the events of life around us. And, on the other hand, something about organizing that expression.

But who knows of words that can convey a just idea of such subtle matter? If one says "Art is the rhythmic expression of Life, or emotional consciousness, or feeling," all are inadequate. Perhaps the "rhythmic expression of life" would be the more perfect definition. But the word "life" is so much more associated with eating and drinking in the popular mind, than with the spirit or force or whatever you care to call it, that exists behind consciousness 27 and is the animating factor of our whole being, that it will hardly serve a useful purpose. So that, perhaps, for a rough, practical definition that will at least point away from the mechanical performances that so often pass for art, "the Rhythmic expression of Feeling" will do: for by Rhythm is meant that ordering of the materials of art (form and colour, in the case of painting) so as to bring them into relationship with our innate sense of harmony which gives them their expressive power. Without this relationship we have no direct means of making the sensuous material of art awaken an answering echo in others. The boy shouting at the top of his voice, making a horrible noise, was not an artist because his expression was inadequate—was not related to the underlying sense of harmony that would have given it expressive power.

But who really has the words to accurately describe such a nuanced topic? If someone says, "Art is the rhythmic expression of life, or emotional consciousness, or feeling," it all falls short. Maybe "the rhythmic expression of life" is the best definition. However, the term "life" is much more linked to eating and drinking in everyday thinking than to the spirit or force, or whatever you'd like to call it, that exists behind consciousness 27 and is the driving force of our entire being, so it probably won’t be very helpful. So, for a rough, practical definition that at least suggests something beyond the mechanical acts that often pretend to be art, "the Rhythmic expression of Feeling" might work: Rhythm refers to the arrangement of the materials of art (like form and color in painting) in a way that connects them with our inherent sense of harmony, which gives them their expressive power. Without this connection, we lack a direct way of making the sensory material of art resonate with others. The boy yelling at the top of his lungs, making a terrible noise, wasn’t an artist because his expression was inadequate—it didn’t connect to the deeper sense of harmony that would have given it expressive power.

Plate III. STUDY FOR "APRIL" In red chalk on toned paper.

Plate III.

Plate 3.

STUDY FOR "APRIL"

STUDY FOR "APRIL"

In red chalk on toned paper.

In red chalk on colored paper.

Let us test this definition with some simple cases. Here is a savage, shouting and flinging his arms and legs about in wild delight; he is not an artist, although he may be moved by life and feeling. But let this shouting be done on some ordered plan, to a rhythm expressive of joy and delight, and his leg and arm movements governed by it also, and he has become an artist, and singing and dancing (possibly the oldest of the arts) will result.

Let’s put this definition to the test with some straightforward examples. Here’s a person, excited and waving their arms and legs around in pure joy; they’re not an artist, even though they may be filled with emotion. But if this excitement is expressed in a structured way, to a rhythm that conveys happiness and joy, and if their arm and leg movements are also in sync with that rhythm, then they become an artist, resulting in singing and dancing (which might be the oldest forms of art).

Or take the case of one who has been deeply moved by something he has seen, say a man killed by a wild beast, which he wishes to tell his friends. If he just explains the facts as he saw them, making no effort to order his words so as to make the most telling impression upon his hearers and convey to them something of the feelings that are stirring in him, if he merely does this, he is not an artist, although the recital of such a terrible incident may be 28moving. But the moment he arranges his words so as to convey in a telling manner not only the plain facts, but the horrible feelings he experienced at the sight, he has become an artist. And if he further orders his words to a rhythmic beat, a beat in sympathy with his subject, he has become still more artistic, and a primitive form of poetry will result.

Or consider someone who has been profoundly affected by something they’ve witnessed, like a man being killed by a wild animal, and they want to share it with their friends. If they simply state the facts as they saw them, without trying to organize their words to create a strong impact or to express the feelings stirred in them, they aren’t an artist, even though recounting such a horrific event might be 28moving. But as soon as they arrange their words to effectively communicate not just the facts but also the terrible feelings they felt while witnessing it, they become an artist. If they go further and structure their words to a rhythmic beat that resonates with the subject, they become even more artistic, and a primitive form of poetry emerges.

Or in building a hut, so long as a man is interested solely in the utilitarian side of the matter, as are so many builders to-day, and just puts up walls as he needs protection from wild beasts, and a roof to keep out the rain, he is not yet an artist. But the moment he begins to consider his work with some feeling, and arranges the relative sizes of his walls and roof so that they answer to some sense he has for beautiful proportion, he has become an artist, and his hut has some architectural pretensions. Now if his hut is of wood, and he paints it to protect it from the elements, nothing necessarily artistic has been done. But if he selects colours that give him pleasure in their arrangement, and if the forms his colour masses assume are designed with some personal feeling, he has invented a primitive form of decoration.

Or when building a hut, as long as someone is only focused on the practical side, like many builders today, and just puts up walls to protect against wild animals and a roof to keep out the rain, they aren't an artist yet. But once they start to think about their work with some emotion and arrange the sizes of their walls and roof to reflect their sense of what looks good, they become an artist, and their hut has some architectural flair. Now, if their hut is made of wood and they paint it to protect it from the weather, that's not necessarily artistic. But if they choose colors that they enjoy seeing together, and if the shapes those colors create are designed with personal expression, they've created a simple form of decoration.

And likewise the savage who, wishing to illustrate his description of a strange animal he has seen, takes a piece of burnt wood and draws on the wall his idea of what it looked like, a sort of catalogue of its appearance in its details, he is not necessarily an artist. It is only when he draws under the influence of some feeling, of some pleasure he felt in the appearance of the animal, that he becomes an artist.

And similarly, the person living in the wild who, wanting to show what a strange animal he has seen, takes a piece of burnt wood and sketches on the wall his interpretation of its appearance, creating a kind of catalog of its details, is not automatically an artist. It’s only when he draws because of some emotion, some joy he experienced seeing the animal, that he becomes an artist.

Of course in each case it is assumed that the men have the power to be moved by these things, and whether they are good or poor artists will 29depend on the quality of their feeling and the fitness of its expression.

Of course, in each case, it's assumed that the men can be moved by these things, and whether they are good or poor artists will 29depend on how genuine their feelings are and how well they express them.

Plate IV. STUDY ON TISSUE-PAPER IN RED CHALK FOR FIGURE OF BOREAS

Plate IV.

Plate IV.

STUDY ON TISSUE-PAPER IN RED CHALK FOR FIGURE OF BOREAS

STUDY ON TISSUE PAPER IN RED CHALK FOR THE FIGURE OF BOREAS

The purest form of this "rhythmic expression of feeling" is music. And as Walter Pater shows us in his essay on "The School of Giorgione," "music is the type of art." The others are more artistic as they approach its conditions. Poetry, the most musical form of literature, is its most artistic form. And in the greatest pictures form, colour, and idea are united to thrill us with harmonies analogous to music.

The purest form of this "rhythmic expression of feeling" is music. As Walter Pater illustrates in his essay on "The School of Giorgione," "music is the ideal form of art." Other art forms become more artistic as they come closer to its essence. Poetry, the most musical type of literature, is the most artistic expression of this. In the greatest paintings, form, color, and concept come together to excite us with harmonies similar to music.

The painter expresses his feelings through the representation of the visible world of Nature, and through the representation of those combinations of form and colour inspired in his imagination, that were all originally derived from visible nature. If he fails from lack of skill to make his representation convincing to reasonable people, no matter how sublime has been his artistic intention, he will probably have landed in the ridiculous. And yet, so great is the power of direction exercised by the emotions on the artist that it is seldom his work fails to convey something, when genuine feeling has been the motive. On the other hand, the painter with no artistic impulse who makes a laboriously commonplace picture of some ordinary or pretentious subject, has equally failed as an artist, however much the skilfulness of his representations may gain him reputation with the unthinking.

The painter shares his emotions through his portrayal of the visible world in nature and by capturing those combinations of form and color that spring from his imagination, all of which originally come from the natural world. If he lacks the skill to make his representation convincing to reasonable people, regardless of how grand his artistic intention may be, he will likely end up looking silly. Yet, the influence of emotions on the artist is so strong that his work rarely fails to communicate something when true feeling drives it. Conversely, a painter without any artistic impulse who creates a painfully ordinary picture of a mundane or pretentious subject has also failed as an artist, no matter how much skill his representations might earn him recognition from those who don't think critically.

The study, therefore, of the representation of visible nature and of the powers of expression possessed by form and colour is the object of the painter's training.

The study of the representation of visible nature and of the expressive powers of form and color is the goal of a painter's training.

And a command over this power of representation and expression is absolutely necessary if he is to be capable of doing anything worthy of his art.

And having control over this ability to represent and express is essential if he wants to achieve anything meaningful in his art.

30This is all in art that one can attempt to teach. The emotional side is beyond the scope of teaching. You cannot teach people how to feel. All you can do is to surround them with the conditions calculated to stimulate any natural feeling they may possess. And this is done by familiarising students with the best works of art and nature.

30This is all in art that one can try to teach. The emotional aspect goes beyond what can be taught. You can't teach people how to feel. All you can do is create an environment that encourages any natural feelings they might have. This is accomplished by exposing students to the best works of art and nature.


It is surprising how few art students have any idea of what it is that constitutes art. They are impelled, it is to be assumed, by a natural desire to express themselves by painting, and, if their intuitive ability is strong enough, it perhaps matters little whether they know or not. But to the larger number who are not so violently impelled, it is highly essential that they have some better idea of art than that it consists in setting down your canvas before nature and copying it.

It’s surprising how few art students really understand what art is. They’re likely driven by a natural desire to express themselves through painting, and if they have enough natural talent, it might not matter much whether they know the finer points. However, for the many who aren’t as strongly motivated, it’s crucial that they have a clearer understanding of art beyond just placing their canvas in front of nature and copying what they see.

Inadequate as this imperfect treatment of a profoundly interesting subject is, it may serve to give some idea of the point of view from which the following pages are written, and if it also serves to disturb the "copying theory" in the minds of any students and encourages them to make further inquiry, it will have served a useful purpose.

As flawed as this brief discussion of a really interesting topic is, it may offer some insight into the perspective from which the following pages are written. If it also challenges the "copying theory" for any students and encourages them to explore further, it will have fulfilled a valuable purpose.


31

II
DRAWING

By drawing is here meant the expression of form upon a plane surface.

By "drawing," we mean the representation of shape on a flat surface.

Art probably owes more to form for its range of expression than to colour. Many of the noblest things it is capable of conveying are expressed by form more directly than by anything else. And it is interesting to notice how some of the world's greatest artists have been very restricted in their use of colour, preferring to depend on form for their chief appeal. It is reported that Apelles only used three colours, black, red, and yellow, and Rembrandt used little else. Drawing, although the first, is also the last, thing the painter usually studies. There is more in it that can be taught and that repays constant application and effort. Colour would seem to depend much more on a natural sense and to be less amenable to teaching. A well-trained eye for the appreciation of form is what every student should set himself to acquire with all the might of which he is capable.

Art likely owes more to form for its range of expression than to color. Many of the most powerful ideas it conveys are expressed more directly through form than anything else. It's interesting to note how some of the world's greatest artists have used very few colors, relying more on form for their main impact. It’s said that Apelles only used three colors—black, red, and yellow—and Rembrandt didn’t use much more. Drawing, while being the first skill a painter learns, is also the last one they usually perfect. There's a lot that can be taught in drawing, and it really rewards constant practice and effort. Color seems to rely much more on an innate sense and is less easy to teach. A well-trained eye for appreciating form is what every student should strive to develop with all their strength.

It is not enough in artistic drawing to portray accurately and in cold blood the appearance of objects. To express form one must first be moved by it. There is in the appearance of all objects, animate and inanimate, what has been called an emotional significance, a hidden rhythm that is not 32caught by the accurate, painstaking, but cold artist. The form significance of which we speak is never found in a mechanical reproduction like a photograph. You are never moved to say when looking at one, "What fine form."

It's not enough in artistic drawing to just accurately and dispassionately capture the look of objects. To really express form, you have to feel something about it first. Every object, whether alive or not, carries an emotional significance, a subtle rhythm that a precise, meticulous, but emotionally detached artist misses. The form significance we're talking about isn't found in mechanical reproductions like photographs. You never look at a photograph and say, "What fine form."

It is difficult to say in what this quality consists. The emphasis and selection that is unconsciously given in a drawing done directly under the guidance of strong feeling, are too subtle to be tabulated; they escape analysis. But it is this selection of the significant and suppression of the non-essential that often gives to a few lines drawn quickly, and having a somewhat remote relation to the complex appearance of the real object, more vitality and truth than are to be found in a highly-wrought and painstaking drawing, during the process of which the essential and vital things have been lost sight of in the labour of the work; and the non-essential, which is usually more obvious, is allowed to creep in and obscure the original impression. Of course, had the finished drawing been done with the mind centred upon the particular form significance aimed at, and every touch and detail added in tune to this idea, the comparison might have been different. But it is rarely that good drawings are done this way. Fine things seem only to be seen in flashes, and the nature that can carry over the impression of one of these moments during the labour of a highly-wrought drawing is very rare, and belongs to the few great ones of the craft alone.

It’s hard to pinpoint exactly what this quality is. The emphasis and choices made unconsciously in a drawing created with strong feelings are too subtle to be cataloged; they evade analysis. However, it’s this ability to choose what’s significant and ignore what’s non-essential that often gives a few quickly drawn lines, which might only vaguely resemble the complex look of the real object, more life and truth than a carefully crafted drawing. In the latter, the essential and vital aspects often get overlooked in the effort of the work; meanwhile, the obvious non-essential elements slip in and obscure the original impression. Of course, if the finished drawing had been created with a focus on the specific significance intended and every stroke and detail aligned with that idea, the outcome could be different. But it’s rare for good drawings to come out this way. Beautiful things seem to flash into view only briefly, and the ability to hold onto the impression of one of those moments while working on a detailed drawing is very rare, belonging only to a few great masters of the craft.

It is difficult to know why one should be moved by the expression of form; but it appears to have some physical influence over us. In looking at a fine drawing, say of a strong man, we seem to identify ourselves with it and feel a thrill of its strength in 33our own bodies, prompting us to set our teeth, stiffen our frame, and exclaim "That's fine." Or, when looking at the drawing of a beautiful woman, we are softened by its charm and feel in ourselves something of its sweetness as we exclaim, "How beautiful." The measure of the feeling in either case will be the extent to which the artist has identified himself with the subject when making the drawing, and has been impelled to select the expressive elements in the forms.

It’s hard to say why we should be affected by the way something looks; however, it seems to have a physical impact on us. When we look at a great drawing, like that of a strong man, we tend to relate to it and feel a rush of its strength in our own bodies, making us grit our teeth, tense up, and say, "That’s impressive." Similarly, when viewing a drawing of a beautiful woman, we’re moved by its allure and feel a bit of its sweetness within ourselves as we say, "How beautiful." The intensity of our feelings in either situation will depend on how much the artist connected with the subject while creating the drawing and how they've chosen the expressive features in the forms.

Art thus enables us to experience life at second hand. The small man may enjoy somewhat of the wider experience of the bigger man, and be educated to appreciate in time a wider experience for himself. This is the true justification for public picture galleries. Not so much for the moral influence they exert, of which we have heard so much, but that people may be led through the vision of the artist to enlarge their experience of life. This enlarging of the experience is true education, and a very different thing from the memorising of facts that so often passes as such. In a way this may be said to be a moral influence, as a larger mind is less likely to harbour small meannesses. But this is not the kind of moral influence usually looked for by the many, who rather demand a moral story told by the picture; a thing not always suitable to artistic expression.

Art allows us to experience life vicariously. A smaller person can gain a bit of the broader experience of a larger one and eventually learn to appreciate a wider life experience for themselves. This is the real reason we have public art galleries. It's not just about the moral impact they supposedly have, which we hear so much about, but about guiding people, through the artist's vision, to broaden their own life experiences. This broadening of experience is true education and is very different from simply memorizing facts, which often gets mistaken for education. In a way, this can be seen as a moral influence, since a broader mindset is less likely to entertain small-mindedness. However, this isn't the type of moral influence most people typically seek; they often want a clear moral lesson presented in the artwork, which isn't always appropriate for artistic expression.

One is always profoundly impressed by the expression of a sense of bulk, vastness, or mass in form. There is a feeling of being lifted out of one's puny self to something bigger and more stable. It is this splendid feeling of bigness in Michael Angelo's figures that is so satisfying. One cannot come away from the contemplation of that wonderful ceiling of 34his in the Vatican without the sense of having experienced something of a larger life than one had known before. Never has the dignity of man reached so high an expression in paint, a height that has been the despair of all who have since tried to follow that lonely master. In landscape also this expression of largeness is fine: one likes to feel the weight and mass of the ground, the vastness of the sky and sea, the bulk of a mountain.

One is always deeply impressed by the sense of size, vastness, or mass in form. It feels like being lifted out of one's small self to something greater and more stable. It's this incredible feeling of bigness in Michelangelo's figures that is so satisfying. You can't walk away from the awe-inspiring ceiling of 34 his in the Vatican without feeling like you've experienced something of a larger life than you knew before. Never has the dignity of humanity been expressed so profoundly in paint, a height that has frustrated all who have since attempted to follow that solitary master. In landscape, this sense of largeness is also beautiful: we enjoy feeling the weight and mass of the ground, the vastness of the sky and sea, the bulk of a mountain.

On the other hand one is charmed also by the expression of lightness. This may be noted in much of the work of Botticelli and the Italians of the fifteenth century. Botticelli's figures seldom have any weight; they drift about as if walking on air, giving a delightful feeling of otherworldliness. The hands of the Madonna that hold the Child might be holding flowers for any sense of support they express. It is, I think, on this sense of lightness that a great deal of the exquisite charm of Botticelli's drawing depends.

On the other hand, one is also captivated by the sense of lightness. This is evident in much of Botticelli's work and that of the Italians from the fifteenth century. Botticelli's figures rarely appear to have any weight; they float around as if walking on air, creating a delightful feeling of being otherworldly. The hands of the Madonna holding the Child might as well be holding flowers, given their lack of support. I believe that this sense of lightness is a significant part of the exquisite charm found in Botticelli's drawings.

The feathery lightness of clouds and of draperies blown by the wind is always pleasing, and Botticelli nearly always has a light wind passing through his draperies to give them this sense.

The airy feel of clouds and the fabric swaying in the wind is always enjoyable, and Botticelli almost always captures a gentle breeze flowing through his drapery to create this effect.

As will be explained later, in connection with academic drawing, it is eminently necessary for the student to train his eye accurately to observe the forms of things by the most painstaking of drawings. In these school studies feeling need not be considered, but only a cold accuracy. In the same way a singer trains himself to sing scales, giving every note exactly the same weight and preserving a most mechanical time throughout, so that every note of his voice may be accurately under his control and be equal to the subtlest variations he may afterwards 35want to infuse into it at the dictates of feeling. For how can the draughtsman, who does not know how to draw accurately the cold, commonplace view of an object, hope to give expression to the subtle differences presented by the same thing seen under the excitement of strong feeling?

As will be explained later, in connection with academic drawing, it's essential for the student to train their eye to observe the forms of things through detailed drawing. In these school studies, emotion doesn’t need to be considered, just pure accuracy. Just like a singer practices scales, giving every note equal weight and keeping a precise rhythm, so that every note is completely under their control and can match the smallest variations they might want to express later based on feeling. How can a draftsman, who can’t accurately draw the plain, ordinary view of an object, expect to convey the subtle differences when the same object is viewed under intense emotion?

Plate V. FROM A STUDY BY BOTTICELLI In the Print Room at the British Museum.

Plate V.

Plate 5.

FROM A STUDY BY BOTTICELLI

From a study by Botticelli

In the Print Room at the British Museum.

In the Print Room at the British Museum.

These academic drawings, too, should be as highly finished as hard application can make them, so that the habit of minute visual expression may be acquired. It will be needed later, when drawing of a finer kind is attempted, and when in the heat of an emotional stimulus the artist has no time to consider the smaller subtleties of drawing, which by then should have become almost instinctive with him, leaving his mind free to dwell on the bigger qualities.

These academic drawings should also be polished and refined to the best of your ability, so that you can develop the habit of detailed visual expression. This skill will be essential later on when you're attempting more intricate drawings, and when, in the midst of emotional inspiration, you won’t have time to think about the finer details of drawing. By that point, those details should come naturally, allowing you to focus on the broader aspects.

Drawing, then, to be worthy of the name, must be more than what is called accurate. It must present the form of things in a more vivid manner than we ordinarily see them in nature. Every new draughtsman in the history of art has discovered a new significance in the form of common things, and given the world a new experience. He has represented these qualities under the stimulus of the feeling they inspired in him, hot and underlined, as it were, adding to the great book of sight the world possesses in its art, a book by no means completed yet.

Drawing, to truly deserve the name, has to be more than just accurate. It should show the form of things in a way that's more vibrant than how we usually see them in nature. Every new artist throughout history has found a fresh meaning in the shapes of everyday objects and offered the world a new experience. They've captured these qualities driven by the emotions they stirred in them, intense and emphasized, contributing to the vast collection of visual experiences that art gives the world, a collection that's far from complete.

So that to say of a drawing, as is so often said, that it is not true because it does not present the commonplace appearance of an object accurately, may be foolish. Its accuracy depends on the completeness with which it conveys the particular emotional significance that is the object of the drawing. What this significance is will vary 36enormously with the individual artist, but it is only by this standard that the accuracy of the drawing can be judged.

To say that a drawing isn't accurate just because it doesn't resemble the typical appearance of an object can be misguided. Its accuracy relies on how well it communicates the specific emotional meaning that the drawing aims to express. The significance will differ greatly depending on the individual artist, but the drawing's accuracy should only be assessed by this standard.

It is this difference between scientific accuracy and artistic accuracy that puzzles so many people. Science demands that phenomena be observed with the unemotional accuracy of a weighing machine, while artistic accuracy demands that things be observed by a sentient individual recording the sensations produced in him by the phenomena of life. And people with the scientific habit that is now so common among us, seeing a picture or drawing in which what are called facts have been expressed emotionally, are puzzled, if they are modest, or laugh at what they consider a glaring mistake in drawing if they are not, when all the time it may be their mistaken point of view that is at fault.

It’s the difference between scientific accuracy and artistic accuracy that confuses so many people. Science requires that we observe phenomena with the cold precision of a weighing scale, while artistic accuracy relies on a sensitive individual capturing the feelings stirred in them by the experiences of life. People with the scientific mindset that is so prevalent today, upon seeing a picture or drawing where what are referred to as facts are expressed with emotion, may feel confused—if they’re humble—or laugh at what they see as an obvious error in the artwork if they’re not. All the while, it could be their flawed perspective that’s the real issue.

But while there is no absolute artistic standard by which accuracy of drawing can be judged, as such standard must necessarily vary with the artistic intention of each individual artist, this fact must not be taken as an excuse for any obviously faulty drawing that incompetence may produce, as is often done by students who when corrected say that they "saw it so." For there undoubtedly exists a rough physical standard of rightness in drawing, any violent deviations from which, even at the dictates of emotional expression, is productive of the grotesque. This physical standard of accuracy in his work it is the business of the student to acquire in his academic training; and every aid that science can give by such studies as Perspective, Anatomy, and, in the case of Landscape, even Geology and Botany, should be used to increase the accuracy of 37his representations. For the strength of appeal in artistic work will depend much on the power the artist possesses of expressing himself through representations that arrest everyone by their truth and naturalness. And although, when truth and naturalness exist without any artistic expression, the result is of little account as art, on the other hand, when truly artistic expression is clothed in representations that offend our ideas of physical truth, it is only the few who can forgive the offence for the sake of the genuine feeling they perceive behind it.

But while there's no absolute artistic standard to judge the accuracy of drawing, as that standard can vary with each artist's intention, this shouldn't be an excuse for any clearly faulty drawing that incompetence might produce. This excuse is often used by students who, when corrected, say they "saw it that way." There is definitely a rough physical standard of correctness in drawing, and any extreme deviations from it, even for emotional expression, can result in something grotesque. It's essential for students to develop this physical standard of accuracy during their academic training. They should utilize every resource science offers, like studies in Perspective, Anatomy, and even Geology and Botany for Landscape, to enhance the accuracy of their representations. The impact of an artwork greatly depends on the artist's ability to communicate through representations that captivate everyone with their truthfulness and naturalness. Although having truth and naturalness without any artistic expression holds little value as art, when a truly artistic expression is presented in a way that clashes with our sense of physical truth, only a few can overlook that clash in appreciation of the genuine emotion behind it.

Plate VI. STUDY IN NATURAL RED CHALK BY ALFRED STEPHENS From the collection of Charles Ricketts and Charles Shannon

Plate VI.

Plate 6.

STUDY IN NATURAL RED CHALK BY ALFRED STEPHENS

STUDY IN NATURAL RED CHALK BY ALFRED STEPHENS

From the collection of Charles Ricketts and Charles Shannon

From the collection of Charles Ricketts and Charles Shannon

How far the necessities of expression may be allowed to override the dictates of truth to physical structure in the appearance of objects will always be a much debated point. In the best drawing the departures from mechanical accuracy are so subtle that I have no doubt many will deny the existence of such a thing altogether. Good artists of strong natural inspiration and simple minds are often quite unconscious of doing anything when painting, but are all the same as mechanically accurate as possible.

How much the need for expression can take precedence over the truth of physical structure in how objects look is always going to be a topic of debate. In the best drawings, the deviations from mechanical accuracy are so subtle that I’m sure many people will claim they don’t exist at all. Talented artists with strong natural inspiration and straightforward thinking often don’t realize they’re doing anything special while painting, yet they’re still as mechanically accurate as they can be.

Yet however much it may be advisable to let yourself go in artistic work, during your academic training let your aim be a searching accuracy.

Yet no matter how much it's recommended to express yourself freely in artistic work, during your academic training, focus on precision and accuracy.


38

III
VISION

It is necessary to say something about Vision in the first place, if we are to have any grasp of the idea of form.

It’s important to talk about Vision first if we want to understand the concept of form.

An act of vision is not so simple a matter as the student who asked her master if she should "paint nature as she saw nature" would seem to have thought. And his answer, "Yes, madam, provided you don't see nature as you paint nature," expressed the first difficulty the student of painting has to face: the difficulty of learning to see.

An act of vision isn’t as straightforward as the student who asked her teacher if she should “paint nature as she saw it” might have believed. His reply, “Yes, ma’am, as long as you don’t see nature the way you paint it,” pointed out the first challenge that a painting student must confront: the challenge of learning to really see.

Let us roughly examine what we know of vision. Science tells us that all objects are made visible to us by means of light; and that white light, by which we see things in what may be called their normal aspect, is composed of all the colours of the solar spectrum, as may be seen in a rainbow; a phenomenon caused, as everybody knows, by the sun's rays being split up into their component parts.

Let’s take a closer look at what we know about vision. Science tells us that we see objects because of light; and that white light, which allows us to see things in their usual appearance, is made up of all the colors of the solar spectrum, like you can see in a rainbow. This happens, as everyone knows, when the sun’s rays are split into their individual colors.

This light travels in straight lines and, striking objects before us, is reflected in all directions. Some of these rays passing through a point situated behind the lenses of the eye, strike the retina. The multiplication of these rays on the retina produces a picture of whatever is before the eye, such as can be seen on the ground glass at the back of a 39photographer's camera, or on the table of a camera obscura, both of which instruments are constructed roughly on the same principle as the human eye.

This light travels in straight lines and, when it hits objects in front of us, it reflects in all directions. Some of these rays pass through a point behind the lenses of the eye and hit the retina. The combination of these rays on the retina creates an image of whatever is in front of the eye, similar to what you can see on the ground glass at the back of a 39photographer's camera, or on the table of a camera obscura, both of which are built on a principle similar to that of the human eye.

These rays of light when reflected from an object, and again when passing through the atmosphere, undergo certain modifications. Should the object be a red one, the yellow, green, and blue rays, all, in fact, except the red rays, are absorbed by the object, while the red is allowed to escape. These red rays striking the retina produce certain effects which convey to our consciousness the sensation of red, and we say "That is a red object." But there may be particles of moisture or dust in the air that will modify the red rays so that by the time they reach the eye they may be somewhat different. This modification is naturally most effective when a large amount of atmosphere has to be passed through, and in things very distant the colour of the natural object is often entirely lost, to be replaced by atmospheric colours, as we see in distant mountains when the air is not perfectly clear. But we must not stray into the fascinating province of colour.

When light rays reflect off an object and travel through the atmosphere, they undergo certain changes. If the object is red, it absorbs all the other colors—yellow, green, and blue—while letting the red rays pass through. These red rays hit the retina and create an effect that gives us the sensation of red, leading us to say, "That is a red object." However, there may be moisture or dust particles in the air that alter the red rays by the time they reach our eyes, making them appear slightly different. This effect is particularly strong when light has to travel through a lot of atmosphere, and when looking at very distant things, the true color of the object can be completely lost, replaced by colors caused by the atmosphere, like we see with distant mountains on hazy days. But let’s not get sidetracked into the intriguing world of color.

What chiefly concerns us here is the fact that the pictures on our retinas are flat, of two dimensions, the same as the canvas on which we paint. If you examine these visual pictures without any prejudice, as one may with a camera obscura, you will see that they are composed of masses of colour in infinite variety and complexity, of different shapes and gradations, and with many varieties of edges; giving to the eye the illusion of nature with actual depths and distances, although one knows all the time that it is a flat table on which one is looking.

What really matters here is that the images on our retinas are flat and two-dimensional, just like the canvas we paint on. If you look at these images without bias, like you would with a camera obscura, you'll notice they are made up of blocks of color in endless variety and complexity, with different shapes and shades, as well as many types of edges. This creates an illusion of nature with real depth and distance, even though we know we are actually looking at a flat surface.

Seeing then that our eyes have only flat pictures containing two-dimension information about the 40objective world, from whence is this knowledge of distance and the solidity of things? How do we see the third dimension, the depth and thickness, by means of flat pictures of two dimensions?

Seeing that our eyes only have flat images that provide two-dimensional information about the 40objective world, where does this understanding of distance and the solidity of objects come from? How do we actually perceive the third dimension, the depth and thickness, through flat two-dimensional images?

The power to judge distance is due principally to our possessing two eyes situated in slightly different positions, from which we get two views of objects, and also to the power possessed by the eyes of focussing at different distances, others being out of focus for the time being. In a picture the eyes can only focus at one distance (the distance the eye is from the plane of the picture when you are looking at it), and this is one of the chief causes of the perennial difficulty in painting backgrounds. In nature they are out of focus when one is looking at an object, but in a painting the background is necessarily on the same focal plane as the object. Numerous are the devices resorted to by painters to overcome this difficulty, but they do not concern us here.

The ability to judge distance mainly comes from having two eyes positioned slightly apart, giving us two perspectives on objects. Our eyes can also focus at different distances, making other things temporarily out of focus. In a picture, however, the eyes can only focus at one distance (the distance from the eye to the picture plane when you look at it), which is a major reason why painting backgrounds is so challenging. In real life, backgrounds are out of focus when you’re looking at a specific object, but in a painting, the background has to be on the same focal plane as the subject. Artists use many techniques to address this issue, but that isn’t our focus here.

The fact that we have two flat pictures on our two retinas to help us, and that we can focus at different planes, would not suffice to account for our knowledge of the solidity and shape of the objective world, were these senses not associated with another sense all important in ideas of form, the sense of touch.

The fact that we see two flat images on our retinas and can focus on different distances wouldn’t be enough to explain how we understand the solidity and shape of the outside world, if we didn’t also rely on another crucial sense for our ideas of form, the sense of touch.

This sense is very highly developed in us, and the earlier period of our existence is largely given over to feeling for the objective world outside ourselves. Who has not watched the little baby hands feeling for everything within reach, and without its reach, for the matter of that; for the infant has no knowledge yet of what is and what is not within its reach. Who has not offered some bright object to a 41young child and watched its clumsy attempts to feel for it, almost as clumsy at first as if it were blind, as it has not yet learned to focus distances. And when he has at last got hold of it, how eagerly he feels it all over, looking intently at it all the time; thus learning early to associate the "feel of an object" with its appearance. In this way by degrees he acquires those ideas of roughness and smoothness, hardness and softness, solidity, &c., which later on he will be able to distinguish by vision alone, and without touching the object.

This sense is really well developed in us, and the earlier part of our lives is mostly spent reaching out to understand the world around us. Who hasn't seen a little baby's hands reaching for everything within reach and even beyond it, since the baby doesn't yet know what it can or can't grab? Who hasn't held out a shiny object to a young child and watched its awkward attempts to grab it, almost as clumsy as if it were blind, because it hasn't figured out how to judge distances yet? And once it finally gets hold of it, how eagerly it explores the object, examining it closely the whole time; thus, learning early on to connect the "feel of an object" with its appearance. Gradually, it picks up ideas about roughness and smoothness, hardness and softness, solidity, etc., which later on it will be able to identify just by sight, without needing to touch the object.

Our survival depends so much on this sense of touch, that it is of the first importance to us. We must know whether the ground is hard enough for us to walk on, or whether there is a hole in front of us; and masses of colour rays striking the retina, which is what vision amounts to, will not of themselves tell us. But associated with the knowledge accumulated in our early years, by connecting touch with sight, we do know when certain combinations of colour rays strike the eye that there is a road for us to walk on, and that when certain other combinations occur there is a hole in front of us, or the edge of a precipice.

Our survival relies heavily on our sense of touch, making it extremely important to us. We need to know if the ground is solid enough to walk on or if there’s a hole in our path; simply seeing colors hitting our eyes won’t inform us about that. However, based on the knowledge we gained in our early years by linking touch with sight, we can tell that when certain colors strike our eyes, there’s a path for us to walk on, while other color combinations warn us of a hole or the edge of a cliff ahead.

And likewise with hardness and softness, the child who strikes his head against the bed-post is forcibly reminded by nature that such things are to be avoided, and feeling that it is hard and that hardness has a certain look, it avoids that kind of thing in the future. And when it strikes its head against the pillow, it learns the nature of softness, and associating this sensation with the appearance of the pillow, knows in future that when softness is observed it need not be avoided as hardness must be.

And the same goes for hardness and softness. When a child hits their head against the bedpost, nature makes it clear that they should avoid such things. They realize that it's hard and recognize what hardness looks like, so they stay away from that kind of thing in the future. And when they bump their head against the pillow, they learn what softness is. By connecting this feeling with how the pillow looks, they understand in the future that softness doesn't need to be avoided like hardness does.

42Sight is therefore not a matter of the eye alone. A whole train of associations connected with the objective world is set going in the mind when rays of light strike the retina refracted from objects. And these associations vary enormously in quantity and value with different individuals; but the one we are here chiefly concerned with is this universal one of touch. Everybody "sees" the shape of an object, and "sees" whether it "looks" hard or soft, &c. Sees, in other words, the "feel" of it.

42Sight isn't just about the eye. A whole series of connections linked to the outside world is triggered in the mind when light hits the retina after bouncing off objects. These connections can vary greatly in both amount and significance for different people; but the one we're mainly focusing on here is the universal experience of touch. Everyone "sees" the shape of an object and "sees" whether it "looks" hard or soft, etc. In other words, we perceive its "feel."

If you are asked to think of an object, say a cone, it will not, I think, be the visual aspect that will occur to most people. They will think of a circular base from which a continuous side slopes up to a point situated above its centre, as one would feel it. The fact that in almost every visual aspect the base line is that of an ellipse, not a circle, comes as a surprise to people unaccustomed to drawing.

If someone asks you to picture an object, like a cone, most people probably won't first consider how it looks. Instead, they'll think about a circular base that smoothly rises to a point above the center, much like how it feels. It often surprises those who aren't used to drawing that, visually, the base is actually shaped like an ellipse rather than a circle.

But above these cruder instances, what a wealth of associations crowd in upon the mind, when a sight that moves one is observed. Put two men before a scene, one an ordinary person and the other a great poet, and ask them to describe what they see. Assuming them both to be possessed of a reasonable power honestly to express themselves, what a difference would there be in the value of their descriptions. Or take two painters both equally gifted in the power of expressing their visual perceptions, and put them before the scene to paint it. And assuming one to be a commonplace man and the other a great artist, what a difference will there be in their work. The commonplace painter will paint a commonplace picture, while the form and colour will be the means of stirring deep associations 43and feelings in the mind of the other, and will move him to paint the scene so that the same splendour of associations may be conveyed to the beholder.

But beyond these simpler examples, what a rich array of associations floods the mind when we witness something that touches us deeply. Place two men in front of a scene, one an average person and the other a great poet, and ask them to describe what they see. If both can express themselves reasonably well, the difference in the quality of their descriptions would be striking. Or take two painters who are equally skilled at expressing their visual perceptions and set them before the same scene to paint it. Assuming one is just an ordinary person and the other a great artist, the difference in their work will be pronounced. The ordinary painter will create an ordinary painting, while the form and color will evoke profound associations and feelings in the great artist's mind, inspiring him to capture the scene in a way that communicates the same richness of associations to the viewer. 43

Plate VII. STUDY FOR THE FIGURE OF APOLLO IN THE PICTURE "APOLLO AND DAPHNE" In natural red chalk rubbed with finger; the high lights are picked out with rubber.

Plate VII.

Plate 7.

STUDY FOR THE FIGURE OF APOLLO IN THE PICTURE "APOLLO AND DAPHNE"

STUDY FOR THE FIGURE OF APOLLO IN THE PICTURE "APOLLO AND DAPHNE"

In natural red chalk rubbed with finger; the high lights are picked out with rubber.

In natural red chalk smudged with a finger; the highlights are highlighted with an eraser.

But to return to our infant mind. While the development of the perception of things has been going on, the purely visual side of the question, the observation of the picture on the retina for what it is as form and colour, has been neglected—neglected to such an extent that when the child comes to attempt drawing, sight is not the sense he consults. The mental idea of the objective world that has grown up in his mind is now associated more directly with touch than with sight, with the felt shape rather than the visual appearance. So that if he is asked to draw a head, he thinks of it first as an object having a continuous boundary in space. This his mind instinctively conceives as a line. Then, hair he expresses by a row of little lines coming out from the boundary, all round the top. He thinks of eyes as two points or circles, or as points in circles, and the nose either as a triangle or an L-shaped line. If you feel the nose you will see the reason of this. Down the front you have the L line, and if you feel round it you will find the two sides meeting at the top and a base joining them, suggesting the triangle. The mouth similarly is an opening with a row of teeth, which are generally shown although so seldom seen, but always apparent if the mouth is felt (see diagram A). This is, I think, a fair type of the first drawing the ordinary child makes—and judging by some ancient scribbling of the same order I remember noticing scratched on a wall at Pompeii, and by savage drawing generally, it appears to be a fairly universal 44type. It is a very remarkable thing which, as far as I know, has not yet been pointed out, that in these first attempts at drawing the vision should not be consulted. A blind man would not draw differently, could he but see to draw. Were vision the first sense consulted, and were the simplest visual appearance sought after, one might expect something like diagram B, the shadows under eyes, nose, mouth, and chin, with the darker mass of the hair being the simplest thing the visual appearance can be reduced to. But despite this being quite as easy to do, it does not appeal to the ordinary child as the other type does, because it does not satisfy the 45sense of touch that forms so large a part of the idea of an object in the mind. All architectural elevations and geometrical projections generally appeal to this mental idea of form. They consist of views of a building or object that could never possibly be seen by anybody, assuming as they do that the eye of the spectator is exactly in front of every part of the building at the same time, a physical impossibility. And yet so removed from the actual visual appearance is our mental idea of objects that such drawings do convey a very accurate idea of a building or object. And of course they have great advantage as working drawings in that they can be scaled.

But let's get back to the developing mind of a child. While the child is learning to perceive things, the visual aspect—looking at the picture on the retina in terms of shape and color—has been overlooked. It's been overlooked to the point that when the child tries to draw, sight is not the sense they rely on. The mental image of the world around them is more closely tied to touch than sight, focusing on the felt shape rather than the visual form. So, if asked to draw a head, the child first thinks of it as an object with a continuous outline in space. This is instinctively imagined as a line in their mind. They represent hair with a series of little lines extending from the outline around the top. They visualize eyes as two dots or circles, or as dots within circles, and picture the nose as either a triangle or an L-shaped line. If you touch the nose, you’ll understand why. The L shape runs down the front, and if you feel around it, you'll notice the two sides meet at the top with a base connecting them, forming a triangle. The mouth is similarly seen as an opening with a row of teeth, which are usually depicted even though they aren't often visible; they are always noticeable when the mouth is touched (see diagram A). This seems to be a typical example of the first drawing made by an average child—and based on some ancient markings I saw scratched on a wall at Pompeii, along with similar primitive drawings, this appears to be quite a universal 44pattern. It's remarkable, and as far as I know, it hasn't been noted yet that in these early attempts at drawing, vision isn’t consulted. A blind person would draw the same way if they could see to draw. If vision were the primary sense used and the simplest visual look was sought, you'd expect something like diagram B, showcasing shadows under the eyes, nose, mouth, and chin, with the darker mass of hair being the most straightforward thing to visually depict. However, even though this would be just as easy to create, it doesn’t resonate with the average child like the other style does because it doesn’t fulfill the 45connection to touch that forms a large part of their concept of an object. All architectural drawings and geometrical projections appeal to this mental image of form. They are representations of a building or object that no one could actually see, as they assume the viewer is positioned exactly in front of every part of the building at the same time, which is physically impossible. Yet, our mental representation of objects is so far removed from what we actually see that such drawings can convey a very accurate idea of a building or object. Plus, they are very useful as working drawings because they can be scaled.

Diagram I. A. TYPE OF FIRST DRAWING MADE BY CHILDREN, SHOWING HOW VISION HAS NOT BEEN CONSULTED B. TYPE OF WHAT MIGHT HAVE BEEN EXPECTED IF CRUDEST EXPRESSION OF VISUAL APPEARANCE HAD BEEN ATTEMPTED

Diagram I.

Diagram I.

A. TYPE OF FIRST DRAWING MADE BY CHILDREN, SHOWING HOW VISION HAS NOT BEEN CONSULTED

A. TYPE OF FIRST DRAWING CREATED BY KIDS, SHOWING HOW VISION HAS NOT BEEN TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT

B. TYPE OF WHAT MIGHT HAVE BEEN EXPECTED IF CRUDEST EXPRESSION OF VISUAL APPEARANCE HAD BEEN ATTEMPTED

B. TYPE OF WHAT MIGHT HAVE BEEN EXPECTED IF THE SIMPLEST FORM OF VISUAL APPEARANCE HAD BEEN TRIED

If so early the sense of vision is neglected and relegated to be the handmaiden of other senses, it is no wonder that in the average adult it is in such a shocking state of neglect. I feel convinced that with the great majority of people vision is seldom if ever consulted for itself, but only to minister to some other sense. They look at the sky to see if it is going to be fine; at the fields to see if they are dry enough to walk on, or whether there will be a good crop of hay; at the stream not to observe the beauty of the reflections from the blue sky or green fields dancing upon its surface or the rich colouring of its shadowed depths, but to calculate how deep it is or how much power it would supply to work a mill, how many fish it contains, or some other association alien to its visual aspect. If one looks up at a fine mass of cumulus clouds above a London street, the ordinary passer-by who follows one's gaze expects to see a balloon or a flying-machine at least, and when he sees it is only clouds he is apt to wonder what one is gazing at. The beautiful 46form and colour of the cloud seem to be unobserved. Clouds mean nothing to him but an accumulation of water dust that may bring rain. This accounts in some way for the number of good paintings that are incomprehensible to the majority of people. It is only those pictures that pursue the visual aspect of objects to a sufficient completion to contain the suggestion of these other associations, that they understand at all. Other pictures, they say, are not finished enough. And it is so seldom that a picture can have this petty realisation and at the same time be an expression of those larger emotional qualities that constitute good painting.

If from an early age we ignore our sense of sight and treat it as a secondary sense, it's no surprise that most adults hardly pay it any attention. I'm convinced that for most people, they rarely, if ever, appreciate vision on its own; instead, they utilize it to serve other senses. They look at the sky just to check if the weather will be nice; at the fields to see if they’re dry enough to walk on or if they’ll yield a good crop; and at the stream not to admire the beautiful reflections of the blue sky or the green fields dancing on its surface or the rich colors of its shadowy depths, but to figure out how deep it is or how much energy it could produce for a mill, how many fish it has, or other irrelevant thoughts that have nothing to do with its visual beauty. If someone gazes up at a great mass of cumulus clouds above a London street, the average passerby who sees where they’re looking expects to see a balloon or at least a flying machine, and when they realize it’s just clouds, they usually wonder what the person is staring at. The stunning shapes and colors of the clouds seem to go unnoticed. For them, clouds are just a collection of water droplets that might bring rain. This helps explain why so many beautiful paintings are beyond the understanding of most people. They only connect with artworks that focus on the visual qualities of objects enough to also suggest those other associations. They say that any other paintings aren’t complete enough. And it’s rarely that a painting can achieve such a trivial realization while also expressing the broader emotional qualities that define great art.

The early paintings of the Pre-Raphaelite Brotherhood appear to be a striking exception to this. But in their work the excessive realisation of all details was part of the expression and gave emphasis to the poetic idea at the basis of their pictures, and was therefore part of the artistic intention. In these paintings the fiery intensity with which every little detail was painted made their picture a ready medium for the expression of poetic thought, a sort of "painted poetry," every detail being selected on account of some symbolic meaning it had, bearing on the poetic idea that was the object of the picture.

The early paintings of the Pre-Raphaelite Brotherhood stand out as a clear exception to this. In their work, the intense focus on every detail was a crucial part of their expression and highlighted the poetic ideas behind their art, aligning with their artistic intentions. In these paintings, the passionate attention to each small detail made their artwork a perfect vehicle for expressing poetic thoughts—a kind of "painted poetry," where every detail was carefully chosen for its symbolic significance related to the overarching poetic idea of the piece.

But to those painters who do not attempt "painted poetry," but seek in painting a poetry of its own, a visual poetry, this excessive finish (as it is called) is irksome, as it mars the expression of those qualities in vision they wish to express. Finish in art has no connection with the amount of detail in a picture, but has reference only to the completeness with which the emotional idea the painter set out to express has been realised.

But for those artists who don’t aim for “painted poetry” and instead look for a unique poetry within painting, a visual poetry, this excessive finish (as it’s called) is bothersome because it disrupts the expression of the qualities in vision they want to convey. Finish in art isn’t about how much detail is in a picture; it’s about how completely the emotional idea the artist intended to express has been realized.

Plate VIII. STUDY FOR A PICTURE In red conté chalk and white pastel rubbed on toned paper.

Plate VIII.

Plate 8.

STUDY FOR A PICTURE

STUDY FOR A PHOTO

In red conté chalk and white pastel rubbed on toned paper.

In red conté chalk and white pastel applied on toned paper.

47 The visual blindness of the majority of people is greatly to be deplored, as nature is ever offering them on their retina, even in the meanest slum, a music of colour and form that is a constant source of pleasure to those who can see it. But so many are content to use this wonderful faculty of vision for utilitarian purposes only. It is the privilege of the artist to show how wonderful and beautiful is all this music of colour and form, so that people, having been moved by it in his work, may be encouraged to see the same beauty in the things around them. This is the best argument in favour of making art a subject of general education: that it should teach people to see. Everybody does not need to draw and paint, but if everybody could get the faculty of appreciating the form and colour on their retinas as form and colour, what a wealth would always be at their disposal for enjoyment! The Japanese habit of looking at a landscape upside down between their legs is a way of seeing without the deadening influence of touch associations. Thus looking, one is surprised into seeing for once the colour and form of things with the association of touch for the moment forgotten, and is puzzled at the beauty. The odd thing is that although thus we see things upside down, the pictures on our retinas are for once the right way up; for ordinarily the visual picture is inverted on the retina, like that on the ground glass at the back of a photographic camera.

47 It's really unfortunate that most people aren't aware of the visual beauty around them because nature constantly presents a vibrant display of color and shape, even in the humblest neighborhoods, which can bring joy to those who are able to appreciate it. Yet so many people only use their incredible ability to see for practical purposes. The artist's role is to demonstrate how extraordinary and beautiful this visual symphony is, inspiring viewers to notice the same beauty in their surroundings. This is the strongest case for including art in general education: it should help people learn to see. Not everyone needs to be an artist, but if everyone could appreciate shapes and colors as they are, there would always be a treasure trove of enjoyment at their fingertips! The Japanese practice of viewing a landscape upside down between their legs allows for seeing beyond the limiting associations of touch. In this way of looking, people are often amazed to discover the beauty of color and form, momentarily forgetting touch associations. Interestingly, even though we are perceiving things upside down, the images on our retinas are right side up; typically, what we see is inverted on the retina, just like the image captured on the ground glass of a camera.

To sum up this somewhat rambling chapter, I have endeavoured to show that there are two aspects from which the objective world can be apprehended. There is the purely mental perception founded chiefly on knowledge derived from our sense 48of touch associated with vision, whose primitive instinct is to put an outline round objects as representing their boundaries in space. And secondly, there is the visual perception, which is concerned with the visual aspects of objects as they appear on the retina; an arrangement of colour shapes, a sort of mosaic of colour. And these two aspects give us two different points of view from which the representation of visible things can be approached.

To wrap up this somewhat lengthy chapter, I’ve tried to demonstrate that there are two ways to understand the objective world. First, there's the purely mental perception, mainly based on knowledge we gain from our sense of touch linked with vision, which instinctively outlines objects to define their boundaries in space. Second, there's visual perception, focusing on how objects appear on the retina, creating an arrangement of color shapes, almost like a mosaic of color. These two aspects provide us with two different perspectives for approaching the representation of visible things.

When the representation from either point of view is carried far enough, the result is very similar. Work built up on outline drawing to which has been added light and shade, colour, aerial perspective, &c., may eventually approximate to the perfect visual appearance. And inversely, representations approached from the point of view of pure vision, the mosaic of colour on the retina, if pushed far enough, may satisfy the mental perception of form with its touch associations. And of course the two points of view are intimately connected. You cannot put an accurate outline round an object without observing the shape it occupies in the field of vision. And it is difficult to consider the "mosaic of colour forms" without being very conscious of the objective significance of the colour masses portrayed. But they present two entirely different and opposite points of view from which the representation of objects can be approached. In considering the subject of drawing I think it necessary to make this division of the subject, and both methods of form expression should be studied by the student. Let us call the first method Line Drawing and the second Mass Drawing. Most modern drawing is a mixture of both these points of view, but they should be studied separately if confusion is to be avoided. If 49the student neglects line drawing, his work will lack the expressive significance of form that only a feeling for lines seems to have the secret of conveying; while, if he neglects mass drawing, he will be poorly equipped when he comes to express form with a brush full of paint to work with.

When you examine representations from either perspective closely enough, the outcomes are quite similar. Work developed from outline drawing, which includes added light and shade, color, aerial perspective, etc., can eventually look very much like the ideal visual appearance. Conversely, representations that focus on pure vision, the mosaic of color on the retina, if taken far enough, might fulfill the mental perception of form along with its tactile associations. And naturally, these two perspectives are closely linked. You can’t outline an object accurately without noticing the shape it occupies in your field of vision. Similarly, it’s tough to think about the "mosaic of color forms" without being very aware of the objective meaning of the color masses depicted. However, they represent two completely different and opposing perspectives for approaching object representation. When discussing drawing, I believe it’s important to make this distinction, and both methods of expressing form need to be studied by students. Let’s call the first method Line Drawing and the second Mass Drawing. Most modern drawing combines both these perspectives, but they should be studied separately to avoid confusion. If the student overlooks line drawing, their work will lack the expressive significance of form that seems to stem from an understanding of lines; while, if they disregard mass drawing, they will be ill-prepared to express form with a brush full of paint.


50

IV
LINE DRAWING

Most of the earliest forms of drawing known to us in history, like those of the child we were discussing in the last chapter, are largely in the nature of outline drawings. This is a remarkable fact considering the somewhat remote relation lines have to the complete phenomena of vision. Outlines can only be said to exist in appearances as the boundaries of masses. But even here a line seems a poor thing from the visual point of view; as the boundaries are not always clearly defined, but are continually merging into the surrounding mass and losing themselves to be caught up again later on and defined once more. Its relationship with visual appearances is not sufficient to justify the instinct for line drawing. It comes, I think, as has already been said, from the sense of touch. When an object is felt there is no merging in the surrounding mass, but a firm definition of its boundary, which the mind instinctively conceives as a line.

Most of the earliest forms of drawing we know about in history, like those created by the child we talked about in the last chapter, are mainly outline drawings. This is interesting, considering how loosely lines relate to the complete experience of vision. Outlines only seem to exist as the edges of shapes. Even in this context, a line appears inadequate from a visual perspective; edges are not always clearly defined and constantly blend into the surrounding area, only to re-emerge and be defined again later. Its connection to visual appearances isn't enough to explain the instinct for line drawing. It seems to come, as previously mentioned, from our sense of touch. When we feel an object, there’s no blending with the surrounding area, just a clear definition of its edge, which our minds instinctively interpret as a line.

There is a more direct appeal to the imagination in line drawing than in possibly anything else in pictorial art. The emotional stimulus given by fine design is due largely to line work. The power a line possesses of instinctively directing the eye along its course is of the utmost value also, enabling the artist to concentrate the attention of the beholder 51where he wishes. Then there is a harmonic sense in lines and their relationships, a music of line that is found at the basis of all good art. But this subject will be treated later on when talking of line rhythm.

There’s a more immediate appeal to the imagination in line drawing than in maybe anything else in visual art. The emotional impact of a great design comes mainly from the line work. The ability of a line to instinctively guide the eye along its path is incredibly valuable, letting the artist focus the viewer's attention where they want it 51. Additionally, there’s a sense of harmony in lines and their relationships, a rhythm of line that lies at the core of all good art. However, this topic will be discussed later when we talk about line rhythm.

Most artists whose work makes a large appeal to the imagination are strong on the value of line. Blake, whose visual knowledge was such a negligible quantity, but whose mental perceptions were so magnificent, was always insisting on its value. And his designs are splendid examples of its powerful appeal to the imagination.

Most artists whose work captures the imagination know the importance of line. Blake, whose visual knowledge was quite limited but whose mental insights were remarkable, always emphasized its value. His designs are excellent examples of how line can greatly engage the imagination.

On this basis of line drawing the development of art proceeded. The early Egyptian wall paintings were outlines tinted, and the earliest wall sculpture was an incised outline. After these incised lines some man of genius thought of cutting away the surface of the wall between the outlines and modelling it in low relief. The appearance of this may have suggested to the man painting his outline on the wall the idea of shading between his outlines.

Based on this concept of line drawing, the evolution of art progressed. The early Egyptian wall paintings were just colored outlines, and the first wall sculptures were incised outlines. After these incised lines, some innovative individual came up with the idea of carving away the surface of the wall between the outlines and creating a low relief. This may have inspired the artist painting his outlines on the wall to consider adding shading between them.

At any rate the next development was the introduction of a little shading to relieve the flatness of the line-work and suggest modelling. And this was as far as things had gone in the direction of the representation of form, until well on in the Italian Renaissance. Botticelli used nothing else than an outline lightly shaded to indicate form. Light and shade were not seriously perceived until Leonardo da Vinci. And a wonderful discovery it was thought to be, and was, indeed, although it seems difficult to understand where men's eyes had been for so long with the phenomena of light and shade before them all the time. But this is only another proof of 52what cannot be too often insisted on, namely that the eye only sees what it is on the look-out for, and it may even be there are things just as wonderful yet to be discovered in vision.

At any rate, the next development was the introduction of a little shading to break up the flatness of the line work and suggest form. This was the extent of progress in representing form until well into the Italian Renaissance. Botticelli only used an outline that was lightly shaded to indicate form. Light and shade weren't really recognized until Leonardo da Vinci came along. It was considered a remarkable discovery, and it truly was, though it’s hard to comprehend where people’s attention had been for so long when the phenomena of light and shade were right in front of them. But this just proves once again that the eye only sees what it looks for, and there may be just as many amazing things yet to be discovered in vision.

But it was still the touch association of an object that was the dominant one; it was within the outline demanded by this sense that the light and shade were to be introduced as something as it were put on the object. It was the "solids in space" idea that art was still appealing to.

But it was still the tactile connection with an object that was the main focus; it was within the boundaries set by this sense that light and shadow were to be applied as if they were added onto the object. It was the "solids in space" concept that art was still trying to convey.

"The first object of a painter is to make a simple flat surface appear like a relievo, and some of its parts detached from the ground; he who excels all others in that part of the art deserves the greatest praise,"[1] wrote Leonardo da Vinci, and the insistence on this "standing out" quality, with its appeal to the touch sense as something great in art, sounds very strange in these days. But it must be remembered that the means of creating this illusion were new to all and greatly wondered at.

"The main goal of a painter is to make a flat surface look like it has depth, as if some parts are coming out from the background; the person who is the best at this part of the art deserves the highest praise," [1] wrote Leonardo da Vinci, and the emphasis on this quality of "standing out," which appeals to the sense of touch as something impressive in art, sounds quite unusual today. However, it's important to remember that the techniques for creating this illusion were new to everyone and caused a lot of amazement.

[1] Leonardo da Vinci, Treatise on Painting, paragraph 178.

[1] Leonardo da Vinci, Treatise on Painting, paragraph 178.

And again, in paragraph 176 of his treatise, Leonardo writes: "The knowledge of the outline is of most consequence, and yet may be acquired to great certainty by dint of study; as the outlines of the human figure, particularly those which do not bend, are invariably the same. But the knowledge of the situation, quality and quantity of shadows, being infinite, requires the most extensive study."

And again, in paragraph 176 of his treatise, Leonardo writes: "The understanding of the outline is extremely important and can be reliably learned through diligent study; since the outlines of the human figure, especially those that don’t bend, are always the same. However, understanding the placement, quality, and amount of shadows is vast and requires the most thorough study."

The outlines of the human figure are "invariably the same"? What does this mean? From the visual point of view we know that the space occupied by figures in the field of our vision is by no means "invariably the same," but of great variety. So it cannot be the visual appearance he is speaking about. 53It can only refer to the mental idea of the shape of the members of the human figure. The remark "particularly those that do not bend" shows this also, for when the body is bent up even the mental idea of its form must be altered. There is no hint yet of vision being exploited for itself, but only in so far as it yielded material to stimulate this mental idea of the exterior world.

The outlines of the human figure are "always the same"? What does this mean? From a visual perspective, we know that the space taken up by figures in our field of vision is definitely not "always the same," but rather quite varied. So it can't be the visual appearance he's referring to. 53It can only relate to our mental concept of the shape of the parts of the human figure. The comment "especially those that don’t bend" supports this idea too, since when the body bends, even our mental image of its form has to change. There's no indication yet of vision being used for its own sake, but only in how it provides material to inspire this mental concept of the outside world.

Plate IX. STUDY BY WATTEAU From an original drawing in the collection of Charles Ricketts and Charles Shannon.

Plate IX.

Plate 9.

STUDY BY WATTEAU

Watteau's Study

From an original drawing in the collection of Charles Ricketts and Charles Shannon.

From an original drawing in the collection of Charles Ricketts and Charles Shannon.

All through the work of the men who used this light and shade (or chiaroscuro, as it was called) the outline basis remained. Leonardo, Raphael, Michael Angelo, Titian, and the Venetians were all faithful to it as the means of holding their pictures together; although the Venetians, by fusing the edges of their outline masses, got very near the visual method to be introduced later by Velazquez.

All throughout the work of the artists who used this light and shade (or chiaroscuro, as it was known), the basic outline remained. Leonardo, Raphael, Michelangelo, Titian, and the Venetians all stayed true to it as the way to keep their paintings cohesive; although the Venetians, by blending the edges of their outlined shapes, came very close to the visual technique that would be introduced later by Velázquez.

In this way, little by little, starting from a basis of simple outline forms, art grew up, each new detail of visual appearance discovered adding, as it were, another instrument to the orchestra at the disposal of the artist, enabling him to add to the somewhat crude directness and simplicity of the early work the graces and refinements of the more complex work, making the problem of composition more difficult but increasing the range of its expression.

In this way, bit by bit, starting from basic simple shapes, art evolved, with each new detail discovered adding another tool to the artist's toolkit, allowing them to enhance the somewhat rough straightforwardness and simplicity of early works with the elegance and complexity of more advanced pieces, making the challenge of composition tougher but expanding the range of its expression.

But these additions to the visual formula used by artists was not all gain; the simplicity of the means at the disposal of a Botticelli gives an innocence and imaginative appeal to his work that it is difficult to think of preserving with the more complete visual realisation of later schools. When the realisation of actual appearance is most complete, the mind is liable to be led away by side issues connected with the things represented, instead of seeing the emotional intentions of the artist expressed through 54them. The mind is apt to leave the picture and looking, as it were, not at it but through it, to pursue a train of thought associated with the objects represented as real objects, but alien to the artistic intention of the picture. There is nothing in these early formulae to disturb the contemplation of the emotional appeal of pure form and colour. To those who approach a picture with the idea that the representation of nature, the "making it look like the real thing," is the sole object of painting, how strange must be the appearance of such pictures as Botticelli's.

But these additions to the visual formula used by artists weren’t all beneficial; the simplicity of the tools available to a Botticelli gives his work an innocence and imaginative charm that’s hard to maintain with the more detailed visual representation of later styles. When the depiction of actual appearance is most complete, the viewer can easily get distracted by side issues related to the objects depicted, rather than recognizing the emotional intentions of the artist expressed through 54them. The viewer tends to drift away from the picture, looking not directly at it but through it, chasing thoughts linked to the objects shown as real items, but unrelated to the artistic intent of the piece. There’s nothing in these early formulas to interrupt the contemplation of the emotional resonance of pure form and color. For those who approach a painting believing that capturing nature, or "making it look like the real thing," is the sole purpose of art, the appearance of paintings like Botticelli’s must seem quite strange.

The accumulation of the details of visual observation in art is liable eventually to obscure the main idea and disturb the large sense of design on which so much of the imaginative appeal of a work of art depends. The large amount of new visual knowledge that the naturalistic movements of the nineteenth century brought to light is particularly liable at this time to obscure the simpler and more primitive qualities on which all good art is built. At the height of that movement line drawing went out of fashion, and charcoal, and an awful thing called a stump, took the place of the point in the schools. Charcoal is a beautiful medium in a dexterous hand, but is more adaptable to mass than to line drawing. The less said about the stump the better, although I believe it still lingers on in some schools.

The gathering of visual details in art can eventually overshadow the main idea and disrupt the overall design, which is crucial for the imaginative appeal of a piece. The wealth of new visual knowledge that emerged from the naturalistic movements of the nineteenth century is especially likely to obscure the simpler, more fundamental qualities that form the foundation of great art. At the peak of that movement, line drawing fell out of favor, and charcoal, along with a dreadful tool called a stump, replaced the pencil in art schools. Charcoal can be a beautiful medium in skilled hands, but it lends itself better to creating mass rather than fine lines. It's best not to dwell on the stump, although I think it still persists in some schools.

Line drawing is happily reviving, and nothing is so calculated to put new life and strength into the vagaries of naturalistic painting and get back into art a fine sense of design.

Line drawing is making a comeback, and nothing is better for adding new life and energy to the whims of realistic painting and bringing a great sense of design back into art.

This obscuring of the direct appeal of art by the accumulation of too much naturalistic detail, and the loss of power it entails, is the cause of artists 55having occasionally gone back to a more primitive convention. There was the Archaistic movement in Greece, and men like Rossetti and Burne-Jones found a better means of expressing the things that moved them in the technique of the fourteenth century. And it was no doubt a feeling of the weakening influence on art, as an expressive force, of the elaborate realisations of the modern school, that prompted Puvis de Chavannes to invent for himself his large primitive manner. It will be noticed that in these instances it is chiefly the insistence upon outline that distinguishes these artists from their contemporaries.

This blurring of art's direct appeal due to excessive naturalistic detail, along with the loss of impact it brings, is why some artists 55have occasionally returned to a more basic style. There was the Archaistic movement in Greece, and artists like Rossetti and Burne-Jones found a more effective way to express their feelings using the techniques of the fourteenth century. It was likely a recognition of the diminishing influence of modern art, with its complicated representations, that led Puvis de Chavannes to create his own large, primitive style. It’s important to note that in these cases, it’s primarily the emphasis on outline that sets these artists apart from their peers.

Art, like life, is apt to languish if it gets too far away from primitive conditions. But, like life also, it is a poor thing and a very uncouth affair if it has nothing but primitive conditions to recommend it. Because there is a decadent art about, one need not make a hero of the pavement artist. But without going to the extreme of flouting the centuries of culture that art inherits, as it is now fashionable in many places to do, students will do well to study at first the early rather than the late work of the different schools, so as to get in touch with the simple conditions of design on which good work is built. It is easier to study these essential qualities when they are not overlaid by so much knowledge of visual realisation. The skeleton of the picture is more apparent in the earlier than the later work of any school.

Art, like life, tends to suffer when it strays too far from its basic roots. However, similar to life, it's also lacking and quite awkward if it relies solely on those basic roots. Just because there's some subpar art out there doesn’t mean we should glorify the street artist. Without dismissing the rich history of culture that art comes from—something that’s becoming trendy in many places—students should focus initially on early works rather than the later ones from different schools. This way, they can connect with the fundamental design principles that underpin quality work. It's easier to grasp these essential elements when they're not buried under excessive knowledge of visual representation. The framework of the artwork is clearer in the earlier pieces than in the later works of any school.

The finest example of the union of the primitive with the most refined and cultured art the world has ever seen is probably the Parthenon at Athens, a building that has been the wonder of the artistic world for over two thousand years. Not only are 56the fragments of its sculptures in the British Museum amazing, but the beauty and proportions of its architecture are of a refinement that is, I think, never even attempted in these days. What architect now thinks of correcting the poorness of hard, straight lines by very slightly curving them? Or of slightly sloping inwards the columns of his facade to add to the strength of its appearance? The amount of these variations is of the very slightest and bears witness to the pitch of refinement attempted. And yet, with it all, how simple! There is something of the primitive strength of Stonehenge in that solemn row of columns rising firmly from the steps without any base. With all its magnificence, it still retains the simplicity of the hut from which it was evolved.

The best example of the combination of primitive and highly refined art that the world has ever seen is probably the Parthenon in Athens, a structure that has amazed the art world for over two thousand years. Not only are the pieces of its sculptures in the British Museum incredible, but the beauty and proportions of its architecture possess a refinement that, I believe, isn't even attempted nowadays. What architect today thinks of softening harsh, straight lines by curving them just a bit? Or of slightly angling the columns of his facade inward to enhance its strength? The degree of these variations is minimal and reflects the level of refinement sought. And yet, despite all this, it remains so simple! There’s something of the primitive strength of Stonehenge in that impressive row of columns rising firmly from the steps without any base. With all its grandeur, it still keeps the simplicity of the hut from which it originated.

Something of the same combination of primitive grandeur and strength with exquisite refinement of visualisation is seen in the art of Michael Angelo. His followers adopted the big, muscular type of their master, but lost the primitive strength he expressed; and when this primitive force was lost sight of, what a decadence set in!

Something similar to that mix of raw greatness and power, along with stunning visual detail, can be found in the art of Michelangelo. His followers embraced the large, muscular style of their master but missed the raw strength he portrayed; and once that primal force faded away, a decline began!

This is the point at which art reaches its highest mark: when to the primitive strength and simplicity of early art are added the infinite refinements and graces of culture without destroying or weakening the sublimity of the expression.

This is the point where art reaches its peak: when the raw power and simplicity of early art are combined with the endless refinements and elegance of culture without compromising or diminishing the greatness of the expression.

In painting, the refinement and graces of culture take the form of an increasing truth to natural appearances, added bit by bit to the primitive baldness of early work; until the point is reached, as it was in the nineteenth century, when apparently the whole facts of visual nature are incorporated. From this wealth of visual material, to which must 57be added the knowledge we now have of the arts of the East, of China, Japan, and India, the modern artist has to select those things that appeal to him; has to select those elements that answer to his inmost need of expressing himself as an artist. No wonder a period of artistic dyspepsia is upon us, no wonder our exhibitions, particularly those on the Continent, are full of strange, weird things. The problem before the artist was never so complex, but also never so interesting. New forms, new combinations, new simplifications are to be found. But the steadying influence and discipline of line work were never more necessary to the student.

In painting, the refinement and elegance of culture show up as a growing truth to natural appearances, gradually added to the simple, straightforward style of early work; until we reach the point, like in the nineteenth century, when seemingly all aspects of visual nature are included. From this abundance of visual material, which also includes our understanding of Eastern arts from China, Japan, and India, the modern artist must choose what resonates with him; he has to pick those elements that fulfill his deepest need to express himself as an artist. It’s no surprise that we’re experiencing a period of artistic confusion, and it’s no wonder our exhibitions, especially on the Continent, are full of strange, bizarre things. The challenges facing the artist have never been so complex, yet they’re also more fascinating than ever. New forms, new combinations, and new simplifications can be discovered. But the steadying influence and discipline of line work have never been more essential for the student.

The primitive force we are in danger of losing depends much on line, and no work that aims at a sublime impression can dispense with the basis of a carefully wrought and simple line scheme.

The basic power we risk losing relies heavily on line, and no project that seeks to create a striking effect can ignore the foundation of a well-crafted and straightforward line design.

The study, therefore, of pure line drawing is of great importance to the painter, and the numerous drawings that exist by the great masters in this method show how much they understood its value.

The study of pure line drawing is really important for painters, and the many drawings from the great masters using this technique show how much they recognized its value.

And the revival of line drawing, and the desire there is to find a simpler convention founded on this basis, are among the most hopeful signs in the art of the moment.

And the return of line drawing, along with the desire to establish a simpler approach based on this foundation, are some of the most promising signs in contemporary art.


58

V
MASS DRAWING

In the preceding chapter it has, I hope, been shown that outline drawing is an instinct with Western artists and has been so from the earliest times; that this instinct is due to the fact that the first mental idea of an object is the sense of its form as a felt thing, not a thing seen; and that an outline drawing satisfies and appeals directly to this mental idea of objects.

In the previous chapter, I hope I’ve demonstrated that outline drawing is an instinct for Western artists and has been since ancient times; that this instinct arises from the fact that the first mental image of an object is its form as a tangible thing, not just something visual; and that an outline drawing directly appeals to this mental image of objects.

But there is another basis of expression directly related to visual appearances that in the fulness of time was evolved, and has had a very great influence on modern art. This form of drawing is based on the consideration of the flat appearances on the retina, with the knowledge of the felt shapes of objects for the time being forgotten. In opposition to line drawing, we may call this Mass Drawing.

But there is another way to express visual appearances that developed over time and has greatly influenced modern art. This type of drawing focuses on the flat images on the retina, temporarily ignoring the actual shapes of objects. In contrast to line drawing, we can refer to this as Mass Drawing.

The scientific truth of this point of view is obvious. If only the accurate copying of the appearances of nature were the sole object of art (an idea to be met with among students) the problem of painting would be simpler than it is, and would be likely ere long to be solved by the photographic camera.

The scientific truth of this perspective is clear. If accurately replicating the appearances of nature were the only goal of art (a notion found among students), the challenge of painting would be simpler than it is and would likely soon be resolved by the camera.

This form of drawing is the natural means of expression when a brush full of paint is in your hands. The reducing of a complicated appearance 59to a few simple masses is the first necessity of the painter. But this will be fully explained in a later chapter treating more practically of the practice of mass drawing.

This way of drawing is the most natural way to express yourself when you're holding a brush loaded with paint. Simplifying a complex look into a few basic shapes is the painter's first priority. But this will be explained in more detail in a later chapter that focuses on the practical aspects of mass drawing.

Plate X. EXAMPLE OF FIFTEENTH-CENTURY CHINESE WORK BY LUI LIANG (BRITISH MUSEUM) Showing how early Chinese masters had developed the mass-drawing point of view.

Plate X.

Plate X.

EXAMPLE OF FIFTEENTH-CENTURY CHINESE WORK BY LUI LIANG (BRITISH MUSEUM)

EXAMPLE OF FIFTEENTH-CENTURY CHINESE WORK BY LUI LIANG (BRITISH MUSEUM)

Showing how early Chinese masters had developed the mass-drawing point of view.

Showing how early Chinese masters had developed the mass-drawing perspective.

The art of China and Japan appears to have been more [influenced by this view of natural appearances than that of the West has been, until quite lately. The Eastern mind does not seem to be so obsessed by the objectivity of things as is the Western mind. With us the practical sense of touch is all powerful. "I know that is so, because I felt it with my hands" would be a characteristic expression with us. Whereas I do not think it would be an expression the Eastern mind would use. With them the spiritual essence of the thing seen appears to be the more real, judging from their art. And who is to say they may not be right? This is certainly the impression one gets from their beautiful painting, with its lightness of texture and avoidance of solidity. It is founded on nature regarded as a flat vision, instead of a collection of solids in space. Their use of line is also much more restrained than with us, and it is seldom used to accentuate the solidity of things, but chiefly to support the boundaries of masses and suggest detail. Light and shade, which suggest solidity, are never used, a wide light where there is no shadow pervades everything, their drawing being done with the brush in masses.

The art of China and Japan seems to have been more influenced by this perspective on natural appearances than the art of the West, at least until recently. The Eastern mindset doesn’t appear to be as focused on the objectivity of things as the Western mindset is. For us, the practical sense of touch is incredibly important. "I know that's true because I felt it with my hands," would be a common expression for us. However, I don’t think the Eastern mindset would use a phrase like that. For them, the spiritual essence of what they see seems to be more real, as suggested by their art. And who’s to say they aren’t right? That’s certainly the impression you get from their beautiful paintings, which have a light texture and avoid a sense of solidity. Their art is based on nature viewed as a flat image, rather than a collection of solid objects in space. Their use of line is also much more subtle than ours; it’s rarely used to emphasize the solid nature of things, but mainly to define the edges of shapes and hint at details. Light and shadow, which suggest solidity, are never employed; instead, a bright light with no shadows fills everything, and their drawing is done with the brush in broad strokes.

When, as in the time of Titian, the art of the West had discovered light and shade, linear perspective, aerial perspective, &c., and had begun by fusing the edges of the masses to suspect the necessity of painting to a widely diffused focus, 60they had got very near considering appearances as a visual whole. But it was not until Velazquez that a picture was painted that was founded entirely on visual appearances, in which a basis of objective outlines was discarded and replaced by a structure of tone masses.

When, like in the time of Titian, Western art had discovered light and shade, linear perspective, aerial perspective, etc., and had started to blend the edges of shapes to suggest the need for painting with a widely spread focus, 60 they were close to viewing appearances as a unified visual experience. However, it wasn’t until Velazquez that a painting was created based entirely on visual appearances, where the foundation of objective outlines was abandoned in favor of a structure made up of tone masses.

When he took his own painting room with the little Infanta and her maids as a subject, Velazquez seems to have considered it entirely as one flat visual impression. The focal attention is centred on the Infanta, with the figures on either side more or less out of focus, those on the extreme right being quite blurred. The reproduction here given unfortunately does not show these subtleties, and flattens the general appearance very much. The focus is nowhere sharp, as this would disturb the contemplation of the large visual impression. And there, I think, for the first time, the whole gamut of natural vision, tone, colour, form, light and shade, atmosphere, focus, &c., considered as one impression, were put on canvas.

When he created his own painting featuring the little Infanta and her maids, Velazquez seemed to view it as a single flat visual impression. The main focus is on the Infanta, with the figures on either side appearing somewhat blurred, especially those on the far right. The reproduction shown here unfortunately doesn’t capture these nuances and flattens the overall appearance significantly. The focus isn’t sharp anywhere, as that would disrupt the appreciation of the large visual impression. Here, I think, for the first time, the entire range of natural vision—tone, color, form, light and shadow, atmosphere, focus, etc.—was represented on canvas as a single impression.

All sense of design is lost. The picture has no surface; it is all atmosphere between the four edges of the frame, and the objects are within. Placed as it is in the Prado, with the light coming from the right as in the picture, there is no break between the real people before it and the figures within, except the slight yellow veil due to age.

All sense of design is gone. The image has no surface; it’s all about the atmosphere within the four edges of the frame, and the objects are inside. Positioned as it is in the Prado, with light coming from the right like in the picture, there’s no separation between the real people in front of it and the figures inside, except for the faint yellow tint from aging.

But wonderful as this picture is, as a "tour de force," like his Venus of the same period in the National Gallery, it is a painter's picture, and makes but a cold impression on those not interested in the technique of painting. With the cutting away of the primitive support of fine outline design and the absence of those accents conveying a fine form 61stimulus to the mind, art has lost much of its emotional significance.

But as amazing as this painting is, as a "tour de force," like his Venus from the same time in the National Gallery, it’s definitely a painter’s piece and leaves a cold impression on those who aren't into the technique of painting. With the removal of the basic support of fine outline design and the lack of those highlights that convey fine form 61stimulus to the mind, art has lost a lot of its emotional significance.

Plate XI. LOS MENENAS. BY VELAZQUEZ (PRADO) Probably the first picture ever painted entirely from the visual or impressionist standpoint. Photo Anderson

Plate XI.

Plate 11.

LOS MENENAS. BY VELAZQUEZ (PRADO)

Las Meninas by Velázquez (Prado)

Probably the first picture ever painted entirely from the visual or impressionist standpoint.

Probably the first painting ever created entirely from a visual or impressionist perspective.

Photo Anderson

Photo by Anderson

The Impressionist Point of View.

But art has gained a new point of view. With this subjective way of considering appearances—this "impressionist vision," as it has been called—many things that were too ugly, either from shape or association, to yield material for the painter, were yet found, when viewed as part of a scheme of colour sensations on the retina which the artist considers emotionally and rhythmically, to lend themselves to new and beautiful harmonies and "ensembles," undreamt of by the earlier formulae. And further, many effects of light that were too hopelessly complicated for painting, considered on the old light and shade principles (for instance, sunlight through trees in a wood), were found to be quite paintable, considered as an impression of various colour masses. The early formula could never free itself from the object as a solid thing, and had consequently to confine its attention to beautiful ones. But from the new point of view, form consists of the shape and qualities of masses of colour on the retina; and what objects happen to be the outside cause of these shapes matters little to the impressionist. Nothing is ugly when seen in a beautiful aspect of light, and aspect is with them everything. This consideration of the visual appearance in the first place necessitated an increased dependence on the model. As he does not now draw from his mental perceptions the artist has nothing to select the material of his picture from until it has existed as a seen thing before him: until he has a visual impression of it in his mind. With the older point of view (the representation by a pictorial description, as it were, based 62on the mental idea of an object), the model was not so necessary. In the case of the Impressionist the mental perception is arrived at from the visual impression, and in the older point of view the visual impression is the result of the mental perception. Thus it happens that the Impressionist movement has produced chiefly pictures inspired by the actual world of visual phenomena around us, the older point of view producing most of the pictures deriving their inspiration from the glories of the imagination, the mental world in the mind of the artist. And although interesting attempts are being made to produce imaginative works founded on the impressionist point of view of light and air, the loss of imaginative appeal consequent upon the destruction of contours by scintillation, atmosphere, &c., and the loss of line rhythm it entails, have so far prevented the production of any very satisfactory results. But undoubtedly there is much new material brought to light by this movement waiting to be used imaginatively; and it offers a new field for the selection of expressive qualities.

But art has gained a new perspective. With this subjective way of looking at appearances—called “impressionist vision”—many things that were too ugly, either in shape or association, to provide material for the painter, were found to lend themselves to new and beautiful harmonies and "ensembles" when viewed as part of a scheme of color sensations on the retina that the artist considers emotionally and rhythmically, something earlier formulas could never have imagined. Moreover, many light effects that were too complex for painting, based on the old light and shade principles (like sunlight filtering through trees in a forest), turned out to be quite paintable when looked at as an impression of various color masses. The old formulas could never break free from treating an object as a solid entity, and as a result, they focused only on beautiful ones. But from this new perspective, form exists in the shape and qualities of color masses on the retina, and what objects create these shapes is of little concern to the impressionist. Nothing is ugly when seen in a beautiful light, and light is everything to them. This emphasis on visual appearance necessitated a greater reliance on the model. Since the artist no longer draws from mental perceptions, he can’t select the material of his picture until it has physically existed before him: until he has a visual impression in his mind. With the older perspective (the representation through pictorial description, based 62on the mental idea of an object), the model was less necessary. In Impressionism, mental perception is derived from visual impression, while in the earlier view, visual impression resulted from mental perception. Thus, the Impressionist movement has mainly produced paintings inspired by the actual world of visual phenomena around us, while the older perspective created most of its works inspired by the wonders of imagination and the artist's mental world. Although interesting attempts are being made to create imaginative works based on the impressionist focus on light and air, the loss of imaginative appeal due to the blurring of contours by light effects, atmosphere, etc., and the loss of line rhythm it brings, have so far prevented any truly satisfying results. However, there is undoubtedly a wealth of new material revealed by this movement, waiting to be used imaginatively, and it offers a new landscape for selecting expressive qualities.

This point of view, although continuing to some extent in the Spanish school, did not come into general recognition until the last century in France. The most extreme exponents of it are the body of artists who grouped themselves round Claude Monet. This impressionist movement, as the critics have labelled it, was the result of a fierce determination to consider nature solely from the visual point of view, making no concessions to any other associations connected with sight. The result was an entirely new vision of nature, startling and repulsive to eyes unaccustomed to observation from a purely visual point of view and used only to seeing the " 63feel of things," as it were. The first results were naturally rather crude. But a great amount of new visual facts were brought to light, particularly those connected with the painting of sunlight and half light effects. Indeed the whole painting of strong light has been permanently affected by the work of this group of painters. Emancipated from the objective world, they no longer dissected the object to see what was inside it, but studied rather the anatomy of the light refracted from it to their eyes. Finding this to be composed of all the colours of the rainbow as seen in the solar spectrum, and that all the effects nature produced are done with different proportions of these colours, they took them, or the nearest pigments they could get to them, for their palette, eliminating the earth colours and black. And further, finding that nature's colours (the rays of coloured light) when mixed produced different results than their corresponding pigments mixed together, they determined to use their paints as pure as possible, placing them one against the other to be mixed as they came to the eye, the mixture being one of pure colour rays, not pigments, by this means.

This perspective, although still somewhat present in the Spanish school, didn’t gain widespread acceptance until the last century in France. The most radical proponents of this view were the group of artists gathered around Claude Monet. This impressionist movement, as critics termed it, emerged from a strong commitment to viewing nature exclusively from a visual standpoint, without considering any other associations related to sight. The outcome was a completely new way of seeing nature, shocking and off-putting to those unaccustomed to observing purely visually and only familiar with the " 63feel of things," so to speak. The initial results were naturally quite raw. However, a wealth of new visual facts was revealed, especially those related to the depiction of sunlight and half-light effects. In fact, the entire portrayal of bright light has been forever influenced by the work of this group of painters. Free from the objective world, they no longer dissected objects to examine what was inside them but rather studied the anatomy of the light reflecting off them to their eyes. Discovering that this light was made up of all the colors of the rainbow as seen in the solar spectrum, and that all the effects produced by nature were achieved with different proportions of these colors, they chose these colors, or the closest pigments they could find, for their palette, discarding earth tones and black. Furthermore, they noticed that nature's colors (the beams of colored light) produced different results when mixed than when their corresponding pigments were combined. Thus, they decided to use their paints as pure as possible, placing them next to each other so they would mix as they reached the eye, with the result being one of pure color rays, not pigments.

But we are here only concerned with the movement as it affected form, and must avoid the fascinating province of colour.

But we are only focused on how the movement influenced form and must steer clear of the captivating area of color.

Those who had been brought up in the old school of outline form said there was no drawing in these impressionist pictures, and from the point of view of the mental idea of form discussed in the last chapter, there was indeed little, although, had the impression been realised to a sufficiently definite focus, the sense of touch and solidity would probably have been satisfied. But the particular field of this 64new point of view, the beauty of tone and colour relations considered as an impression apart from objectivity, did not tempt them to carry their work so far as this, or the insistence on these particular qualities would have been lost.

Those who were raised with the traditional outline approach argued that there was no drawing in these impressionist paintings, and from the perspective of the mental concept of form discussed in the last chapter, there was indeed little. However, if the impression had been captured with a sufficiently clear focus, the sense of touch and solidity would likely have been fulfilled. But in this new point of view, the beauty of tone and color relationships seen as an impression apart from objectivity did not encourage them to take their work that far, or the emphasis on these specific qualities would have been diminished.

But interesting and alluring as is the new world of visual music opened up by this point of view, it is beginning to be realised that it has failed somehow to satisfy. In the first place, the implied assumption that one sees with the eye alone is wrong:

But as interesting and captivating as the new world of visual music is from this perspective, it’s becoming clear that it hasn’t fully met expectations. First of all, the assumption that we see with just our eyes is incorrect:

"In every object there is inexhaustible meaning; the eye sees in it what the eye brings means of seeing,"[2]

"In everything, there is endless meaning; the eye sees what it is trained to see,"[2]

[2] Goethe, quoted in Carlyle's French Revolution, chap. i.

[2] Goethe, referenced in Carlyle's French Revolution, chapter 1.

and it is the mind behind the eye that supplies this means of perception: one sees with the mind. The ultimate effect of any picture, be it impressionist, post, anti, or otherwise—is its power to stimulate these mental perceptions within the mind.

and it is the mind behind the eye that provides this way of perception: one sees with the mind. The ultimate impact of any picture, whether it’s impressionist, post, anti, or something else—is its ability to stimulate these mental perceptions within the mind.

But even from the point of view of the true visual perception (if there is such a thing) that modern art has heard so much talk of, the copying of the retina picture is not so great a success. The impression carried away from a scene that has moved us is not its complete visual aspect. Only those things that are significant to the felt impression have been retained by the mind; and if the picture is to be a true representation of this, the significant facts must be sorted out from the mass of irrelevant matter and presented in a lively manner. The impressionist's habit of painting before nature entirely is not calculated to do this. Going time after time to the same place, even if similar weather conditions are waited for, although well enough for studies, is against the production of a fine picture. Every 65time the artist goes to the selected spot he receives a different impression, so that he must either paint all over his picture each time, in which case his work must be confined to a small scale and will be hurried in execution, or he must paint a bit of today's impression alongside of yesterday's, in which case his work will be dull and lacking in oneness of conception.

But even from the perspective of the true visual perception (if that even exists) that modern art has talked about so much, copying the image our eyes see isn’t that successful. The feeling we take away from a scene that moves us isn’t its complete visual representation. Only the parts that are important to our emotional impression are kept in our minds; and if the artwork is going to accurately reflect this, the meaningful details need to be separated from the irrelevant clutter and presented in an engaging way. The impressionist's practice of painting directly from nature isn’t really suited for this. Going back to the same location repeatedly, even if they wait for similar weather conditions, while fine for studies, doesn’t lead to a great finished piece. Each time the artist visits the chosen spot, they get a different impression, so they either have to repaint their entire picture each time—resulting in smaller-scale and rushed work—or they have to combine today's impression with yesterday's, which makes the piece feel flat and lacking a cohesive vision.

And further, in decomposing the colour rays that come to the eye and painting in pure colour, while great addition was made to the power of expressing light, yet by destroying the definitions and enveloping everything in a scintillating atmosphere, the power to design in a large manner was lost with the wealth of significance that the music of line can convey.

And additionally, by breaking down the color rays that reach our eyes and using pure colors in painting, while we greatly improved our ability to express light, we lost the ability to design on a larger scale and the depth of meaning that the beauty of lines can communicate, all because we wrapped everything in a sparkling atmosphere.

But impressionism has opened up a view from which much interesting matter for art is to be gleaned. And everywhere painters are selecting from this, and grafting it on to some of the more traditional schools of design.

But impressionism has provided a perspective from which a lot of interesting material for art can be gathered. And everywhere, painters are picking from this and integrating it into some of the more traditional styles of design.

Our concern here is with the influence this point of view has had upon draughtsmanship. The influence has been considerable, particularly with those draughtsmen whose work deals with the rendering of modern life. It consists in drawing from the observation of the silhouette occupied by objects in the field of vision, observing the flat appearance of things as they are on the retina. This is, of course, the only accurate way in which to observe visual shapes. The difference between this and the older point of view is its insistence on the observation of the flat visual impression to the exclusion of the tactile or touch sense that by the association of ideas we have come to expect in things seen. An 66increased truth to the character of appearances has been the result, with a corresponding loss of plastic form expression.

Our focus here is on how this perspective has impacted drawing skills. The influence has been significant, especially among artists whose work captures modern life. It involves drawing from observing the outline formed by objects within our field of vision, noticing the flat look of things as they appear on the retina. This is, of course, the most accurate way to perceive visual shapes. The difference from the older perspective is its emphasis on observing the flat visual impression, ignoring the tactile or touch senses that we typically associate with what we see. An 66increased accuracy in depicting appearances has resulted, alongside a corresponding decline in expressing three-dimensional form.

On pages 66 and 67 a reproduction of a drawing in the British Museum, attributed to Michael Angelo, is contrasted with one in the Louvre by Degas. The one is drawn from the line point of view and the other from the mass. They both contain lines, but in the one case the lines are the contours of felt forms and in the other the boundaries of visual masses. In the Michael Angelo the silhouette is only the result of the overlapping of rich forms considered in the round. Every muscle and bone has been mentally realised as a concrete thing and the drawing made as an expression of this idea. Note the line rhythm also; the sense of energy and movement conveyed by the swinging curves; and compare with what is said later (page 162) about the rhythmic significance of swinging curves.

On pages 66 and 67, there's a reproduction of a drawing in the British Museum, attributed to Michelangelo, compared with one in the Louvre by Degas. One is drawn from a linear perspective, while the other focuses on mass. Both include lines, but in the first case, the lines outline felt forms, whereas in the second, they define visual masses. In Michelangelo's drawing, the silhouette arises from the interplay of rich, rounded forms. Every muscle and bone is mentally realized as a tangible entity, and the drawing expresses this concept. Also, take note of the rhythm in the lines; the sense of energy and movement created by the flowing curves; and compare it with what is discussed later (page 162) regarding the rhythmic significance of flowing curves.

Then compare it with the Degas and observe the totally different attitude of mind in which this drawing has been approached. Instead of the outlines being the result of forms felt as concrete things, the silhouette is everywhere considered first, the plastic sense (nowhere so great as in the other) being arrived at from the accurate consideration of the mass shapes.

Then compare it with the Degas and notice the completely different mindset with which this drawing has been created. Instead of the outlines coming from shapes seen as solid objects, the silhouette is always seen first, with the sense of volume (which is nowhere near as strong as in the other) being derived from a precise examination of the mass shapes.

Notice also the increased attention to individual character in the Degas, observe the pathos of those underfed little arms, and the hand holding the tired ankle—how individual it all is. What a different tale this little figure tells from that given before the footlights! See with what sympathy the contours have been searched for those accents expressive of all this.

Notice also the greater focus on individual character in the Degas. Observe the sadness in those underfed little arms and the hand holding the tired ankle—it's all so unique. This little figure tells a completely different story than what is presented on stage! Just look at how carefully the shapes have been explored to capture those emotions.

Plate XII. STUDY ATTRIBUTED TO MICHAEL ANGELO (BRITISH MUSEUM) Note the desire to express form as a felt solid thing, the contours resulting from the overlapping forms. The visual appearance is arrived at as a result of giving expression to the mental idea of a solid object.

Plate XII.

Plate 12.

STUDY ATTRIBUTED TO MICHAEL ANGELO (BRITISH MUSEUM)

STUDY ATTRIBUTED TO MICHAEL ANGELO (BRITISH MUSEUM)

Note the desire to express form as a felt solid thing, the contours resulting from the overlapping forms. The visual appearance is arrived at as a result of giving expression to the mental idea of a solid object.

Note the wish to show form as something tangible, with the shapes emerging from the overlapping forms. The visual look comes from expressing the mental concept of a solid object.


Plate XIII. STUDY BY DEGAS (LUXEMBOURG) In contrast with Michael Angelo's drawing, note the preoccupation with the silhouette the spaces occupied by the different masses in the field of vision; how the appearance solid forms is the result of accurately portraying this visual appearance. Photo Levi

Plate XIII.

Plate 13.

STUDY BY DEGAS (LUXEMBOURG)

Degas Study (Luxembourg)

In contrast with Michael Angelo's drawing, note the preoccupation with the silhouette the spaces occupied by the different masses in the field of vision; how the appearance solid forms is the result of accurately portraying this visual appearance.

In contrast to Michelangelo's drawing, notice the focus on the silhouette and the areas occupied by the various forms in the field of vision; how the look of solid shapes comes from accurately depicting this visual aspect.

Photo Levi

Photo by Levi

67 How remote from individual character is the Michael Angelo in contrast with this! Instead of an individual he gives us the expression of a glowing mental conception of man as a type of physical strength and power.

67 How different from individual character is the Michael Angelo compared to this! Instead of focusing on a unique person, he presents the idea of man as a symbol of physical strength and power.

The rhythm is different also, in the one case being a line rhythm, and in the other a consideration of the flat pattern of shapes or masses with a play of lost-and-foundness on the edges (see later, pages 192 et seq., variety of edges). It is this feeling for rhythm and the sympathetic searching for and emphasis of those points expressive of character, that keep this drawing from being the mechanical performance which so much concern with scientific visual accuracy might well have made it, and which has made mechanical many of the drawings of Degas's followers who unintelligently copy his method.

The rhythm is different as well; in one case, it's a linear rhythm, while in the other, it's about the flat pattern of shapes or masses with a play of lost-and-foundness on the edges (see later, pages 192 et seq., variety of edges). It's this sense of rhythm and the careful search for and emphasis on those points that express character that keeps this drawing from becoming a mechanical effort, which could easily happen with so much focus on scientific visual accuracy. This has turned many of Degas's followers' drawings into mechanical copies that lack understanding of his method.


68

VI
THE ACADEMIC AND CONVENTIONAL

The terms Academic and Conventional are much used in criticism and greatly feared by the criticised, often without either party appearing to have much idea of what is meant. New so-called schools of painting seem to arrive annually with the spring fashions, and sooner or later the one of last year gets called out of date, if not conventional and academic. And as students, for fear of having their work called by one or other of these dread terms, are inclined to rush into any new extravagance that comes along, some inquiry as to their meaning will not be out of place before we pass into the chapters dealing with academic study.

The terms Academic and Conventional are commonly used in criticism and often dreaded by those being criticized, usually without a clear understanding from either side of what they mean. New so-called schools of painting seem to pop up every year with the spring trends, and eventually, the one from last year is deemed out of date, if not conventional and academic. And since students are afraid of having their work labeled with one of these intimidating terms, they often feel pressured to jump into whatever new trend comes along. So, it makes sense to explore what these terms actually mean before we move on to the chapters about academic study.

It has been the cry for some time that Schools of Art turned out only academic students. And one certainly associates a dead level of respectable mediocrity with much school work. We can call to mind a lot of dull, lifeless, highly-finished work, imperfectly perfect, that has won the prize in many a school competition. Flaubert says "a form deadens," and it does seem as if the necessary formality of a school course had some deadening influence on students; and that there was some important part of the artist's development which it has failed to recognise and encourage.

For a while now, there has been a complaint that Art Schools only produce academic students. You can definitely 연결. a stale level of acceptable mediocrity with a lot of school projects. We can recall numerous dull, lifeless, overly polished works that, while not quite perfect, have won awards in many school competitions. Flaubert says "a form deadens," and it really seems like the strict structure of a school program has some dulling effect on students; it feels like there's a crucial part of an artist's growth that these programs overlook and don't support.

The freer system of the French schools has been 69in many cases more successful. But each school was presided over by an artist of distinction, and this put the students in touch with real work and thus introduced vitality. In England, until quite lately, artists were seldom employed in teaching, which was left to men set aside for the purpose, without any time to carry on original work of their own. The Royal Academy Schools are an exception to this. There the students have the advantage of teaching from some distinguished member or associate who has charge of the upper school for a month at a time. But as the visitor is constantly changed, the less experienced students are puzzled by the different methods advocated, and flounder hopelessly for want of a definite system to work on; although for a student already in possession of a good grounding there is much to be said for the system, as contact with the different masters widens their outlook.

The more relaxed system of French schools has been 69in many cases more successful. But each school was led by a distinguished artist, which connected the students with real work and added energy to their experience. In England, until recently, artists were rarely hired to teach; that role was given to people designated for teaching, who often lacked the time to pursue their own creative work. The Royal Academy Schools are an exception to this. There, students benefit from instruction by a notable member or associate who runs the upper school for a month at a time. However, since the instructors change frequently, the less experienced students get confused by the varied teaching styles and struggle to find a clear system to follow; although for those who already have a solid foundation, the approach has its advantages as exposure to different masters broadens their perspective.

But perhaps the chief mistake in Art Schools has been that they have too largely confined themselves to training students mechanically to observe and portray the thing set before them to copy, an antique figure, a still-life group, a living model sitting as still and lifeless as he can. Now this is all very well as far as it goes, but the real matter of art is not necessarily in all this. And if the real matter of art is neglected too long the student may find it difficult to get in touch with it again.

But maybe the biggest mistake in art schools has been that they’ve mostly focused on training students to mechanically observe and replicate whatever is in front of them—a classic statue, a still-life arrangement, or a live model sitting as still as possible. While this approach has its merits, it doesn’t capture the true essence of art. If the deeper meaning of art is overlooked for too long, students might struggle to reconnect with it later on.

These accurate, painstaking school studies are very necessary indeed as a training for the eye in observing accurately, and the hand in reproducing the appearances of things, because it is through the reproduction of natural appearances and the knowledge of form and colour derived from such study 70that the student will afterwards find the means of giving expression to his feelings. But when valuable prizes and scholarships are given for them, and not for really artistic work, they do tend to become the end instead of the means.

These precise and detailed school studies are really important for training the eye to observe accurately and the hand to reproduce how things look. It's through capturing natural appearances and understanding form and color from such study 70 that students will later discover how to express their feelings. However, when valuable awards and scholarships are offered for these studies instead of true artistic work, they can become the goal rather than the means.

It is of course improbable that even school studies done with the sole idea of accuracy by a young artist will in all cases be devoid of artistic feeling; it will creep in, if he has the artistic instinct. But it is not enough encouraged, and the prize is generally given to the drawing that is most complete and like the model in a commonplace way. If a student, moved by a strong feeling for form, lets himself go and does a fine thing, probably only remotely like the model to the average eye, the authorities are puzzled and don't usually know what to make of it.

It’s unlikely that even school studies focused solely on accuracy by a young artist will completely lack artistic feeling; it will come through if they have the artistic instinct. However, it's not sufficiently encouraged, and the prize is typically awarded to the drawing that is the most finished and resembles the model in a typical way. If a student, driven by a strong appreciation for form, allows their creativity to flow and creates something impressive that may only vaguely resemble the model to the average observer, the authorities are confused and usually don’t know how to respond to it.

There are schools where the most artistic qualities are encouraged, but they generally neglect the academic side; and the student leaves them poorly equipped for fine work. Surely it would be possible to make a distinction, giving prizes for academic drawings which should be as thoroughly accurate in a mechanical way as industry and application can make them, and also for artistic drawings, in which the student should be encouraged to follow his bent, striving for the expression of any qualities that delight him, and troubling less about mechanical accuracy. The use of drawing as an expression of something felt is so often left until after the school training is done that many students fail to achieve it altogether. And rows of lifeless pictures, made up of models copied in different attitudes, with studio properties around them, are the result, and pass for art in many quarters. Such pictures often display 71considerable ability, for as Burne-Jones says in one of his letters, "It is very difficult to paint even a bad picture." But had the ability been differently directed, the pictures might have been good.

There are schools that really focus on artistic skills, but they usually overlook the academic aspects; as a result, students graduate without being well-prepared for serious work. It would definitely be possible to make a distinction, awarding prizes for academic drawings, which should be as technically precise as industry and effort can make them, and also for artistic drawings, where students should be encouraged to explore their creativity and express whatever qualities inspire them, without worrying too much about technical accuracy. The use of drawing as a way to express emotions is often postponed until after school training is complete, causing many students to miss out on mastering it entirely. The result is often a bunch of lifeless pictures, made from models posed in different positions, surrounded by studio props, which are accepted as art in many places. These pictures can show considerable talent, because as Burne-Jones mentioned in one of his letters, "It is very difficult to paint even a bad picture." But if that talent had been channeled differently, the artwork could have been really good.

Plate XIV. DRAWING IN RED CHALK BY ERNEST COLE Example of unacademic drawing made in the author's class at the Goldsmiths College School of Art.

Plate XIV.

Plate 14.

DRAWING IN RED CHALK BY ERNEST COLE

DRAWING IN RED CHALK BY ERNEST COLE

Example of unacademic drawing made in the author's class at the Goldsmiths College School of Art.

Example of a non-academic drawing created in the author's class at Goldsmiths College School of Art.

It is difficult to explain what is wrong with an academic drawing, and what is the difference between it and fine drawing. But perhaps this difference can be brought home a little more clearly if you will pardon a rather fanciful simile. I am told that if you construct a perfectly fitted engine —the piston fitting the cylinder with absolute accuracy and the axles their sockets with no space between, &c.—it will not work, but be a lifeless mass of iron. There must be enough play between the vital parts to allow of some movement; "dither" is, I believe, the Scotch word for it. The piston must be allowed some play in the opening of the cylinder through which it passes, or it will not be able to move and show any life. And the axles of the wheels in their sockets, and, in fact, all parts of the machine where life and movement are to occur, must have this play, this "dither." It has always seemed to me that the accurately fitting engine was like a good academic drawing, in a way a perfect piece of workmanship, but lifeless. Imperfectly perfect, because there was no room left for the play of life. And to carry the simile further, if you allow too great a play between the parts, so that they fit one over the other too loosely, the engine will lose power and become a poor rickety thing. There must be the smallest amount of play that will allow of its working. And the more perfectly made the engine, the less will the amount of this "dither" be.

It's tough to explain what's wrong with an academic drawing and how it differs from fine drawing. But maybe this difference can be made clearer with a rather imaginative comparison. I’ve heard that if you build a perfectly fitted engine—where the piston fits the cylinder exactly and the axles fit their sockets with no space in between—it won't work, but instead, will just be a lifeless chunk of iron. There needs to be enough room between the essential parts to allow for some movement; "dither" is, I believe, the Scottish term for it. The piston needs a bit of play in the cylinder opening to move and show any life. The axles of the wheels in their sockets, and all parts of the machine where movement is expected, must have this play, this "dither." I’ve always thought of the precisely fitted engine as similar to a good academic drawing—it's a flawless piece of craftsmanship, but lacks life. Imperfectly perfect, because there’s no space for the play of life. To extend the analogy, if you allow too much play between the parts, so they fit too loosely over each other, the engine will lose power and become a shaky disaster. There must be just the right amount of play to keep it functioning. The better the engine is made, the less this "dither" will be.

The word "dither" will be a useful name to give 72that elusive quality, that play on mechanical accuracy, existing in all vital art. It is this vital quality that has not yet received much attention in art training.

The term "dither" is a handy way to describe 72that elusive quality, that subtlety in mechanical precision that exists in all essential art. This vital quality hasn't received much focus in art education yet.

It is here that the photograph fails, it can only at best give mechanical accuracy, whereas art gives the impression of a live, individual consciousness. Where the recording instrument is a live individual, there is no mechanical standard of accuracy possible, as every recording instrument is a different personality. And it is the subtle differences in the individual renderings of nature that are the life-blood of art. The photograph, on account of its being chained to mechanical accuracy, has none of this play of life to give it charm. It only approaches artistic conditions when it is blurred, vague, and indefinite, as in so-called artistic photography, for then only can some amount of this vitalising play, this "dither" be imagined to exist.

This is where photography falls short; it can only provide mechanical accuracy at best, while art conveys the essence of a living, individual consciousness. When the recording source is a living person, no mechanical standard of accuracy can apply, because each recorder has a unique personality. It's these subtle differences in how individuals capture nature that make art come alive. Photography, tied to mechanical precision, lacks this vibrancy and charm. It only starts to resemble art when it's blurred, vague, and ambiguous, as in what is called artistic photography, because then some sense of this energizing play, this "dither," can be imagined to exist.

It is this perfect accuracy, this lack of play, of variety, that makes the machine-made article so lifeless. Wherever there is life there is variety, and the substitution of the machine-made for the hand-made article has impoverished the world to a greater extent than we are probably yet aware of. Whereas formerly, before the advent of machinery, the commonest article you could pick up had a life and warmth which gave it individual interest, now everything is turned out to such a perfection of deadness that one is driven to pick up and collect, in sheer desperation, the commonest rubbish still surviving from the earlier period.

It's this perfect accuracy, this absence of play and variety, that makes machine-made products so lifeless. Wherever there is life, there is variety, and replacing hand-made goods with machine-made ones has diminished the world more than we probably realize. Back in the day, before machines took over, even the simplest item had a life and warmth that made it interesting. Now, everything is produced with such a level of lifeless perfection that we find ourselves desperately collecting the most ordinary scraps that still exist from the earlier time.

But to return to our drawings. If the variations from strict accuracy made under the influence 73of feeling are too great, the result will be a caricature. The variations in a beautiful drawing are so subtle as often to defy detection. The studies of Ingres are an instance of what I mean. How true and instinct with life are his lines, and how easily one might assume that they were merely accurate. But no merely accurate work would have the impelling quality these drawings possess. If the writer may venture an opinion on so great an artist, the subtle difference we are talking about was sometimes missed by even Ingres himself, when he transferred his drawings to the canvas; and the pictures have in some cases become academic and lifeless. Without the stimulus of nature before him it was difficult to preserve the "dither" in the drawing, and the life has escaped. This is the great difficulty of working from studies; it is so easy to lose those little points in your drawing that make for vitality of expression, in the process of copying in cold blood.

But let's get back to our drawings. If the changes from strict accuracy influenced by feeling are too drastic, the outcome will be a caricature. The variations in a beautiful drawing are so subtle that they often go unnoticed. The studies of Ingres illustrate what I mean. His lines are incredibly true and full of life, and one could easily think they were just accurate. But no purely accurate work would have the compelling quality these drawings have. If I may share my opinion on such a great artist, even Ingres sometimes missed the subtle difference we’re discussing when he transferred his drawings to canvas; in some cases, his paintings became academic and lifeless. Without the inspiration of nature in front of him, it was hard to maintain the "dither" in the drawing, and the life was lost. This is the major challenge of working from studies; it's so easy to lose those little details in your drawing that bring vitality of expression when copying in a detached manner.

Plate XV. FROM A PENCIL DRAWING BY INGRES Photo Bulloz

Plate XV.

Plate 15.

FROM A PENCIL DRAWING BY INGRES

FROM A PENCIL DRAWING BY INGRES

Photo Bulloz

Photo Bulloz

The fact is: it is only the academic that can be taught. And it is no small thing if this is well done in a school. The qualities that give vitality and distinction to drawing must be appreciated by the student himself, and may often assert themselves in his drawing without his being aware that he is doing aught but honestly copying. And if he has trained himself thoroughly he will not find much difficulty when he is moved to vital expression. All the master can do is to stand by and encourage whenever he sees evidence of the real thing. But there is undoubtedly this danger of the school studies becoming the end instead of the means.

The truth is: only those who are academically inclined can really be taught. And it's a big deal if this is achieved well in a school. The traits that bring life and uniqueness to drawing need to be recognized by the student themselves, and they may often come out in their work without them even realizing they're doing anything but honestly copying. If they’ve trained thoroughly, they won’t struggle much when it comes to expressing themselves genuinely. The role of the teacher is to be there and encourage whenever they spot signs of true talent. However, there is certainly a risk that school studies can become the goal instead of the tool.

A drawing is not necessarily academic because it is thorough, but only because it is dead. Neither 74is a drawing necessarily academic because it is done in what is called a conventional style, any more than it is good because it is done in an unconventional style. The test is whether it has life and conveys genuine feeling.

A drawing isn't automatically considered academic just because it's detailed, but only if it's lifeless. Neither 74 is a drawing automatically academic because it's created in what's called a conventional style, any more than it’s good just because it's made in an unconventional style. The real measure is whether it has vitality and expresses true emotion.


There is much foolish talk about conventional art, as if art could ever get away from conventions, if it would. The convention will be more natural or more abstract according to the nature of the thing to be conveyed and the medium employed to express it. But naturalism is just as much a convention as any of the other isms that art has lately been so assailed with. For a really unconventional art there is Madame Tussaud's Waxworks. There, even the convention of a frame and flat surface are done away with, besides the painted symbols to represent things. They have real natural chairs, tables, and floors, real clothes, and even real hair. Realism everywhere, but no life. And we all know the result. There is more expression of life in a few lines scribbled on paper by a good artist than in all the reality of the popular show.

There’s a lot of pointless chatter about traditional art, as if art could ever escape conventions, even if it wanted to. The convention will be more natural or more abstract, depending on what’s being expressed and the medium used to express it. But naturalism is just as much a convention as any of the other "isms" that art has recently been criticized for. For truly unconventional art, look at Madame Tussaud's Waxworks. There, even the convention of a frame and flat surface is eliminated, along with the painted symbols used to represent things. They have real chairs, tables, and floors, real clothes, and even real hair. Realism everywhere, but no life. And we all know the outcome. There’s more expression of life in a few quick lines scribbled on paper by a skilled artist than in all the reality of that popular exhibit.

It would seem that, after a certain point, the nearer your picture approaches the actual illusion of natural appearance, the further you are from the expression of life. One can never hope to surpass the illusionary appearance of a tableau vivant. There you have real, living people. But what an awful deathlike stillness is felt when the curtain is drawn aside. The nearer you approach the actual in all its completeness, the more evident is the lack of that movement which always accompanies life. You cannot express life by copying laboriously 75natural appearances. Those things in the appearance that convey vital expression and are capable of being translated into the medium he is working with, have to be sought by the artist, and the painted symbols of his picture made accordingly. This lack of the movement of life is never noticed in a good picture, on the other hand the figures are often felt to move.

It seems that after a certain point, the closer your artwork gets to looking exactly like reality, the further you move away from conveying the essence of life. You can never really top the illusion of a tableau vivant. In that case, you have real, living people. But there’s a chilling, lifeless stillness when the curtain is pulled back. The closer you get to reality in all its detail, the more obvious it is that there’s a lack of movement, which is always present in life. You can't capture life just by painstakingly mimicking natural appearances. The elements in that appearance that communicate vital expression and can be translated into the medium the artist is using must be sought after, with the painted symbols of the artwork crafted accordingly. This absence of life's movement is typically not noticeable in a good painting; instead, the figures often seem to come alive.

Pictures are blamed for being conventional when it is lack of vitality that is the trouble. If the convention adopted has not been vitalised by the emotion that is the reason of the painting, it will, of course, be a lifeless affair. But however abstract and unnaturalistic the manner adopted, if it has been truly felt by the artist as the right means of expressing his emotional idea, it will have life and should not be called conventional in the commonly accepted offensive use of the term.

Pictures are often criticized for being conventional when the real issue is a lack of vitality. If the tradition used hasn’t been energized by the emotion that inspires the painting, it will undoubtedly feel lifeless. However, no matter how abstract or unconventional the style might be, if the artist genuinely feels that it’s the best way to express their emotional idea, it will vibrate with life and shouldn’t be labeled as conventional in the usual negative sense of the word.

It is only when a painter consciously chooses a manner not his own, which he does not comprehend and is incapable of firing with his own personality, that his picture is ridiculous and conventional in the dead sense.

It’s only when a painter intentionally adopts a style that isn’t his own, which he doesn’t understand and can’t infuse with his own personality, that his artwork becomes absurd and traditional in a lifeless way.

But every age differs in its temperament, and the artistic conventions of one age seldom fit another. The artist has to discover a convention for himself, one that fits his particular individuality. But this is done simply and naturally—not by starting out with the intention of flouting all traditional conventions on principle; nor, on the other hand, by accepting them all on principle, but by simply following his own bent and selecting what appeals to him in anything and everything that comes within the range of his vision. The result is likely to be something very different from 76the violent exploits in peculiarity that have been masquerading as originality lately. Originality is more concerned with sincerity than with peculiarity.

But every era has its own vibe, and the artistic norms of one period rarely fit another. An artist needs to find a convention that suits their own individuality. This happens naturally—not by deliberately rejecting all traditional conventions, nor by blindly accepting them, but by following their own instincts and picking what resonates with them from everything they encounter. The outcome is likely to be something quite different from 76 the wild peculiarities that have been passing for originality lately. Originality is more about sincerity than about being unusual.

The struggling and fretting after originality that one sees in modern art is certainly an evidence of vitality, but one is inclined to doubt whether anything really original was ever done in so forced a way. The older masters, it seems, were content sincerely to try and do the best they were capable of doing. And this continual striving to do better led them almost unconsciously to new and original results. Originality is a quality over which an artist has as little influence as over the shape and distinction of his features. All he can do is to be sincere and try and find out the things that really move him and that he really likes. If he has a strong and original character, he will have no difficulty in this, and his work will be original in the true sense. And if he has not, it is a matter of opinion whether he is not better employed in working along the lines of some well-tried manner that will at any rate keep him from doing anything really bad, than in struggling to cloak his own commonplaceness under violent essays in peculiarity and the avoidance of the obvious at all costs.

The struggle and anxiety for originality seen in modern art certainly shows vitality, but it makes one question whether anything truly original has been created in such a forced manner. It seems that the older masters were genuinely content to do their best. Their continuous effort to improve led them almost unconsciously to new and original outcomes. Originality is something an artist has just as little control over as the shape and features of their face. All they can do is be sincere and discover what genuinely moves them and what they truly like. If an artist has a strong and original character, this process will come easily, and their work will be original in the truest sense. If not, it's debatable whether they might be better off working within a tried-and-true style that at least keeps them from producing anything really bad, rather than struggling to hide their own mediocrity behind dramatic attempts at uniqueness and avoiding the obvious at all costs.

But while speaking against fretting after eccentricity, don't let it be assumed that any discouragement is being given to genuine new points of view. In art, when a thing has once been well done and has found embodiment in some complete work of art, it has been done once for all. The circumstances that produced it are never likely to occur again. That is why those painters who continue to reproduce a picture of theirs (we do not mean literally) that had been a success in the first instance, never 77afterwards obtain the success of the original performance. Every beautiful work of art is a new creation, the result of particular circumstances in the life of the artist and the time of its production, that have never existed before and will never recur again. Were any of the great masters of the past alive now, they would do very different work from what they did then, the circumstances being so entirely different. So that should anybody seek to paint like Titian now, by trying to paint like Titian did in his time, he could not attempt anything more unlike the spirit of that master; which in its day, like the spirit of all masters, was most advanced. But it is only by a scrupulously sincere and truthful attitude of mind that the new and original circumstances in which we find ourselves can be taken advantage of for the production of original work. And self-conscious seeking after peculiarity only stops the natural evolution and produces abortions.

But while we talk about not stressing over being quirky, let's not assume that this means we discourage genuine new perspectives. In art, once something has been skillfully created and has taken form in a complete piece, it's a one-and-done deal. The conditions that led to its creation are unlikely to happen again. That’s why artists who try to replicate a successful piece of theirs (not literally, of course) never manage to capture the same success as the original. Every beautiful artwork is a fresh creation, shaped by unique circumstances in the artist's life and the time it was made—circumstances that have never happened before and won’t again. If any of the great masters from the past were alive today, they would create very different works because the circumstances are so different now. So, if someone tries to paint like Titian by mimicking his style from his era, they couldn't create anything more disconnected from the essence of that master, which, in its time, was very forward-thinking. The only way to truly take advantage of the new and original situations we find ourselves in is through a genuinely sincere and honest mindset, which can lead to the creation of original work. However, self-consciously trying to be different just hinders natural growth and results in failures.

But do not be frightened by conventions, the different materials in which the artist works impose their conventions. And as it is through these materials that he has to find expression, what expressive qualities they possess must be studied, and those facts in nature selected that are in harmony with them. The treatment of hair by sculptors is an extreme instance of this. What are those qualities of hair that are amenable to expression in stone? Obviously they are few, and confined chiefly to the mass forms in which the hair arranges itself. The finest sculptors have never attempted more than this, have never lost sight of the fact that it was stone they were working with, and never made any attempt to create an illusion of real hair. And in the same way, when working in bronze, the fine artist 78never loses sight of the fact that it is bronze with which he is working. How sadly the distinguished painter to whom a misguided administration entrusted the work of modelling the British emblem overlooked this, may be seen any day in Trafalgar Square, the lions there possessing none of the splendour of bronze but looking as if they were modelled in dough, and possessing in consequence none of the vital qualities of the lion. It is interesting to compare them with the little lion Alfred Stevens modelled for the railing of the British Museum, and to speculate on what a thrill we might have received every time we passed Trafalgar Square, had he been entrusted with the work, as he might have been.

But don’t be intimidated by conventions; the different materials an artist uses come with their own rules. Since the artist must find expression through these materials, it’s important to study their expressive qualities and choose elements from nature that align with them. The way sculptors treat hair is a clear example of this. What qualities of hair can effectively be expressed in stone? Clearly, there are just a few, mostly related to the overall shapes in which hair naturally falls. The greatest sculptors have always understood this—they never forgot they were working with stone and didn’t try to create the illusion of real hair. Similarly, when working with bronze, a fine artist never forgets they are using bronze. Unfortunately, the distinguished painter assigned by a misguided administration to create the British emblem completely missed this. You can see the result every day in Trafalgar Square; the lions there lack the majesty of bronze and look like they were sculpted from dough, thus missing the powerful qualities of a lion. It’s interesting to compare them with the small lion Alfred Stevens created for the railing of the British Museum, and to imagine how much more impressive our experience passing Trafalgar Square could have been if he had been given that task.

And in painting, the great painters never lose sight of the fact that it is paint with which they are expressing themselves. And although paint is capable of approaching much nearer an actual illusory appearance of nature than stone or bronze, they never push this to the point where you forget that it is paint. This has been left for some of the smaller men.

And in painting, the great artists always remember that they are using paint to express themselves. While paint can create a closer illusion of nature than stone or bronze can, they never take it so far that you forget it's paint. That's something that some lesser artists have attempted.

And when it comes to drawing, the great artists have always confined themselves to the qualities in nature that the tool they were drawing with was capable of expressing, and no others. Whether working with pen, pencil, chalk, or charcoal, they always created a convention within which unlimited expression has been possible.

And when it comes to drawing, the great artists have always limited themselves to the qualities in nature that the tool they were using could express, and nothing else. Whether working with pen, pencil, chalk, or charcoal, they always established a convention that allowed for unlimited expression.

To sum up, academic drawing is all that can be really taught, and is as necessary to the painter as the practising of exercises is to the musician, that his powers of observation and execution may be trained. But the vital matter of art is not in all this necessary training. And this fact the student 79should always keep in mind, and be ever ready to give rein to those natural enthusiasms which, if he is an artist, he will find welling up within him. The danger is that the absorbing interest in his academic studies may take up his whole attention, to the neglect of the instinctive qualities that he should possess the possession of which alone will entitle him to be an artist.

To sum up, academic drawing is the only thing that can really be taught, and it’s just as essential to a painter as practicing exercises is to a musician, so they can develop their observation and execution skills. But the core of art isn't found in all this necessary training. This is something the student 79 should always remember, and they should be ready to embrace those natural passions that, if they are an artist, will rise up from within. The risk is that getting too absorbed in academic studies may consume all their focus, causing them to overlook the instinctive qualities that are essential for being an artist.


80

VII
THE STUDY OF DRAWING

We have seen that there are two extreme points of view from which the representation of form can be approached, that of outline directly related to the mental idea of form with its touch association on the one hand, and that of mass connected directly with the visual picture on the retina on the other.

We have seen that there are two extreme viewpoints from which the representation of form can be approached: one is outline, directly linked to the mental concept of form with its tactile association, and the other is mass, directly connected to the visual image on the retina.

Now, between these two extreme points of view there are an infinite variety of styles combining them both and leaning more to the one side or the other, as the case may be. But it is advisable for the student to study both separately, for there are different things to be learnt and different expressive qualities in nature to be studied in both.

Now, between these two extreme viewpoints, there’s an endless range of styles that combine elements from each and lean more towards one side or the other, depending on the situation. However, it’s recommended that students study each separately, as there are unique lessons and different expressive qualities in nature to explore in both.

From the study of outline drawing the eye is trained to accurate observation and learns the expressive value of a line. And the hand is also trained to definite statement, the student being led on by degrees from simple outlines to approach the full realisation of form in all the complexity of light and shade.

From practicing outline drawing, the eye becomes skilled in precise observation and understands the expressive power of a line. The hand is also trained for clear expression, with the student gradually moving from simple outlines to fully realizing form in all its complexity of light and shadow.

But at the same time he should study mass drawing with paint from the purely visual point of view, in order to be introduced to the important study of tone values and the expression of form by means of planes. And so by degrees he will 81learn accurately to observe and portray the tone masses (their shapes and values) to which all visual appearances can be reduced; and he will gradually arrive at the full realisation of form—a realisation that will bring him to a point somewhat similar to that arrived at from the opposite point of view of an outline to which has been added light and shade, &c.

But at the same time, he should study mass drawing with paint from a purely visual perspective to get familiar with the important aspects of tone values and how to express form using planes. Gradually, he will 81 learn to accurately observe and depict the tone masses (their shapes and values) to which all visual appearances can be simplified; and he will eventually achieve a complete understanding of form—a realization that will be similar to what one gains from starting with an outline and then adding light and shade, etc.

But unless both points of view are studied, the student's work will be incomplete. If form be studied only from the outline point of view, and what have been called sculptor's drawings alone attempted, the student will lack knowledge of the tone and atmosphere that always envelop form in nature. And also he will be poorly equipped when he comes to exchange the pencil for a brush and endeavours to express himself in paint.

But if both perspectives aren't examined, the student's work will be lacking. If form is only looked at from the outline perspective and only sculptor's drawings are attempted, the student will miss out on the understanding of the tone and atmosphere that always surround form in nature. Additionally, they will be poorly prepared when it's time to switch from pencil to brush and try to express themselves in paint.

And if his studies be only from the mass point of view, the training of his eye to the accurate observation of all the subtleties of contours and the construction of form will be neglected. And he will not understand the mental form stimulus that the direction and swing of a brush stroke can give. These and many things connected with expression can best be studied in line work.

And if his studies are only focused on the big picture, he will overlook the importance of training his eye to accurately observe all the details of shapes and the construction of forms. He won’t grasp how the direction and flow of a brushstroke can inspire mental images. These aspects, along with many others related to expression, can be best explored through line work.

Let the student therefore begin on the principles adopted in most schools, with outline studies of simple casts or models, and gradually add light and shade. When he has acquired more proficiency he may approach drawing from the life. This is sufficiently well done in the numerous schools of art that now exist all over the country. But, at the same time (and this, as far as I know, is not done anywhere), the student should begin some simple form of mass drawing in paint, simple exercises, 83as is explained later in the chapter on Mass Drawing, Practical, being at first attempted and criticised solely from the point of view of tone values.

Let the student start with the basic principles used in most schools, focusing on simple outlines of casts or models, and gradually adding light and shadow. Once he has gained more skill, he can move on to drawing from life. This is already being done well in many art schools across the country. However, at the same time (and as far as I know, this isn’t done anywhere else), the student should start with some basic form of mass drawing in paint, doing simple exercises, 83as explained later in the chapter on Mass Drawing, Practical, initially focused on tone values for feedback and critique.

Diagram II. SHOWING WHERE SQUARENESSES MAY BE LOOKED FOR IN THE DRAWING ON THE OPPOSITE PAGE

Diagram II.

Diagram II.

SHOWING WHERE SQUARENESSES MAY BE LOOKED FOR IN THE DRAWING ON THE OPPOSITE PAGE

SHOWING WHERE SQUARING ERRORS MAY BE FOUND IN THE DRAWING ON THE OPPOSITE PAGE

Plate XVI. STUDY BY RUBENS FROM THE COLLECTION OF CHARLES RICKETTS AND CHARLES SHANNON A splendid example of Rubens' love of rich, full forms. Compare with the diagram opposite, and note the flatnesses that give strength to the forms.

Plate XVI.

Plate 16.

STUDY BY RUBENS FROM THE COLLECTION OF CHARLES RICKETTS AND CHARLES SHANNON

STUDY BY RUBENS FROM THE COLLECTION OF CHARLES RICKETTS AND CHARLES SHANNON

A splendid example of Rubens' love of rich, full forms. Compare with the diagram opposite, and note the flatnesses that give strength to the forms.

A great example of Rubens' appreciation for rich, full shapes. Look at the diagram opposite and notice the flat areas that add strength to the forms.

From lack of this elementary tone study, the student, when he approaches painting for the first time, with only his outline and light and shade knowledge, is entirely at sea. With brushes and paint he is presented with a problem of form expressions entirely new. And he usually begins to flounder about, using his paint as much like chalk on paper as possible. And timid of losing his outlines, he fears to put down a mass, as he has no knowledge of reducing appearances to a structure of tone masses or planes.

Due to the absence of this basic tone study, when a student tackles painting for the first time, armed only with knowledge of outlines and light and shade, they are completely lost. Faced with brushes and paint, they encounter a completely new challenge of expressing form. Typically, they start to struggle, treating the paint almost like chalk on paper. Worried about losing their outlines, they hesitate to lay down larger areas of color, as they lack an understanding of how to simplify appearances into a structure of tone masses or planes.

I would suggest, therefore, that the student should study simultaneously from these two points of view, beginning with their most extreme positions, that is, bare outline on the one side and on the other side tone masses criticised for their accuracy of values only in the first instance. As he advances, the one study will help the other. The line work will help the accuracy with which he observes the shapes of masses, and when he comes to light and shade his knowledge of tone values will help him here. United at last, when complete light and shade has been added to his outline drawings and to his mass drawing an intimate knowledge of form, the results will approximate and the two paths will meet. But if the qualities appertaining to either point of view are not studied separately, the result is confusion and the "muddling through" method so common in our schools of art.

I would suggest that students study from these two perspectives at the same time, starting with their most extreme positions: a bare outline on one side and, on the other, tone masses evaluated solely for their accuracy in values at first. As they progress, one study will support the other. The line work will improve how accurately they observe the shapes of masses, and their understanding of tone values will assist them when dealing with light and shadow. Ultimately, when complete light and shadow are added to their outline drawings and mass drawings, a deep understanding of form will emerge, and the two approaches will converge. However, if the qualities related to either perspective aren't studied individually, it leads to confusion and the common "muddling through" method found in our art schools.


84

VIII
LINE DRAWING: PRACTICAL

Seeing that the first condition of your drawing is that it has to be made on a flat surface, no matter whether it is to be in line or mass you intend to draw, it is obvious that appearances must be reduced to terms of a flat surface before they can be expressed on paper. And this is the first difficulty that confronts the student in attempting to draw a solid object. He has so acquired the habit of perceiving the solidity of things, as was explained in an earlier chapter, that no little difficulty will be experienced in accurately seeing them as a flat picture.

Seeing that the first condition of your drawing is that it has to be on a flat surface, whether you plan to draw in line or using mass, it’s clear that appearances need to be simplified to fit a flat surface before they can be represented on paper. This is the first challenge that students face when trying to draw a solid object. They’ve developed the habit of recognizing the solidity of things, as mentioned in an earlier chapter, so they will find it quite difficult to accurately see these objects as a flat image.

Observing Solids as a Flat copy.

As it is only from one point of view that things can be drawn, and as we have two eyes, therefore two points of view, the closing of one eye will be helpful at first.

Since things can only be seen from one perspective at a time, and we have two eyes, meaning two perspectives, closing one eye can be useful at the beginning.

The simplest and most mechanical way of observing things as a flat subject is to have a piece of cardboard with a rectangular hole cut out of the middle, and also pieces of cotton threaded through it in such a manner that they make a pattern of squares across the opening, as in the accompanying sketch. To make such a frame, get a piece of stiff cardboard, about 12 inches by 9 inches, and cut a rectangular hole in the centre, 7 inches by 5 inches, as in Diagram III. Now mark off the inches on 85all sides of the opening, and taking some black thread, pass it through the point A with a needle (fixing the end at this point with sealing-wax), and across the opening to the corresponding point on the opposite side. Take it along to the next point, as shown by the dotted line, and pass it through and across the opening again, and so on, until B is reached, when the thread should be held by some sealing-wax quite taut everywhere. Do the same for the other side. This frame should be held between the eye and the object to be drawn 86(one eye being closed) in a perfectly vertical position, and with the rectangular sides of the opening vertical and horizontal. The object can then be observed as a flat copy. The trellis of cotton will greatly help the student in seeing the subject to be drawn in two dimensions, and this is the first technical difficulty the young draughtsman has to overcome. It is useful also in training the eye to see the proportions of different parts one to another, the squares of equal size giving one a unit of measurement by which all parts can be scaled.

The easiest and most straightforward way to observe things as a flat subject is to use a piece of cardboard with a rectangular hole cut out in the middle, along with pieces of cotton threaded through it in a way that creates a pattern of squares across the opening, as shown in the accompanying sketch. To create this frame, take a piece of stiff cardboard, about 12 inches by 9 inches, and cut a rectangular hole in the center measuring 7 inches by 5 inches, as illustrated in Diagram III. Next, measure out inches on all sides of the opening, and using some black thread, thread it through point A with a needle (securing the end at this point with sealing wax) and across the opening to the corresponding point on the opposite side. Bring it along to the next point, as indicated by the dotted line, and thread it through and across the opening again, and continue this until you reach point B, where the thread should be held taut by some sealing wax at all points. Repeat this process for the other side. The frame should be held between your eye and the object you want to draw (with one eye closed) in a perfectly vertical position, ensuring the rectangular sides of the opening are vertical and horizontal. You can then observe the object as a flat representation. The grid of cotton will significantly assist the student in seeing the subject to be drawn in two dimensions, which is the first technical challenge that a young draughtsman must overcome. It is also useful for training the eye to see the proportions of different parts in relation to one another, with the equally-sized squares providing a unit of measurement for scaling all parts.

Diagram III. A DEVICE FOR ENABLING STUDENTS TO OBSERVE APPEARANCES AS A FLAT SUBJECT

Diagram III.

Diagram 3.

A DEVICE FOR ENABLING STUDENTS TO OBSERVE APPEARANCES AS A FLAT SUBJECT

A TOOL FOR HELPING STUDENTS VIEW IMAGES AS A FLAT SUBJECT

Fixing Positions of Salient Points

Vertical and horizontal lines are also of the utmost importance in that first consideration for setting out a drawing, namely the fixing of salient points, and getting their relative Positions. Fig. Z, on page 87 [Transcribers Note: Diagram IV], will illustrate what is meant. Let A B C D E be assumed to be points of some importance in an object you wish to draw. Unaided, the placing of these points would be a matter of considerable difficulty. But if you assume a vertical line drawn from A, the positions of B, C, D, and E can be observed in relation to it by noting the height and length of horizontal lines drawn from them to this vertical line. This vertical can be drawn by holding a plumb line at arm's length (closing one eye, of course) and bringing it to a position where it will cover the point A on your subject. The position of the other points on either side of this vertical line can then be observed. Or a knitting-needle can be held vertically before you at arm's length, giving you a line passing through point A. The advantage of the needle is that comparative measurements can be taken with it.

Vertical and horizontal lines are extremely important for laying out a drawing, especially when it comes to identifying key points and understanding their relative positions. Figure Z on page 87 [Transcribers Note: Diagram IV] illustrates this concept. Let's assume A, B, C, D, and E are significant points in the object you want to draw. Without any guidance, placing these points can be quite challenging. However, if you draw a vertical line from A, you can determine the positions of B, C, D, and E by measuring their height and distance using horizontal lines drawn from those points to the vertical line. You can create this vertical line by holding a plumb line at arm's length (closing one eye, of course) and adjusting it until it aligns with point A on your subject. Once this vertical line is established, you can compare the positions of the other points relative to it. Alternatively, you can use a knitting needle held vertically in front of you at arm's length, creating a line that runs through point A. The advantage of the needle is that it allows for easy comparative measurements.

87

87

Diagram IV. SHOWING THREE PRINCIPLES OF CONSTRUCTION USED IN OBSERVING FIG. X, MASSES; FIG. Y, CURVES; FIG. Z, POSITION OF POINTS

Diagram IV.

Diagram IV.

SHOWING THREE PRINCIPLES OF CONSTRUCTION USED IN OBSERVING FIG. X, MASSES; FIG. Y, CURVES; FIG. Z, POSITION OF POINTS

SHOWING THREE PRINCIPLES OF CONSTRUCTION USED IN OBSERVING FIG. X, MASSES; FIG. Y, CURVES; FIG. Z, POSITION OF POINTS

88In measuring comparative distances the needle should always be held at arm's length and the eye kept in one position during the operation; and, whether held vertically or horizontally, always kept in a vertical plane, that is, either straight up and down, or across at right angles to the line of your vision. If these things are not carefully observed, your comparisons will not be true. The method employed is to run the thumb-nail up the needle until the distance from the point so reached to the top exactly corresponds with the distance on the object you wish to measure. Having this carefully noted on your needle, without moving the position of your eye, you can move your outstretched arm and compare it with other distances on the object. It is never advisable to compare other than vertical and horizontal measurements. In our diagram the points were drawn at random and do not come in any obvious mathematical relationship, and this is the usual circumstance in nature. But point C will be found to be a little above the half, and point D a little less than a third of the way up the vertical line. How much above the half and less than the third will have to be observed by eye and a corresponding amount allowed in setting out your drawing. In the horizontal distances, B will be found to be one-fourth the distance from X to the height of C on the right of our vertical line, and C a little more than this distance to the left, while the distance on the right of D is a little less than one-fifth of the whole height. The height of B is so near the top as to be best judged by eye, and its distance to the right is the same as B. These measurements are never to be taken as absolutely accurate, but are a great help to beginners in training 89 the eye, and are at times useful in every artist's work.

88When measuring comparative distances, always hold the needle at arm's length and keep your eye in one position during the process. Whether the needle is held vertically or horizontally, it should always remain in a vertical plane, meaning straight up and down or perpendicular to your line of sight. If you don’t pay attention to these details, your comparisons won’t be accurate. To use this method, run your thumb along the needle until the distance from that point to the top matches exactly with the distance on the object you want to measure. Once you’ve noted this position on your needle, without moving your eye, you can extend your arm and compare it with other distances on the object. It's never a good idea to compare anything other than vertical and horizontal measurements. In our diagram, the points are randomly drawn and don’t have any clear mathematical relationship, which is usually the case in nature. Point C will be slightly above halfway, and point D will be just under a third of the way up the vertical line. The exact values above halfway and below a third should be estimated by sight, allowing for adjustments in your drawing. In terms of horizontal distances, point B will be about a quarter of the distance from X to the height of C on the right side of our vertical line, while C is slightly more than this distance to the left. The distance to the right of D is just under one-fifth of the total height. The height of B is so close to the top that it’s best judged by eye, and its distance to the right matches that of B. These measurements shouldn’t be viewed as perfectly accurate, but they are very helpful for beginners in training 89 their eye and can be useful in the work of any artist.

Plate XVII. DEMONSTRATION DRAWING MADE BEFORE THE STUDENTS OF THE GOLDSMITHS COLLEGE SCHOOL OF ART Illustrating how different directions of lines can help expression of form.

Plate XVII.

Plate 17.

DEMONSTRATION DRAWING MADE BEFORE THE STUDENTS OF THE GOLDSMITHS COLLEGE SCHOOL OF ART

DEMONSTRATION DRAWING DONE FOR THE STUDENTS OF THE GOLDSMITHS COLLEGE SCHOOL OF ART

Illustrating how different directions of lines can help expression of form.

Illustrating how different line directions can enhance the expression of form.

It is useful if one can establish a unit of measurement, some conspicuous distance that does not vary in the object (if a living model a great many distances will be constantly varying), and with which all distances can be compared.

It’s helpful to set a unit of measurement, a noticeable distance that stays consistent in the object (if it’s a living model, many distances will be constantly changing), and with which all distances can be compared.

In setting out a drawing, this fixing of certain salient points is the first thing for the student to do. The drawing reproduced on page 90 [Transcribers Note: Plate XVIII] has been made to illustrate the method of procedure it is advisable to adopt in training the eye to accurate observation. It was felt that a vertical line drawn through the pit of the arm would be the most useful for taking measurements on, and this was first drawn and its length decided upon. Train yourself to draw between limits decided upon at the start. This power will be of great use to you when you wish to place a figure in an exact position in a picture. The next thing to do is to get the relative heights of different points marked upon this line. The fold at the pit of the stomach was found to be exactly in the centre. This was a useful start, and it is generally advisable to note where the half comes first, and very useful if it comes in some obvious place. Other measurements were taken in the same way as our points A B C D E in the diagram on page 87 [Transcribers Note: Diagram IV], and horizontal lines drawn across, and the transverse distances measured in relation to the heights. I have left these lines on the drawing, and also different parts of it unfinished, so as to show the different stages of the work. These guide lines are done mentally later on, when the student is more advanced, and with more accuracy than the clumsy knitting-needle. 90But before the habit of having constantly in mind a vertical and horizontal line with which to compare positions is acquired, they should be put in with as much accuracy as measuring can give.

In starting a drawing, the first step for the student is to establish certain key points. The drawing shown on page 90 [Transcribers Note: Plate XVIII] demonstrates the approach recommended for training the eye to observe accurately. It was determined that drawing a vertical line through the armpit would be the most helpful for taking measurements, so this line was drawn first and its length decided. Practice drawing within predetermined limits from the beginning. This skill will be invaluable when you want to place a figure precisely in a picture. Next, mark the relative heights of different points along this line. The crease at the base of the stomach was identified as being exactly in the center. This was a useful starting point, and it's generally advisable to first note where the halfway mark lies, especially if it’s in a clear position. Other measurements were taken similarly to our points A, B, C, D, E in the diagram on page 87 [Transcribers Note: Diagram IV], with horizontal lines drawn across and transverse distances measured relative to the heights. I left these lines on the drawing, along with various unfinished parts, to showcase the different stages of the work. These guide lines are usually done mentally later on, when the student has advanced and can achieve greater accuracy than with a crude knitting needle. 90 However, before developing the habit of consistently visualizing a vertical and horizontal line for comparing positions, these lines should be drawn in with as much precision as measuring allows.

Blocking in your Drawing.

The next thing to do is to block out the spaces corresponding to those occupied by the model in the field of your vision. The method employed to do this is somewhat similar to that adopted by a surveyor in drawing the plan of a field. Assuming he had an irregular shaped one, such as is drawn in Fig. X, page 87 [Transcribers Note: Diagram IV], he would proceed to invest it with straight lines, taking advantage of any straightness in the boundary, noting the length and the angles at which these straight lines cut each other, and then reproducing them to scale on his plan. Once having got this scaffolding accurately placed, he can draw the irregularities of the shape in relation to these lines with some certainty of getting them right.

The next step is to outline the areas that the model occupies in your field of vision. The method used for this is somewhat similar to what a surveyor does when creating a layout of a piece of land. If he had an irregularly shaped plot, like the one shown in Fig. X, page 87 [Transcribers Note: Diagram IV], he would start by drawing straight lines, making use of any straight edges in the boundary, measuring the lengths, and noting the angles where these lines intersect. Then, he would recreate them to scale on his map. Once this framework is accurately set up, he can draw the irregular features of the shape in relation to these lines with a good level of confidence that he’ll get them right.

You should proceed in very much the same way to block out the spaces that the forms of your drawing are to occupy. I have produced these blocking-out lines beyond what was necessary in the accompanying drawing (page 87 [Transcribers Note: Diagram IV]), in order to show them more clearly.

You should go about this in a similar way to outline the areas that the shapes of your drawing will fill. I've made these outline lines longer than needed in the drawing included (page 87 [Transcribers Note: Diagram IV]) to make them clearer.

How to observe the Shape of Curves.

There is yet another method of construction useful in noting accurately the shape of a curved line, which is illustrated in Fig. Y, page 87 [Transcribers Note: Diagram IV]. First of all, fix the positions of the extremities of the line by means of the vertical and horizontal. And also, as this is a double curve, the point at which the curvature changes from one direction to the other: point C. By drawing lines CA, CB and noting the distances 91your curves travel from these straight lines, and particularly the relative position of the farthest points reached, their curvature can be accurately observed and copied. In noting the varying curvature of forms, this construction should always be in your mind to enable you to observe them accurately. First note the points at which the curvature begins and ends, and then the distances it travels from a line joining these two points, holding up a pencil or knitting-needle against the model if need be.

There’s another construction method that helps accurately capture the shape of a curved line, as shown in Fig. Y, page 87 [Transcribers Note: Diagram IV]. Start by establishing the positions of the endpoints of the line using the vertical and horizontal axes. Since this is a double curve, you also need to identify the point where the curvature shifts direction: point C. By drawing lines CA and CB and measuring the distances 91 your curves extend from these straight lines, especially the relative positions of the farthest points reached, you can accurately observe and replicate their curvature. When studying the varying curvature of forms, keep this construction in mind to help you observe them precisely. First, identify the points where the curvature starts and ends, then measure how far it extends from a line connecting these two points, using a pencil or knitting-needle against the model if necessary.

Plate XVIII. STUDY ILLUSTRATING METHOD OF DRAWING Note the different stages. 1st. Centre line and transverse lines for settling position of salient points. 2nd. Blocking in, as shown in further leg. 3rd. Drawing in the forms and shading, as shown in front leg. 4th. Rubbing with fingers (giving a faint middle tone over the whole), and picking out high lights with bread, as shown on back and arms.

Plate XVIII.

Plate 18.

STUDY ILLUSTRATING METHOD OF DRAWING

Study on Drawing Techniques

Note the different stages. 1st. Centre line and transverse lines for settling position of salient points. 2nd. Blocking in, as shown in further leg. 3rd. Drawing in the forms and shading, as shown in front leg. 4th. Rubbing with fingers (giving a faint middle tone over the whole), and picking out high lights with bread, as shown on back and arms.

Note the different stages. 1st. Center line and cross lines for determining the position of key points. 2nd. Blocking in, as shown in the front leg. 3rd. Outlining the shapes and shading, as shown in the front leg. 4th. Rubbing with fingers (creating a light middle tone overall) and highlighting with bread, as shown on the back and arms.


The Drawing proper.

A drawing being blocked out in such a state as the further leg and foot of our demonstration drawing (page 90 [Transcribers Note: Plate XVIII]), it is time to begin the drawing proper. So far you have only been pegging out the ground it is going to occupy. This initial scaffolding, so necessary to train the eye, should be done as accurately as possible, but don't let it interfere with your freedom in expressing the forms afterwards. The work up to this point has been mechanical, but it is time to consider the subject with some feeling for form. Here knowledge of the structure of bones and muscles that underlie the skin will help you to seize on those things that are significant and express the form of the figure. And the student cannot do better than study the excellent book by Sir Alfred D. Fripp on this subject, entitled Human Anatomy for Art Students. Notice particularly the swing of the action, such things as the pull occasioned by the arm resting on the farther thigh, and the prominence given to the forms by the straining of the skin at the shoulder. Also the firm lines of the bent back and the crumpled forms of the front of the body. Notice the overlapping of the con92tours, and where they are accentuated and where more lost, &c., drawing with as much feeling and conviction as you are capable of. You will have for some time to work tentatively, feeling for the true shapes that you do not yet rightly see, but as soon as you feel any confidence, remember it should be your aim to express yourself freely and swiftly.

A drawing being laid out like the lower leg and foot in our example drawing (page 90 [Transcribers Note: Plate XVIII]), it’s time to start the actual drawing. Up to now, you’ve only been outlining the space it will take up. This foundational work, which is crucial for training your eye, should be done as accurately as possible, but don’t let it restrict your freedom to express the forms later on. The work so far has been mechanical, but now you need to engage with the subject by considering the forms. Understanding the structures of bones and muscles under the skin will help you focus on what’s important and convey the figure's shape. Students would benefit from studying the great book by Sir Alfred D. Fripp, titled Human Anatomy for Art Students. Pay special attention to the movement of the figure, such as the tension from the arm resting on the opposite thigh and the emphasis on the shapes created by the skin stretching at the shoulder. Also observe the strong lines of the bent back and the folded forms at the front of the body. Look at how the contours overlap and where they stand out or fade away, drawing with as much feeling and conviction as you can. For a while, you’ll need to work tentatively, searching for the true shapes that you don’t yet clearly see, but as soon as you feel any confidence, remember your goal is to express yourself openly and quickly.

There is a tendency in some quarters to discourage this blocking in of the forms in straight lines, and certainly it has been harmful to the freedom of expression in the work of some students. They not only begin the drawing with this mechanical blocking in, but continue it in the same mechanical fashion, cutting up almost all their curves into flatnesses, and never once breaking free from this scaffolding to indulge in the enjoyment of free line expression. This, of course, is bad, and yet the character of a curved line is hardly to be accurately studied in any other way than by observing its relation to straight lines. The inclination and length of straight lines can be observed with certainty. But a curve has not this definiteness, and is a very unstable thing to set about copying unaided. Who but the highly skilled draughtsman could attempt to copy our random shape at Fig. X, page 87 [Transcribers Note: Diagram IV], without any guiding straight lines? And even the highly skilled draughtsman would draw such straight lines mentally. So that some blocking out of the curved forms, either done practically or in imagination, must be adopted to rightly observe any shapes. But do not forget that this is only a scaffolding, and should always be regarded as such and kicked away as soon as real form expression with any feeling begins.

There’s a tendency in some circles to discourage the use of blocking in forms with straight lines, and it has definitely harmed the freedom of expression in the work of some students. They start the drawing with this mechanical blocking in and continue doing it in the same mechanical way, breaking almost all their curves into flat shapes, never once breaking free from this framework to enjoy free line expression. This is obviously not good, yet the nature of a curved line can only really be understood by looking at how it relates to straight lines. The angle and length of straight lines can be observed clearly. But a curve doesn’t have that kind of clarity and is quite unstable to copy without help. Who, except for a highly skilled draftsman, could try to copy our random shape in Fig. X, page 87 [Transcribers Note: Diagram IV], without any guiding straight lines? Even the highly skilled draftsman would use straight lines mentally. So, some form of blocking out the curved shapes, whether done practically or imagined, must be used to accurately observe any shapes. But remember, this is just a framework, and it should always be seen as such and discarded as soon as real form expression with any feeling starts.

93But it will be some years before the beginner has got his eye trained to such accuracy of observation that he can dispense with it.

93But it will take a few years before the beginner has developed the observational skills needed to no longer rely on it.

In Blocking-in observe Shape of the Background as much as the Object.

In the case of foreshortenings, the eye, unaided by this blocking out, is always apt to be led astray. And here the observation of the shape of the background against the object will be of great assistance. The appearance of the foreshortened object is so unlike what you know it to be as a solid thing, that much as it is as well to concentrate the attention on the background rather than on the form in this blocking-out process. And in fact, in blocking out any object, whether foreshortened or not, the shape of the background should be observed as carefully as any other shape. But in making the drawing proper, the forms must be observed in their inner relations. That is to say, the lines bounding one side of a form must be observed in relation to the lines bounding the other side; as the true expression of form, which is the object of drawing, depends on the true relationship of these boundaries. The drawing of the two sides should be carried on simultaneously, so that one may constantly compare them.

In the case of foreshortening, the eye, without help in blocking it out, can easily get confused. Observing the background shape against the object will be really helpful here. The look of a foreshortened object is so different from what you know it to be as a solid item that it’s better to focus on the background instead of the form during this blocking-out process. In fact, when blocking out any object, whether it’s foreshortened or not, you should pay as much attention to the shape of the background as you do to any other shape. However, when making the actual drawing, you need to observe the forms in their inner relationships. This means that the lines on one side of a form must be watched in relation to the lines on the other side, as the true expression of form—what you aim to capture in your drawing—depends on the accurate relationship of these boundaries. You should work on drawing both sides at the same time so you can keep comparing them.

Boundaries a series of Overlappings.

The boundaries of forms with any complexity, such as the human figure, are not continuous lines. One form overlaps another, like the lines of a range of hills. And this overlapping should be sought for and carefully expressed, the outlines being made up of a series of overlappings.

The edges of complex shapes, like the human figure, aren’t smooth lines. One shape overlaps another, similar to the lines of a series of hills. This overlapping should be explored and clearly expressed, with the outlines created by a series of overlaps.

Shading.

In Line Drawing shading should only be used to aid the expression of form. It is not advisable to aim at representing the true tone values.

In line drawing, shading should only be used to enhance the expression of form. It’s not a good idea to focus on depicting the actual tone values.

94In direct light it will be observed that a solid object has some portion of its surface in light, while other portions, those turned away from the light, are in shadow. Shadows are also cast on the ground and surrounding objects, called cast shadows. The parts of an object reflecting the most direct light are called the high lights. If the object have a shiny surface these lights are clear and distinct; if a dull surface, soft and diffused. In the case of a very shiny surface, such as a glazed pot, the light may be reflected so completely that a picture of the source of light, usually a window, will be seen.

94In bright light, you will notice that a solid object has some areas that are lit up, while other areas, those facing away from the light, are in shadow. Shadows are also cast on the ground and nearby objects, known as cast shadows. The parts of an object that reflect the most direct light are referred to as highlights. If the object has a shiny surface, these highlights are sharp and clear; if it has a dull surface, they are soft and diffused. In the case of a very shiny surface, like a glazed pot, the light may be reflected so well that you can see a picture of the light source, usually a window.

In the diagram on page 95 [Transcribers Note: Diagram V], let A represent the plan of a cone, B C the opening of a window, and D the eye of the spectator, and E F G the wall of a room. Light travels in straight lines from the window, strikes the surface of the cone, and is reflected to the eye, making the angle of incidence equal to the angle of reflection, the angle of incidence being that made by the light striking an object, and the angle of reflection that made by the light in leaving the surface.

In the diagram on page 95 [Transcribers Note: Diagram V], let A stand for the shape of a cone, B C for the window opening, D for the viewer's eye, and E F G for the wall of a room. Light moves in straight lines from the window, hits the surface of the cone, and reflects back to the eye, with the angle at which the light hits the surface equal to the angle at which it leaves, where the angle of incidence is the angle formed by the incoming light and the angle of reflection is the angle formed by the outgoing light.

It will be seen that the lines B1D, C2D are the limits of the direct rays of light that come to the eye from the cone, and that therefore between points 1 and 2 will be seen the highest light. If the cone have a perfect reflecting surface, such as a looking-glass has, this would be all the direct light that would be reflected from the cone to the eye. But assuming it to have what is called a dull surface, light would be reflected from other parts also, although not in so great a quantity. If what is called a dull surface is looked at under a microscope it will be found to be quite rough, 96i.e. made up of many facets which catch light at different angles.

It will be clear that the lines B1D and C2D mark the boundaries of the direct rays of light that reach the eye from the cone, meaning that between points 1 and 2, the brightest light will be visible. If the cone has a perfectly reflective surface, like a mirror, this would be all the direct light that would bounce off the cone to the eye. However, if it has what is known as a dull surface, light would reflect from other areas as well, though not as much. When viewed under a microscope, a dull surface appears quite rough, 96i.e. made up of many facets that catch light at different angles.

Diagram V. PLAN OF CONE A, LIT BY WINDOW BC; POSITION OF EYE D. ILLUSTRATING PRINCIPLES OF LIGHT AND SHADE

Diagram V.

Diagram V.

PLAN OF CONE A, LIT BY WINDOW BC; POSITION OF EYE D. ILLUSTRATING PRINCIPLES OF LIGHT AND SHADE

PLAN OF CONE A, LIT BY WINDOW BC; POSITION OF EYE D. ILLUSTRATING PRINCIPLES OF LIGHT AND SHADE

Lines B4, C3 represent the extreme limits of light that can be received by the cone, and therefore at points 3 and 4 the shadow will commence. The fact that light is reflected to the eye right up to the point 3 does not upset the theory that it can only be reflected from points where the angle of incidence can equal the angle of reflection, as it would seem to do, because the surface being rough presents facets at different angles, from some of which it can be reflected to the eye right up to point 3. The number of these facets that can so reflect is naturally greatest near the high lights, and gets gradually less as the surface turns more away; until the point is reached where the shadows begin, at which point the surface positively turns away from the light and the reflection of direct light ceases altogether. After point 3 there would be no light coming to the eye from the object, were it not that it receives reflected light. Now, the greatest amount of reflected light will come from the direction opposite to that of the direct light, as all objects in this direction are strongly lit. The surface of the wall between points E and H, being directly opposite the light, will give most reflection. And between points 5 and 6 this light will be reflected by the cone to the eye in its greatest intensity, since at these points the angles of incidence equal the angles of reflection. The other parts of the shadow will receive a certain amount of reflected light, lessening in amount on either side of these points. We have now rays of light coming to the eye from the cone between the extreme points 7 and 8. From 7 to 3 we have 97the light, including the half tones. Between 1 and 2 the high light. Between 3 and 8 the shadows, with the greatest amount of reflected light between 5 and 6.

Lines B4, C3 mark the outer limits of light that can be captured by the cone, and so at points 3 and 4, the shadow will start. The fact that light is reflected to the eye right up to point 3 doesn’t contradict the theory that it can only be reflected from points where the angle of incidence equals the angle of reflection, even though it might seem that way, because the rough surface has facets at different angles, some of which can reflect light to the eye up to point 3. The number of these facets that can reflect is naturally highest near the highlights and decreases gradually as the surface turns away, until the point is reached where the shadows begin, at which point the surface definitely turns away from the light and direct light reflection ceases completely. After point 3, there would be no light reaching the eye from the object, were it not for the reflected light. The most reflected light will come from the direction opposite to that of the direct light since all objects in that direction are well illuminated. The wall surface between points E and H, being directly opposite the light, will provide the most reflection. Between points 5 and 6, this light will be reflected by the cone to the eye at its greatest intensity, as at these points the angles of incidence equal the angles of reflection. Other parts of the shadow will receive some reflected light, which decreases on either side of these points. Now we have rays of light reaching the eye from the cone between the outer points 7 and 8. From 7 to 3 we have 97 the light, including the mid-tones. Between 1 and 2 are the highlights. Between 3 and 8 are the shadows, with the most reflected light occurring between 5 and 6.

Plate XIX. ILLUSTRATING CURVED LINKS SUGGESTING FULLNESS AND FORESHORTENING

Plate XIX.

Plate 19.

ILLUSTRATING CURVED LINKS SUGGESTING FULLNESS AND FORESHORTENING

ILLUSTRATING CURVED LINKS SUGGESTING FULLNESS AND FORESHORTENING

I should not have troubled the reader with this tedious diagram were it not that certain facts about light and shade can be learned from it. The first is that the high lights come much more within the edge of the object than you would have expected. With the light directly opposite point 7, one might have thought the highest light would have come there, and that is where many students put it, until the loss of roundness in the appearance of their work makes them look more carefully for its position. So remember always to look out for high lights within the contours of forms, not on the edges.

I shouldn’t have bothered the reader with this boring diagram if it didn’t teach some important things about light and shadow. The first takeaway is that highlights are usually much closer to the edge of the object than you might think. When the light is directly across from point 7, you might assume the brightest highlight would be there, which is where many students place it. However, this often leads to a flat appearance in their work, prompting them to examine its position more closely. So always remember to look for highlights within the shapes of forms, not just on the edges.

The next thing to notice is that the darkest part of the shadow will come nearest the lights between points 3 and 5. This is the part turned most away from the direction of the greatest amount of reflected light, and therefore receiving least. The lightest part of the shadow will be in the middle, rather towards the side away from the light, generally speaking. The shadow cast on the ground will be dark, like the darkest part of the shadow on the cone, as its surface is also turned away from the chief source of reflected light.

The next thing to notice is that the darkest part of the shadow will be closest to the lights between points 3 and 5. This area is turned the most away from the direction of the most reflected light, so it receives the least light. The lightest part of the shadow will be in the middle, generally leaning towards the side away from the light. The shadow on the ground will be dark, similar to the darkest part of the shadow on the cone, as its surface is also turned away from the main source of reflected light.

Although the artist will very seldom be called upon to draw a cone, the same principles of light and shade that are so clearly seen in such a simple figure obtain throughout the whole of nature. This is why the much abused drawing and shading from whitened blocks and pots is so useful. Nothing so clearly impresses the general laws of light and shade as this so-called dull study.

Although artists are rarely asked to draw a cone, the same principles of light and shadow that are evident in this simple shape apply throughout all of nature. This is why the often criticized practice of drawing and shading from white blocks and pots is so valuable. Nothing illustrates the general laws of light and shade as clearly as this so-called dull study.

98This lightening of shadows in the middle by reflected light and darkening towards their edges is a very important thing to remember, the heavy, smoky look students' early work is so prone to, being almost entirely due to their neglect through ignorance of this principle. Nothing is more awful than shadows darker in the middle and gradually lighter towards their edges. Of course, where there is a deep hollow in the shadow parts, as at the armpit and the fold at the navel in the drawing on page 90 [Transcribers Note: Plate XVIII], you will get a darker tone. But this does not contradict the principle that generally shadows are lighter in the middle and darker towards the edges. Note the luminous quality the observation of this principle gives the shadow on the body of our demonstration drawing.

98This lightening of shadows in the center by reflected light and darkening towards the edges is really important to keep in mind. The heavy, smoky appearance that students often have in their early work is mainly because they ignore this principle. Nothing is worse than shadows that are darker in the center and gradually lighter towards the edges. Of course, in places where there are deep hollows in the shadow areas, like at the armpit and the fold at the navel in the drawing on page 90 [Transcribers Note: Plate XVIII], you will see a darker tone. But this doesn't go against the principle that, generally speaking, shadows are lighter in the center and darker towards the edges. Notice the luminous quality that observing this principle brings to the shadow on the body of our demonstration drawing.

This is a crude statement of the general principles of light and shade on a simple round object. In one with complex surfaces the varieties of light and shade are infinite. But the same principles hold good. The surfaces turned more to the source of light receive the greatest amount, and are the lightest. And from these parts the amount of light lessens through what are called the half tones as the surface turns more away, until a point is reached where no more direct light is received, and the shadows begin. And in the shadows the same law applies: those surfaces turned most towards the source of reflected light will receive the most, and the amount received will gradually lessen as the surface turns away, until at the point immediately before where the half tones begin the amount of reflected light will be very little, and in consequence the darkest part of the shadows may be looked for. There may, of course, be other sources of direct 99light on the shadow side that will entirely alter and complicate the effect. Or one may draw in a wide, diffused light, such as is found in the open air on a grey day; in which case there will be little or no shadow, the modelling depending entirely on degrees of light and half tone.

This is a basic explanation of the general principles of light and shadow on a simple round object. On an object with complex surfaces, the variations of light and shadow are limitless. However, the same principles apply. The surfaces that face the light source receive the most light and are the brightest. From these areas, the amount of light decreases through what are known as half tones as the surface turns away, until it reaches a point where no direct light hits, and shadows begin. In the shadows, the same rule applies: surfaces that are most oriented towards the source of reflected light will receive the most illumination, and this will gradually decrease as the surface turns away, until just before the half tones start, where the amount of reflected light is minimal, resulting in the darkest parts of the shadows. There may, of course, be other sources of direct 99light on the shadowed side that can completely change and complicate the effect. Alternatively, one could use a broad, diffused light, like what you find in open air on a gray day; in this case, there would be little or no shadow, with the modeling relying solely on varying degrees of light and half tone.

In studying the principles of simple light and shade it is advisable to draw from objects of one local colour, such as white casts. In parti-coloured objects the problem is complicated by the different tones of the local colour. In line drawing it is as well to take as little notice as possible of these variations which disturb the contemplation of pure form and do not belong to the particular province of form expression with which drawing is concerned.

When studying the principles of simple light and shadow, it's helpful to draw from objects of a single local color, like white casts. In multi-colored objects, the issue becomes complicated due to the different tones of the local color. In line drawing, it's best to pay little attention to these variations, as they distract from the appreciation of pure form and don't pertain to the specific area of expression that drawing focuses on.

Although one has selected a strong half light and half shade effect to illustrate the general principles of light and shade, it is not advisable in making line drawings to select such a position. A point of view with a fairly wide light at your back is the best. In this position little shadow will be seen, most of the forms being expressed by the play of light and half tone. The contours, as they are turned away from the light, will naturally be darker, and against a light background your subject has an appearance with dark edges that is easily expressed by a line drawing. Strong light and shade effects should be left for mass drawing. You seldom see any shadows in Holbein's drawings; he seems to have put his sitters near a wide window, close against which he worked. Select also a background as near the tone of the highest light on the object to be drawn as possible. This will show up clearly the contour. In the case of a portrait drawing, a newspaper hung behind the head answers very well and 100is always easily obtained. The tone of it can be varied by the distance at which it is placed from the head, and by the angle at which it is turned away from or towards the light.

Although a strong half light and half shade effect has been chosen to illustrate the general principles of light and shade, it’s not a good idea to select such a position for line drawings. A viewpoint with a broad light behind you is the best option. In this position, little shadow will be visible, as most forms are defined by the play of light and half tone. The contours, as they turn away from the light, will naturally appear darker, and against a light background, your subject will have a look with dark edges that can be easily captured in a line drawing. Strong contrasts of light and shade should be reserved for mass drawing. You rarely see shadows in Holbein's drawings; he seems to have placed his sitters near a wide window, close to which he worked. Choose a background that matches the tone of the brightest light on the object being drawn as closely as possible. This will make the contour stand out clearly. For portrait drawings, a newspaper hung behind the head works very well and 100 is always easy to get. The tone can be adjusted by changing the distance from the head and the angle at which it is turned relative to the light.

Don't burden a line drawing with heavy half tones and shadows; keep them light. The beauty that is the particular province of line drawing is the beauty of contours, and this is marred by heavy light and shade. Great draughtsmen use only just enough to express the form, but never to attempt the expression of tone. Think of the half tones as part of the lights and not as part of the shadows.

Don't overload a line drawing with heavy shading and shadows; keep them light. The beauty unique to line drawing comes from the beauty of contours, and this is ruined by heavy light and shade. Great draftsmen use just enough to show the form, but never to convey tone. Think of the shading as part of the highlights and not part of the shadows.

There are many different methods of drawing in line, and a student of any originality will find one that suits his temperament. But I will try and illustrate one that is at any rate logical, and that may serve as a fair type of line drawing generally.

There are many different ways to draw in line, and any creative student will find one that matches their personality. But I will try to show one that is at least logical and can serve as a good example of line drawing overall.

The appearance of an object is first considered as a series of contours, some forming the boundaries of the form against the background, and others the boundaries of the subordinate forms within these bounding lines. The light and shade and differences of local colour (like the lips, eyebrows, and eyes in a head) are considered together as tones of varying degrees of lightness and darkness, and suggested by means of lines drawn parallel across the drawing from left to right, and from below upwards, or vice versa, darker and closer together when depth is wanted, and fainter and further apart where delicacy is demanded, and varying in thickness when gradation is needed. This rule of parallel shading is broken only when strongly marked forms, such as the swing lines of hair, a prominent bone or straining muscles, &c., demand it. This parallel shading gives a great beauty of 101surface and fleshiness to a drawing. The lines following, as it were, the direction of the light across the object rather than the form, give a unity that has a great charm. It is more suited to drawings where extreme delicacy of form is desired, and is usually used in silver point work, a medium capable of the utmost refinement.

The look of an object starts as a series of outlines, some creating the edges of the shape against the background, and others outlining the smaller shapes within these boundaries. The light and shadows, along with differences in local color (like the lips, eyebrows, and eyes on a face), are seen together as tones with varying degrees of lightness and darkness. This is represented using lines drawn parallel across the drawing from left to right, and from bottom to top, or the other way around, with darker lines placed closer together where more depth is needed, and lighter lines spaced further apart where a delicate touch is required, adjusting the thickness when gradation is necessary. This technique of parallel shading is only set aside when strong features, such as the flowing lines of hair, a prominent bone, or straining muscles, require it. This parallel shading brings great beauty of 101surface and fleshiness to a drawing. The lines mimic the direction of light across the object rather than just following its shape, creating a unity that is very appealing. This approach is better suited for drawings that demand extreme delicacy of form and is typically used in silverpoint work, a medium capable of the highest refinement.

Plate XX. STUDY FOR THE FIGURE OF LOVE IN THE PICTURE "LOVE LEAVING PSYCHE" ILLUSTRATING A METHOD OF DRAWING The lines of shading following a convenient parallel direction unless prominent forms demand otherwise.

Plate XX.

Plate 20.

STUDY FOR THE FIGURE OF LOVE IN THE PICTURE "LOVE LEAVING PSYCHE" ILLUSTRATING A METHOD OF DRAWING

STUDY FOR THE FIGURE OF LOVE IN THE PICTURE "LOVE LEAVING PSYCHE" ILLUSTRATING A METHOD OF DRAWING

The lines of shading following a convenient parallel direction unless prominent forms demand otherwise.

The lines of shading follow a convenient parallel direction unless prominent shapes require a different approach.

In this method the lines of shading not being much varied in direction or curved at all, a minimum amount of that "form stimulus" is conveyed. The curving of the lines in shading adds considerably to the force of the relief, and suggests much stronger modelling. In the case of foreshortened effects, where the forms are seen at their fullest, arching one over the other, some curvature in the lines of shading is of considerable advantage in adding to the foreshortened look.

In this method, the shading lines don’t vary much in direction or curve at all, which conveys a minimal amount of that "form stimulus." Curving the shading lines significantly enhances the sense of relief and suggests much stronger modeling. In the case of foreshortened effects, where the forms are seen at their fullest, overlapping each other, having some curvature in the shading lines is quite beneficial for enhancing the foreshortened appearance.

Lines drawn down the forms give an appearance of great strength and toughness, a tense look. And this quality is very useful in suggesting such things as joints and sinews, rocks, hard ground, or gnarled tree-trunks, &c. In figure drawing it is an interesting quality to use sparingly, with the shading done on the across-the-form principle; and to suggest a difference of texture or a straining of the form. Lines of shading drawn in every direction, crossing each other and resolving themselves into tone effects, suggest atmosphere and the absence of surface form. This is more often used in the backgrounds of pen and ink work and is seldom necessary in pencil or chalk drawing, as they are more concerned with form than atmosphere. Pen and ink is more often used for elaborate pictorial effects in illustration work, owing to the ease with which it can be reproduced and printed; and it is 102here that one more often finds this muddled quality of line spots being used to fill up interstices and make the tone even.

Lines drawn along the forms create an impression of great strength and toughness, giving a tense appearance. This quality is particularly effective in suggesting elements like joints and sinews, rocks, hard ground, or gnarled tree trunks, etc. In figure drawing, it’s interesting to use this quality sparingly, employing shading based on the across-the-form technique to imply texture differences or a strain in the form. Shading lines drawn in various directions, overlapping and blending into tone effects, convey atmosphere and diminish surface form. This technique is more commonly found in the backgrounds of pen and ink work and is usually unnecessary in pencil or chalk drawings, which focus more on form than atmosphere. Pen and ink are often used for detailed pictorial effects in illustration because they can be easily reproduced and printed; it is 102here that we typically see this chaotic quality of line spots used to fill gaps and create a uniform tone.

Speaking generally, lines of shading drawn across the forms suggest softness, lines drawn in curves fulness of form, lines drawn down the forms hardness, and lines crossing in all directions so that only a mystery of tone results, atmosphere. And if these four qualities of line be used judiciously, a great deal of expressive power is added to your shading. And, as will be explained in the next chapter, somewhat the same principle applies to the direction of the swing of the brush in painting.

Speaking generally, lines of shading drawn across the shapes suggest softness, curved lines indicate fullness of shape, straight lines show hardness, and lines crossing in all directions create a mysterious tone, or atmosphere. If you use these four qualities of line wisely, you'll add a lot of expressive power to your shading. As will be explained in the next chapter, a similar principle applies to the direction of the brush strokes in painting.

Shading lines should never be drawn backwards and forwards from left to right (scribbled), except possibly where a mystery of shadow is wanted and the lines are being crossed in every direction; but never when lines are being used to express form. They are not sufficiently under control, and also the little extra thickness that occurs at the turn is a nuisance.

Shading lines should never be drawn back and forth from left to right (scribbled), except maybe when creating an effect of shadow where the lines cross in every direction; but never when lines are used to convey form. They aren't controlled enough, and the slight extra thickness that happens at the turns is annoying.

The crossing of lines in shading gives a more opaque look. This is useful to suggest the opaque appearance of the darker passage that occurs in that part of a shadow nearest the lights; and it is sometimes used in the half tones also.

The crossed lines in shading create a denser look. This is helpful for illustrating the solid appearance of the darker areas in a shadow closest to the light; it's also sometimes applied in the midtones.

Draughtsmen vary very much in their treatment of hair, and different qualities of hair require different treatment. The particular beauty of it that belongs to point drawing is the swing and flow of its lines. These are especially apparent in the lights. In the shadows the flow of line often stops, to be replaced by a mystery of shadow. So that a play of swinging lines alternating with shadow passages, drawn like all the other shadows 103with parallel lines not following the form, is often effective, and suggests the quality of hair in nature. The swinging lines should vary in thickness along their course, getting darker as they pass certain parts, and gradating into lighter lines at other parts according to the effect desired. (See illustration, page 102 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXI].)

Artists differ greatly in how they depict hair, and various types of hair require different approaches. The unique beauty of point drawing lies in the movement and flow of its lines. This is especially noticeable in the highlights. In the shadows, the flow often stops, giving way to a sense of mystery. Thus, a contrast of flowing lines mixed with shadow areas, drawn like all other shadows 103 with parallel lines that don't conform to the shape, can be quite effective and evoke the natural quality of hair. The flowing lines should change in thickness along their length, becoming darker in certain areas and fading into lighter lines in others, depending on the desired effect. (See illustration, page 102 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXI].)

Plate XXI. STUDY IN RED CHALK Illustrating a treatment of hair in line-work.

Plate XXI.

Plate 21.

STUDY IN RED CHALK

STUDY WITH RED CHALK

Illustrating a treatment of hair in line-work.

Illustrating a hair treatment using line art.

To sum up, in the method of line drawing we are trying to explain (the method employed for most of the drawings by the author in this book) the lines of shading are made parallel in a direction that comes easy to the hand, unless some quality in the form suggests their following other directions. So that when you are in doubt as to what direction they should follow, draw them on the parallel principle. This preserves a unity in your work, and allows the lines drawn in other directions for special reasons to tell expressively.

To sum up, in the line drawing method we’re explaining (the technique used for most of the drawings by the author in this book), the shading lines are drawn parallel in a direction that feels comfortable for your hand, unless the shape suggests a different direction. So when you're unsure about the direction they should go, stick to drawing them parallel. This keeps your work cohesive and lets any lines drawn in other directions for specific reasons stand out more effectively.

As has already been explained, it is not sufficient in drawing to concentrate the attention on copying accurately the visual appearance of anything, important as the faculty of accurate observation is. Form to be expressed must first be appreciated. And here the science of teaching fails. "You can take a horse to the fountain, but you cannot make him drink," and in art you can take the student to the point of view from which things are to be appreciated, but you cannot make him see. How, then, is this appreciation of form to be developed? Simply by feeding. Familiarise yourself with all the best examples of drawing you can find, trying to see in nature the same qualities. Study the splendid drawing by Puvis de Chavannes reproduced on page 104 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXII]. Note the way the contours have been searched for expressive qualities. Look how 104the expressive line of the back of the seated figure has been "felt," the powerful expression of the upraised arm with its right angle (see later page 155 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XII], chapter on line rhythm). And then observe the different types of the two standing figures; the practical vigour of the one and the soft grace of the other, and how their contours have been studied to express this feeling, &c. There is a mine of knowledge to be unearthed in this drawing.

As already mentioned, just focusing on accurately copying what you see isn’t enough in drawing, even though being able to observe well is important. To convey form, you must first truly appreciate it. This is where teaching often falls short. "You can take a horse to the fountain, but you can't make it drink," and similarly, in art, you can guide a student to the right perspective, but you can't make them see it. So, how can this appreciation for form be developed? Simply by exposure. Get familiar with the best examples of drawing you can find, attempting to see the same qualities in nature. Study the amazing drawing by Puvis de Chavannes on page 104 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXII]. Notice how the outlines have been explored for their expressive qualities. Observe how 104 the expressive line of the back of the seated figure has been "felt," and the strong expression of the raised arm with its right angle (see later page 155 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XII], chapter on line rhythm). And then look at the different types of the two standing figures; one has a practical vigor, while the other displays soft grace, and see how their outlines have been studied to convey this feeling, etc. There's a wealth of knowledge to be discovered in this drawing.

There never was an age when such an amount of artistic food was at the disposal of students. Cheap means of reproduction have brought the treasures of the world's galleries and collections to our very doors in convenient forms for a few pence. The danger is not from starvation, but indigestion. Students are so surfeited with good things that they often fail to digest any of them; but rush on from one example to another, taking but snapshot views of what is offered, until their natural powers of appreciation are in a perfect whirlwind of confused ideas. What then is to be done? You cannot avoid the good things that are hurled at you in these days, but when you come across anything that strikes you as being a particularly fine thing, feed deeply on it. Hang it up where you will see it constantly; in your bedroom, for instance, where it will entertain your sleepless hours, if you are unfortunate enough to have any. You will probably like very indifferent drawings at first, the pretty, the picturesque and the tricky will possibly attract before the sublimity of finer things. But be quite honest and feed on the best that you genuinely like, and when you have thoroughly digested and comprehended that, you will weary of it and long for something better, and so, gradually, 105be led on to appreciate the best you are capable of appreciating.

There has never been a time when students had access to such a wealth of artistic resources. Affordable methods of reproduction have brought the treasures of the world’s galleries and collections right to our doorsteps for just a few cents. The problem isn’t starving for art, but rather getting overwhelmed by it. Students often experience so much great content that they struggle to fully appreciate any of it; they jump from one piece to another, getting only quick glimpses of what’s available, leaving their natural ability to appreciate art in a chaotic state. So what should you do? You can’t escape the abundance of great art that surrounds you today, but when you find something that really resonates with you, immerse yourself in it. Display it where you’ll see it often, like in your bedroom, especially during those sleepless nights, if you happen to have them. At first, you might be drawn to mediocre drawings; the beautiful, picturesque, and clever might catch your eye before the deeper qualities of more profound works. But be honest with yourself and indulge in the best that you genuinely enjoy. Once you’ve fully absorbed and understood that, you’ll likely grow tired of it and crave something greater, and gradually, 105you’ll be led to appreciate the best that you are capable of appreciating.

Plate XXII. STUDY FOR DECORATION AT AMIENS "REPOSE" BY PEUVIS DE CHAVANNES Note how the contours are searched for expressive forms, the power given to the seated figure by the right angle of the raised arm, and the contrast between the upright vigour of the right-hand figure with the softer lines of the middle one. Photo Neurdein

Plate XXII.

Plate XXII.

STUDY FOR DECORATION AT AMIENS "REPOSE" BY PEUVIS DE CHAVANNES

STUDY FOR DECORATION AT AMIENS "REST" BY PEUVIS DE CHAVANNES

Note how the contours are searched for expressive forms, the power given to the seated figure by the right angle of the raised arm, and the contrast between the upright vigour of the right-hand figure with the softer lines of the middle one.

Note how the shapes are explored for expressive forms, the strength given to the seated figure by the right angle of the raised arm, and the contrast between the upright energy of the right-hand figure and the softer lines of the middle one.

Photo Neurdein

Neurdein Photo

Before closing this chapter there are one or two points connected with the drawing of a head that might be mentioned, as students are not always sufficiently on the look out for them.

Before wrapping up this chapter, there are a couple of points related to drawing a head that should be mentioned, as students often don't pay enough attention to them.

In our diagram on page 107 [Transcribers Note: Diagram VI], let Fig. 1 represent a normal eye. At Fig. 2 we have removed the skin and muscles and exposed the two main structural features in the form of the eye, namely the bony ring of the socket and the globe containing the lenses and retina. Examining this opening, we find from A to B that it runs smoothly into the bony prominence at the top of the nose, and that the rest of the edge is sharp, and from point C to E quite free. It is at point A, starting from a little hole, that the sharp edge begins; and near this point the corner of the eye is situated: A, Figs. 1, 2, 3. From points A to F the bony edge of the opening is very near the surface and should be looked for.

In our diagram on page 107 [Transcribers Note: Diagram VI], let Figure 1 show a normal eye. In Figure 2, we have removed the skin and muscles to reveal the two main structural parts of the eye: the bony ring of the socket and the globe that contains the lenses and retina. Looking at this opening, we see that from A to B it smoothly connects to the bony bump at the top of the nose, while the rest of the edge is sharp, and from point C to E, it’s fairly clear. Point A starts from a small hole where the sharp edge begins, and near this point is the corner of the eye: A, Figures 1, 2, 3. From points A to F, the bony edge of the opening is very close to the surface and should be identified.

The next thing to note is the fact that the eyebrow at first follows the upper edge of the bony opening from B to C, but that from point C it crosses the free arch between C and D and soon ends. So that considering the under side of the eyebrow, whereas from point C towards B there is usually a cavernous hollow, from C towards D there is a prominence. The character of eyes varies greatly, and this effect is often modified by the fleshy fulness that fills in the space between the eyelid and the brow, but some indication of a change is almost always to be observed at a point somewhere about C, and should be looked out for. Any bony prominence from this point towards D 106should be carefully constructed. Look out for the bone, therefore, between the points CD and AF.

The next thing to note is that the eyebrow initially follows the upper edge of the bony opening from B to C, but from point C, it crosses the free arch between C and D and quickly ends. Considering the underside of the eyebrow, while there is usually a deep hollow from point C towards B, there is a bump from C towards D. The shape of the eyes varies widely, and this effect is often influenced by the fleshy fullness that fills the space between the eyelid and the brow, but there is almost always some sign of a change around point C that should be noted. Any bony prominence from this point towards D 106 should be carefully formed. Therefore, pay attention to the bone between points CD and AF.

Never forget when painting an eye that what we call the white of the eye is part of a sphere and will therefore have the light and shade of a sphere. It will seldom be the same tone all over; if the light is coming from the right, it will be in shade towards the left and vice versa. Also the eyelids are bands of flesh placed on this spherical surface. They will therefore partake of the modelling of the sphere and not be the same tone all across. Note particularly the sudden change of plane usually marked by a fold, where the under eyelid meets the surface coming from the cheek bone. The neglect to construct these planes of the under eyelid is a very common fault in poorly painted eyes. Note also where the upper eyelid comes against the flesh under the eyebrow (usually a strongly marked fold) and the differences of planes that occur at this juncture. In some eyes, when there is little loose flesh above the eyelid, there is a deep hollow here, the eyelid running up under the bony prominence, C D. This is an important structural line, marking as it does the limit of the spherical surface of the eyeball, on which surface the eyelids are placed.

Never forget when painting an eye that what we call the white of the eye is part of a sphere and will therefore have light and shadow like a sphere. It will rarely be the same tone all over; if the light is coming from the right, it will be shaded on the left and vice versa. Also, the eyelids are strips of flesh resting on this spherical surface. They will reflect the shape of the sphere and won't be the same tone everywhere. Pay special attention to the sudden change of angle usually marked by a fold, where the lower eyelid meets the area coming from the cheekbone. Ignoring these angles of the lower eyelid is a very common mistake in poorly painted eyes. Also observe where the upper eyelid meets the flesh under the eyebrow (usually a prominent fold) and the differences in angles that happen at this point. In some eyes, when there's little loose flesh above the eyelid, there’s a deep hollow here, with the eyelid rising underneath the bony prominence, C D. This is an important structural line, marking the boundary of the spherical surface of the eyeball, on which the eyelids rest.

Fig. 4 is a rough diagram of the direction it is usual for the hairs forming the eyebrow to take. From A a few scant hairs start radiating above the nose and quite suddenly reach their thickest and strongest growth between B and E. They continue, still following a slightly radiating course until D. These hairs are now met by another lot, starting from above downwards, and growing from. B to C. An eyebrow is considered by the draughtsman 108 as a tone of a certain shape and qualities of edge. And what interests us here is to note the effect of this order of growth upon its appearance as tone. The meeting of the strong growth of hair upwards with the downward growth between points B and E creates what is usually the darkest part of the eyebrow at this point. And the coming together of the hairs towards D often makes another dark part in this direction. The edge from C to B is nearly always a soft one, the tone melting into the flesh, and this should be looked out for, giving as it does a pretty variety to the run of the line. Another thing that tends to make this edge soft is the fact that a bony prominence is situated here and has usually a high light upon it that crosses the eyebrow. From C to D you usually find a sharper edge, the hairs running parallel to the line of the eyebrow, while from D to B and A to B a softer boundary can be looked for. The chief accent will generally be found at B, where a dark mass often comes sharply against the tone of the forehead.

Fig. 4 is a basic diagram showing the typical direction of eyebrow hairs. From A, a few sparse hairs begin to grow above the nose and quickly reach their thickest and strongest growth between B and E. They continue along a slightly spreading path until D. At this point, they collide with another group of hairs that grow downward from B to C. An eyebrow is seen by the artist 108 as a shape with specific qualities at its edge. What we should notice here is how this growth pattern affects its tone. The combination of the thick upward growth with the downward hairs between points B and E usually creates the darkest part of the eyebrow at this location. The convergence of hairs toward D often results in another dark area in that direction. The edge from C to B is generally soft, with the tone blending into the skin, which provides a nice variety to the line's shape. Another factor that softens this edge is the bony prominence located here, which typically has a highlight that crosses the eyebrow. From C to D, you'll usually find a sharper edge, with hairs aligning parallel to the eyebrow line, while from D to B and A to B, a softer boundary is expected. The main emphasis is often found at B, where a dark clump sharpens against the tone of the forehead.

Diagram VI. ILLUSTRATING SOME POINTS CONNECTED WITH THE EYES NOT ALWAYS OBSERVED IN DRAWING A HEAD

Diagram VI.

Diagram 6.

ILLUSTRATING SOME POINTS CONNECTED WITH THE EYES NOT ALWAYS OBSERVED IN DRAWING A HEAD

ILLUSTRATING SOME POINTS RELATED TO THE EYES NOT ALWAYS SEEN IN DRAWING A HEAD

The eyelashes do not count for much in drawing a head, except in so far as they affect the tone impression. In the first place they shade the white of the eye when the light is above, as is usually the case. They are much thicker on the outer than on the inner side of the eyelids, and have a tendency to grow in an outward direction, so that when the light comes from the left, as is shown by arrow, Fig. 5, the white of the eye at A1 will not be much shaded, and the light tone will run nearly up to the top. But at B4, which should be the light side of this eye, the thick crop of eyelashes will shade it somewhat and the light will not 109run far up in consequence, while B3, A2 will be in the shade from the turning away from the direction of the light of the spherical surface of the whites of the eyes.

Eyelashes don't play a significant role in drawing a head, except for how they influence the overall lighting effect. First of all, they block some of the white of the eye when the light comes from above, which is usually the case. They are much thicker on the outer side than on the inner side of the eyelids and tend to grow outward. So, when the light comes from the left, as shown by the arrow in Fig. 5, the white of the eye at A1 won't be heavily shaded, and the light will extend almost to the top. However, at B4, which should be the light side of this eye, the dense eyelashes will provide some shading, preventing the light from reaching far up. Meanwhile, B3 and A2 will be shaded because they turn away from the direction of the light coming from the spherical surface of the whites of the eyes.

These may seem small points to mention, but the observance of such small points makes a great difference to the construction of a head.

These might seem like minor details, but paying attention to them really impacts how a person thinks.

Fig. 6 gives a series of blocks all exactly alike in outline, with lines showing how the different actions of the head affect the guide lines on which the features hang; and how these actions can be suggested even when the contours are not varied. These archings over should be carefully looked out for when the head is in any but a simple full face position.

Fig. 6 shows a series of blocks that are all identical in shape, with lines illustrating how the various movements of the head influence the guide lines that the features align with; and how these movements can be implied even when the outlines remain unchanged. These archings should be carefully noted when the head is in any position other than a straightforward full-face view.


110

IX
MASS DRAWING: PRACTICAL

This is the form of drawing with which painting in the oil medium is properly concerned. The distinction between drawing and painting that is sometimes made is a wrong one in so far as it conveys any idea of painting being distinct from drawing. Painting is drawing (i.e. the expression of form) with the added complication of colour and tone. And with a brush full of paint as your tool, some form of mass drawing must be adopted, so that at the same time that the student is progressing with line drawing, he should begin to accustom, himself to this other method of seeing, by attempting very simple exercises in drawing with the brush.

This is the type of drawing that's really relevant to oil painting. The distinction between drawing and painting that people sometimes make is misleading because it suggests that painting is separate from drawing. Painting is essentially drawing (i.e. the expression of form) with the added complexity of color and tone. With a brush full of paint as your tool, you need to use some kind of mass drawing approach, so while the student is working on line drawing, they should also start getting used to this different way of seeing by trying out some very simple exercises in brush drawing.

Most objects can be reduced broadly into three tone masses, the lights (including the high lights), the half tones, and the shadows. And the habit of reducing things into a simple equation of three tones as a foundation on which to build complex appearances should early be sought for.

Most objects can be generally categorized into three tone masses: the lights (including the highlights), the half tones, and the shadows. It’s important to develop the habit of simplifying things into this straightforward equation of three tones as a basis for creating more complex appearances.

Exercise in Mass Drawing.

Here is a simple exercise in mass drawing with the brush that is, as far as I know, never offered to the young student. Select a simple object: some of those casts of fruit hanging up that are common in art schools will do. Place it in a strong light and shade, preferably by artificial light, as it is not so subtle, and therefore easier; the 111light coming from either the right or left hand, but not from in front. Try and arrange it so that the tone of the ground of your cast comes about equal to the half tones in the relief.

Here’s a simple exercise in mass drawing with a brush that, as far as I know, has never been offered to young students. Choose a simple object: some of those fruit casts hanging around that are common in art schools will work. Place it in strong light and shadow, preferably using artificial light, as it’s less subtle and therefore easier; the 111light should come from either the right or left, but not from straight on. Try to arrange it so that the tone of the surface of your cast matches the half tones in the relief.

Plate XXIII. SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME PAINTING FROM A CAST IN DIFFERENT STAGES No. 1. Blocking out the shape of spaces to be occupied by masses. No. 2. A middle tone having been scumbled over the whole, the lights are now painted. Their shapes and the play of lost-and-foundness on their edges being observed. Gradations are got by thinner paint, which is mixed with the wet middle tone of the ground, and is darkened.

Plate XXIII.

Plate 23.

SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME PAINTING FROM A CAST IN DIFFERENT STAGES

SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME PAINTING FROM A CAST IN DIFFERENT STAGES

No. 1. Blocking out the shape of spaces to be occupied by masses.

No. 1. Outlining the shape of areas to be filled by masses.

No. 2. A middle tone having been scumbled over the whole, the lights are now painted. Their shapes and the play of lost-and-foundness on their edges being observed. Gradations are got by thinner paint, which is mixed with the wet middle tone of the ground, and is darkened.

No. 2. A mid-tone has been brushed over everything, and the highlights are now added. Their shapes and the way they blend in and out on the edges are noted. Gradients are created using thinner paint mixed with the wet mid-tone base, which is then darkened.

Plate XXIV. SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME PAINTING FROM A CAST IN DIFFERENT STAGES No. 3. The same as the last, with the addition of the darks; variety being got in the same way as in the case of the lights, only here the thinner part is lighter, whereas in the case of the lights it was darker. No. 4. The finished work, refinements being added and mistakes corrected.

Plate XXIV.

Plate 24.

SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME PAINTING FROM A CAST IN DIFFERENT STAGES

SET OF FOUR PHOTOS OF THE SAME PAINTING FROM A CAST IN DIFFERENT STAGES

No. 3. The same as the last, with the addition of the darks; variety being got in the same way as in the case of the lights, only here the thinner part is lighter, whereas in the case of the lights it was darker.

No. 3. The same as the last, but with the addition of the darks; variety is achieved in the same way as with the lights, except here the thinner part is lighter, while with the lights it was darker.

No. 4. The finished work, refinements being added and mistakes corrected.

No. 4. The completed work, with improvements made and errors fixed.

First draw in the outlines of the masses strongly in charcoal, noting the shapes of the shadows carefully, taking great care that you get their shapes blocked out in square lines in true proportion relative to each other, and troubling about little else. Let this be a setting out of the ground upon which you will afterwards express the form, rather than a drawing—the same scaffolding, in fact, that you were advised to do in the case of a line drawing, only, in that case, the drawing proper was to be done with a point, and in this case the drawing proper is to be done with a brush full of paint. Fix the charcoal well with a spray diffuser and the usual solution of white shellac in spirits of wine.

First, sketch the outlines of the masses boldly in charcoal, paying close attention to the shapes of the shadows. Make sure to get their forms outlined in clear, straight lines that are accurately proportioned to one another, and focus on that above all else. Think of this as laying the foundation for the final form rather than a complete drawing—the same scaffolding you were told to use for a line drawing, but in this case, the final drawing will be done with a brush loaded with paint. Secure the charcoal well using a spray diffuser and the usual mixture of white shellac in alcohol.

Taking raw umber and white (oil paint), mix up a tone that you think equal to the half tones of the cast before you. Extreme care should be taken in matching this tone. Now scumble this with a big brush equally over the whole canvas (or whatever you are making your study on). Don't use much medium, but if it is too stiff to go on thinly enough, put a little oil with it, but no turpentine. By scumbling is meant rubbing the colour into the canvas, working the brush from side to side rapidly, and laying just the thinnest solid tone that will cover the surface. If this is properly done, and your drawing was well fixed, you will just be able to see it through the paint. Now mix up a tone equal to the highest lights on the cast, and map out simply the shapes of the light masses on your study, leaving the 112scumbled tone for the half tones. Note carefully where the light masses come sharply against the half tones and where they merge softly into them.

Take raw umber and white (oil paint) and mix a tone that matches the half-tones of the object in front of you. Be very careful to get this tone right. Now, use a large brush to scumble it evenly over the entire canvas (or whatever you're working on). Don't use much medium, but if it's too thick to apply thinly, add a bit of oil, but no turpentine. Scumbling means rubbing the color into the canvas by quickly moving the brush back and forth, applying just the thinnest solid tone that will cover the surface. If done correctly and your drawing is well outlined, you should barely see it through the paint. Next, mix a tone that matches the brightest highlights on the object and simply outline the shapes of the light areas on your work, leaving the 112scumbled tone for the half-tones. Pay close attention to where the light areas contrast sharply with the half-tones and where they gently blend into them.

You will find that the scumbled tone of your ground will mix with the tone of the lights with which you are painting, and darken it somewhat. This will enable you to get the amount of variety you want in the tone of the lights. The thicker you paint the lighter will be the tone, while the thinner paint will be more affected by the original half tone, and will consequently be darker. When this is done, mix up a tone equal to the darkest shadow, and proceed to map out the shadows in the same way as you did the lights; noting carefully where they come sharply against the half tone and where they are lost. In the case of the shadows the thicker you paint the darker will be the tone; and the thinner, the lighter.

You’ll notice that the blended color of your base will mix with the colors of the lights you’re using, making it a bit darker. This lets you achieve the variety you want in the light tones. The thicker you paint, the lighter the tone will be, while thinner paint will be more influenced by the original mid-tone and will therefore appear darker. Once you’ve done this, mix a color that matches the darkest shadow and start outlining the shadows just like you did for the lights, paying close attention to where they sharply contrast with the mid-tone and where they fade away. For the shadows, the thicker you paint, the darker the tone will be, and the thinner the paint, the lighter it will appear.

When the lights and shadows have been mapped out, if this has been done with any accuracy, your work should be well advanced. And it now remains to correct and refine it here and there, as you feel it wants it. Place your work alongside the cast, and walk back to correct it. Faults that are not apparent when close, are easily seen at a little distance.

When you've figured out the lights and shadows, and done it accurately, your work should be pretty much there. Now, you just need to tweak and polish it where it needs it. Set your work next to the cast and step back to make corrections. Errors that aren't obvious up close are easy to spot from a distance.

I don't suggest that this is the right or only way of painting, but I do suggest that exercises of this description will teach the student many of the rudimentary essentials of painting, such elementary things as how to lay a tone, how to manage a brush, how to resolve appearances into a simple structure of tones, and how to manipulate your paint so as to express the desired shape. This elementary paint drawing is, as far as I know, never 113given as an exercise, the study of drawing at present being confined to paper and charcoal or chalk mediums. Drawing in charcoal is the nearest thing to this "paint drawing," it being a sort of mixed method, half line and half mass drawing. But although allied to painting, it is a very different thing from expressing form with paint, and no substitute for some elementary exercise with the brush. The use of charcoal to the neglect of line drawing often gets the student into a sloppy manner of work, and is not so good a training to the eye and hand in clear, definite statement. Its popularity is no doubt due to the fact that you can get much effect with little knowledge. Although this painting into a middle tone is not by any means the only method of painting, I do feel that it is the best method for studying form expression with the brush.

I’m not claiming that this is the right or only way to paint, but I do believe that exercises like this will teach students many basic essentials of painting, such as how to apply a tone, how to handle a brush, how to break down appearances into a simple structure of tones, and how to manipulate your paint to shape the forms you want. As far as I know, this basic paint drawing technique is never given as an exercise, with drawing studies currently limited to paper and charcoal or chalk mediums. Drawing in charcoal is the closest thing to this "paint drawing," as it combines elements of both line and mass drawing. However, while it is related to painting, it is quite different from conveying form with paint and cannot replace some basic brush exercises. Relying too much on charcoal often leads students to develop a messy style, and it’s not as effective for training your eye and hand to make clear, precise statements. Its popularity is probably due to the fact that you can achieve a lot with minimal knowledge. Although painting in a middle tone is not the only method, I think it’s the best way to study form expression with a brush.

But, when you come to colour, the fact of the opaque middle tone (or half tone) being first painted over the whole will spoil the clearness and transparency of your shadows, and may also interfere with the brilliancy of the colour in the lights. When colour comes to be considered it may be necessary to adopt many expedients that it is as well not to trouble too much about until a further stage is reached. But there is no necessity for the half tone to be painted over the shadows. In working in colour the half tone or middle tone of the lights can be made, and a middle tone of the shadows, and these two first painted separately, the edges where they come together being carefully studied and finished. Afterwards the variety of tone in the lights and the shadows can be added. By this means the difference in the quality of the colour between 114lights and shadows is preserved. This is an important consideration, as there is generally a strong contrast between them, the shadows usually being warm if the lights are cool and vice versa; and such contrasts greatly affect the vitality of colouring.

But when it comes to color, painting an opaque middle tone (or half tone) over everything first can ruin the clarity and transparency of your shadows, and may also affect the brightness of the colors in the lights. Once you start thinking about color, you might need to use many techniques that it's best not to worry too much about until you reach a later stage. However, there’s no need for the half tone to be painted over the shadows. When working with color, you can create a half tone or middle tone for the lights and a middle tone for the shadows, painting these two separately and carefully finishing the edges where they meet. Later, you can add a variety of tones in the lights and shadows. This method helps maintain the difference in color quality between 114lights and shadows. This is an important point, as there’s usually a strong contrast between them, with shadows being warm if the lights are cool and vice versa; such contrasts significantly impact the vibrancy of the colors.

Try always to do as much as possible with one stroke of the brush; paint has a vitality when the touches are deft, that much handling and continual touching kills. Look carefully at the shape and variety of the tone you wish to express, and try and manipulate the swing of your brush in such a way as to get in one touch as near the quality of shape and gradation you want. Remember that the lightest part of your touch will be where the brush first touches the canvas when you are painting lights into a middle tone; and that as the amount of paint in the brush gets less, so the tone will be more affected by what you are painting into, and get darker. And in painting the shadows, the darkest part of your stroke will be where the brush first touches the canvas; and it will gradually lighten as the paint in your brush gets less and therefore more affected by the tone you are painting into. If your brush is very full it will not be influenced nearly so much. And if one wants a touch that shall be distinct, as would be the case in painting the shiny light on a glazed pot, a very full brush would be used. But generally speaking, get your effects with as little paint as possible. Thinner paint is easier to refine and manipulate. There will be no fear of its not being solid if you are painting into a solidly scumbled middle tone.

Always try to do as much as you can with one stroke of the brush; paint has a vibrancy when the strokes are skillful, while too much handling and constant touching ruin that. Pay close attention to the shape and variety of the tone you want to express, and try to move your brush in a way that captures the quality of shape and gradation in one stroke. Remember that the lightest part of your stroke will be where the brush first touches the canvas when you’re painting lights into a mid-tone; and as the amount of paint on the brush decreases, the tone will be more influenced by what you’re painting into, making it darker. When painting shadows, the darkest part of your stroke will be where the brush first touches the canvas, and it will gradually lighten as the paint in your brush runs out and is more affected by the tone you’re painting into. If your brush is very full, it won’t be influenced nearly as much. If you want a distinct touch, like when painting the shiny highlight on a glazed pot, you would use a very full brush. But generally, aim to achieve your effects with as little paint as possible. Thinner paint is easier to refine and adjust. You won’t have to worry about it not looking solid if you’re painting into a solidly scumbled mid-tone.

Many charming things are to be done with a mixture of solid and transparent paint, but it is 115well at first not to complicate the problem too much, and therefore to leave this until later on, when you are competent to attack problems of colour. Keep your early work both in monochrome and colour quite solid, but as thin as you can, reserving thicker paint for those occasions when you wish to put a touch that shall not be influenced by what you are painting into.

Many delightful things can be created with a mix of opaque and transparent paint, but it’s best not to complicate things too much at first. So, let's save this for later when you're more skilled at handling color challenges. Keep your initial work, whether in black and white or color, quite solid but as thin as possible, saving the thicker paint for moments when you want to add a touch that won’t be affected by what you’re painting on.

Plate XXV. ILLUSTRATING SOME TYPICAL BRUSH STROKES MADE WITH FOUR CLASSES OF BRUSH Class A, round; Class B, flat; Class C, full flat brush with rounded corners; Class D, filbert shape.

Plate XXV.

Plate 25.

ILLUSTRATING SOME TYPICAL BRUSH STROKES MADE WITH FOUR CLASSES OF BRUSH

ILLUSTRATING SOME TYPICAL BRUSH STROKES MADE WITH FOUR TYPES OF BRUSHES

Class A, round; Class B, flat; Class C, full flat brush with rounded corners; Class D, filbert shape.

Class A, round; Class B, flat; Class C, full flat brush with rounded corners; Class D, filbert shape.

It will perhaps be as well to illustrate a few of the different brush strokes, and say something about the different qualities of each. These are only given as typical examples of the innumerable ways a brush may be used as an aid to very elementary students; every artist will, of course, develop ways of his own.

It might be helpful to show some of the different brush strokes and discuss the various qualities of each. These are just typical examples of the countless ways a brush can be used as a tool for beginners; every artist will, of course, find their own unique methods.

The touch will of necessity depend in the first instance upon the shape of the brush, and these shapes are innumerable. But there are two classes into which they can roughly be divided, flat and round. The round brushes usually sold, which we will call Class A, have rather a sharp point, and this, although helpful in certain circumstances, is against their general usefulness. But a round brush with a round point is also made, and this is much more convenient for mass drawing. Where there is a sharp point the central hairs are much longer, and consequently when the brush is drawn along and pressed so that all the hairs are touching the canvas, the pressure in the centre, where the long hairs are situated, is different from that at the sides. This has the effect of giving a touch that is not equal in quality all across, and the variety thus given is difficult to manipulate. I should therefore advise the student to try the blunt-ended round brushes first, as they give a 116much more even touch, and one much more suited to painting in planes of tone.

The touch will obviously depend initially on the shape of the brush, and there are countless shapes available. However, they can be broadly categorized into two types: flat and round. The round brushes that are typically sold, which we'll call Class A, have a fairly sharp point. While this can be useful in certain situations, it limits their overall versatility. There are also round brushes with a rounded tip, which are much better for mass drawing. With a sharp point, the central bristles are longer, so when the brush is dragged along and pressed down so that all the bristles touch the canvas, the pressure in the center, where the longer bristles are, is different from that at the sides. This results in a touch that isn't uniform across the board, making it challenging to control the variety created. Therefore, I recommend that students start with blunt-ended round brushes first, as they provide a 116much more even touch, which is much better for painting in varying tones.

The most extreme flat brushes (Class B) are thin and rather short, with sharp square ends, and have been very popular with students. They can be relied upon to give a perfectly flat, even tone, but with a rather hard sharp edge at the sides, and also at the commencement of the touch. In fact, they make touches like little square bricks. But as the variety that can be got out of them is limited, and the amount of paint they can carry so small that only short strokes can be made, they are not the best brush for general use. They are at times, when great refinement and delicacy are wanted, very useful, but are, on the whole, poor tools for the draughtsman in paint. Some variety can be got by using one or other of their sharp corners, by which means the smallest possible touch can be made to begin with, which can be increased in size as more pressure is brought to bear, until the whole surface of the brush is brought into play. They are also often used to paint across the form, a manner illustrated in the second touch, columns 1 and 2 of the illustration on page 114 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXVI].

The most extreme flat brushes (Class B) are thin and relatively short, with sharp square ends, and they have become very popular among students. They reliably produce a perfectly flat, even tone, but with a rather harsh sharp edge on the sides and at the start of the stroke. In fact, they create marks that look like little square bricks. However, since the variety of strokes they can produce is limited, and they carry only a small amount of paint, they are not ideal for general use. They can be quite handy when great precision and delicacy are needed, but overall, they are not the best tools for a painter. Some variety can be achieved by using one of their sharp corners, which allows for the smallest touch to begin with, that can be expanded in size as more pressure is applied, until the whole surface of the brush is used. They are often used to paint across the form, as shown in the second touch, columns 1 and 2 of the illustration on page 114 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXVI].

A more useful brush (Class C) partakes of the qualities of both flat and round. It is made with much more hair than the last, is longer, and has a square top with rounded corners. This brush carries plenty of paint, will lay an even tone, and, from the fact that the corners are rounded and the pressure consequently lessened at the sides, does not leave so hard an edge on either side of your stroke.

A more versatile brush (Class C) combines features of both flat and round brushes. It uses significantly more bristles than the previous one, is longer, and has a square top with rounded corners. This brush holds a lot of paint, provides a smooth finish, and because the corners are rounded, the pressure is reduced on the edges, resulting in softer lines on either side of your stroke.

Another brush that has recently come into fashion is called a filbert shape (Class D) by the makers. It is a fine brush to draw with, as being 117flat it paints in planes, and having a rounded top is capable of getting in and out of a variety of contours. They vary in shape, some being more pointed than others. The blunt-ended form is the best for general use. Either this class of brush or Class C are perhaps the best for the exercises in mass drawing we have been describing. But Class A should also be tried, and even Class B, to find out which suits the particular individuality of the student.

Another brush that has recently become popular is called a filbert shape (Class D) by the manufacturers. It's a great brush for drawing because it's flat, allowing it to paint in different planes, and its rounded top can easily navigate various contours. They come in different shapes, with some being more pointed than others. The blunt-ended version is the best for general use. Either this type of brush or Class C are probably the most suitable for the mass drawing exercises we've been discussing. However, Class A should also be tried, and even Class B, to see which one fits the student's individual style best.

On page 114 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXVI] a variety of touches have been made in turn by these different shaped brushes.

On page 114 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXVI] a range of strokes have been applied in turn by these variously shaped brushes.

In all the strokes illustrated it is assumed that the brush is moderately full of paint of a consistency a little thinner than that usually put up by colourmen. To thin it, mix a little turpentine and linseed oil in equal parts with it; and get it into easy working consistency before beginning your work, so as not to need any medium.

In all the strokes shown, it's assumed that the brush is moderately loaded with paint that's a bit thinner than what you usually get from paint suppliers. To thin it, mix equal parts of turpentine and linseed oil with the paint, and make sure it has a workable consistency before you start, so you won't need any medium.

In the first column (No. 1), a touch firmly painted with an equal pressure all along its course is given. This gives you a plane of tone with firm edges the width of your brush, getting gradually darker or lighter as your brush empties, according to the length of the stroke and to whether you are painting into a lighter or darker ground.

In the first column (No. 1), a stroke is made with consistent pressure throughout. This creates a tone that has sharp edges the width of your brush, gradually getting darker or lighter as the brush runs out of paint, depending on the length of the stroke and whether you're painting on a lighter or darker surface.

In column No. 2 a drag touch is illustrated. This is a very useful one. The brush is placed firmly on the canvas and then dragged from the point lightly away, leaving a gradated tone. A great deal of the modelling in round objects is to be expressed by this variety of handling. The danger is that its use is apt to lead to a too dexterous manner of painting; a dexterity more concerned with the clever manner in which a thing is painted than with the truth expressed.

In column No. 2, a drag touch technique is shown. This is really useful. The brush is held firmly on the canvas and then dragged lightly away from the point, creating a gradient tone. A lot of the shaping in round objects can be captured through this type of technique. The risk is that using it might lead to overly skillful painting; a skill that focuses more on how cleverly something is painted rather than on the truth being conveyed.

118Column No. 3. This is a stroke lightly and quickly painted, where the brush just grazes the surface of the canvas. The paint is put on in a manner that is very brilliant, and at the same time of a soft quality. If the brush is only moderately full, such touches will not have any hard edges, but be of a light, feathery nature. It is a most useful manner of putting on paint when freshness of colour is wanted, as it prevents one tone being churned up with another and losing its purity. And in the painting of hair, where the tones need to be kept very separate, and at the same time not hard, it is very useful. But in monochrome painting from the cast it is of very little service.

118Column No. 3. This is a stroke that’s applied lightly and quickly, with the brush barely touching the canvas. The paint is applied in a way that is vibrant yet soft. If the brush is only moderately loaded, these strokes will have no harsh edges and will appear light and feathery. This technique is very effective for achieving fresh colors, as it prevents one tone from mixing with another and losing its clarity. It’s particularly useful when painting hair, where the tones need to remain distinct and soft. However, in monochrome painting from a cast, it is not very helpful.

Another method of using a brush is hatching, the drawing of rows of parallel lines in either equal or varying thicknesses. This method will lighten or darken a tone in varying degree, according to whether the lines are thick, thin, or gradated—somewhat in the same way that lines of shading are drawn in line work. In cases where the correction of intricate modelling is desired and where it would be very difficult to alter a part accurately by a deft stroke of the brush, this method is useful to employ. A dry brush can be drawn across the lines to unite them with the rest of the work afterwards. This method of painting has lately been much used by those artists who have attempted painting in separate, pure colours, after the so-called manner of Claude Monet, although so mechanical a method is seldom used by that master.

Another way to use a brush is hatching, which involves drawing rows of parallel lines in either consistent or varying thicknesses. This technique can lighten or darken a tone to different extents, depending on whether the lines are thick, thin, or blended—similar to how shading is created in line art. When detailed modeling needs correction and it's challenging to make precise changes with a single brush stroke, this method is helpful. A dry brush can be used to blend the lines with the rest of the artwork afterward. Recently, many artists have adopted this painting technique, using distinct, pure colors in a style reminiscent of Claude Monet, though this mechanical approach is rarely employed by the master himself.

As your power of drawing increases (from the line drawing you have been doing), casts of hands and heads should be attempted in the same manner as has been described. Illustrations are given of 119exercises of this description on pages 110 and 122. Unfortunately the photographs, which were taken from the same study at different stages during the painting, are not all alike, the first painting of the lights being too darkly printed in some cases. But they show how much can be expressed with the one tone, when variety is got by using the middle tone to paint into. The two tones used are noted in the right-hand lower corner.

As your drawing skills improve (from the line drawing you've been doing), you should try drawing casts of hands and heads in the same way that has been described. Examples of this kind of exercise can be found on pages 110 and 122. Unfortunately, the photographs, which were taken from the same study at different points during the painting process, are not all the same; in some instances, the first painting of the lights is printed too darkly. However, they demonstrate how much can be conveyed with just one tone, using the middle tone for variety in painting. The two tones used are noted in the lower right-hand corner.

Try to train yourself to do these studies at one sitting. But if you find you cannot manage this, use slower drying colours, say bone brown and zinc white, which will keep wet until the next day.

Try to train yourself to complete these studies in one go. But if you find you can't do that, use slower-drying colors, like bone brown and zinc white, which will stay wet until the next day.

When you begin studying from the life, proceed in the same way with monochrome studies painted into a middle tone.

When you start studying from life, do it the same way with monochrome studies painted in a mid-tone.

And what are you to do if you find, when you have finished, that it is all wrong? I should advise you to let it dry, and then scumble a middle tone right over the whole thing, as you did at first, which will show the old work through, and you can then correct your drawing and proceed to paint the lights and shadows as before. And if only a part of it is wrong, when it is quite dry rub a little, poppy oil thinned with turpentine over the work, as little as will serve to cover the surface. If it is found difficult to get it to cover, breathe on the canvas, the slightest moisture will help it to bite. When this is done, wipe it off with the palm of your hand or an old piece of clean linen. Now paint a middle tone right over the part you wish to retouch, being careful about joining it up to the surrounding work, and proceed as before, drawing in the light and shadow masses.

And what should you do if you realize, after finishing, that everything is wrong? I recommend letting it dry, then applying a middle tone over the entire piece, like you did initially, which will allow the old work to show through. You can then adjust your drawing and continue painting the lights and shadows as before. If only part of it is incorrect, once it's completely dry, rub a little thinned poppy oil mixed with turpentine over the area, just enough to cover the surface. If you have trouble getting it to cover, breathe on the canvas; even a tiny bit of moisture will help it adhere. After that, wipe it off with your palm or an old clean cloth. Now, paint a middle tone over the part you want to fix, being careful to blend it with the surrounding area, and proceed as before, working in the light and shadow areas.

This form of drawing you will probably find more difficult at first. For the reason already explained 120it seems natural to observe objects as made up of outlines, not masses. The frame with cottons across it should be used to flatten the appearance, as in making outline drawings. And besides this a black glass should be used. This can easily be made by getting a small piece of glass—a photographic negative will do—and sticking some black paper on the back; turning it over the front to keep the raw edges of the glass from cutting the fingers. Or the glass can be painted on the back with black paint. Standing with your back to the object and your painting, hold this glass close in front of one of your eyes (the other being closed), so that you can see both your painting and the object. Seeing the tones thus reduced and simplified, you will be enabled more easily to correct your work.

This type of drawing might seem more challenging at first. As mentioned earlier 120, it's natural to see objects as outlines instead of solid shapes. Use a frame with cotton stretched across it to flatten the appearance, similar to creating outline drawings. You should also use a piece of black glass. This can easily be made by taking a small piece of glass—a photographic negative works—and attaching some black paper to the back; flip it over so the raw edges of the glass don’t cut your fingers. Alternatively, the back of the glass can be painted black. Stand with your back to both the object and your painting, holding the glass close to one of your eyes (with the other eye closed), so you can see both the painting and the object. By viewing the tones in this reduced and simplified way, you'll find it easier to make corrections to your work.

I should like to emphasise the importance of the setting-out work necessary for brush-drawing. While it is not necessary to put expressive work into this preparatory work, the utmost care should be taken to ensure its accuracy as far as it goes. It is a great nuisance if, after you have put up some of your fair structure, you find the foundations are in the wrong place and the whole thing has to be torn down and shifted. It is of the utmost necessity to have the proportions and the main masses settled at this early stage, and every device of blocking out with square lines and measuring with your knitting-needle, &c., should be adopted to ensure the accuracy of these large proportions. The variations and emphases that feeling may dictate can be done in the painting stage. This initial stage is not really a drawing at all, but a species of mapping out, and as such it should be regarded. The only excuse for making the elaborate preparatory drawings on 121canvas students sometimes do, is that it enables them to learn the subject, so that when they come to paint it, they already know something about it. But the danger of making these preparatory drawings interesting is that the student fears to cover them up and lose an outline so carefully and lovingly wrought; and this always results in a poor painting. When you take up a brush to express yourself, it must be with no fear of hurting a careful drawing. Your drawing is going to be done with the brush, and only the general setting out of the masses will be of any use to you in the work of this initial stage. Never paint with the poor spirit of the student who fears to lose his drawing, or you will never do any fine things in painting. Drawing (expressing form) is the thing you should be doing all the time. And in art, "he that would save his work must often lose it," if you will excuse the paraphrase of a profound saying which, like most profound sayings, is applicable to many things in life besides what it originally referred to. It is often necessary when a painting is nearly right to destroy the whole thing in order to accomplish the apparently little that still divides it from what you conceive it should be. It is like a man rushing a hill that is just beyond the power of his motor-car to climb, he must take a long run at it. And if the first attempt lands him nearly up at the top but not quite, he has to go back and take the long run all over again, to give him the impetus that shall carry him right through.

I want to highlight how important it is to do the foundational work necessary for brush-drawing. While you don’t need to add expressive details at this stage, it’s crucial to make sure everything is accurate. It’s really frustrating if, after constructing part of your piece, you realize the foundations are in the wrong spot, forcing you to dismantle and move everything. It’s essential to get the proportions and main shapes sorted out early on, and you should use every method you can think of, like drawing straight lines and measuring with something like a knitting needle, to ensure these large shapes are correct. The variations and emotional touches can come later during the painting phase. This first step isn’t really drawing; it’s more about mapping things out, so think of it that way. The only reason for students to create detailed preparatory drawings on 121canvas is that it helps them understand the subject, so when it’s time to paint, they already have some knowledge. However, the risk of making these preparatory drawings too appealing is that students hesitate to cover them up, fearing they’ll lose a carefully crafted outline, which usually leads to a poor painting. When you pick up a brush to express yourself, it has to be without the fear of ruining a careful drawing. Your real drawing will happen with the brush, and only the basic layout of the shapes will be useful during this initial phase. Never approach painting with the timid mindset of a student afraid to lose his drawing; otherwise, you won’t create anything great. Drawing (capturing form) should be your focus all the time. And in art, "he who wants to save his work must often let it go," if you’ll allow me to paraphrase a profound saying that applies to many aspects of life, not just the original context. Sometimes, when a painting is nearly right, you have to destroy a lot of it to achieve the small changes needed to align it with your vision. It’s like a driver trying to ascend a hill that’s slightly beyond their car’s capability; they must take a long run to gain speed. If their first attempt almost gets them to the top but not quite, they have to go back and build up that speed again to finally reach the summit.

Another method of judging tone drawing is our old method of half closing the eyes. This, by lowering the tone and widening the focus, enables you to correct the work more easily.

Another way to evaluate tone in drawing is our classic technique of slightly closing the eyes. This trick, by dulling the tone and broadening the focus, makes it easier for you to adjust your work.

In tone drawing there is not only the shape of 122the masses to be considered, but their values—that is, their position in an imagined scale from dark to light. The relation of the different tones in this way—the values, as it is called—is an extremely important matter in painting. But it more properly belongs to the other department of the subject, namely Colour, and this needs a volume to itself. But something more will be said on this subject when treating of Rhythm.

In tone drawing, you need to think about not just the shape of 122the masses, but also their values—meaning their place on a scale from dark to light. The relationship between the different tones—what we call values—is really important in painting. However, it fits better in the other part of the topic, which is Color, and that deserves its own volume. More will be discussed on this topic when we cover Rhythm.

We saw, in speaking of line drawing, how the character of a line was found by observing its flatnesses and its relation to straight lines. In the same way the character of modelling is found by observing its planes. So that in building up a complicated piece of form, like a head or figure, the planes (or flat tones) should be sought for everywhere. As a carver in stone blocks out his work in square surfaces, the modelling of a figure or any complex surface that is being studied should be set out in planes of tone, painting in the first instance the larger ones, and then, to these, adding the smaller; when it will be seen that the roundnesses have, with a little fusing of edges here and there, been arrived at. Good modelling is full of these planes subtly fused together. Nothing is so characteristic of bad modelling as "gross roundnesses." The surface of a sphere is the surface with the least character, like the curve of a circle, and the one most to be avoided in good modelling.

We discussed how to understand a line by looking at its flatness and how it relates to straight lines. Similarly, we can understand the character of modeling by observing its planes. When creating a complex form, like a head or figure, we should look for planes (or flat tones) everywhere. Just like a stone carver outlines their work with flat surfaces, the modeling of a figure or any intricate surface being studied should be outlined in planes of tone, first painting the larger ones, and then layering on the smaller ones. This will allow us to see that roundness is achieved with a little blending of edges here and there. Good modeling is filled with these planes that are subtly blended together. One of the key signs of poor modeling is "obvious roundness." The surface of a sphere has the least character, like the curve of a circle, and is something to avoid in good modeling.

In the search for form the knowledge of anatomy, and particularly the bony structures, is of the utmost importance. During the rage for realism and naturalism many hard things were said about the study of anatomy. And certainly, were it to be used to overstep the modesty of nature in these 123respects and to be paraded to the exclusion of the charm and character of life, it would be as well left alone. But if we are to make a drawing that shall express something concrete, we must know something of its structure, whatever it is. In the case of the human figure it is impossible properly to understand its action and draw it in a way that shall give a powerful impression without a knowledge of the mechanics of its construction. But I hardly think the case for anatomy needs much stating at the present time. Never let anatomical knowledge tempt you into exaggerated statements of internal structure, unless such exaggeration helps the particular thing you wish to express. In drawing a figure in violent action it might, for instance, be essential to the drawing, whereas in drawing a figure at rest or a portrait, it would certainly be out of place.

In the quest for form, understanding anatomy, especially the bony structures, is crucial. During the trend for realism and naturalism, there were many harsh criticisms of studying anatomy. If anatomy is used to disrespect the modesty of nature in these respects and to overshadow the charm and character of life, it might be better to leave it aside. However, if we want to create a drawing that conveys something concrete, we need to understand its structure, whatever it may be. When it comes to the human figure, it's impossible to fully grasp its movement and draw it in a way that leaves a strong impression without knowing how it’s constructed mechanically. I doubt that the importance of anatomy needs much justification today. Never let anatomical knowledge lead you to overemphasize internal structure, unless that exaggeration serves the particular expression you aim for. For instance, when drawing a figure in dynamic action, it might be essential to the artwork, but when drawing a figure at rest or a portrait, it would definitely be inappropriate.

Plate XXVI. SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM THE LIFE IN DIFFERENT STAGES No. 1. Blocking out the spaces occupied by different masses in charcoal.

Plate XXVI.

Plate XXVI.

SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM THE LIFE IN DIFFERENT STAGES

SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM LIFE AT DIFFERENT STAGES

No. 1. Blocking out the spaces occupied by different masses in charcoal.

No. 1. Shading the areas filled by different shapes in charcoal.

Plate XXVII. SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM THE LIFE IN DIFFERENT STAGES No. 2. A middle tone having been scumbled over the whole, the lights are painted into it; variety being got by varying the thickness of the paint. The darks are due to the charcoal lines of initial drawing showing through middle tone.

Plate XXVII.

Plate 27.

SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM THE LIFE IN DIFFERENT STAGES

SET OF FOUR PHOTOS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM LIFE AT DIFFERENT STAGES

No. 2. A middle tone having been scumbled over the whole, the lights are painted into it; variety being got by varying the thickness of the paint. The darks are due to the charcoal lines of initial drawing showing through middle tone.

No. 2. A mid-tone has been brushed over everything, and the highlights are painted into it; variety is achieved by changing the thickness of the paint. The dark areas come from the charcoal lines of the initial drawing showing through the mid-tone.

Plate XXVIII. SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM THE LIFE IN DIFFERENT STAGES No. 3. The same as the last, but with the shadows added; variety being got by varying thickness of paint as before.

Plate XXVIII.

Plate 28.

SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM THE LIFE IN DIFFERENT STAGES

SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM LIFE AT DIFFERENT STAGES

No. 3. The same as the last, but with the shadows added; variety being got by varying thickness of paint as before.

No. 3. The same as the last, but with the shadows added; variety is achieved by changing the thickness of the paint as before.

Plate XXIX. SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM THE LIFE IN DIFFERENT STAGES No. 4. The completed head.

Plate XXIX.

Plate 29.

SET OF FOUR PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM THE LIFE IN DIFFERENT STAGES

SET OF FOUR PHOTOS OF THE SAME STUDY FROM LIFE AT DIFFERENT STAGES

No. 4. The completed head.

No. 4. The finished head.

In the chapter on line work it was stated that: "Lines of shading drawn across the forms suggest softness, lines drawn in curves fulness of form, lines drawn down the forms hardness, and lines crossing in every direction atmosphere," and these rules apply equally well to the direction of the brush strokes (the brush work) in a painting.

In the chapter on line work, it was stated that: "Lines of shading drawn across the forms suggest softness, lines drawn in curves suggest fullness of form, lines drawn down the forms suggest hardness, and lines crossing in every direction suggest atmosphere," and these rules also apply to the direction of the brush strokes (the brushwork) in a painting.

The brush swinging round the forms suggests fore-shortening, and fulness of form generally, and across the forms softness, while the brush following down the forms suggests toughness and hardness, and crossing in every direction atmosphere. A great deal of added force can be given to form expression in this way. In the foreshortened figure on the ground at the left of Tintoretto's "Finding of the Body of St. Mark," the foreshortened effect helped by the brush work swinging round can be seen (see illustration, 124page 236 [Transcribers Note: Plate XLIX]). The work of Henner in France is an extreme instance of the quality of softness and fleshiness got by painting across the form. The look of toughness and hardness given by the brush work following down the forms is well illustrated in much of the work of James Ward, the animal painter. In his picture in the National Gallery, "Harlech Castle," No. 1158, this can be seen in the painting of the tree-trunks, &c.

The brush moving around the shapes suggests foreshortening and a fullness of form overall, while across the forms it conveys softness. In contrast, the brush moving down the forms suggests toughness and hardness, creating an atmosphere that crosses in every direction. This technique can significantly enhance the expression of form. In the foreshortened figure on the ground to the left of Tintoretto's "Finding of the Body of St. Mark," the effect of foreshortening, aided by the sweeping brushwork, is evident (see illustration, 124page 236 [Transcribers Note: Plate XLIX]). Henner's work in France is a prime example of achieving softness and fleshiness by painting across the form. The tough and hard appearance created by brushwork that follows down the forms is well illustrated in much of James Ward's artwork, the animal painter. In his piece at the National Gallery, "Harlech Castle," No. 1158, this can be seen in the depiction of the tree trunks, etc.

The crossing of the brush work in every direction, giving a look of atmosphere, is naturally often used in painting backgrounds and also such things as the plane surfaces of sky and mist, &c.

The crisscrossing brush strokes in all directions create a sense of depth, which is often used in painting backgrounds as well as flat surfaces like the sky and mist, etc.

It is often inconvenient to paint across the form when softness is wanted. It is only possible to have one colour in your brush sweep, and the colour changes across, much more than down the form as a rule. For the shadows, half tones and lights, besides varying in tone, vary also in colour; so that it is not always possible to sweep across them with one colour. It is usually more convenient to paint down where the colours can be laid in overlapping bands of shadow, half tone and light, &c. Nevertheless, if this particular look of softness and fleshiness is desired, either the painting must be so thin or the tones so fused together that no brush strokes show, or a dry flat brush must afterwards be drawn lightly across when the painting is done, to destroy the downward brush strokes and substitute others going across, great care being taken to drag only from light to dark, and to wipe the brush carefully after each touch; and also never to go over the same place twice, or the paint will lose vitality. This is a method much employed by artists who delight in this particular quality.

It can be tricky to paint across the form when you're aiming for a soft look. Generally, you can only have one color on your brush at a time, and the color tends to shift more across the form than down. For shadows, mid-tones, and highlights, colors not only vary in tone but also in hue, making it difficult to apply just one color over them. It’s usually easier to paint downward, where colors can be layered in overlapping bands of shadow, mid-tone, and light, etc. However, if you're looking for a specific softness and fleshiness, you have to either paint very thinly or blend the tones together so that no brush strokes are visible. Alternatively, you can use a dry, flat brush to lightly sweep across the finished painting, which helps to hide the downward brush strokes and replace them with others that go across. Be careful to drag from light to dark and clean the brush thoroughly after each stroke, and avoid going over the same spot twice; otherwise, the paint will lose its vibrancy. This technique is commonly used by artists who appreciate this particular quality.

125But when a strong, tough look is desired, such as one sees when a muscle is in violent action, or in the tendon above the wrist or above the heel in the leg, or generally where a bone comes to the surface, in all these cases the brush work should follow down the forms. It is not necessary and is often inadvisable for the brush work to show at all, in which case these principles will be of little account. But when in vigorously painted work they do, I think it will generally be found to create the effects named.

125But when a strong, defined look is needed, like what you see when a muscle is working hard, or in the tendons above the wrist or heel of the leg, or generally where a bone is close to the surface, the brushwork should follow the shapes. It's not always necessary, and often not recommended, for the brushwork to be visible; in those cases, these principles won’t matter much. However, when working with bold brushstrokes, if the brushwork is visible, I think it usually helps achieve the desired effects.

Drawing on toned paper with white chalk or Chinese white and black or red chalk is another form of mass drawing. And for studies it is intended to paint from, this is a quick and excellent manner. The rapidity with which the facts of an appearance can be noted makes it above all others the method for drapery studies. The lights are drawn with white, the toned paper being allowed to show through where a darker tone is needed, the white (either chalk or Chinese white) being put on thickly when a bright light is wanted and thinly where a quieter light is needed. So with the shadows, the chalk is put on heavily in the darks and less heavily in the lighter shadows. Since the days of the early Italians this has been a favourite method of drawing drapery studies (see illustrations, page 260 [Transcribers Note: Plate LIV]).

Drawing on toned paper with white chalk or Chinese white, as well as black or red chalk, is another approach to mass drawing. It's a quick and excellent method for studies intended for painting. The speed with which the details of an appearance can be captured makes it the best technique for drapery studies. The highlights are depicted in white, with the toned paper showing through when a darker tone is needed. The white (either chalk or Chinese white) is applied thickly for bright lights and thinly for softer lights. Similarly, for shadows, the chalk is applied heavily in the dark areas and lightly in the lighter shadows. Since the early Italian artists, this has been a popular method for drawing drapery studies (see illustrations, page 260 [Transcribers Note: Plate LIV]).

Some artists have shaded their lights with gold and silver paint. The late Sir Edward Burne-Jones was very fond of this, and drawings with much decorative charm have been done this way. The principle is the same as in drawing with white chalk, the half tone being given by the paper.

Some artists have covered their lights with gold and silver paint. The late Sir Edward Burne-Jones really liked this technique, and many drawings with a lot of decorative appeal have been created this way. The concept is the same as drawing with white chalk, where the paper provides the midtone.

Keep the lights separate from the shadows, let 126the half tone paper always come as a buffer state between them. Get as much information into the drawing of your lights and shadows as possible; don't be satisfied with a smudge effect. Use the side of your white chalk when you want a mass, or work in parallel lines (hatching) on the principle described in the chapter on line drawing.

Keep the lights separate from the shadows, let 126 the half-tone paper always act as a buffer between them. Include as much detail in the drawing of your lights and shadows as you can; don't settle for just a smudge effect. Use the side of your white chalk when you want to create a mass, or work with parallel lines (hatching) based on the principles explained in the chapter on line drawing.


127

X
RHYTHM

The subject of Rhythm in what are called the Fine Arts is so vague, and has received so little attention, that some courage, or perhaps foolhardiness, is needed to attack it. And in offering the following fragmentary ideas that have been stumbled on in my own limited practice, I want them to be accepted only for what they are worth, as I do not know of any proper authority for them. But they may serve as a stimulus, and offer some lines on which the student can pursue the subject for himself.

The topic of Rhythm in what we refer to as the Fine Arts is pretty unclear and hasn't been explored much, so it takes a bit of courage—or maybe recklessness—to tackle it. In sharing these scattered thoughts that I've come across in my own limited experience, I hope they'll be seen for what they are since I can't claim any real authority on the subject. However, they might inspire others and provide some direction for students to explore the topic on their own.

The word rhythm is here used to signify the power possessed by lines, tones, and colours, by their ordering and arrangement, to affect us, somewhat as different notes and combinations of sound do in music. And just as in music, where sounds affect us without having any direct relation with nature, but appeal directly to our own inner life; so in painting, sculpture, and architecture there is a music that appeals directly to us apart from any significance that may be associated with the representation of natural phenomena. There is, as it were, an abstract music of line, tone, and colour.

The word rhythm is used here to describe the influence that lines, tones, and colors have through their arrangement and ordering on our emotions, similar to how different notes and sound combinations affect us in music. Just like music, where sounds impact us without a direct connection to nature and resonate with our inner feelings; in painting, sculpture, and architecture, there is a form of music that speaks to us independently of any meaning linked to the depiction of natural events. There exists, in a sense, an abstract music of line, tone, and color.

The danger of the naturalistic movement in painting in the nineteenth century has been that it has turned our attention away from this fundamental fact of art to the contemplation of interesting 128realisations of appearances—realisations often full of poetic suggestiveness due to associations connected with the objects painted as concrete things, but not always made directly significant as artistic expression; whereas it is the business of the artist to relate the form, colour, and tone of natural appearances to this abstract musical quality, with which he should never lose touch even in the most highly realised detail of his work. For only thus, when related to rhythm, do the form, tone, and colour of appearances obtain their full expressive power and become a means of vitally conveying the feeling of the artist.

The problem with the naturalistic movement in 19th-century painting has been that it has distracted us from the core essence of art, leading us to focus on interesting 128 representations of appearances—representations that are often rich in poetic meaning due to the associations tied to the objects depicted as real things, but not always made significant as artistic expression. Meanwhile, it’s the artist's role to connect the form, color, and tone of natural appearances to this abstract musical quality, which they should never lose sight of, even in the most detailed aspects of their work. Only in this way, when connected to rhythm, do the form, tone, and color of things achieve their full expressive potential and effectively communicate the artist's feelings.

Inquiry as to the origin of this power and of rhythm generally is a profoundly interesting subject; and now that recent advances in science tend to show that sound, heat, light, and possibly electricity and even nerve force are but different rhythmic forms of energy, and that matter itself may possibly be resolved eventually into different rhythmic motions, it does look as if rhythm may yet be found to contain even the secret of life itself. At any rate it is very intimately associated with life; and primitive man early began to give expression in some form of architecture, sculpture, or painting to the deeper feelings that were moving him; found some correspondence between the lines and colours of architecture, sculpture, and painting and the emotional life that was awakening within him. Thus, looking back at the remains of their work that have come down to us, we are enabled to judge of the nature of the people from the expression we find in hewn stone and on painted walls.

The question of where this power and rhythm come from is a really fascinating topic. Now, with recent scientific discoveries suggesting that sound, heat, light, and maybe even electricity and nerve force are just different rhythmic forms of energy, and that matter itself might eventually be broken down into various rhythmic motions, it seems like rhythm might hold the key to the secret of life. At the very least, it's closely tied to life; early humans began to express their deeper feelings through some form of architecture, sculpture, or painting, finding a connection between the lines and colors in these forms and the emotions stirring within them. So, looking back at the remnants of their work that survive today, we can understand the nature of these people through the expressions found in carved stone and painted walls.

It is in primitive art generally that we see more clearly the direct emotional significance of line and 129form. Art appears to have developed from its most abstract position, to which bit by bit have been added the truths and graces of natural appearance, until as much of this naturalistic truth has been added as the abstract significance at the base of the expression could stand without loss of power. At this point, as has already been explained, a school is at the height of its development. The work after this usually shows an increased concern with naturalistic truth, which is always very popular, to the gradual exclusion of the backbone of abstract line and form significance that dominated the earlier work. And when these primitive conditions are lost touch with, a decadence sets in. At least, this is roughly the theory to which a study of the two great art developments of the past, in Greece and Italy, would seem to point. And this theory is the excuse for all the attempts at primitivism of which we have lately seen so much.

In primitive art, we can see more clearly the direct emotional impact of line and 129form. Art seems to have evolved from its most abstract form, gradually incorporating the truths and beauty of how things appear in nature, until enough of this naturalistic truth has been added without losing the power of the underlying abstract expression. At this stage, as mentioned earlier, a school is at its peak. After this, the work usually shows a greater focus on naturalistic truth, which is always very popular, gradually moving away from the essential abstract line and form significance that characterized earlier works. When we lose touch with these primitive conditions, a decline begins. At least, this is roughly the theory suggested by a study of the two major art movements of the past, in Greece and Italy. This theory explains all the recent attempts at primitivism we've been seeing a lot of lately.

Art having lost touch with its primitive base owing to the over-doses of naturalism it has had, we must, these new apostles say, find a new primitive base on which to build the new structure of art. The theory has its attractions, but there is this difference between the primitive archaic Greek or early Italian and the modern primitive; the early men reverently clothed the abstract idea they started with in the most natural and beautiful form within their knowledge, ever seeking to discover new truths and graces from nature to enrich their work; while the modern artist, with the art treasures of all periods of the world before him, can never be in the position of these simple-minded men. It is therefore unlikely that the future development of art will be on lines similar to that of the past. 130The same conditions of simple ignorance are never likely to occur again. Means of communication and prolific reproduction make it very unlikely that the art of the world will again be lost for a season, as was Greek art in the Middle Ages. Interesting intellectually as is the theory that the impressionist point of view (the accepting of the flat retina picture as a pattern of colour sensations) offers a new field from which to select material for a new basis of artistic expression, so far the evidence of results has not shown anything likely seriously to threaten the established principles of traditional design. And anything more different in spirit from the genuine primitive than the irreverent anarchy and flouting of all refinement in the work of some of these new primitives, it would be difficult to imagine. But much of the work of the movement has undoubted artistic vitality, and in its insistence on design and selection should do much to kill "realism" and the "copying nature" theory of a few years back.

Art has lost its connection to its primitive roots due to an overload of naturalism, according to these new advocates. They argue that we need to find a new primitive base to create a new structure for art. This theory is appealing, but there's a key difference between the primitive archaic Greek or early Italian artists and modern primitives: the early artists carefully expressed their initial abstract ideas in the most natural and beautiful forms they knew, always looking to discover new truths and beauty in nature to enrich their work. In contrast, the modern artist has the art treasures of all periods available to them, which puts them in a completely different position than those earlier, simpler-minded creators. Therefore, it’s unlikely that future art development will mirror the paths taken in the past. The circumstances of simple ignorance are unlikely to reoccur. The advancements in communication and mass reproduction make it very improbable that the art of the world will again be lost for a time, as Greek art was during the Middle Ages. While the idea that the impressionist perspective (accepting the flat image on the retina as a pattern of color sensations) offers a new foundation for artistic expression is intellectually intriguing, evidence so far hasn’t shown anything that seriously threatens the established principles of traditional design. Moreover, it’s hard to imagine anything more different in spirit from genuine primitives than the irreverent chaos and disregard for refinement present in some of the works of these new primitives. Nonetheless, much of this movement's work has undeniable artistic vitality, and its focus on design and selection should help diminish the "realism" and "copying nature" theories that were popular a few years ago.

Although it is perfectly true that the feelings and ideas that impel the artist may sooner or later find their own expression, there are a great many principles connected with the arranging of lines, tones, and colours in his picture that it is difficult to transgress without calamity. At any rate the knowledge of some of them will aid the artist in gaining experience, and possibly save him some needless fumbling.

While it's true that the emotions and ideas driving the artist will eventually find their expression, there are numerous principles related to organizing lines, tones, and colors in their artwork that are easy to get wrong with disastrous results. At the very least, understanding some of these principles will help the artist gain experience and might even prevent unnecessary mistakes.

But don't for one moment think that anything in the nature of rules is going to take the place of the initial artistic impulse which must come from within. This is not a matter for teaching, art training being only concerned with perfecting the means of its expression.

But don’t for a second think that any kind of rules can replace the original artistic impulse that has to come from within. This isn’t something that can be taught; art training is only about perfecting the ways to express it.

Plate XXX. A STUDY FOR A PICTURE OF "ROSALIND AND ORLANDO" Ros. "He calls us back; my pride fell with my fortunes."

Plate XXX.

Plate 30.

A STUDY FOR A PICTURE OF "ROSALIND AND ORLANDO"

A STUDY FOR A PICTURE OF "ROSALIND AND ORLANDO"

Ros. "He calls us back; my pride fell with my fortunes."

Ros. "He’s calling us back; my pride went down with my fortunes."

131

It is proposed to treat the subject from the material side of line and tone only, without any reference to subject matter, with the idea of trying to find out something about the expressive qualities line and tone are capable of yielding unassociated with visual things. What use can be made of any such knowledge to give expression to the emotional life of the artist is not our concern, and is obviously a matter for the individual to decide for himself.

It’s suggested to discuss the topic solely from the perspective of line and tone, leaving out any reference to specific subject matter. The goal is to explore the expressive qualities that line and tone can produce without being linked to visual representations. How this knowledge can be applied to express the artist’s emotional life is not our focus and is clearly something each individual must determine for themselves.


There is at the basis of every picture a structure of lines and masses. They may not be very obvious, and may be hidden under the most broken of techniques, but they will always be found underlying the planning of any painting. Some may say that the lines are only the boundaries of the masses, and others that the masses are only the spaces between the lines. But whichever way you care to look at it, there are particular emotional qualities analogous to music that affect us in lines and line arrangements and also in tone or mass arrangements. And any power a picture may have to move us will be largely due to the rhythmic significance of this original planning. These qualities, as has already been stated, affect us quite apart from any association they may have with natural things: arrangements of mere geometrical lines are sufficient to suggest them. But of course other associations connected with the objects represented will largely augment the impression, when the line and tone arrangements and the sentiment of the object are in sympathy. And if they are not, it may happen that associations connected with the representation will cut in and obscure or entirely destroy this line and tone music. That is to say, 132if the line and tone arrangement in the abstract is expressive of the sublime, and the objects whose representation they support something ridiculous, say a donkey braying, the associations aroused by so ridiculous an appearance will override those connected with the line and tone arrangement. But it is remarkable how seldom this occurs in nature, the sentiment of the line and tone arrangements things present being usually in harmony with the sentiment of the object itself. As a matter of fact, the line effect of a donkey in repose is much more sublime than when he is braying.

Every picture has a foundation made up of lines and shapes. They might not be immediately noticeable, and could be hidden under the most chaotic techniques, but they are always present in the planning of any painting. Some may argue that the lines are just the edges of the shapes, while others believe the shapes are merely the spaces between the lines. Regardless of your perspective, there are specific emotional qualities similar to music that influence us through lines and their arrangements, as well as through the arrangement of tones or shapes. The emotional impact of a picture largely depends on the rhythmic weight of this initial planning. These qualities, as previously mentioned, affect us regardless of any connections to real-life objects: simply arranged geometric lines can suggest feelings. However, other associations linked to the represented objects can enhance the impression significantly, particularly when the line and tone arrangements align with the essence of the object. Conversely, if they don’t align, associations tied to the representation might interfere and obscure or completely dilute this line and tone harmony. For example, if the line and tone arrangement conveys something profound but the objects depicted evoke something silly, like a donkey braying, the absurdity of the image will dominate over the emotional weight of the line and tone. It's quite remarkable how rarely this conflict occurs in nature; usually, the emotional tone of the line and shape arrangements is in sync with the emotions tied to the object itself. In fact, the line effect of a donkey resting is often far more profound than when he is making noise.

Unity and Variety.

There are two qualities that may be allowed to divide the consideration of this subject, two points of view from which the subject can be approached: Unity and Variety, qualities somewhat opposed to each other, as are harmony and contrast in the realm of colour. Unity is concerned with the relationship of all the parts to that oneness of conception that should control every detail of a work of art. All the more profound qualities, the deeper emotional notes, are on this side of the subject. On the other hand, variety holds the secrets of charm, vitality, and the picturesque, it is the "dither," the play between the larger parts, that makes for life and character. Without variety there can be no life.

There are two qualities that can help us explore this topic from different angles: Unity and Variety. These qualities are somewhat opposed to each other, much like harmony and contrast in the world of color. Unity focuses on how all parts connect to a single concept that should guide every detail of a piece of art. The more profound qualities and deeper emotional aspects are found on this side of the discussion. On the flip side, variety holds the keys to charm, energy, and visual interest; it’s the "dither," the interplay between the larger elements, that brings life and character. Without variety there can be no life.

In any conception of a perfect unity, like the perfected life of the Buddhist, Nirvana or Nibbana (literally "dying out" or "extinction" as of an expiring fire), there is no room for variety, for the play of life; all such fretfulness ceases, to be replaced by an all-pervading calm, beautiful, if you like, but lifeless. There is this deadness about any conception of perfection that will always make it an unattainable 133 ideal in life. Those who, like the Indian fakir or the hermits of the Middle Ages, have staked their all on this ideal of perfection, have found it necessary to suppress life in every way possible, the fakirs often remaining motionless for long periods at a time, and one of the mediaeval saints going so far as to live on the top of a high column where life and movement were well-nigh impossible.

In any idea of a perfect unity, like the ideal life of the Buddhist, Nirvana or Nibbana (literally "dying out" or "extinction" like a dying fire), there's no space for variety or the flow of life; all such anxiety fades away, replaced by a deep calm that's beautiful, if you think so, but ultimately lifeless. There’s a lifeless quality to any notion of perfection that will always make it an unreachable 133 ideal in life. Those who, like the Indian fakir or the hermits of the Middle Ages, have devoted everything to this ideal of perfection, have had to suppress life in every way possible, with fakirs often staying completely still for long periods, and one medieval saint going so far as to live on top of a tall column where life and movement were nearly impossible.

And in art it is the same; all those who have aimed at an absolute perfection have usually ended in a deadness. The Greeks knew better than many of their imitators this vital necessity in art. In their most ideal work there is always that variety that gives character and life. No formula or canon of proportions or other mechanical device for the attainment of perfection was allowed by this vital people entirely to subdue their love of life and variety. And however near they might go towards a perfect type in their ideal heads and figures, they never went so far as to kill the individual in the type. It is the lack of this subtle distinction that, I think, has been the cause of the failure of so much art founded on so-called Greek ideals. Much Roman sculpture, if you except their portrait busts, illustrates this. Compared with Greek work it lacks that subtle variety in the modelling that gives vitality. The difference can be felt instinctively in the merest fragment of a broken figure. It is not difficult to tell Greek from Roman fragments, they pulsate with a life that it is impossible to describe but that one instinctively feels. And this vitality depends, I think it will be found, on the greater amount of life-giving variety in the surfaces of the modelling. In their architectural mouldings, the difference of which we are speaking can be more easily traced. 134The vivacity and brilliancy of a Greek moulding makes a Roman work look heavy and dull. And it will generally be found that the Romans used the curve of the circle in the sections of their mouldings, a curve possessing the least amount of variety, as is explained later, where the Greeks used the lines of conic sections, curves possessed of the greatest amount of variety.

In art, it's the same: those who strive for absolute perfection often end up creating something lifeless. The Greeks understood this necessity in art better than many of their imitators. In their most ideal works, there's always a variety that brings character and life. This vital culture didn't let any formula, rule of proportion, or mechanical method completely suppress their love for life and diversity. Even when they aimed for a perfect type in their idealized heads and figures, they never went so far as to eliminate individuality. I believe this missing subtlety explains the failure of much art based on so-called Greek ideals. Much Roman sculpture, aside from their portrait busts, demonstrates this. Compared to Greek work, it lacks the nuanced variety in the modeling that gives it vitality. You can instinctively recognize the difference in even the smallest fragment of a broken figure. It’s easy to distinguish Greek from Roman fragments; the Greek ones exude a life that's hard to describe but easily felt. This vitality, I think, comes from the richer variety in the surfaces of the modeling. The difference can be tracked more easily in their architectural moldings. 134The liveliness and brilliance of a Greek molding makes Roman work appear heavy and dull. Generally, the Romans favored the curve of a circle in the sections of their moldings, a curve with minimal variety, while the Greeks preferred conic sections, curves with much greater variety.

But while unity must never exist without this life-giving variety, variety must always be under the moral control of unity, or it will get out of hand and become extravagant. In fact, the most perfect work, like the most perfect engine of which we spoke in a former chapter, has the least amount of variety, as the engine has the least amount of "dither," that is compatible with life. One does not hear so much talk in these days about a perfect type as was the fashion at one time; and certainly the pursuit of this ideal by a process of selecting the best features from many models and constructing a figure out of them as an ideal type, was productive of very dead and lifeless work. No account was taken of the variety from a common type necessary in the most perfect work, if life and individual interest are not to be lost, and the thing is not to become a dead abstraction. But the danger is rather the other way at the moment. Artists revel in the oddest of individual forms, and the type idea is flouted on all hands. An anarchy of individualism is upon us, and the vitality of disordered variety is more fashionable than the calm beauty of an ordered unity.

But while unity should never exist without this life-giving variety, variety must always be guided by the moral control of unity, or it will become chaotic and excessive. In fact, the most perfect work, like the ideal engine we discussed in a previous chapter, has the least amount of variety, as the engine has the least amount of "dither" compatible with life. People don't talk as much about a perfect type these days as they used to; and certainly, the pursuit of this ideal by selecting the best features from many models to create a composite ideal type led to very lifeless and uninspired work. There was no consideration given to the variety from a common type that's necessary for the most perfect work, if life and individual interest are to be preserved, and to avoid creating something that's merely a dead abstraction. However, the current danger leans in the opposite direction. Artists are indulging in the strangest individual forms, and the idea of a type is disregarded everywhere. We are facing an anarchy of individualism, and the energy of chaotic variety is more celebrated than the serene beauty of a harmonious unity.

Excess of variations from a common type is what I think we recognise as ugliness in the objective world, whereas beauty is on the side of unity and conformity to type. Beauty possesses both 135variety and unity, and is never extreme, erring rather on the side of unity.

Too many variations from a common type is what I believe we recognize as ugliness in the world around us, while beauty aligns with unity and conformity to type. Beauty includes both variety and unity, and it never goes to extremes, leaning more towards unity.

Burke in his essay on "The Sublime and the Beautiful" would seem to use the word beautiful where we should use the word pretty, placing it at the opposite pole from the sublime, whereas I think beauty always has some elements of the sublime in it, while the merely pretty has not. Mere prettiness is a little difficult to place, it does not come between either of our extremes, possessing little character or type, variety or unity. It is perhaps charm without either of these strengthening associates, and in consequence is always feeble, and the favourite diet of weak artistic digestions.

Burke in his essay on "The Sublime and the Beautiful" seems to use the word beautiful when we should say pretty, placing it as the complete opposite of the sublime. However, I believe beauty always contains some elements of the sublime, while something that's just pretty does not. Prettiness is somewhat hard to define; it doesn't sit between our two extremes, lacking strong character or type, variety, or unity. It’s maybe charm without any of these stronger companions, and as a result, it always feels weak, making it the go-to choice for those with less robust artistic palates.

The sculpture of ancient Egypt is an instance of great unity in conception, and the suppression of variety to a point at which life scarcely exists. The lines of the Egyptian figures are simple and long, the surfaces smooth and unvaried, no action is allowed to give variety to the pose, the placing of one foot a little in front of the other being alone permitted in the standing figures; the arms, when not hanging straight down the sides, are flexed stiffly at the elbow at right angles; the heads stare straight before them. The expression of sublimity is complete, and this was, of course, what was aimed at. But how cold and terrible is the lack of that play and variety that alone show life. What a relief it is, at the British Museum, to go into the Elgin Marble room and be warmed by the noble life pulsating in the Greek work, after visiting the cold Egyptian rooms.

The sculpture of ancient Egypt demonstrates remarkable unity in design, but the lack of variety is so extreme that it barely conveys life. The lines of the Egyptian figures are simple and elongated, with smooth, uniform surfaces. No movement is allowed to add diversity to the pose; the only variation in the standing figures is one foot slightly placed in front of the other. The arms, when not hanging straight down, are stiffly bent at the elbow at right angles, while the heads gaze straight ahead. This creates a sense of sublime presence, which was the intended goal. However, the absence of playfulness and variety, which are essential for showing life, feels stark and unsettling. It's such a relief to enter the Elgin Marble room at the British Museum and feel the vibrant life in the Greek sculptures after experiencing the coldness of the Egyptian exhibits.

In what we call a perfect face it is not so much the perfect regularity of shape and balance in the features that charms us, not the things that belong to an ideal type, but rather the subtle variations 136from this type that are individual to the particular head we are admiring. A perfect type of head, if such could exist, might excite our wonder, but would leave us cold. But it can never exist in life; the slightest movement of the features, which must always accompany life and expression, will mar it. And the influence of these habitual movements on the form of the features themselves will invariably mould them into individual shapes away from the so-called perfect type, whatever may have been nature's intention in the first instance.

In what we consider a perfect face, it's not really about the perfect symmetry and balance of the features that captivates us, nor is it the traits that fit an ideal standard. Instead, it's the subtle variations from this standard that are unique to the specific face we’re admiring. A perfect version of a head, if it could even exist, might amaze us, but it wouldn't evoke any warmth. However, such a perfect type can never exist in reality; the slightest movement of the features, which always comes with life and expression, would ruin it. Moreover, the regular movements of the face will inevitably shape the features into unique forms that deviate from the so-called perfect type, regardless of what nature intended in the beginning.

If we call these variations from a common type in the features imperfections, as it is usual to do, it would seem to be the imperfections of perfection that charm and stir us; and that perfection without these so-called imperfections is a cold, dead abstraction, devoid of life: that unity without variety is lifeless and incapable of touching us.

If we refer to these differences from a common type in features as imperfections, which is common practice, it seems to be the imperfections of perfection that attract and move us; and perfection without these so-called imperfections is a cold, lifeless concept, lacking vitality: that unity without variety is lifeless and unable to engage us.

On the other hand, variety without unity to govern it is a riotous exuberance of life, lacking all power and restraint and wasting itself in a madness of excess.

On the other hand, variety without a unifying force is just chaotic energy, lacking control and wasting itself in a frenzy of overindulgence.

So that in art a balance has to be struck between these two opposing qualities. In good work unity is the dominating quality, all the variety being done in conformity to some large idea of the whole, which is never lost sight of, even in the smallest detail of the work. Good style in art has been defined as "variety in unity," and Hogarth's definition of composition as the art of "varying well" is similar. And I am not sure that "contrasts in harmony" would not be a suggestive definition of good colour.

In art, there needs to be a balance between these two opposing qualities. In quality work, unity is the main focus, and all the variety exists in alignment with a larger concept of the whole, which is always kept in mind, even in the smallest details of the piece. Good style in art has been described as "variety in unity," and Hogarth's definition of composition as the art of "varying well" conveys a similar idea. I also think that "contrasts in harmony" could be an insightful definition of good color.

Let us consider first variety and unity as they are related to line drawing, and afterwards to mass drawing.

Let's first look at variety and unity in relation to line drawing, and then to mass drawing.


137

XI
RHYTHM: VARIETY OF LINE

Line rhythm or music depends on the shape of your lines, their relation to each other and their relation to the boundaries of your panel. In all good work this music of line is in harmony with the subject (the artistic intention) of your picture or drawing.

Line rhythm or music relies on how your lines are shaped, how they relate to each other, and how they connect with the edges of your panel. In all great work, this line music harmonizes with the subject (the artistic intention) of your picture or drawing.

The two lines with the least variation are a perfectly straight line and a circle. A perfectly straight line has obviously no variety at all, while a circle, by curving at exactly the same ratio all along, has no variation of curvature, it is of all curves the one with the least possible variety. These two lines are, therefore, two of the dullest, and are seldom used in pictures except to enhance the beauty and variety of others. And even then, subtle variations, some amount of play, is introduced to relieve their baldness. But used in this way, vertical and horizontal lines are of the utmost value in rectangular pictures, uniting the composition to its bounding lines by their parallel relationship with them. And further, as a contrast to the richness and beauty of curves they are of great value, and are constantly used for this purpose. The group of mouldings cutting against the head in a portrait, or the lines of a column used to accentuate the curved forms of a face or 138figure, are well-known instances; and the portrait painter is always on the look out for an object in his background that will give him such straight lines. You may notice, too, how the lines drawn across a study in order to copy it (squaring it out, as it is called) improve the look of a drawing, giving a greater beauty to the variety of the curves by contrast with the variety lacking in straight lines.

The two lines with the least variation are a perfectly straight line and a circle. A perfectly straight line has no variety at all, while a circle, by curving at the exact same ratio all the way around, has no variation in curvature; it has the least variety of all curves. Therefore, these two lines are among the dullest and are rarely used in artwork except to enhance the beauty and variety of other elements. Even then, subtle variations or some play is introduced to relieve their blandness. However, when used this way, vertical and horizontal lines become extremely valuable in rectangular images, connecting the composition to its border lines through their parallel relationship. Furthermore, as a contrast to the richness and beauty of curves, they hold great value and are constantly employed for this reason. The group of moldings cutting against the head in a portrait or the lines of a column used to highlight the curved features of a face or 138figure are well-known examples; and the portrait artist is always looking for objects in the background that will provide such straight lines. You may also notice how the lines drawn across a study to copy it (called squaring it out) improve the appearance of a drawing, enhancing the beauty of the curves by contrasting them with the uniformity of straight lines.

The perfect curve of the circle should always be avoided in the drawing of natural objects (even a full moon), and in vital drawings of any sort some variety should always be looked for. Neither should the modelling of the sphere ever occur in your work, the dullest of all curved surfaces.

The perfect curve of a circle should always be avoided when drawing natural objects (even a full moon), and in any important drawings, some variety should always be sought. The modeling of a sphere should also never appear in your work, as it is the dullest of all curved surfaces.

Although the curve of the perfect circle is dull from its lack of variety, it is not without beauty, and this is due to its perfect unity. It is of all curves the most perfect example of static unity. Without the excitement of the slightest variation it goes on and on for ever. This is, no doubt, the reason why it was early chosen as a symbol of Eternity, and certainly no more perfect symbol could be found.

Although the shape of the perfect circle may seem boring because it lacks variety, it still holds beauty, thanks to its flawless unity. Out of all shapes, it serves as the best example of static unity. Without the thrill of even the slightest change, it continues endlessly. This is probably why it was chosen early on as a symbol of Eternity, and it’s clear that no better symbol could exist.

The circle seen in perspective assumes the more beautiful curve of the ellipse, a curve having much variety; but as its four quarters are alike, not so much as a symmetrical figure can have.

The circle viewed in perspective takes on the more appealing shape of an ellipse, a form that offers much variety; however, since its four sections are identical, it can't compare to a truly symmetrical figure.

Perhaps the most beautiful symmetrically curved figure of all is the so-called egg of the well-known moulding from such a temple as the Erechtheum, called the egg and dart moulding. Here we have a perfect balance between variety and unity. The curvature is varied to an infinite degree, at no point is its curving at the same ratio as at any 139other point; perhaps the maximum amount of variety that can be got in a symmetrical figure, preserving, as it does, its almost perfect continuity, for it approaches the circle in the even flow of its curvature. This is, roughly, the line of the contour of a face, and you may note how much painters who have excelled in grace have insisted on it in their portraits. Gainsborough and Vandyke are striking, instances.

Perhaps the most beautiful symmetrically curved shape of all is the egg from the well-known molding found in temples like the Erechtheum, known as the egg and dart molding. Here we see a perfect balance between variety and unity. The curvature varies infinitely; at no point is its curve the same ratio as at any other point. This allows for perhaps the maximum amount of variety that can be achieved in a symmetrical figure while maintaining its nearly perfect continuity, as it approaches a circle with the smooth flow of its curvature. This is, roughly, the contour line of a face, and you can see how much painters who master grace have emphasized this in their portraits. Gainsborough and Vandyke are striking examples.

Diagram VII. EGG AND DART MOULDING FROM ONE OF THE CARYATIDES FROM THE ERECHTHEUM IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM

Diagram VII.

Diagram 7.

EGG AND DART MOULDING FROM ONE OF THE CARYATIDES FROM THE ERECHTHEUM IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM

EGG AND DART MOULDING FROM ONE OF THE CARYATIDES FROM THE ERECHTHEUM IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM

The line of a profile is often one of great beauty, only here the variety is apt to overbalance the unity or run of the line. The most beautiful profiles 140are usually those in which variety is subordinated to the unity of the contour. I fancy the Greeks felt this when they did away with the hollow above the nose, making the line of the forehead run, with but little interruption, to the tip of the nose. The unity of line is increased, and the variety made more interesting. The idea that this was the common Greek type is, I should imagine, untrue, for their portrait statues do not show it. 141It does occur in nature at rare intervals, and in most Western nationalities, but I do not think there is much evidence of its ever having been a common type anywhere.

The shape of a profile is often incredibly beautiful, but here, the variety tends to overshadow the flow of the line. The most stunning profiles 140are typically those where variety is secondary to the overall contour. I think the Greeks understood this when they eliminated the dip above the nose, allowing the forehead to connect smoothly to the tip of the nose. This enhances the unity of the line and makes the variety more interesting. However, the idea that this was the typical Greek type is, in my opinion, inaccurate, as their portrait statues don't reflect it. 141It does appear in nature occasionally and among many Western nationalities, but I don’t believe there's much evidence that it was ever a common type anywhere.

Diagram VIII. ILLUSTRATING VARIETY IN SYMMETRY Note how the hollows marked A are opposed by fullnesses marked B.

Diagram VIII.

Diagram VIII.

ILLUSTRATING VARIETY IN SYMMETRY

SHOWING DIVERSITY IN SYMMETRY

Note how the hollows marked A are opposed by fullnesses marked B.

Note how the depressions marked A are contrasted by the bulges marked B.

In drawing or painting a profile this run or unity of the line is the thing to feel, if you would express its particular beauty. This is best done in the case of a painting by finally drawing it with the brush from the background side, after having painted all the variety there is of tone and colour on the face side of the line. As the background usually varies little, the swing of the brush is not hampered on this side as it is on the other. I have seen students worried to distraction trying to paint the profile line from the face side, fearing to lose the drawing by going over the edge. With the edge blurred out from the face side, it is easy to come with a brush full of the colour the background is immediately against the face (a different colour usually from what it is further away), and draw it with some decision and conviction, care being taken to note all the variations on the edge, where the sharpnesses come and where the edge is more lost, &c.

When drawing or painting a profile, the key is to feel the flow or unity of the line if you want to capture its unique beauty. This is best achieved in a painting by finally outlining it with the brush from the background side, after you've painted all the different tones and colors on the face side of the line. Since the background usually doesn't change much, the brush movement is smoother on this side compared to the other. I’ve seen students become extremely frustrated trying to paint the profile line from the face side, worrying that they might lose the drawing by going over the edge. With the edge softened from the face side, it's easier to take a brush filled with the color that the background immediately touches against the face (which is usually a different color than what’s further away) and draw it with some confidence and clarity, making sure to pay attention to all the variations on the edge, noting where the sharp points are and where the edge fades, etc.

Variety in Symmetry.

The contours of the limbs illustrate another form of line variety—what may be called "Variety in Symmetry." While roughly speaking the limbs are symmetrical, each side not only has variety in itself, but there is usually variety of opposition. Supposing there is a convex curve on the one side, you will often have a concave form on the other. Always look out for this in drawing limbs, and it will often improve a poorly drawn part if more of this variation on symmetry is discovered.

The shapes of the limbs show another type of line variety—what can be called "Variety in Symmetry." Generally, the limbs are symmetrical, but each side has its own variety, and there's usually contrasting variation as well. If one side has a convex curve, you’ll often find a concave shape on the opposite side. Always watch for this when drawing limbs; it can often enhance a poorly drawn section if you notice more of this variation in symmetry.

The whole body, you may say, is symmetrical, 143but even here natural conditions make for variety. The body is seldom, except in soldiering, held in a symmetrical position. The slightest action produces the variety we are speaking about. The accompanying sketches will indicate what is meant.

The entire body, you could say, is symmetrical, 143but even here natural conditions create variety. The body is rarely, except in military contexts, held in a symmetrical position. The smallest movement brings about the variety we’re talking about. The sketches that follow will show what is meant.

Diagram IX. ILLUSTRATING VARIETY IN SYMMETRY Note how the hollows marked A are opposed by the fullnesses marked B.

Diagram IX.

Diagram IX.

ILLUSTRATING VARIETY IN SYMMETRY

Showcasing variety in symmetry

Note how the hollows marked A are opposed by the fullnesses marked B.

Note how the indentations marked A are contrasted by the bulges marked B.

Of course the student, if he has any natural ability, instinctively looks out for all these variations that give the play of life to his drawing. It is not for him in the full vigour of inspiration that books such as this are written. But there may come a time when things "won't come," and it is then that it is useful to know where to look for possible weak spots in your work.

Of course, if the student has any natural talent, they will instinctively seek out all the variations that bring life to their drawing. This kind of book isn't for those fully immersed in inspiration. However, there may be times when creativity just isn't flowing, and it's in those moments that it's helpful to know where to identify any weak areas in your work.

Variety of Thickness and Accent.

A line of equal thickness is a very dead and inexpressive thing compared with one varied and stressed at certain points. If you observe any of the boundaries in nature we use a line to express, you will notice some points are accentuated, attract the attention, more than others. The only means you have to express this in a line drawing is by darkening and sharpening the line. At other points, where the contour is almost lost, the line can be soft and blurred.

A line of uniform thickness is quite flat and uninspiring compared to one that varies and has emphasis at certain points. If you look at any of the natural boundaries we use a line to depict, you'll see some areas stand out and grab attention more than others. The only way to convey this in a line drawing is by making the line darker and sharper. In other areas, where the outline is almost faded, the line can be soft and blurred.

It is impossible to write of the infinite qualities of variety that a fine draughtsman will get into his line work; they must be studied first hand. But on this play of thickness and quality of line much of the vitality of your drawing will depend.

It’s impossible to capture the endless qualities of variety that a skilled draftsman can achieve in their line work; they need to be experienced firsthand. However, the way you vary the thickness and quality of your lines will significantly impact the vitality of your drawing.


144

XII
RHYTHM: UNITY OF LINE

Unity of line is a bigger quality than variety, and as it requires a larger mental grasp, is more rarely met with. The bigger things in drawing and design come under its consideration, including, as it does, the relation of the parts to the whole. Its proper consideration would take us into the whole field of Composition, a subject needing far more consideration than it can be given in this book.

The unity of line is a more important quality than variety, and since it requires a broader understanding, it's less commonly found. The major aspects of drawing and design fall under its scope, including how the parts relate to the whole. A thorough exploration of this topic would lead us into the entire realm of Composition, a subject that deserves much more attention than can be provided in this book.

In almost all compositions a rhythmic flow of lines can be traced. Not necessarily a flow of actual lines (although these often exist); they may be only imaginary lines linking up or massing certain parts, and bringing them into conformity with the rhythmic conception of the whole. Or again, only a certain stress and flow in the forms, suggesting line movements. But these line movements flowing through your panel are of the utmost importance; they are like the melodies and subjects of a musical symphony, weaving through and linking up the whole composition.

In almost all compositions, you can see a rhythmic flow of lines. It doesn’t have to be a flow of real lines (though they often are there); they can be just imaginary lines connecting or grouping certain parts, making them fit with the rhythmic idea of the entire piece. Alternatively, there might just be a certain emphasis and movement in the shapes, hinting at line movements. But these line movements that flow through your piece are incredibly important; they’re like the melodies and themes in a musical symphony, intertwining and connecting the entire composition.

Often, the line of a contour at one part of a picture is picked up again by the contour of some object at another part of the composition, and although no actual line connects them, a unity is thus set up between them. (See diagrams, pages 166 and 168, illustrating line compositions of pictures 145by Botticelli and Paolo Veronese). This imaginary following through of contours across spaces in a composition should always be looked out for and sought after, as nothing serves to unite a picture like this relationship of remote parts. The flow of these lines will depend on the nature of the subject: they will be more gracious and easy, or more vigorous and powerful, according to the demands of your subject.

Often, the outline of one part of an image is echoed by the outline of another object in a different section of the composition, and even though there isn’t a direct line connecting them, a sense of unity is created between them. (See diagrams, pages 166 and 168, illustrating line compositions of pictures 145 by Botticelli and Paolo Veronese). This imaginary connection of outlines across the spaces in a composition should always be looked for and encouraged, as nothing brings a picture together like this relationship between distant elements. The flow of these lines will depend on the nature of the subject: they may be more graceful and fluid or more dynamic and strong, based on what your subject requires.

This linking up of the contours applies equally well to the drawing of a single figure or even a head or hand, and the student should always be on the look out for this uniting quality. It is a quality of great importance in giving unity to a composition.

This connection of contours also works well for drawing a single figure, head, or hand, and students should always be on the lookout for this unifying quality. It's a crucial aspect in creating harmony in a composition.

Parallelism

When groups of lines in a picture occur parallel to each other they produce an accentuation of the particular quality the line may contain, a sort of sustained effect, like a sustained chord on an organ, the effect of which is much bigger than that of the same chord struck staccato. This sustained quality has a wonderful influence in steadying and uniting your work.

When lines in a picture run parallel to each other, they highlight the specific qualities those lines have, creating a lasting effect similar to a sustained chord on an organ, which is much more powerful than the same chord played in a short, sharp way. This enduring quality has a great impact on making your work feel more stable and cohesive.

This parallelism can only be used successfully with the simplest lines, such as a straight line or a simple curve; it is never advisable except in decorative patterns to be used with complicated shapes. Blake is very fond of the sustained effect parallelism gives, and uses the repetition of curved and straight lines very often in his compositions. Note in Plate I of the Job series, page 146 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXI], the use made of this sustaining quality in the parallelism of the sheep's backs in the background and the parallel upward flow of the lines of the figures. In Plate II you see it used in the curved lines of the figures on either side of 146the throne above, and in the two angels with the scroll at the left-hand corner. Behind these two figures you again have its use accentuating by repetition the peaceful line of the hacks of the sheep. The same thing can be seen in Plate XXXI, B, where the parallelism of the back lines of the sheep and the legs of the seated figures gives a look of peace contrasting with the violence of the messenger come to tell of the destruction of Job's sons. The emphasis that parallelism gives to the music of particular lines is well illustrated in all Blake's work. He is a mine of information on the subject of line rhythm. Compare A with Plate XXXI, C; note how the emotional quality is dependent in both cases on the parallelism of the upward flow of the lines. How also in Plate I he has carried the vertical feeling even into the sheep in the front, introducing little bands of vertical shading to carry through the vertical lines made by the kneeling figures. And in the last plate, "So the Lord blessed the latter end of Job more than the beginning," note how the greater completeness with which the parallelism has been carried out has given a much greater emphasis to the effect, expressing a greater exaltation and peace than in Plate XXXI, A. Notice in Plate XXXI, D, where "The just, upright man is laughed to scorn," how this power of emphasis is used to increase the look of scorn hurled at Job by the pointing fingers of his three friends.

This parallelism can only be effectively used with the simplest lines, like a straight line or a basic curve; it’s generally not a good idea, except in decorative patterns, to apply it to complex shapes. Blake really appreciates the sustained effect that parallelism creates and frequently incorporates the repetition of curved and straight lines in his compositions. In Plate I of the Job series, page 146 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXI], you can see how this sustaining quality is used in the parallel lines of the sheep’s backs in the background and the parallel upward flow of the lines in the figures. In Plate II, it’s evident in the curved lines of the figures on either side of 146 the throne above, and in the two angels with the scroll in the left-hand corner. Behind these two figures, it further emphasizes the calm line created by the backs of the sheep through repetition. This effect is also visible in Plate XXXI, B, where the parallel lines of the sheep's backs and the legs of the seated figures convey a sense of peace that contrasts sharply with the violence of the messenger coming to announce the destruction of Job’s sons. The emphasis that parallelism gives to the flow of certain lines is well illustrated in all of Blake’s work. He provides a wealth of insights into line rhythm. Compare A with Plate XXXI, C; notice how the emotional quality in both cases relies on the parallel upward flow of the lines. Also, in Plate I, he has extended the vertical sense even to the sheep in the foreground, introducing small bands of vertical shading to enhance the vertical lines created by the kneeling figures. And in the final plate, “So the Lord blessed the latter end of Job more than the beginning,” observe how the more complete execution of the parallelism has created a much stronger emphasis on the effect, conveying a greater sense of exaltation and peace compared to Plate XXXI, A. In Plate XXXI, D, where “The just, upright man is laughed to scorn,” notice how this emphasis is used to heighten the scorn directed at Job by the pointing fingers of his three friends.

Of the use of this principle in curved forms, the repetition of the line of the back in stooping figures is a favourite device with Blake. There will be found instances of this in Plate XXXII, E and G. (Further instances will be found on reference 147to Plates VII, VIII, XIII, and XVII, in Blake's Job.) In the last instance it is interesting to note how he has balanced the composition, which has three figures kneeling on the right and only one on the left. By losing the outline of the third figure on the right and getting a double line out of the single figure on the left by means of the outline of the mass of hair, and also by shading this single figure more strongly, he has contrived to keep a perfect balance. The head of Job is also turned to the left, while he stands slightly on that side, still further balancing the three figures on the right. (This does not show so well in the illustration here reproduced as in the original print.)

In using this principle with curved shapes, Blake often repeats the line of the back in bent figures. You can find examples of this in Plate XXXII, E and G. (More examples can be found by referencing 147 in Plates VII, VIII, XIII, and XVII, in Blake's Job.) In the last example, it's interesting to see how he balanced the composition with three figures kneeling on the right and only one on the left. By omitting the outline of the third figure on the right and creating a double line from the single figure on the left through the outline of the hair, and by shading the single figure more strongly, he maintained perfect balance. Job's head is also turned to the left, while he slightly leans that way, further balancing the three figures on the right. (This isn't as clear in the illustration shown here as it is in the original print.)

Plate XXXI. Thus did Job continually. (Plate I, Blake's Job) And I only am escaped alone to tell thee. (Plate IV, Blake's Job) So the Lord blessed the latter end of Job more than the beginning. (Plate XXI, Blake's Job) The just upright man is laughed to scorn. (Plate X, Blake's Job)

Plate XXXI.

Plate 31.

Thus did Job continually. (Plate I, Blake's Job)

Thus did Job continually. (Plate I, Blake's Job)

And I only am escaped alone to tell thee. (Plate IV, Blake's Job)

And I alone have escaped to tell you. (Plate IV, Blake's Job)

So the Lord blessed the latter end of Job more than the beginning. (Plate XXI, Blake's Job)

So the Lord blessed the end of Job more than the beginning. (Plate XXI, Blake's Job)

The just upright man is laughed to scorn. (Plate X, Blake's Job)

The righteous man is mocked. (Plate X, Blake's Job)

Some rude things were said above about the straight line and the circle, on account of their lack of variety, and it is true that a mathematically straight line, or a mathematically perfect circle, are never found in good artistic drawing. For without variety is no charm or life. But these lines possess other qualities, due to their maximum amount of unity, that give them great power in a composition; and where the expression of sublimity or any of the deeper and more profound sentiments are in evidence, they are often to be found.

Some harsh comments were made earlier about straight lines and circles because they lack variety, and it's true that a mathematically straight line or a perfectly round circle aren't typically seen in great artistic work. Without variety, there's no charm or life. However, these shapes have other qualities, thanks to their maximum unity, that give them significant strength in a composition. You'll often find them where expressions of sublimity or deeper, more profound feelings are present.

The rows of columns in a Greek temple, the clusters of vertical lines in a Gothic cathedral interior, are instances of the sublimity and power they possess. The necessary play that makes for vitality—the "dither" as we called this quality in a former chapter—is given in the case of the Greek temple by the subtle curving of the lines of columns and steps, and by the rich variety of the sculpture, and in the case of the Gothic cathedral by a rougher cutting of the stone blocks and the variety in the 148colour of the stone. But generally speaking, in Gothic architecture this particular quality of "dither" or the play of life in all the parts is conspicuous, the balance being on the side of variety rather than unity. The individual workman was given a large amount of freedom and allowed to exercise his personal fancy. The capitals of columns, the cusping of windows, and the ornaments were seldom repeated, but varied according to the taste of the craftsman. Very high finish was seldom attempted, the marks of the chisel often being left showing in the stonework. All this gave a warmth and exuberance of life to a fine Gothic building that makes a classical building look cold by comparison. The freedom with which new parts were built on to a Gothic building is another proof of the fact that it is not in the conception of the unity of the whole that their chief charm consists.

The rows of columns in a Greek temple and the clusters of vertical lines in a Gothic cathedral highlight their grandeur and strength. The necessary dynamic that contributes to vitality—the "dither," as we previously referred to this quality—is present in the Greek temple through the gentle curve of the columns and steps, and through the diverse sculpture. In contrast, the Gothic cathedral showcases this dynamic with the rougher texture of the stone blocks and the variety in the 148colors of the stone. Generally speaking, in Gothic architecture, this particular quality of "dither" or the play of life across all the components is very noticeable, with an emphasis on variety over unity. Craftsmen had considerable freedom and were encouraged to express their individual style. The capitals of columns, the cusping of windows, and the decorations were rarely duplicated but varied based on the craftsman's preference. High levels of finish were usually not pursued, with the chisel marks often visible in the stonework. All this contributed to a warmth and vibrancy in a fine Gothic building, making classical structures seem cold by comparison. The ease with which new sections could be added to a Gothic building further demonstrates that its primary appeal lies not in the idea of a unified whole.

On the other hand, a fine classic building is the result of one large conception to which every part has rigorously to conform. Any addition to this in after years is usually disastrous. A high finish is always attempted, no tool marks nor any individuality of the craftsman is allowed to mar the perfect symmetry of the whole. It may be colder, but how perfect in sublimity! The balance here is on the side of unity rather than variety.

On the other hand, a great classic building comes from one cohesive vision that every part must strictly follow. Any additions made later often end up ruining the original design. A high level of finish is always aimed for; no tool marks or individual touches from the craftsman are allowed to disrupt the perfect symmetry of the overall structure. It might feel more impersonal, but how stunning it is in its greatness! Here, the emphasis is on unity rather than variety.

The strength and sublimity of Norman architecture is due to the use of circular curves in the arches, combined with straight lines and the use of square forms in the ornaments—lines possessed of least variety.

The strength and beauty of Norman architecture come from the use of circular curves in the arches, along with straight lines and square shapes in the decorations—lines that have the least variety.

All objects with which one associates the look of strength will be found to have straight lines in their composition. The look of strength in a strong 149man is due to the square lines of the contours, so different from the rounded forms of a fat man. And everyone knows the look of mental power a square forehead gives to a head and the look of physical power expressed by a square jaw. The look of power in a rocky landscape or range of hills is due to the same cause.

All things that give off an impression of strength have straight lines in their design. The appearance of strength in a strong 149man comes from the square lines of his features, which are so different from the rounded shapes of a heavier man. Everyone can recognize how a square forehead adds to the impression of mental power, just as a square jaw shows physical strength. The sense of power in a rocky landscape or a range of hills comes from the same reason.

Plate XXXII. When the Almighty was yet with me, when my children were about me. (Plate II, Blake's Job) With dreams upon my bed Thou scarest me, and affrightest me with visions. (Plate XI, Blake's Job) Printed the wrong way up in order to show that the look of horror is not solely dependent on the things represented but belongs to the rhythm, the pattern of the composition. And my servant Job shall pray for you. (Plate XVIII, Blake's Job) When the morning-stars sang together, and all the sons of God shouted for joy. (Plate XIV, Blake's Job)

Plate XXXII.

Plate 32.

When the Almighty was yet with me, when my children were about me. (Plate II, Blake's Job)

When the Almighty was still with me, when my children were around me. (Plate II, Blake's Job)

With dreams upon my bed Thou scarest me, and affrightest me with visions. (Plate XI, Blake's Job)

With dreams on my bed, you frighten me and scare me with visions. (Plate XI, Blake's Job)

Printed the wrong way up in order to show that the look of horror is not solely dependent on the things represented but belongs to the rhythm, the pattern of the composition.

Printed the wrong way up to demonstrate that the expression of horror isn't just based on the objects depicted but is tied to the rhythm and pattern of the whole layout.

And my servant Job shall pray for you. (Plate XVIII, Blake's Job)

And my servant Job will pray for you. (Plate XVIII, Blake's Job)

When the morning-stars sang together, and all the sons of God shouted for joy. (Plate XIV, Blake's Job)

When the morning stars sang together, and all the sons of God shouted with joy. (Plate XIV, Blake's Job)

The Horizontal and the Vertical

The horizontal and the vertical are two very important lines, the horizontal being associated with calm and contemplation and the vertical with a feeling of elevation. As was said above, their relation to the sides of the composition to which they are parallel in rectangular pictures is of great importance in uniting the subject to its bounding lines and giving it a well-knit look, conveying a feeling of great stability to a picture.

The horizontal and vertical lines are really important. The horizontal line represents calm and reflection, while the vertical line evokes a sense of height. As mentioned earlier, their relationship to the sides of the composition that they're parallel to in rectangular images is crucial. It helps connect the subject to its borders, giving it a cohesive appearance and a strong sense of stability.

How impressive and suggestive of contemplation is the long line of the horizon on a calm day at sea, or the long, horizontal line of a desert plain! The lack of variety, with all the energy and vitality that accompany it, gives one a sense of peace and rest, a touch of infinity that no other lines can convey. The horizontal lines which the breeze makes on still water, and which the sky often assumes at sunset, affect us from the same harmonic cause.

How striking and thought-provoking is the long stretch of the horizon on a calm day at sea, or the endless, flat expanse of a desert! The simplicity, combined with the energy and vitality of it all, brings a sense of peace and tranquility, a hint of infinity that no other lines can express. The horizontal lines created by the breeze on still water, and the way the sky often appears at sunset, influence us for the same harmonious reasons.

The stone pine and the cypress are typical instances of the sublime associated with the vertical in nature. Even a factory chimney rising above a distant town, in spite of its unpleasant associations, is impressive, not to speak of the beautiful spires of some of our Gothic cathedrals, pointing upwards. How well Constable has used the vertical sublimity of the spire of Salisbury Cathedral can be seen in his picture, at the Victoria and Albert Museum, where he has contrasted it with the gay tracery of an arch 150of elm trees. Gothic cathedrals generally depend much on this vertical feeling of line for their impressiveness.

The stone pine and the cypress are classic examples of the grandeur associated with verticality in nature. Even a factory chimney towering over a distant town, despite its negative connotations, is striking, not to mention the stunning spires of some of our Gothic cathedrals, reaching skyward. You can see how effectively Constable captured the vertical grandeur of the spire of Salisbury Cathedral in his painting at the Victoria and Albert Museum, where he contrasts it with the vibrant patterns of elm trees. Gothic cathedrals often rely heavily on this vertical sense of line to create their impressive presence.

The Romans knew the expressive power of the vertical when they set up a lonely column as a monument to some great deed or person. And a sense of this sublimity may be an unconscious explanation of the craze for putting towers and obelisks on high places that one comes across in different parts of the country, usually called someone's "folly."

The Romans understood the impressive impact of vertical structures when they erected a solitary column to honor a significant achievement or individual. This sense of grandeur might unconsciously explain the obsession with placing towers and obelisks on elevated spots around the country, often referred to as someone's "folly."

In the accompanying diagrams, A, B, C and D, E, F, pages 152 [Transcribers Note: Diagram X] and 153 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XI], are examples of the influence to be associated with the horizontal and vertical lines. A is nothing but six straight lines drawn across a rectangular shape, and yet I think they convey something of the contemplative and peaceful sense given by a sunset over the sea on a calm evening. And this is entirely due to the expressive power straight lines possess, and the feelings they have the power to call up in the mind. In B a little more incident and variety has been introduced, and although there is a certain loss of calm, it is not yet enough to destroy the impression. The line suggesting a figure is vertical and so plays up to the same calm feeling as the horizontal lines. The circular disc of the sun has the same static quality, being the curve most devoid of variety. It is the lines of the clouds that give some excitement, but they are only enough to suggest the dying energy of departing day.

In the diagrams accompanying this text, A, B, C, and D, E, F, on pages 152 [Transcribers Note: Diagram X] and 153 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XI], we see examples of how horizontal and vertical lines influence perception. A consists of just six straight lines across a rectangle, yet I believe they evoke a contemplative and peaceful feeling similar to a sunset over the sea on a calm evening. This effect is entirely due to the expressive nature of straight lines and the emotions they can evoke in our minds. In B, a bit more action and variety have been added, and while this introduces some tension, it doesn’t completely disrupt the overall calmness. The vertical line suggesting a figure reinforces the serene feeling created by the horizontal lines. The circular disc of the sun also shares this stillness, being the curve with the least variation. It’s the lines of the clouds that provide a bit of excitement, but they only hint at the fading energy of the setting day.

Now let us but bend the figure in a slight curve, as at C, and destroy its vertical direction, partly cover the disc of the sun so as to destroy the complete circle, and all this is immediately altered, our 151calm evening has become a windy one, our lines now being expressive of some energy.

Now let's just bend the shape into a slight curve, like at C, and change its vertical direction, partially cover the sun's disc to break the complete circle, and immediately everything changes; our 151calm evening has turned into a windy one, and our lines now express some energy.

PLATE XXXIII. FÊTE CHAMPÊTRE. GIORGIONI (LOUVRE) Note the straight line introduced in seated female figure with flute to counteract rich forms.

PLATE XXXIII.

PLATE 33.

FÊTE CHAMPÊTRE. GIORGIONI (LOUVRE)

COUNTRY FESTIVAL. GIORGIONI (LOUVRE)

Note the straight line introduced in seated female figure with flute to counteract rich forms.

Note the straight line introduced in the seated female figure with the flute to balance out the rich shapes.

To take a similar instance with vertical lines. Let D represent a row of pine trees in a wide plain. Such lines convey a sense of exaltation and infinite calm. Now if some foliage is introduced, as at E, giving a swinging line, and if this swinging line is carried on by a corresponding one in the sky, we have introduced some life and variety. If we entirely destroy the vertical feeling and bend our trees, as at F, the expression of much energy will be the result, and a feeling of the stress and struggle of the elements introduced where there was perfect calm.

To illustrate a similar example with vertical lines, let's say D stands for a row of pine trees in a wide open field. These lines give off a vibe of uplift and endless tranquility. Now, if we add some foliage, like at E, creating a flowing line, and this flowing line is echoed by a similar one in the sky, we bring in some life and variation. However, if we completely eliminate the vertical aspect and bend our trees, as seen at F, we create an impression of high energy, evoking a sense of tension and conflict where there was once complete peace.

It is the aloofness of straight lines from all the fuss and flurry of variety that gives them this calm, infinite expression. And their value as a steadying influence among the more exuberant forms of a composition is very great. The Venetians knew this and made great use of straight lines among the richer forms they so delighted in.

The distance of straight lines from all the chaos and variety gives them this calm, endless look. Their role as a stabilizing force among the more vibrant shapes in a composition is really significant. The Venetians understood this and cleverly incorporated straight lines alongside the more extravagant forms they loved.

It is interesting to note how Giorgione in his "Fête Champêtre" of the Louvre (see illustration, page 151 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXIII]), went out of his way to get a straight line to steady his picture and contrast with the curves. Not wanting it in the landscape, he has boldly made the contour of the seated female conform to a rigid straight line, accentuated still further by the flute in her hand. If it were not for this and other straight lines in the picture, and a certain squareness of drawing in the draperies, the richness of the trees in the background, the full forms of the flesh and drapery would be too much, and the effect become sickly, if not positively sweet. Van Dyck, also, used to go out of his way to introduce a hard straight line near the head in his portraits for the same 154reason, often ending abruptly, without any apparent reason, a dark background in a hard line, and showing a distant landscape beyond in order to get a light mass to accentuate the straight line.

It's interesting to see how Giorgione, in his "Fête Champêtre" at the Louvre (see illustration, page 151 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXIII]), intentionally created a straight line to steady his composition and provide contrast with the curves. Not satisfied with a natural landscape, he boldly shaped the contour of the seated woman to fit a rigid straight line, further emphasized by the flute in her hand. Without this and other straight lines in the artwork, along with a certain squareness in the drapery, the richness of the trees in the background and the fullness of the figures would overwhelm the viewer and create an effect that feels overly sweet, if not outright sickly. Van Dyck also made a point of incorporating a hard straight line near the heads in his portraits for the same reason, often ending abruptly, without any clear rationale, a dark background with a hard line, while including a distant landscape beyond to create a light mass that highlights the straight line.

Diagram X. ILLUSTRATING, A, CALM RHYTHMIC INFLUENCE OF HORIZONTAL LINES SUCH AS A SUNSET OVER THE SEA MIGHT GIVE; B, INTRODUCTION OF LINES CONVEYING SOME ENERGY; C, SHOWING DESTRUCTION OF REPOSE BY FURTHER CURVING OF LINES. THE CALM EVENING HAS BECOME A WINDY ONE.

Diagram X.

Diagram X.

ILLUSTRATING, A, CALM RHYTHMIC INFLUENCE OF HORIZONTAL LINES SUCH AS A SUNSET OVER THE SEA MIGHT GIVE; B, INTRODUCTION OF LINES CONVEYING SOME ENERGY; C, SHOWING DESTRUCTION OF REPOSE BY FURTHER CURVING OF LINES. THE CALM EVENING HAS BECOME A WINDY ONE.

ILLUSTRATING, A, CALM RHYTHMIC INFLUENCE OF HORIZONTAL LINES SUCH AS A SUNSET OVER THE SEA MIGHT GIVE; B, INTRODUCTION OF LINES CONVEYING SOME ENERGY; C, SHOWING DESTRUCTION OF REPOSE BY FURTHER CURVING OF LINES. THE CALM EVENING HAS BECOME A WINDY ONE.

Diagram XI. ILLUSTRATING, D, RHYTHMIC INFLUENCE OF VERTICAL LINES; E, THE INTRODUCTION OF SOME VARIETY; F, THE DESTRUCTION OF THE VERTICAL AND CONSEQUENT LOSS OF REPOSE.

Diagram XI.

Diagram 11.

ILLUSTRATING, D, RHYTHMIC INFLUENCE OF VERTICAL LINES; E, THE INTRODUCTION OF SOME VARIETY; F, THE DESTRUCTION OF THE VERTICAL AND CONSEQUENT LOSS OF REPOSE.

ILLUSTRATING, D, RHYTHMIC INFLUENCE OF VERTICAL LINES; E, THE INTRODUCTION OF SOME VARIETY; F, THE DESTRUCTION OF THE VERTICAL AND CONSEQUENT LOSS OF REPOSE.

The rich modelling and swinging lines of the "Bacchus and Ariadne" of Titian in the National Gallery, here reproduced, page 154 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXIV], would be too gross, were it not for the steadying influence of the horizontal lines in the sky and the vertical lines of the tree-trunks.

The rich details and flowing lines of Titian's "Bacchus and Ariadne" in the National Gallery, shown here, page 154 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXIV], would be overwhelming if it weren't for the calming effect of the horizontal lines in the sky and the vertical lines of the tree trunks.

While speaking of this picture, it might not be out of place to mention an idea that occurred to me as to the reason for the somewhat aggressive standing leg of the female figure with the cymbals leading the procession of revellers. I will not attempt any analysis of this composition, which is ably gone into in another book of this series. But the standing leg of this figure, given such prominence in the composition, has always rather puzzled me. I knew Titian would not have given it that vigorous stand without a good reason. It certainly does not help the run of the composition, although it may be useful in steadying it, and it is not a particularly beautiful thing in itself, as the position is one better suited to a man's leg than to a woman's. But if you cover it over with your finger and look at the composition without it, I think the reason of its prominence becomes plainer. Titian evidently had some trouble, as well he might have, with the forward leg of the Bacchus. He wished to give the look of his stepping from the car lightly treading the air, as gods may be permitted to do. But the wheel of the car that comes behind the foot made it difficult to evade the idea that he was stepping on it, which would be the way an ordinary mortal 155would alight. I think the duty of the aggressive standing leg of the leading Bacchante, with its great look of weight, is to give a look of lightness to this forward leg of Bacchus, by contrast—which it certainly does. On examining the picture closely in a good light, you will see that he has had the foot of Bacchus in several positions before he got it right. Another foot can distinctly be seen about a couple of inches or so above the present one. The general vertical direction of this leg is also against its look of lightness and motion, tending rather to give it a stationary, static look. I could not at first see why he did not bring the foot further to the right, which would have aided the lightness of the figure and increased its movement. But you will observe that this would have hurled the whole weight of the mass of figures on the right, forward on to the single figure of Ariadne, and upset the balance; as you can see by covering this leg with your finger and imagining it swinging to the right. So that Titian, having to retain the vertical position for Bacchus' forward leg, used the aggressive standing leg of the cymbal lady to accentuate its spring and lightness.

While discussing this painting, it seems appropriate to bring up a thought I had about why the female figure with the cymbals, who leads the group of partygoers, has such an assertive standing leg. I won't delve into an analysis of this composition, as that's thoroughly covered in another book in this series. However, the prominent standing leg of this figure has always intrigued me. I knew Titian wouldn’t have given it such a bold stance without a valid reason. It certainly doesn't enhance the flow of the composition, though it may help stabilize it, and it’s not particularly beautiful in itself, as that position is more fitting for a man than a woman. But if you cover it with your finger and view the composition without it, the reason for its prominence becomes clearer. Titian clearly had some challenges, as he likely would have, with the forward leg of Bacchus. He aimed to portray him as lightly stepping from the chariot, as gods are allowed to do. However, the wheel of the chariot behind the foot complicates the idea, making it look like he's stepping on it, which would be typical for an ordinary person 155. I think the purpose of the aggressive standing leg of the leading Bacchante, with its substantial appearance, is to provide a contrast that makes Bacchus’ forward leg appear lighter, which it definitely does. Upon closer examination in good lighting, you can see that Titian positioned Bacchus' foot in several ways before getting it right. Another foot can be clearly seen a couple of inches above the current one. The overall vertical direction of this leg also works against its appearance of lightness and movement, giving it a more stationary look. Initially, I couldn’t understand why he didn't move the foot further to the right, which would have helped the figure feel lighter and more dynamic. However, you'll notice that this would have shifted the entire weight of the group of figures to the right, onto the single figure of Ariadne, upsetting the balance; you can see this by covering this leg with your finger and imagining it swinging to the right. So, Titian, needing to maintain the vertical position for Bacchus' forward leg, used the assertive standing leg of the cymbal lady to emphasize its spring and lightness.

Plate XXXIV. BACCHUS AND ARIADNE. TITIAN Photo Hanfstaengl

Plate XXXIV.

Plate 34.

BACCHUS AND ARIADNE. TITIAN

Bacchus and Ariadne. Titian

Photo Hanfstaengl

Photo Hanfstaengl

A feeling of straight-up-ness in a figure or of the horizontal plane in anything will produce the same effect as a vertical or horizontal line without any actual line being visible. Blake's "Morning Stars Singing Together" is an instance of the vertical chord, although there is no actual upright line in the figures. But they all have a vigorous straight-up-ness that gives them the feeling of peace and elevation coupled with a flame-like line running through them that gives them their joyous energy.

A sense of uprightness in a figure or the horizontal plane in anything will create the same effect as a vertical or horizontal line, even if no actual line is visible. Blake's "Morning Stars Singing Together" is an example of a vertical chord, even though there isn't a real upright line in the figures. However, they all exhibit a strong sense of uprightness that conveys feelings of peace and elevation, combined with a flame-like line running through them that adds to their cheerful energy.

Diagram XII. A, B, C

Diagram XII.

Diagram 12.

A, B, C

A, B, C

The Right Angle

The combination of the vertical with the horizontal produces one of the strongest and most arresting 156chords that you can make, and it will be found to exist in most pictures and drawings where there is the expression of dramatic power. The cross is the typical example of this. It is a combination of lines that instantly rivets the attention, and has probably a more powerful effect upon the mind—quite apart from anything symbolised by it—than any other simple combinations that could have been devised. How powerful is the effect of a vertical figure, or even a post, seen cutting the long horizontal line of the horizon on the sea-shore. Or a telegraph post by the side of the road, seen against the long horizontal line of a hill at sunset. The look of power given by the vertical lines of a contracted brow is due to the same cause. The vertical furrows of the brow continuing the lines of the nose, make a continuous vertical which the horizontal lines of the brow cross (see Fig. A in the illustration). The same cause gives the profile a powerful look when the eyebrows make a horizontal line contrasting with the vertical line of the forehead (Fig. B). Everybody knows the look of power associated with a square brow: it is not that the square forehead gives the look of a larger brain capacity, for if the forehead protrudes in a curved line, as at C, the look of power is lost, although there is obviously more room for brains.

The mix of vertical and horizontal lines creates one of the most striking and captivating 156chords you can make, and it's commonly found in most paintings and drawings that express dramatic power. The cross is a classic example of this. It's a combination of lines that quickly grabs attention and likely has a more profound effect on the mind—regardless of its symbolism—than any other simple combination that could be imagined. Just think about how powerful a vertical figure, or even a post, looks against the long horizontal line of the horizon at the beach. Or a telegraph pole beside the road, set against the wide horizontal line of a hill at sunset. The strong look created by the vertical lines of a furrowed brow comes from the same principle. The vertical lines of the brow, extending from the nose, create a continuous vertical that the horizontal lines of the brow intersect (see Fig. A in the illustration). The same idea gives a powerful appearance to a profile when the eyebrows form a horizontal line that contrasts with the vertical line of the forehead (Fig. B). Everyone recognizes the strong look associated with a square brow: it’s not that a square forehead suggests a larger brain capacity; if the forehead juts out in a curved line, as shown at C, the strong look disappears, even though there’s clearly more space for brains.

This power of the right angle is well exemplified in Watts' "Love and Death," here reproduced, page 158 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXV]. 157In this noble composition, in the writer's opinion one of the most sublime expressions produced by nineteenth-century art, the irresistible power and majesty of the slowly advancing figure of Death is largely due to the right angle felt through the pose. Not getting it in the contour, Watts has boldly introduced it by means of shading the farther arm and insisting on the light upper edge of the outstretched arm and hand, while losing somewhat the, outline of the head beyond. Note also the look of power the insistence on square forms in the drapery gives this figure. The expression is still further emphasised by the hard square forms of the steps, and particularly by the strong horizontal line of the first step so insisted on, at right angles to the vertical stand of the figure; and also the upright lines of the doorway above. In contrast with the awful sublimity of this figure of Death, how touching is the expression of the little figure of Love, trying vainly to stop the inevitable advance. And this expression is due to the curved lines on which the action of the figure is hung, and the soft undulating forms of its modelling. Whereas the figure of Death is all square lines and flat crisp planes, the whole hanging on a dramatic right angle; this figure is all subtle fullness both of contour and modelling melting one into the other, the whole hung upon a rich full curve starting at the standing foot of the advancing figure. And whereas the expression of Death is supported and emphasised by the hard, square forms and texture of the stone steps, the expression of Love is supported and emphasised by the rounded forms and soft texture of the clustering roses. On this contrast of line and form, so in sympathy with the 159profound sentiment to which this picture owes its origin, the expressive power of this composition will be found to depend.

This power of the right angle is clearly demonstrated in Watts' "Love and Death," shown here, page 158 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXV]. 157In this remarkable piece, which the writer considers one of the most extraordinary expressions of nineteenth-century art, the undeniable strength and grandeur of the slowly approaching figure of Death is largely thanks to the right angle felt through the pose. Instead of incorporating it into the contour, Watts boldly introduces it through shading on the farther arm and by highlighting the light upper edge of the outstretched arm and hand, while the outline of the head becomes somewhat blurred. Notice also how the emphasis on square shapes in the drapery adds to the impression of power in this figure. This expression is further emphasized by the hard square shapes of the steps, particularly the strong horizontal line of the first step, which sits at right angles to the vertical stance of the figure, along with the upright lines of the doorway above. In stark contrast to the terrifying majesty of the figure of Death, the small figure of Love is remarkably touching, attempting unsuccessfully to halt the inevitable progress. This expression arises from the curved lines that convey the action of the figure and the soft, flowing forms of its modeling. While the figure of Death is defined by square lines and flat, sharp planes, all hinging on a dramatic right angle, the figure of Love is characterized by subtle fullness in both contour and modeling, blending seamlessly into one another, all supported by a rich curve that begins at the standing foot of the advancing figure. Additionally, while Death's expression is reinforced by the hard, square forms and texture of the stone steps, Love's expression is highlighted by the rounded shapes and soft texture of the cluster of roses. The powerful contrast of line and form, which resonates with the profound emotion that inspired this artwork, is where the expressive impact of this composition lies.

Diagram XIII. ILLUSTRATING SOME OF THE LINES ON WHICH THE RHYTHMIC POWER OF THIS PICTURE DEPENDS.

Diagram XIII.

Diagram 13.

ILLUSTRATING SOME OF THE LINES ON WHICH THE RHYTHMIC POWER OF THIS PICTURE DEPENDS.

ILLUSTRATING SOME OF THE LINES ON WHICH THE RHYTHMIC POWER OF THIS PICTURE DEPENDS.

Plate XXXV. LOVE AND DEATH. BY G.F. WATTS A noble composition, founded on the power of the right angle in the figure of Death, in contrast with the curved lines in the figure of Love. (See diagram opposite.) Photo Hollyer

Plate XXXV.

Plate 35.

LOVE AND DEATH. BY G.F. WATTS

LOVE AND DEATH. BY G.F. WATTS

A noble composition, founded on the power of the right angle in the figure of Death, in contrast with the curved lines in the figure of Love. (See diagram opposite.)

A noble design, based on the strength of the right angle in the figure of Death, contrasting with the curved lines in the figure of Love. (See diagram opposite.)

Photo Hollyer

Photo by Hollyer

In the diagram accompanying the reproduction of this picture I have tried to indicate in diagrammatical form some of the chief lines of its anatomy.

In the diagram that comes with this picture, I've attempted to show some of the main features of its anatomy in a visual format.

In these diagrams of the anatomy of compositions the lines selected are not always very obvious in the originals and are justly much broken into by truths of natural appearance. But an emotional significance depending on some arrangement of abstract lines is to be found underlying the expression in every good picture, carefully hidden as it is by all great artists. And although some apology is perhaps necessary for the ugliness of these diagrams, it is an ugliness that attends all anatomy drawings. If the student will trace them and put his tracing over the reproductions of the originals, they will help him to see on what things in the arrangement the rhythmic force of the picture depends.

In these diagrams of the anatomy of compositions, the selected lines aren’t always very clear in the originals and are often disrupted by the realities of natural appearance. However, there’s an emotional significance rooted in the arrangement of abstract lines found in every good picture, carefully concealed by all great artists. While some excuse may be needed for the unattractiveness of these diagrams, this ugliness is common to all anatomy drawings. If the student traces these diagrams and overlays their tracing on the reproductions of the originals, it will help them understand what elements in the arrangement contribute to the rhythmic impact of the picture.

Other lines, as important as those selected, may have been overlooked, but the ones chosen will suffice to show the general character of them all.

Other lines, just as important as the ones selected, might have been missed, but the chosen ones will be enough to illustrate their overall character.


There is one condition in a composition, that is laid down before you begin, and that is the shape of your panel or canvas. This is usually a rectangular form, and all the lines of your design will have to be considered in relation to this shape. Vertical and horizontal lines being parallel to the boundaries of rectangular pictures, are always right and immediately set up a relationship, as we have seen.

There’s one requirement for a composition that you need to consider before you start, and that’s the shape of your panel or canvas. This is typically a rectangular shape, and all the lines in your design will need to be thought about in relation to this shape. Vertical and horizontal lines, being parallel to the edges of rectangular images, are always correct and instantly create a relationship, as we have observed.

The arresting power of the right angle exists at each corner of a rectangular picture, where the 160vertical sides meet the horizontal base, and this presents a difficulty, because you do not wish the spectator's attention drawn to the corners, and this dramatic combination of lines always attracts the eye. A favourite way of getting rid of this is to fill them with some dark mass, or with lines swinging round and carrying the eye past them, so that the attention is continually swung to the centre of the picture. For lines have a power of directing the attention, the eye instinctively running with them, and this power is of the greatest service in directing the spectator to the principal interest.

The captivating effect of the right angle is present at each corner of a rectangular image, where the 160vertical sides meet the horizontal base. This creates a challenge, as you don't want the viewer's attention to be drawn to the corners, and this striking combination of lines tends to pull the eye in. A common solution to this issue is to fill those corners with some dark shape or with lines that curve around, guiding the eye past them, so that the focus stays directed toward the center of the image. Lines have a strong ability to guide attention, with the eye instinctively following them, and this ability is invaluable for directing the viewer to the main point of interest.

It is this trouble with the corners that makes the problem of filling a square so exacting. In an ordinary rectangular panel you have a certain amount of free space in the middle, and the difficulty of filling the corners comfortably does not present itself until this space is arranged for. But in a square, the moment you leave the centre you are in one or other of the corners, and the filling of them governs the problem much more than in the case of other shapes. It is a good exercise for students to give themselves a square to fill, in order to understand this difficulty and learn to overcome it.

It’s the issue with the corners that makes filling a square so challenging. In a regular rectangular panel, you have some free space in the middle, and you don’t really encounter the problem of fitting the corners until you’ve arranged that space. But with a square, as soon as you move away from the center, you find yourself in one of the corners, and how you fill those corners really influences the overall problem more than it does with other shapes. It’s a useful exercise for students to challenge themselves with filling a square to grasp this difficulty and learn how to tackle it.

Other lines that possess a direct relation to a rectangular shape are the diagonals. Many compositions that do not hang on a vertical or horizontal basis are built on this line, and are thus related to the bounding shape.

Other lines that are directly related to a rectangular shape are the diagonals. Many compositions that don't rely on a vertical or horizontal orientation are built on this line, and are therefore connected to the bounding shape.

Plate XXXVI. THE SURRENDER OF BREDA VELAZQUEZ (PRADO) Photo Anderson

Plate XXXVI.

Plate 36.

THE SURRENDER OF BREDA VELAZQUEZ (PRADO)

THE SURRENDER OF BREDA VELAZQUEZ (PRADO)

Photo Anderson

Photo by Anderson

When vertical, horizontal, or diagonal lines are referred to, it must not be assumed that one means in all cases naked lines. There is no pure vertical line in a stone pine or cypress tree, nor pure horizontal 161 line in a stretch of country, but the whole swing of their lines is vertical or horizontal. And in the same way, when one speaks of a composition being hung upon a diagonal, it is seldom that a naked diagonal line exists in the composition, but the general swing is across the panel in harmony with one or other diagonal. And when this is so, there is a unity set up between the design and its boundaries. A good instance of vertical, horizontal, and diagonal lines to unite a picture is Velazquez's "The Surrender of Breda," here reproduced. Note the vertical chord in the spears on the left, continued in the leg of the horse and front leg of the figure receiving the key, and the horizontal line made by the dark mass of distant city, to be continued by the gun carried over the shoulder of the figure with the slouch hat behind the principal group. Velazquez has gone out of his way to get this line, as it could hardly have been the fashion to carry a gun in this position, pointing straight at the head of the man behind. Horizontal lines also occur in the sky and distant landscape, one running right through the group of spears. The use of the diagonal is another remarkable thing in the lines of this picture. If you place a ruler on the slanting line of the flag behind the horse's head to the right, you find it is exactly parallel to a diagonal drawn from the top right-hand corner to the lower left-hand corner. Another line practically parallel to this diagonal is the line of the sword belonging to the figure offering the key, the feeling of which is continued in the hand and key of this same figure. It may be noted also that the back right leg of the horse in the front is parallel to the other diagonal, the under side of it 162being actually on the diagonal and thus brought into relation with the bounding lines of the picture. And all these lines, without the artifice being too apparent, give that well-knit, dignified look so in harmony with the nature of the subject.

When talking about vertical, horizontal, or diagonal lines, it's important not to assume we're always referring to simple, unembellished lines. There’s no pure vertical line in a stone pine or cypress tree, nor a pure horizontal line in a stretch of land; the overall flow of their lines appears vertical or horizontal. Similarly, when a composition is said to be organized along a diagonal, there’s rarely a simple diagonal line present, but the overall flow harmonizes with one diagonal or another. In such cases, a unity is created between the design and its boundaries. A great example of using vertical, horizontal, and diagonal lines to bring together a picture is Velazquez's "The Surrender of Breda," which is shown here. Notice the vertical alignment in the spears on the left, extending through the leg of the horse and the front leg of the figure receiving the key, and the horizontal line created by the dark shape of the distant city, which continues through the gun slung over the shoulder of the figure with the slouch hat behind the main group. Velazquez intentionally positioned this line, as carrying a gun like this would not have been common, with it pointing straight at the head of the man behind. Horizontal lines also appear in the sky and far-off landscape, with one cutting right through the group of spears. The use of diagonal lines is another notable feature in this picture. If you place a ruler along the slanted line of the flag behind the horse's head to the right, you’ll see it's perfectly parallel to a diagonal line drawn from the top right corner to the bottom left corner. Another line that is nearly parallel to this diagonal is the sword of the figure offering the key, and that feeling carries through to the hand and key of the same figure. Additionally, the back right leg of the horse in front parallels the other diagonal, with its underside actually lying on that diagonal, connecting with the borders of the picture. All these lines work together without their design being too obvious, creating a cohesive and dignified appearance that complements the subject matter beautifully.

Curved Lines

Curved lines have not the moral integrity of straight lines. Theirs is not so much to minister to the expression of the sublime as to woo us to the beauteous joys of the senses. They hold the secrets of charm. But without the steadying power of straight lines and flatnesses, curves get out of hand and lose their power. In architecture the rococo style is an example of this excess. While all expressions of exuberant life and energy, of charm and grace depend on curved lines for their effect, yet in their most refined and beautiful expression they err on the side of the square forms rather than the circle. When the uncontrolled use of curves approaching the circle and volute are indulged in, unrestrained by the steadying influence of any straight lines, the effect is gross. The finest curves are full of restraint, and excessive curvature is a thing to be avoided in good drawing. We recognise this integrity of straight lines when we say anybody is "an upright man" or is "quite straight," wishing to convey the impression of moral worth.

Curved lines don’t have the moral integrity of straight lines. They’re not really meant to express the sublime but to draw us into the beautiful joys of the senses. They hold the secrets of charm. However, without the steadying influence of straight lines and flat surfaces, curves can get out of control and lose their effectiveness. In architecture, the rococo style is a prime example of this excess. While all expressions of vibrant life and energy, charm, and grace rely on curved lines for their effect, in their most refined and beautiful forms, they lean more towards square shapes than circles. When curves that approach circles and spirals are used excessively, without the balancing influence of straight lines, the result can be overwhelming. The best curves are those that show restraint, and too much curvature should be avoided in good design. We recognize this integrity of straight lines when we say someone is "an upright person" or "quite straight," intending to suggest moral worth.

Rubens was a painter who gloried in the unrestrained expression of the zeal to live and drink deeply of life, and glorious as much of his work is, and wonderful as it all is, the excessive use of curves and rounded forms in his later work robs it of much of its power and offends us by its grossness. His best work is full of squarer drawing and planes.

Rubens was a painter who celebrated the unrestricted expression of the passion for life and fully experiencing it. While much of his work is magnificent and stunning, the overuse of curves and rounded shapes in his later pieces takes away a lot of its impact and can come off as overly excessive. His best work features more angular drawing and surfaces.

163Always be on the look out for straightnesses in curved forms and for planes in your modelling.

163Always be on the lookout for straight lines in curved shapes and for flat surfaces in your modeling.

Let us take our simplest form of composition again, a stretch of sea and sky, and apply curved lines where we formerly had straight lines. You will see how the lines at A, page 164 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XIV], although but slightly curved, express some energy, where the straight lines of our former diagram expressed repose, and then how in B and C the increasing curvature of the lines increases the energy expressed, until in D, where the lines sweep round in one vigorous swirl, a perfect hurricane is expressed. This last, is roughly the rhythmic basis of Turner's "Hannibal Crossing the Alps" in the Turner Gallery.

Let’s revisit our simplest form of composition: a stretch of sea and sky. This time, let’s use curved lines instead of straight ones. You’ll notice how the lines at A, page 164 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XIV], even though they’re only slightly curved, convey some energy, while the straight lines from our previous diagram conveyed calmness. Then, in B and C, as the curvature of the lines increases, the energy they express also grows, until we reach D, where the lines curve dramatically in one powerful swirl, representing a full hurricane. This last example roughly captures the rhythmic foundation of Turner’s “Hannibal Crossing the Alps” in the Turner Gallery.

One of the simplest and most graceful forms the tying lines of a composition may take is a continuous flow, one line evolving out of another in graceful sequence, thus leading the eye on from one part to another and carrying the attention to the principal interests.

One of the simplest and most elegant ways to create a visual structure in a composition is through a continuous flow, where one line seamlessly transitions into another in a graceful sequence, guiding the viewer's eye from one area to another and drawing attention to the main points of interest.

Two good instances of this arrangement are Botticelli's "Birth of Venus" and the "Rape of Europa," by Paolo Veronese, reproduced on pages 166 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XV, Plate XXXVII] and 168 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XVI, Plate XXXVIII]. The Venetian picture does not depend so much on the clarity of its line basis as the Florentine. And it is interesting to note how much nearer to the curves of the circle the lines of Europa approach than do those of the Venus picture. Were the same primitive treatment applied to the later work painted in the oil medium as has been used by Botticelli in his tempera picture, the robustness of the curves would have offended and been too gross for the simple formula; whereas overlaid and hidden under such a rich abundance of natural truth as it is in this gorgeous picture, we are too 167much distracted and entertained by such wealth to have time to dwell on the purity of the line arrangement at its base. And the rich fullness of line arrangement, although rather excessive, seen detached, is in keeping with the sumptuous luxuriance the Venetian loved so well to express. But for pure line beauty the greater restraint of the curves in Botticelli's picture is infinitely more satisfying, though here we have not anything like the same wealth and richness of natural appearance to engage our attention, and the innocent simplicity of the technique leaves much more exposed the structure of lines, which in consequence play a greater part in the effect of the picture.

Two good examples of this arrangement are Botticelli's "Birth of Venus" and Paolo Veronese's "Rape of Europa," found on pages 166 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XV, Plate XXXVII] and 168 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XVI, Plate XXXVIII]. The Venetian painting relies less on its clear lines than the Florentine piece does. It's interesting to note how much closer the lines of Europa get to circular curves than those in the Venus painting. If the same basic approach used by Botticelli in his tempera painting had been applied to the later oil painting, the boldness of the curves would have clashed and felt too heavy for the simple design. However, hidden beneath such a rich display of natural beauty in this stunning painting, we're too distracted and engaged by its wealth to focus on the simplicity of the line arrangement underneath. The abundance of line work, though somewhat excessive when viewed alone, fits well with the lavish style that the Venetians loved to showcase. But for pure line beauty, the more restrained curves in Botticelli's piece are far more satisfying, even though it doesn't have the same richness and vibrancy of natural appearance to capture our attention. The innocent simplicity of the technique leaves the line structure more visible, which plays a greater role in the overall effect of the painting.

Diagram XIV. ILLUSTRATING POWER OF CURVED LINES TO CONVEY ENERGY. A, B, C, D.

Diagram XIV.

Diagram 14.

ILLUSTRATING POWER OF CURVED LINES TO CONVEY ENERGY. A, B, C, D.

ILLUSTRATING THE POWER OF CURVED LINES TO CONVEY ENERGY. A, B, C, D.

Diagram XIV. ILLUSTRATING POWER OF CURVED LINES TO CONVEY ENERGY. A, B, C, D.

Diagram XIV.

Diagram 14.

ILLUSTRATING POWER OF CURVED LINES TO CONVEY ENERGY. A, B, C, D.

ILLUSTRATING THE POWER OF CURVED LINES TO CONVEY ENERGY. A, B, C, D.

Diagram XV. ILLUSTRATING THE FLOW OF LINES ON WHICH THE RHYTHMIC UNITY OF THIS PICTURE DEPENDS.

Diagram XV.

Diagram 15.

ILLUSTRATING THE FLOW OF LINES ON WHICH THE RHYTHMIC UNITY OF THIS PICTURE DEPENDS.

ILLUSTRATING THE FLOW OF LINES THAT CREATE THE RHYTHMIC UNITY OF THIS PICTURE.

Plate XXXVII. THE BIRTH OF VENUS. BOTTICELLI (FLORENCE) A beautiful example of Botticelli's refined line rhythm. (See diagram on opposite page for analysis.) Photo Anderson

Plate XXXVII.

Plate 37.

THE BIRTH OF VENUS. BOTTICELLI (FLORENCE)

THE BIRTH OF VENUS. BOTTICELLI (FLORENCE)

A beautiful example of Botticelli's refined line rhythm. (See diagram on opposite page for analysis.)

A great example of Botticelli's elegant line rhythm. (See the diagram on the opposite page for analysis.)

Photo Anderson

Anderson's Photo

In both cases note the way the lines lead up to the principal subject, and the steadying power introduced by means of horizontal, vertical, and other straight lines. Veronese has contented himself with keeping a certain horizontal feeling in the sky, culminating in the straight lines of the horizon and of the sea edge. And he has also introduced two pyramids, giving straight lines in among the trees, the most pronounced of which leads the eye straight on to the principal head.

In both cases, notice how the lines guide you to the main subject, and the stabilizing effect created by horizontal, vertical, and other straight lines. Veronese has maintained a certain horizontal feel in the sky, reaching a peak at the straight lines of the horizon and the edge of the sea. He has also added two pyramids, incorporating straight lines among the trees, with the most prominent one directing the viewer's gaze directly to the main figure.

Botticelli has first the long line of the horizon echoed in the ground at the right-hand lower corner. And then he has made a determined stand against the flow of lines carrying you out of the picture on the right, by putting straight, upright trees and insisting upon their straightness.

Botticelli starts with the long line of the horizon reflected in the ground at the lower right corner. Then, he firmly counters the flow of lines that lead you out of the picture on the right by placing straight, upright trees and emphasizing their verticality.

Diagram XVI. ILLUSTRATING SOME OF THE MAIN LINES ON WHICH THE RHYTHMIC UNITY OF THIS PICTURE DEPENDS.

Diagram XVI.

Diagram 16.

ILLUSTRATING SOME OF THE MAIN LINES ON WHICH THE RHYTHMIC UNITY OF THIS PICTURE DEPENDS.

ILLUSTRATING SOME OF THE MAIN LINES ON WHICH THE RHYTHMIC UNITY OF THIS PICTURE DEPENDS.

Plate XXXVIII. THE RAPE OF EUROPA. BY PAOLO VERONESE (VENICE) A composition of rich full forms and rich full colour. (See the diagram on opposite page for analysis of line rhythm.) Photo Anderson

Plate XXXVIII.

Plate 38.

THE RAPE OF EUROPA. BY PAOLO VERONESE (VENICE)

THE RAPE OF EUROPA. BY PAOLO VERONESE (VENICE)

A composition of rich full forms and rich full colour. (See the diagram on opposite page for analysis of line rhythm.)

A composition of rich, full shapes and vibrant colors. (See the diagram on the opposite page for a breakdown of line rhythm.)

Photo Anderson

Anderson's Photo

Another rhythmic form the lines at the basis of a composition may take is a flame-like flow of lines; curved lines meeting and parting and meeting again, or even crossing in one continual movement onwards. A striking instance of the use of this 169quality is the work of the remarkable Spanish painter usually called El Greco, two of whose works are here shown (page 172 [Transcribers Note: Plate XL]). Whatever may be said by the academically minded as to the incorrectness of his drawing, there can be no two opinions as to the remarkable rhythmic vitality of his work. The upward flow of his lines and the flame-like flicker of his light masses thrills one in much the same way as watching a flaring fire. There is something exalting and stimulating in it, although, used to excess as he sometimes uses it, it is apt to suffer from lack of repose. Two examples of his pictures are reproduced here, and illustrate his use of this form of movement in the lines and masses of his compositions. Nowhere does he let the eye rest, but keeps the same flickering movement going throughout all his masses and edges. The extraordinary thing about this remarkable painter is that while this restless, unrestrained form of composition makes his work akin to the rococo work of a later period, there is a fiery earnestness and sincerity in all he does, only to be matched among the primitive painters of the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries, and very different from the false sentiment of the later school.

Another rhythmic form that the lines at the foundation of a composition can take is a flame-like flow; curved lines that meet, separate, and come together again, or even intersect in a continuous forward movement. A striking example of this quality is found in the work of the notable Spanish painter commonly known as El Greco, two of whose pieces are shown here (page 172 [Transcribers Note: Plate XL]). Regardless of what some academically minded critics may say about the inaccuracies in his drawing, there is no doubt about the impressive rhythmic vitality of his work. The upward sweep of his lines and the flame-like flicker of his light masses stimulates viewers much like watching a blazing fire. There’s something uplifting and energizing about it, although when used excessively, as he sometimes does, it can come off as lacking in calmness. Two examples of his paintings are reproduced here, illustrating his use of this movement within the lines and masses of his compositions. He never allows the eye to rest, maintaining that flickering movement throughout all his forms and edges. The astonishing aspect of this remarkable painter is that while this restless, uninhibited style of composition aligns his work with the later rococo style, there is a passionate earnestness and sincerity in everything he creates, reminiscent only of the primitive painters from the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries, contrasting sharply with the insincere sentimentality of later art schools.

Blake was also fond of this flame line, but usually used it in combination with more straight lines than the energetic Spaniard allowed himself. Plates III and V in the Job series are good examples of his use of this form. In both cases it will be seen that he uses it in combination with the steadying influence of straight lines, which help to keep the balance and repose necessary in the treatment of even the most violent subjects in art.

Blake also liked this flame line, but he typically used it alongside more straight lines than the dynamic Spaniard allowed himself. Plates III and V in the Job series are great examples of how he used this form. In both instances, you can see that he combines it with the stabilizing effect of straight lines, which help maintain the balance and calm needed in addressing even the most intense subjects in art.

A continual interruption in the flow of lines, and 171a harsh jarring of one against another in an angular, jagged fashion, produces a feeling of terror and horror. A streak of fork lightning is a natural example of this. The plate of Blake's No. XI, p. 148 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXII], reproduced here, is also a good example. I have had it put sideways on so that you may see that the look of horror is not only in the subject but belongs to the particular music of line in the picture. The effect of the harsh contrasts in the lines is further added to by the harsh contrasts of tone: everywhere hard lights are brought up against hard darks. Harsh contrasts of tone produce much the same look of terror as harsh contrasts of line. Battle pictures are usually, when good, full of these clashes of line and tone, and thrilling dramatic effects in which a touch of horror enters are usually founded on the same principle. In the picture by Paolo Uccello in the National Gallery, reproduced on page 170 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXIX], a milder edition of this effect is seen. The artist has been more interested in the pageantry of war and a desire to show off his newly-acquired knowledge of perspective, than anything very terrible. The contrasts of line are here but confined to the smaller parts, and there are no contrasts of light and shade, chiaroscuro not being yet invented. However, it will be seen by the accompanying diagram how consistently the harsh contrasts of line were carried out in the planning of this picture. Notice the unconscious humour of the foreshortened spears and figure carefully arranged on the ground to vanish to the recently discovered vanishing point.

A constant interruption in the flow of lines, and a harsh clashing of one against another in an angular, jagged way, creates a sense of terror and horror. A flash of forked lightning is a natural example of this. The plate from Blake's No. XI, p. 148 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXII], shown here, is also a good example. I've placed it sideways so you can see that the horror isn't just in the subject but also comes from the unique rhythm of lines in the picture. The impact of the harsh contrasts in the lines is enhanced by the stark contrasts in tone: everywhere, bright lights clash with deep darks. Harsh tone contrasts produce a similar sense of terror as harsh line contrasts. Battle scenes usually, when done well, are filled with these clashes of line and tone, and thrilling dramatic effects that include a hint of horror are typically based on the same principle. In the painting by Paolo Uccello in the National Gallery, shown on page 170 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXIX], a milder version of this effect can be seen. The artist was more focused on the spectacle of war and wanted to showcase his newly acquired understanding of perspective than anything particularly terrifying. The contrasts of line are present but limited to smaller parts, and there are no contrasts of light and shade, as chiaroscuro hadn’t been invented yet. However, the accompanying diagram shows how consistently the harsh contrasts of line were implemented in the design of this artwork. Notice the unintentional humor in the foreshortened spears and the figures carefully arranged on the ground to lead to the recently discovered vanishing point.

Diagram XVII. SHOWING THE CLASH OF LINES IN SYMPATHY WITH THE MARTIAL NATURE OF THIS SUBJECT.

Diagram XVII.

Diagram 17.

SHOWING THE CLASH OF LINES IN SYMPATHY WITH THE MARTIAL NATURE OF THIS SUBJECT.

SHOWING THE CONFLICT OF LINES IN ALIGNMENT WITH THE WARRIOR SPIRIT OF THIS TOPIC.

Plate XXXIX. BATTLE OF ST. EGIDIO. PAOLO UCCELLO (NATIONAL GALLERY) Illustrating the effect of jarring lines in composition. (See diagram on opposite page.) Photo Morelli

Plate XXXIX.

Plate 39.

BATTLE OF ST. EGIDIO. PAOLO UCCELLO (NATIONAL GALLERY)

BATTLE OF ST. EGIDIO. PAOLO UCCELLO (NATIONAL GALLERY)

Illustrating the effect of jarring lines in composition. (See diagram on opposite page.)

Illustrating the impact of jarring lines in composition. (See diagram on the opposite page.)

Photo Morelli

Morelli Photo


Lines radiating in smooth curves from a common centre are another form employed to give unity in pictorial design. The point from which they radiate 172need not necessarily be within the picture, and is often considerably outside it. But the feeling that they would meet if produced gives them a unity that brings them into harmonious relationship.

Lines radiating in smooth curves from a common center are another way to create unity in visual design. The point from which they radiate 172 doesn't have to be within the image, and it's often far outside of it. However, the impression that they would converge if extended gives them a unity that connects them in a harmonious way.

There is also another point about radiating lines, and that is their power of setting up a relationship between lines otherwise unrelated. Let us try and explain this. In Panel A, page 174 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XVIII], are drawn some lines at random, with the idea of their being as little related to each other as possible. In B, by the introduction of radiating lines in sympathy with them, they have been brought into some sort of relationship. The line 1-2 has been selected as the dominating line, and an assortment of radiating ones drawn about it. Now, by drawing 7-8, we have set up a relationship between lines 3-4, 5-6, and 1-2, for this line radiates with all of them. Line 9-10 accentuates this relationship with 1-2. The others echo the same thing. It is this echoing of lines through a composition that unites the different parts and gives unity to the whole.

There’s another aspect of radiating lines worth noting: their ability to create connections between lines that wouldn’t normally relate to one another. Let’s explain this. In Panel A, page 174 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XVIII], there are some lines drawn randomly, intended to be as unrelated as possible. In Panel B, by adding radiating lines that resonate with them, these lines have been linked in some way. Line 1-2 is chosen as the dominant line, and several radiating lines are drawn around it. Now, by drawing line 7-8, we have established a connection between lines 3-4, 5-6, and 1-2, since this line radiates towards all of them. Line 9-10 emphasizes this connection with line 1-2. The other lines reflect the same idea. It is this reflection of lines throughout the composition that brings different parts together and creates unity in the whole.

The crossing of lines at angles approaching the right angle is always harsh and somewhat discordant, useful when you want to draw attention dramatically to a particular spot, but to be avoided or covered up at other times. There is an ugly clash of crossing lines in our original scribble, and at C we have introduced a mass to cover this up, and also the angles made by line 3-4 as it crosses the radiating lines above 1-2. With a small mass at 11 to make the balance right, you have a basis for a composition, Diagram C, not at all unpleasing in arrangement, although based on a group of discordant lines drawn at random, but brought into harmony by means of sympathetic radiation.

The intersection of lines at angles close to right angles tends to be jarring and somewhat disharmonious. It's effective for grabbing attention to a specific area, but should be avoided or hidden at other times. In our initial sketch, there's an unpleasant clash of crossing lines, so we added a shape at C to cover it up, as well as the angles created by line 3-4 crossing the lines radiating from 1-2. A small shape at 11 helps balance things out, giving you a foundation for a composition, Diagram C, which is actually quite pleasing in its arrangement, even though it's based on a random mix of discordant lines that achieve harmony through thoughtful placement.

Plate XL. THE ASCENSION OF CHRIST. BY DOMINICO THEOTOCOPULI CALLED EL GRECO. Note the flame-like form and flow of the light masses, and the exalted feeling this conveys. Photo Anderson

Plate XL.

Plate 40.

THE ASCENSION OF CHRIST. BY DOMINICO THEOTOCOPULI CALLED EL GRECO.

THE ASCENSION OF CHRIST. BY DOMENICOS THEOTOCOPULOS KNOWN AS EL GRECO.

Note the flame-like form and flow of the light masses, and the exalted feeling this conveys.

Note the flame-like shape and movement of the light masses, and the uplifting feeling this creates.

Photo Anderson

Anderson's Photo

Plate XLI. THE BAPTISM OF CHRIST. BY DOMINICO THEOTOCOPULI CALLED EL GRECO Another example of his restless, flame-like composition. Photo Anderson

Plate XLI.

Plate 41.

THE BAPTISM OF CHRIST. BY DOMINICO THEOTOCOPULI CALLED EL GRECO

THE BAPTISM OF CHRIST. BY DOMINICO THEOTOCOPULI KNOWN AS EL GRECO

Another example of his restless, flame-like composition.

Another example of his restless, fiery nature.

Photo Anderson

Photo by Anderson

173In Panel D the same group is taken, but this time line 3-4 is used as the dominant one. Line 7-8 introduces 3-4 to 1-2, as it is related to both. Lines 9-10 and 11-12 introduce 3-4 to 5-6, as they are related to both, and the others follow on the same principle. By introducing some masses covering up the crossings, a rhythmic basis for a composition (Diagram E) entirely different from C is obtained, based on the same random group.

173In Panel D, the same group is used, but this time line 3-4 is the main one. Line 7-8 connects 3-4 to 1-2, as it relates to both. Lines 9-10 and 11-12 link 3-4 to 5-6, as they connect to both, and the others follow the same idea. By adding some masses that cover the crossings, a rhythmic foundation for a composition (Diagram E) is created that is completely different from C, based on the same random group.

In Panel F, 1-2 has been taken as the dominant line, and sympathetic lines drawn on the same principle as before. By again covering the crossings and introducing balancing masses we obtain yet another arrangement from the same random scribble.

In Panel F, 1-2 is seen as the main line, and similar lines are drawn based on the same idea as before. By covering the intersections again and adding balancing shapes, we create another arrangement from the same random doodle.

I would suggest this as a new game to students, one giving another two or three lines drawn in a panel at random, the problem being to make harmonious arrangements by the introduction of others radiating in sympathy.

I would suggest this as a new game for students, where they are given two or three lines randomly drawn in a panel. The challenge is to create harmonious arrangements by adding other lines that resonate well with them.

Often in a picture certain conditions are laid down to start with; something as ugly as our original group of lines drawn at random has to be treated pictorially, and it is by means such as here suggested that its discordancy can be subdued and the whole brought into harmony with the shape of your panel. The same principles apply in colour, discordant notes can be brought into harmony by the introduction of others related to both the original colours, thus leading the eye from one to the other by easy stages and destroying the shock. Somewhat in the way a musician will take you from one key into another very remote by means of a few chords leading from the one to the other; whereas, had he taken you straight there, the shock would have 175been terrible. As it is, these transitions from one key into another please and surprise one, and are very effective.

Often in a painting, certain conditions are established from the start; something as unappealing as our original random lines needs to be handled artistically, and it is through methods like those suggested here that its dissonance can be softened and the entire composition can align with the shape of your canvas. The same principles apply to color; discordant hues can be made harmonious by incorporating others that relate to both the original colors, leading the viewer from one to the other in smooth transitions and eliminating the jarring effect. It’s similar to how a musician guides you from one key to another very different key through a series of chords connecting the two; if they had jumped straight to the remote key, it would have created a shocking experience. Instead, these transitions from one key to another are pleasing and surprising, and they are very effective.

Diagram XVIII. SHOWING HOW LINES UNRELATED CAN BE BROUGHT INTO HARMONY BY THE INTRODUCTION OF OTHERS IN SYMPATHY WITH THEM. A. LINES DRAWN AT RANDOM. B. TAKING LINE 1-2 AS DOMINANT LINE. C. AS AT B BUT WITH ADDITION OF MASSES TO COVER LINES CROSSING AND RESTORE BALANCE D. TAKING LINE 3-4 AS DOMINANT LINE E. AS AT D BUT WITH ADDITION OF MASSES TO COVER LINES CROSSING AND GIVE BALANCE F. TAKING LINE 5-6 AS DOMINANT LINE G. AS AT F BUT WITH MASSES TO COVER LINES CROSSING & TO GIVE BALANCE

Diagram XVIII.

Diagram 18.

SHOWING HOW LINES UNRELATED CAN BE BROUGHT INTO HARMONY BY THE INTRODUCTION OF OTHERS IN SYMPATHY WITH THEM.

SHOWING HOW UNRELATED LINES CAN BE BROUGHT INTO HARMONY BY INTRODUCING OTHERS THAT RESONATE WITH THEM.

A. LINES DRAWN AT RANDOM.

Random lines drawn.

B. TAKING LINE 1-2 AS DOMINANT LINE.

B. TAKING LINE 1-2 AS THE MAIN LINE.

C. AS AT B BUT WITH ADDITION OF MASSES TO COVER LINES CROSSING AND RESTORE BALANCE

C. AS AT B BUT WITH ADDITION OF MASSES TO COVER LINES CROSSING AND RESTORE BALANCE

D. TAKING LINE 3-4 AS DOMINANT LINE

D. USING LINE 3-4 AS THE MAIN LINE

E. AS AT D BUT WITH ADDITION OF MASSES TO COVER LINES CROSSING AND GIVE BALANCE

E. AS AT D BUT WITH ADDED MASSES TO COVER LINES CROSSING AND PROVIDE BALANCE

F. TAKING LINE 5-6 AS DOMINANT LINE

F. TAKING LINE 5-6 AS THE MAIN LINE

G. AS AT F BUT WITH MASSES TO COVER LINES CROSSING & TO GIVE BALANCE

G. AS AT F BUT WITH WEIGHTS TO COVER LINES CROSSING & TO PROVIDE BALANCE

Diagram XIX. SHOWING HOW LINES UNRELATED CAN BE BROUGHT INTO HARMONY BY THE INTRODUCTION OF OTHERS IN SYMPATHY WITH THEM. H. LINES DRAWN AT RANDOM. I. LINES DRAWN AT RANDOM. J. ADDITIONAL LINES DRAWN TO RELATE ORIGINAL LINES AND BRING THE WHOLE INTO HARMONY TAKING LINE 1-2, AS DOMINANT. K. ADDITIONAL LINES DRAWN TO RELATE ORIGINAL LINES TAKING 1-2 AS DOMINANT. L. THE SAME AS J WITH ADDITION OF MASSES TO COVER CROSSING OF LINES. M. THE SAME AS AT K WITH ADDITION OF MASSES TO COVER CROSSING LINES.

Diagram XIX.

Diagram 19.

SHOWING HOW LINES UNRELATED CAN BE BROUGHT INTO HARMONY BY THE INTRODUCTION OF OTHERS IN SYMPATHY WITH THEM.

SHOWING HOW UNRELATED LINES CAN BE BROUGHT INTO HARMONY BY INTRODUCING OTHERS THAT RESONATE WITH THEM.

H. LINES DRAWN AT RANDOM.

H. Lines drawn randomly.

I. LINES DRAWN AT RANDOM.

Randomly Drawn Lines.

J. ADDITIONAL LINES DRAWN TO RELATE ORIGINAL LINES AND BRING THE WHOLE INTO HARMONY TAKING LINE 1-2, AS DOMINANT.

J. ADDITIONAL LINES DRAWN TO RELATE ORIGINAL LINES AND BRING THE WHOLE INTO HARMONY TAKING LINE 1-2, AS DOMINANT.

K. ADDITIONAL LINES DRAWN TO RELATE ORIGINAL LINES TAKING 1-2 AS DOMINANT.

K. ADDITIONAL LINES DRAWN TO RELATE ORIGINAL LINES TAKING 1-2 AS DOMINANT.

L. THE SAME AS J WITH ADDITION OF MASSES TO COVER CROSSING OF LINES.

L. THE SAME AS J WITH ADDED MASSES TO COVER CROSSING OF LINES.

M. THE SAME AS AT K WITH ADDITION OF MASSES TO COVER CROSSING LINES.

M. THE SAME AS AT K, WITH THE ADDITION OF MASSES TO COVER CROSSING LINES.

In H, I have introduced a straight line into our 176initial scribble, and this somewhat increases the difficulties of relating them. But by drawing 7-8 and 9-10 radiating from 1-2, we have introduced this straight line to 5-6. For although 5-6 and 9-10 do not radiate from the same point, they are obviously in sympathy. It is only a short part of the line at the end marked 5 that is out of sympathy, and had 5-6 taken the course of the dotted line, it would have radiated from the same point as 9-10. We still have line 3-4 to account for. But by drawing 11-12 we bring it into relationship with 5-6, and so by stages through 9-10 and 7-8 to the original straight line 1-2. Line 13-14, by being related to 3-4, 11-12, and also 5-6, still further harmonises the group, and the remainder echo 5-6 and increase the dominant swing. At L masses have been introduced, covering crossing lines, and we have a basis for a composition.

In H, I added a straight line to our 176 initial sketch, which makes it a bit harder to connect them. But by drawing 7-8 and 9-10 radiating from 1-2, we've linked this straight line to 5-6. Even though 5-6 and 9-10 don’t start from the same point, they clearly complement each other. Only a small part of the line at the end marked 5 is out of sync, and if 5-6 had followed the path of the dotted line, it would have originated from the same point as 9-10. We still need to consider line 3-4. However, by adding 11-12, we connect it to 5-6, and then stage by stage through 9-10 and 7-8 to the original straight line 1-2. Line 13-14, by relating to 3-4, 11-12, and also 5-6, further harmonizes the group, and the rest echo 5-6 and amplify the dominant flow. At L, masses have been added, covering crossing lines, giving us a foundation for a composition.

In Diagram I lines have been drawn as before, at random, but two of them are straight and at right angles, the longer being across the-centre of the panel. The first thing to do is to trick the eye out of knowing that this line is in the centre by drawing others parallel to it, leading the eye downwards to line 9-10, which is now much more important than 1-2 and in better proportion with the height of the panel. The vertical line 3-4 is rather stark and lonely, and so we' introduce two more verticals at 11-12 and 13-14, which modify this, and with another two lines in sympathy with 5-6 and leading the eye back to the horizontal top of the panel, some sort of unity is set up, the introduction of some masses completing the scheme at M.

In Diagram I, lines have been drawn randomly as before, but two of them are straight and at right angles, with the longer one across the center of the panel. The first step is to trick the eye into not realizing that this line is in the center by drawing parallel lines that lead the eye downward to line 9-10, which is now much more important than 1-2 and better proportioned to the height of the panel. The vertical line 3-4 feels quite stark and lonely, so we’ll add two more vertical lines at 11-12 and 13-14 to soften this, along with two additional lines that harmonize with 5-6 and draw the eye back to the horizontal top of the panel, creating a sense of unity, with the introduction of some masses completing the scheme at M.

There is a quality of sympathy set up by certain line relationships about which it is important to say 177something. Ladies who have the instinct for choosing a hat or doing their hair to suit their face instinctively know something of this; know that certain things in their face are emphasised by certain forms in their hats or hair, and the care that has to be taken to see that the things thus drawn attention to are their best and not their worst points.

There’s a kind of empathy created by specific relationships that we should discuss 177. Women who have a knack for picking the right hat or styling their hair to complement their face instinctively understand this. They recognize that certain features of their face are highlighted by particular styles in their hats or hair, and they know to be careful to ensure that the aspects they draw attention to are their best qualities, not their worst.

The principle is more generally understood in relation to colour; everybody knows how the blueness of blue eyes is emphasised by a sympathetic blue dress or touch of blue on a hat, &c. But the same principle applies to lines. The qualities of line in beautiful eyes and eyebrows are emphasised by the long sympathetic curve of a picture hat, and the becoming effect of a necklace is partly due to the same cause, the lines being in sympathy with the eyes or the oval of the face, according to how low or high they hang. The influence of long lines is thus to "pick out" from among the lines of a face those with which they are in sympathy, and thus to accentuate them.

The principle is easily understood in terms of color; everyone knows that the blue in blue eyes is enhanced by a matching blue dress or a hint of blue on a hat, etc. But the same principle applies to lines. The qualities of line in beautiful eyes and eyebrows are highlighted by the graceful curve of a stylish hat, and the flattering effect of a necklace is partly due to the same reason, as the lines resonate with the eyes or the shape of the face, depending on how low or high they hang. The impact of long lines is to "highlight" those features of the face that they complement, thereby emphasizing them.

To illustrate this, on page 178 [Transcribers Note: Plate XLII] is reproduced "The Portrait of the Artist's Daughter," by Sir Edward Burne-Jones.

To illustrate this, on page 178 [Transcribers Note: Plate XLII] is reproduced "The Portrait of the Artist's Daughter," by Sir Edward Burne-Jones.

The two things that are brought out by the line arrangement in this portrait are the beauty of the eyes and the shape of the face. Instead of the picture hat you have the mirror, the widening circles of which swing round in sympathy with the eyes and concentrate the attention on them. That on the left (looking at the picture) being nearest the centre, has the greatest attention concentrated upon it, the lines of the mirror being more in sympathy with this than the other eye, as it is nearer the 179centre. If you care to take the trouble, cut a hole in a piece of opaque paper the size of the head and placing it over the illustration look at the face without the influence of these outside lines; and note how much more equally divided the attention is between the two eyes without the emphasis given to the one by the mirror. This helps the unity of impression, which with both eyes realised to so intense a focus might have suffered. This mirror forms a sort of echo of the pupil of the eye with its reflection of the window in the left-hand corner corresponding to the high light, greatly helping the spell these eyes hold.

The two things highlighted by the line arrangement in this portrait are the beauty of the eyes and the shape of the face. Instead of a picture hat, there’s a mirror, with widening circles that resonate with the eyes and draw attention to them. The eye on the left (when viewing the picture) is closest to the center, so it captures the most focus, with the lines of the mirror aligning more with it than the other eye, due to its proximity to the 179center. If you want to see how it looks without the influence of these outside lines, cut a hole in a piece of opaque paper the size of the head and place it over the illustration to view the face. You’ll notice that the attention between the two eyes becomes more balanced without the emphasis created by the mirror. This enhances the overall impression, which might have been diminished if both eyes were too intensely focused. This mirror acts like an echo of the eye’s pupil, with its reflection in the left-hand corner corresponding to the highlight, significantly enhancing the allure of these eyes.

Diagram XX. INDICATING THE SYMPATHETIC FLOW OF LINES THAT GIVE UNITY TO THIS COMPOSITION.

Diagram XX.

Diagram XX.

INDICATING THE SYMPATHETIC FLOW OF LINES THAT GIVE UNITY TO THIS COMPOSITION.

INDICATING THE SYMPATHETIC FLOW OF LINES THAT PROVIDE UNITY TO THIS COMPOSITION.

Plate XLII. PORTRAIT OF THE ARTIST'S DAUGHTER SIR EDWARD BURNE-JONES, BART. An example of sympathetic rhythm. (See diagram on opposite page.) Photo Hollyer

Plate XLII.

Plate 42.

PORTRAIT OF THE ARTIST'S DAUGHTER SIR EDWARD BURNE-JONES, BART.

PORTRAIT OF THE ARTIST'S DAUGHTER SIR EDWARD BURNE-JONES, BART.

An example of sympathetic rhythm. (See diagram on opposite page.)

An example of sympathetic rhythm. (See diagram on the opposite page.)

Photo Hollyer

Photo by Hollyer

The other form accentuated by the line arrangement is the oval of the face. There is the necklace the lines of which lead on to those on the right in the reflection. It is no mere accident that this chain is so in sympathy with the line of the face: it would hardly have remained where it is for long, and must have been put in this position by the artist with the intention (conscious or instinctive) of accentuating the face line. The line of the reflection on the left and the lines of the mirror are also sympathetic. Others in the folds of the dress, and those forming the mass of the hands and arms, echo still further this line of the face and bring the whole canvas into intense sympathetic unity of expression.

The other form highlighted by the arrangement of lines is the oval of the face. There’s the necklace, whose lines lead to those on the right in the reflection. It’s no coincidence that this chain aligns so well with the shape of the face; it likely wouldn’t have stayed in that position for long and must have been placed there by the artist, whether intentionally or instinctively, to emphasize the facial outline. The lines of the reflection on the left and the mirror also complement this. Additionally, the lines in the folds of the dress, as well as those that define the mass of the hands and arms, further echo this facial line and bring the entire canvas into a powerful, harmonious expression.

The influence that different ways of doing the hair may have on a face is illustrated in the accompanying scribbles. The two profiles are exactly alike—I took great trouble to make them so. It is quite remarkable the difference the two ways of doing the hair make to the look of the faces. The upward swing of the lines in A sympathise with the line of the 180nose and the sharper projections of the face generally (see dotted lines), while the full downward curves of B sympathise with the fuller curves of 181the face and particularly emphasise the fullness under the chin so dreaded by beauty past its first youth (see dotted lines). It is only a very sharply-cut face that can stand this low knot at the back of the head, in which case it is one of the simplest and most beautiful ways of doing the hair. 182The hair dragged up high at the back sharpens the lines of the profile as the low knot blunts them.

The impact that different hairstyles can have on a face is shown in the sketches included. The two profiles are identical—I made sure of that. It's striking how much the two hairstyles change the appearance of the faces. The upward swing of the lines in A complements the shape of the 180nose and the sharper angles of the face overall (see dotted lines), while the full downward curves of B highlight the softer curves of the 181face and especially emphasize the fullness under the chin that is often seen as undesirable after youth (see dotted lines). Only a very sharply-defined face can pull off a low knot at the back of the head; in that case, it becomes one of the simplest and most beautiful hairstyles. 182Pulling the hair up high at the back accentuates the lines of the profile, while the low knot softens them.

Diagram XXI. ILLUSTRATING THE EFFECT ON THE FACE OF PUTTING THE HAIR UP AT THE BACK. HOW THE UPWARD FLOW OF LINES ACCENTUATES THE SHARPNESSES OF THE FEATURES.

Diagram XXI.

Diagram 21.

ILLUSTRATING THE EFFECT ON THE FACE OF PUTTING THE HAIR UP AT THE BACK. HOW THE UPWARD FLOW OF LINES ACCENTUATES THE SHARPNESSES OF THE FEATURES.

ILLUSTRATING THE EFFECT ON THE FACE OF PUTTING THE HAIR UP AT THE BACK. HOW THE UPWARD FLOW OF LINES ACCENTUATES THE SHARPNESSES OF THE FEATURES.

Diagram XXII. ILLUSTRATING THE EFFECT ON THE SAME FACE AS DIAGRAM XXI, OF PUTTING THE HAIR LOW AT THE BACK. HOW THE FULLER LINES THUS GIVEN ACCENTUATE THE FULLNESSES OF THE FEATURES.

Diagram XXII.

Diagram 22.

ILLUSTRATING THE EFFECT ON THE SAME FACE AS DIAGRAM XXI, OF PUTTING THE HAIR LOW AT THE BACK. HOW THE FULLER LINES THUS GIVEN ACCENTUATE THE FULLNESSES OF THE FEATURES.

ILLUSTRATING THE EFFECT ON THE SAME FACE AS DIAGRAM XXI, OF PUTTING THE HAIR LOW AT THE BACK. HOW THE FULLER LINES THUS GIVEN ACCENTUATE THE FULLNESSES OF THE FEATURES.

The illustrations to this chapter have been drawn in diagrammatical form in order to try and show that the musical quality of lines and the emotions they are capable of calling up are not dependent upon truth to natural forms but are inherent in abstract arrangements themselves. That is to say, whenever you get certain arrangements of lines, no matter what the objects in nature may be that yield them, you will always get the particular emotional stimulus belonging to such arrangements. For instance, whenever you get long uninterrupted horizontal lines running through a picture not opposed by any violent contrast, you will always get an impression of intense quiet and repose; no matter whether the natural objects yielding these lines are a wide stretch of country with long horizontal clouds in the sky, a pool with a gentle breeze making horizontal bars on its surface, or a pile of wood in a timber yard. And whenever you get long vertical lines in a composition, no matter whether it be a cathedral interior, a pine forest, or a row of scaffold poles, you will always have the particular feeling associated with rows of vertical lines in the abstract. And further, whenever you get the swinging lines of the volute, an impression of energy will be conveyed, no matter whether it be a breaking wave, rolling clouds, whirling dust, or only a mass of tangled hoop iron in a wheelwright's yard. As was said above, these effects may be greatly increased, modified, or even destroyed by associations connected with the things represented. If in painting the timber yard the artist is thinking more about making it look like a stack of real wood with its commercial associations 183and less about using the artistic material its appearance presents for the making of a picture, he may miss the harmonic impression the long lines of the stacks of wood present. If real wood is the first thing you are led to think of in looking at his work, he will obviously have missed the expression of any artistic feeling the subject was capable of producing. And the same may be said of the scaffold poles or the hoop iron in the wheelwright's yard.

The illustrations in this chapter have been created in a diagrammatic style to show that the musical quality of lines and the emotions they evoke aren't dependent on accurately depicting natural forms but are inherent in abstract arrangements themselves. In other words, whenever you have certain arrangements of lines, regardless of the natural objects that create them, you will consistently get the specific emotional response related to those arrangements. For example, whenever there are long, uninterrupted horizontal lines in a picture without any harsh contrasts, you'll always feel an intense sense of calm and tranquility; it doesn't matter if these lines come from a wide landscape with long horizontal clouds, a pool with a gentle breeze creating horizontal ripples, or a stack of wood in a lumberyard. Similarly, long vertical lines in a composition, whether they come from a cathedral interior, a pine forest, or a row of scaffold poles, will always convey the feeling associated with vertical lines on their own. Additionally, whenever you have the flowing lines of a volute, a sense of energy is communicated, regardless of whether it’s a breaking wave, rolling clouds, swirling dust, or just a pile of tangled hoop iron in a wheelwright's yard. As mentioned earlier, these effects can be enhanced, altered, or even diminished by the associations we have with the subjects depicted. If the artist focuses more on making the timber yard appear like a stack of real wood with its commercial implications 183 rather than using its visual qualities to create an artwork, they might overlook the harmonious effect that the long lines of the wood stacks provide. If real wood is what first comes to mind when viewing their artwork, they'll clearly have missed expressing any artistic emotion the subject could have inspired. The same goes for the scaffold poles or the hoop iron in the wheelwright's yard.

This structure of abstract lines at the basis of a picture will be more or less overlaid with the truths of nature, and all the rich variety of natural forms, according to the requirements of the subject. Thus, in large decorative work, where the painting has to take its place as part of an architectural scheme, the severity of this skeleton will be necessary to unite the work to the architectural forms around it, of which it has to form a part; and very little indulgence in the realisation of natural truth should be permitted to obscure it. But in the painting of a small cabinet picture that exists for close inspection, the supporting power of this line basis is not nearly so essential, and a full indulgence in all the rich variety of natural detail is permissible. And this is how it happens that painters who have gloried in rich details have always painted small pictures, and painters who have preferred larger truths pictures of bigger dimensions. It sounds rather paradoxical to say the smaller the picture the more detail it should contain, and the larger the less, but it is nevertheless true. For although a large picture has not of necessity got to be part of an architectural scheme, it has to be looked at from a distance at which small detail could not be seen, and where such detail would greatly weaken its expressive power. 184And further, the small picture easily comes within the field of vision, and the whole impression can be readily grasped without the main lines being, as it were, underlined. But in a big picture one of the greatest difficulties is to get it to read simply, to strike the eye as one impression. Its size making it difficult for it to be got comfortably within the field of vision, every artifice has to be used to give it "breadth of treatment," as it is called, and nothing interferes with this like detail.

This framework of abstract lines at the core of an artwork will be layered with the truths of nature and the diverse forms found in nature, depending on the subject's needs. In large decorative pieces where the artwork must fit within an architectural design, the strength of this underlying structure is necessary to connect the work to the surrounding architectural elements. In this case, any emphasis on natural accuracy should be minimized to prevent it from obscuring the overarching structure. However, in the creation of a small cabinet piece meant for close viewing, the strength of this structural line is not as crucial, allowing for a full appreciation of the rich details found in nature. That's why artists who revel in intricate details tend to create smaller works, while those who focus on broader themes tend to produce larger pieces. It might seem contradictory that smaller paintings should contain more detail and larger ones less, but it's true. A large painting doesn’t necessarily have to be part of an architectural scheme, but it’s viewed from a distance where fine details aren’t visible, and such detail would diminish its overall impact. Additionally, a small painting easily fits within one's field of vision, allowing the viewer to grasp the entire impression without emphasizing the main lines. In contrast, one of the biggest challenges with a large painting is making it read simply, so it appears as one cohesive impression. Its size makes it difficult to comfortably fit within a viewer's field of vision, so every technique must be employed to achieve what’s known as "breadth of treatment," and nothing disrupts this like excessive detail. 184


185

XIII
VARIETY OF MASS

The masses that go to make up a picture have variety in their shape, their tone values, their edges, in texture or quality, and in gradation. Quite a formidable list, but each of these particulars has some rhythmic quality of its own about which it will be necessary to say a word.

The elements that make up a picture come in different shapes, tone values, edges, textures or qualities, and gradations. That's quite an impressive list, but each of these aspects has its own rhythmic quality that we need to discuss.

Variety of Shape.

As to variety of shape, many things that were said about lines apply equally to the spaces enclosed by them. It is impossible to write of the rhythmic possibilities that the infinite variety of shapes possessed by natural objects contain, except to point out how necessary the study of nature is for this. Variety of shape is one of the most difficult things to invent, and one of the commonest things in nature. However imaginative your conception, and no matter how far you may carry your design, working from imagination, there will come a time when studies from nature will be necessary if your work is to have the variety that will give life and interest. Try and draw from imagination a row of elm trees of about the same height and distance apart, and get the variety of nature into them; and you will see how difficult it is to invent. On examining your work you will probably discover two or three pet forms repeated, or there may be only one. Or try and draw some cumulus clouds from imagination, several groups of them 186across a sky, and you will find how often again you have repeated unconsciously the same forms. How tired one gets of the pet cloud or tree of a painter who does not often consult nature in his pictures. Nature is the great storehouse of variety; even a piece of coal will suggest more interesting rock-forms than you can invent. And it is fascinating to watch the infinite variety of graceful forms assumed by the curling smoke from a cigarette, full of suggestions for beautiful line arrangements. If this variety of form in your work is allowed to become excessive it will overpower the unity of your conception. It is in the larger unity of your composition that the imaginative faculty will be wanted, and variety in your forms should always be subordinated to this idea.

Regarding different shapes, many insights about lines also apply to the spaces they enclose. It's impossible to discuss the rhythmic possibilities that the endless variety of shapes found in natural objects offer, except to emphasize the importance of studying nature for this purpose. Creating unique shapes is one of the hardest things to do, yet it's one of the most common aspects of nature. No matter how creative your ideas or how far you push your design based on imagination, there will come a point when observing nature will be essential if you want your work to have the variety that adds life and interest. Try to draw a row of elm trees that are roughly the same height and spaced apart equally, and see if you can incorporate the variety found in nature; you'll realize how challenging it is to create on your own. When you review your work, you may notice that you’ve repeated two or three favorite forms, or perhaps just one. Alternatively, try drawing several groups of cumulus clouds across a sky from your imagination, and you'll often find that you've unconsciously repeated the same shapes. It quickly becomes tiresome to see the same favorite cloud or tree from an artist who doesn’t frequently refer to nature in their work. Nature is a vast source of variety; even a piece of coal can inspire more interesting rock shapes than you could come up with. It's captivating to observe the endless variety of graceful forms in the curling smoke from a cigarette, which offers numerous ideas for beautiful line arrangements. However, if the variety of forms in your work becomes excessive, it can overwhelm the overall unity of your concept. The broader unity of your composition is where your imagination will be most needed, and the variety in your shapes should always support this idea.

Nature does not so readily suggest a scheme of unity, for the simple reason that the first condition of your picture, the four bounding lines, does not exist in nature. You may get infinite suggestions for arrangements, and should always be on the look out for them, but your imagination will have to relate them to the rigorous conditions of your four bounding lines, and nature does not help you much here. But when variety in the forms is wanted, she is pre-eminent, and it is never advisable to waste inventive power where it is so unnecessary.

Nature doesn’t easily provide a clear sense of unity because the basic requirement for your composition—the four boundary lines—doesn’t exist in nature. You can find endless ideas for arrangements, and you should always be on the lookout for them, but your imagination will have to connect those ideas to the strict requirements of your four boundary lines, and nature doesn’t offer much assistance here. However, when it comes to variety in forms, she excels, and it’s never wise to waste creative energy where it isn’t needed.

But although nature does not readily suggest a design fitting the conditions of a panel her tendency is always towards unity of arrangement. If you take a bunch of flowers or leaves and haphazard stuff them into a vase of water, you will probably get a very chaotic arrangement. But if you leave it for some time and let nature have 187a chance you will find that the leaves and flowers have arranged themselves much more harmoniously. And if you cut down one of a group of trees, what a harsh discordant gap is usually left; but in time nature will, by throwing a bough here and filling up a gap there, as far as possible rectify matters and bring all into unity again. I am prepared to be told this has nothing to do with beauty but is only the result of nature's attempts to seek for light and air. But whatever be the physical cause, the fact is the same, that nature's laws tend to pictorial unity of arrangement.

But even though nature doesn't easily suggest a design that fits a panel, it always tends towards a sense of unity in arrangement. If you grab a bunch of flowers or leaves and just throw them into a vase of water, you’ll probably end up with a messy arrangement. However, if you leave it for a while and let nature have 187a chance, you’ll notice that the leaves and flowers start to arrange themselves in a much more harmonious way. And if you cut down one tree from a group, it usually leaves a harsh, discordant gap; but over time, nature will, by placing a branch here and filling in a gap there, try to fix things and restore a sense of unity. I’m ready to be told that this has nothing to do with beauty and is just nature's way of reaching for light and air. But whatever the physical reason may be, the reality is that nature’s laws tend to create a cohesive visual arrangement.

Variety of Tone Values

It will be as well to try and explain what is meant by tone values. All the masses or tones (for the terms are often used interchangeably) that go to the making of a visual impression can be considered in relation to an imagined scale from white, to represent the lightest, to black, to represent the darkest tones. This scale of values does not refer to light and shade only, but light and shade, colour, and the whole visual impression are considered as one mosaic of masses of different degrees of darkness or lightness. A dark object in strong light may be lighter than a white object in shadow, or the reverse: it will depend on the amount of reflected light. Colour only matters in so far as it affects the position of the mass in this imagined scale of black and white. The correct observation of these tone values is a most important matter, and one of no little difficulty.

It’s important to clarify what tone values mean. All the shades or tones (the terms are often used interchangeably) that contribute to creating a visual impression can be thought of in relation to an imagined scale that ranges from white, indicating the lightest tones, to black, representing the darkest tones. This scale of values doesn’t just pertain to light and shade; it includes color as well, and the entire visual impression is viewed as a mosaic of various masses of different degrees of darkness or lightness. A dark object in bright light might appear lighter than a white object in shadow, or vice versa; it all depends on how much light is reflected. Color is relevant only to the extent that it influences where the mass falls on this imagined scale of black and white. Accurately observing these tone values is extremely important and can be quite challenging.

The word tone is used in two senses, in the first place when referring to the individual masses as to their relations in the scale of "tone values"; and secondly when referring to the musical relationship of these values to a oneness of tone idea 188governing the whole impression. In very much the same way you might refer to a single note in music as a tone, and also to the tone of the whole orchestra. The word values always refers to the relationship of the individual masses or tones in our imagined scale from black to white. We say a picture is out of value or out of tone when some of the values are darker or lighter than our sense of harmony feels they should be, in the same way as we should say an instrument in an orchestra was out of tone or tune when it was higher or lower than our sense of harmony allowed. Tone is so intimately associated with the colour of a picture that it is a little difficult to treat of it apart, and it is often used in a sense to include colour in speaking of the general tone. We say it has a warm tone or a cold tone.

The word "tone" has two meanings: first, it describes individual masses in relation to their position on a scale of "tone values"; and second, it refers to the musical relationship of these values to a unified tone concept that shapes the overall impression. In much the same way, you might talk about a single note in music as a tone, as well as the tone of the entire orchestra. The term "values" always points to the relationship of individual masses or tones in our imagined scale from black to white. We say a picture is out of value or out of tone when some values appear darker or lighter than what our sense of harmony suggests they should be, similar to saying an instrument in an orchestra is out of tone or tune when it's higher or lower than what our sense of harmony permits. Tone is so closely linked to the color of a picture that it can be challenging to discuss it separately, and it's often used to encompass color when talking about the overall tone. We might describe it as having a warm tone or a cold tone.

There is a particular rhythmic beauty about a well-ordered arrangement of tone values that is a very important part of pictorial design. This music of tone has been present in art in a rudimentary way since the earliest time, but has recently received a much greater amount of attention, and much new light on the subject has been given by the impressionist movement and the study of the art of China and Japan, which is nearly always very beautiful in this respect.

There’s a certain rhythmic beauty in a well-organized arrangement of tones that is a crucial aspect of visual design. This tonal harmony has appeared in art since ancient times, but it has recently gained much more attention, with the Impressionist movement and the study of Chinese and Japanese art shedding new light on the subject, as these styles are often very beautiful in this regard.

This quality of tone music is most dominant when the masses are large and simple, when the contemplation of them is not disturbed by much variety, and they have little variation of texture and gradation. A slight mist will often improve the tone of a landscape for this reason. It simplifies the tones, masses them together, obliterating many smaller varieties. I have even heard of the tone 189of a picture being improved by such a mist scrambled or glazed over it.

This quality of musical tone is most powerful when the groups are large and straightforward, when observing them isn't interrupted by too much variety, and they have minimal changes in texture and gradation. A little mist can often enhance the tone of a landscape for this reason. It simplifies the tones, combines them, and hides many smaller differences. I've even heard that the tone 189of a painting can be improved by a mist that blurs or coats it.

Plate XLIII. MONTE SOLARO CAPRI Study on brown paper in charcoal and white chalk.

Plate XLIII.

Plate 43.

MONTE SOLARO CAPRI

Monte Solaro, Capri

Study on brown paper in charcoal and white chalk.

Study on brown paper using charcoal and white chalk.

The powder on a lady's face, when not over-done, is an improvement for the same reason. It simplifies the tones by destroying the distressing shining lights that were cutting up the masses; and it also destroys a large amount of half tone, broadening the lights almost up to the commencement of the shadows.

The powder on a woman's face, when applied in moderation, is an enhancement for the same reason. It smooths out the tones by eliminating the distracting shiny spots that break up the surface; it also minimizes a good deal of the middle tones, bringing the highlights almost to the edges of the shadows.

Tone relationships are most sympathetic when the middle values of your scale only are used, that is to say, when the lights are low in tone and the darks high.

Tone relationships are most harmonious when you only use the middle values of your scale, meaning when the lighter tones are low and the darker tones are high.

They are most dramatic and intense when the contrasts are great and the jumps from dark to light sudden.

They're most dramatic and intense when the contrasts are sharp and the shifts from dark to light are abrupt.

The sympathetic charm of half-light effects is due largely to the tones being of this middle range only; whereas the striking dramatic effect of a storm clearing, in which you may get a landscape brilliantly lit by the sudden appearance of the sun, seen against the dark clouds of the retreating storm, owes much of its dramatic quality to contrast. The strong contrasts of tone values coupled with the strong colour contrast between the warm sunlit land and the cold angry blue of the storm, gives such a scene much dramatic effect and power.

The appealing charm of twilight effects mainly comes from the fact that the tones are in this middle range; on the other hand, the dramatic impact of a clearing storm, where you might see a landscape vividly illuminated by the sudden burst of sunlight against the dark retreating storm clouds, owes much of its drama to contrast. The intense differences in tone combined with the stark color contrast between the warm sunlit land and the cold, fierce blue of the storm create a scene with significant dramatic effect and power.

The subject of values will be further treated in dealing with unity of tone.

The topic of values will be discussed more when addressing the unity of tone.

Variety in Quality and Texture

Variety in quality and nature is almost too subtle to write about with any prospect of being understood. The play of different qualities and textures in the masses that go to form a picture must be appreciated at first hand, and little can be written about it. Oil paint is capable of almost unlimited variety in this 190way. But it is better to leave the study of such qualities until you have mastered the medium in its more simple aspects.

The differences in quality and nature are so subtle that it’s hard to explain them in a way that others will understand. The interplay of different qualities and textures in the elements that make up a picture needs to be experienced directly, and there’s not much that can be said about it. Oil paint allows for almost endless variety in this 190 regard. However, it’s best to wait to explore these qualities until you’ve got a good handle on the medium’s more basic aspects.

The particular tone music of which we were speaking is not helped by any great use of this variety. A oneness of quality throughout the work is best suited to exhibit it. Masters of tone, like Whistler, preserve this oneness of quality very carefully in their work, relying chiefly on the grain of a rough canvas to give the necessary variety and prevent a deadness in the quality of the tones.

The specific tone of music we were discussing isn’t enhanced by excessive variety. A consistent quality throughout the piece is most effective in showcasing it. Great tone masters like Whistler carefully maintain this consistency in their work, mainly using the texture of a rough canvas to provide the needed variety and avoid dullness in the tone quality.

But when more force and brilliancy are wanted, some use of your paint in a crumbling, broken manner is necessary, as it catches more light, thus increasing the force of the impression. Claude Monet and his followers in their search for brilliancy used this quality throughout many of their paintings, with new and striking results. But it is at the sacrifice of many beautiful qualities of form, as this roughness of surface does not lend itself readily to any finesse of modelling. In the case of Claude Monet's work, however, this does not matter, as form with all its subtleties is not a thing he made any attempt at exploiting. Nature is sufficiently vast for beautiful work to be done in separate departments of vision, although one cannot place such work on the same plane with successful pictures of wider scope. And the particular visual beauty of sparkling light and atmosphere, of which he was one of the first to make a separate study, could hardly exist in a work that aimed also at the significance of beautiful form, the appeal of form, as was explained in an earlier chapter, not being entirely due to a visual but to a mental perception, into which the sense 191of touch enters by association. The scintillation and glitter of light destroys this touch idea, which is better preserved in quieter lightings.

But when you need more intensity and brightness, using your paint in a rough, broken style is essential because it catches more light, enhancing the overall impact. Claude Monet and his followers pursued this quality in many of their paintings, achieving new and striking effects. However, this approach sacrifices many beautiful aspects of form since the rough texture doesn’t easily allow for detailed modeling. In Monet's case, though, this isn’t an issue because he didn’t aim to exploit form with all its intricacies. Nature is vast enough for beautiful work to emerge in different areas of vision, although such work can’t be compared to successful pieces with a broader scope. The specific visual beauty of sparkling light and atmosphere, which he was one of the first to study separately, wouldn’t likely exist in a piece that also focused on the beauty of form. The appeal of form, as explained in an earlier chapter, isn't solely visual but involves a mental perception that includes a sense of touch through association. The sparkle and shine of light undermine this tactile idea, which is better maintained in softer lighting.

There is another point in connection with the use of thick paint, that I don't think is sufficiently well known, and that is, its greater readiness to be discoloured by the oil in its composition coming to the surface. Fifteen years ago I did what it would be advisable for every student to do as soon as possible, namely, make a chart of the colours he is likely to use. Get a good white canvas, and set upon it in columns the different colours, very much as you would do on your palette, writing the names in ink beside them. Then take a palette-knife, an ivory one by preference, and drag it from the individual masses of paint so as to get a gradation of different thicknesses, from the thinnest possible layer where your knife ends to the thick mass where it was squeezed out of the tube. It is also advisable to have previously ruled some pencil lines with a hard point down the canvas in such a manner that the strips of paint will cross the lines. This chart will be of the greatest value to you in noting the effect of time on paint. To make it more complete, the colours of several makers should be put down, and at any rate the whites of several different makes should be on it. As white enters so largely into your painting it is highly necessary to use one that does not change.

There's another point about using thick paint that I don't think is widely recognized, and that is its tendency to discolor as the oil in it rises to the surface. Fifteen years ago, I did what I believe every student should do as soon as possible: I created a chart of the colors I was likely to use. Take a good white canvas and organize the different colors in columns, just like you would on your palette, writing the names next to them in ink. Then, use a palette knife—an ivory one is preferable—and drag it from the individual blobs of paint to create a gradient of different thicknesses, from the thinnest layer where your knife ends to the thick blob that came straight from the tube. It's also a good idea to draw some pencil lines down the canvas using a hard-point pencil so that the strips of paint will intersect the lines. This chart will be extremely useful for observing how paint changes over time. To make it even more comprehensive, you should include colors from various manufacturers, and at the very least, include whites from several different brands. Since white is such a significant part of your painting, it's crucial to use one that doesn't alter.

The two things that I have noticed are that the thin ends of the strips of white have invariably kept whiter than the thick end, and that all the paints have become a little more transparent with time. The pencil lines here come in useful, as they can be seen through the thinner portion, and show to what 192extent this transparency has occurred. But the point I wish to emphasise is that at the thick end the larger body of oil in the paint, which always comes to the surface as it dries, has darkened and yellowed the surface greatly; while the small amount of oil at the thin end has not darkened it to any extent.

The two things I've noticed are that the thin ends of the white strips have always stayed whiter than the thick end, and all the paints have become a bit more transparent over time. The pencil lines here are helpful, as they can be seen through the thinner part and show how much this transparency has occurred. But the main point I want to emphasize is that at the thick end, the larger amount of oil in the paint, which always rises to the surface as it dries, has significantly darkened and yellowed the surface; while the small amount of oil at the thin end hasn't darkened it at all.

Claude Monet evidently knew this, and got over the difficulty by painting on an absorbent canvas, which sucks the surplus oil out from below and thus prevents its coming to the surface and discolouring the work in time. When this thick manner of painting is adopted, an absorbent canvas should always be used. It also has the advantage of giving a dull dry surface of more brilliancy than a shiny one.

Claude Monet clearly understood this and addressed the issue by using an absorbent canvas, which absorbs excess oil from underneath, preventing it from rising to the surface and discoloring the artwork over time. When using this thick painting technique, an absorbent canvas should always be employed. It also offers the benefit of providing a dull, dry surface that appears more vibrant than a shiny one.

Although not so much as with painting, varieties of texture enter into drawings done with any of the mediums that lend themselves to mass drawing; charcoal, conté crayon, lithographic chalk, and even red chalk and lead pencil are capable of giving a variety of textures, governed largely by the surface of the paper used. But this is more the province of painting than of drawing proper, and charcoal, which is more painting than drawing, is the only medium in which it can be used with much effect.

Although not as much as with painting, different textures play a role in drawings created with any medium suitable for mass drawing. Charcoal, conté crayon, lithographic chalk, and even red chalk and lead pencil can create various textures, mainly influenced by the type of paper used. However, this aspect is more related to painting than to traditional drawing, and charcoal, which leans more toward painting than drawing, is the only medium that can effectively achieve this.

Variety of Edges.

There is a very beautiful rhythmic quality in the play from softness to sharpness on the edges of masses. A monotonous sharpness of edge is hard, stern, and unsympathetic. This is a useful quality at times, particularly in decorative work, where the more intimate sympathetic qualities are not so much wanted, and where the harder forms go better with the architectural surroundings of which your painted decoration should form a part. On the other hand, a monotonous softness of edge is very weak and feeble-looking, and 193too entirely lacking in power to be desirable. If you find any successful work done with this quality of edge unrelieved by any sharpnesses, it will depend on colour, and not form, for any qualities it may possess.

There’s a beautiful rhythm in the play between softness and sharpness along the edges of shapes. An unchanging sharpness is harsh, rigid, and unfeeling. This quality can be useful at times, especially in decorative work, where softer, more sensitive qualities are less important, and where sturdier forms fit better with the architectural context that your painted decoration should complement. Conversely, a constant softness in edges appears weak and ineffective, and is too lacking in strength to be appealing. If you come across any successful work that employs a totally soft edge without any sharpness, it will rely on color, not form, for any qualities it might have. 193

Some amount of softness makes for charm, and is extremely popular: "I do like that because it's so nice and soft" is a regular show-day remark in the studio, and is always meant as a great compliment, but is seldom taken as such by the suffering painter. But a balance of these two qualities playing about your contours produces the most delightful results, and the artist is always on the look out for such variations. He seldom lets a sharpness of edge run far without losing it occasionally. It may be necessary for the hang of the composition that some leading edges should be much insisted on. But even here a monotonous sharpness is too dead a thing, and although a firmness of run will be allowed to be felt, subtle variations will be introduced to prevent deadness. The Venetians from Giorgione's time were great masters of this music of edges. The structure of lines surrounding the masses on which their compositions are built were fused in the most mysterious and delightful way. But although melting into the surrounding mass, they are always firm and never soft and feeble. Study the edge in such a good example of the Venetian manner as the "Bacchus and Ariadne" at the National Gallery, and note where they are hard and where lost.

Some softness adds charm and is really popular: "I do like that because it's so nice and soft" is a common comment on show days in the studio, and it’s always meant as a big compliment, but the struggling painter seldom sees it that way. However, a balance between these two qualities around your shapes creates the most appealing results, and the artist is always looking for those variations. They rarely let a sharp edge go too far without softening it up now and then. It may be necessary for the overall composition to emphasize some leading edges. But even then, a constant sharpness can feel too lifeless, and while a strong line can be allowed, subtle changes will be added to avoid that dullness. The Venetians since Giorgione were masters of this edge harmony. The outlines surrounding the forms in their compositions blended in the most mysterious and delightful ways. But even as they blend into the surrounding forms, they remain strong and are never soft or weak. Check out the edges in a great example of the Venetian style, like "Bacchus and Ariadne" at the National Gallery, and notice where they are sharp and where they fade away.

There is one rather remarkable fact to be observed in this picture and many Venetian works, and this is that the most accented edges are reserved for unessential parts, like the piece of white drapery 194on the lower arm of the girl with the cymbals, and the little white flower on the boy's head in front. The edges on the flesh are everywhere fused and soft, the draperies being much sharper. You may notice the same thing in many pictures of the later Venetian schools. The greatest accents on the edges are rarely in the head, except it may be occasionally in the eyes. But they love to get some strongly-accented feature, such as a crisply-painted shirt coming against the soft modelling of the neck, to balance the fused edges in the flesh. In the head of Philip IV in our National Gallery the only place where Velazquez has allowed himself anything like a sharp edge is in the high lights on the chain hanging round the neck. The softer edges of the principal features in these compositions lend a largeness and mystery to these parts, and to restore the balance, sharpnesses are introduced in non-essential accessories.

There’s one pretty remarkable thing to notice in this picture and many Venetian artworks: the most highlighted edges are reserved for less important parts, like the piece of white fabric 194 on the lower arm of the girl with the cymbals and the little white flower on the boy's head in front. The edges on the skin are always blended and soft, while the draperies are much sharper. You can see the same approach in many works from the later Venetian schools. The most pronounced edges are rarely in the face, except maybe in the eyes sometimes. However, they like to emphasize a distinct feature, like a crisply-painted shirt contrasting with the soft contours of the neck, to balance the blended edges of the skin. In the head of Philip IV in our National Gallery, the only spot where Velazquez has allowed for a sharp edge is in the highlights on the chain around the neck. The softer edges of the main features in these compositions create a sense of grandeur and mystery, and to restore balance, sharper accents are added to less important accessories.

In the figure with the white tunic from Velazquez's "Surrender of Breda," here reproduced, note the wonderful variety on the edges of the white masses of the coat and the horse's nose, and also that the sharpest accents are reserved for such non-essentials as the bows on the tunic and the loose hair on the horse's forehead. Velazquez's edges are wonderful, and cannot be too carefully studied. He worked largely in flat tones or planes; but this richness and variety of his edges keeps his work from looking flat and dull, like that of some of his followers. I am sorry to say this variety does not come out so well in the reproduction on page 194 [Transcribers Note: Plate XLIV] as I could have wished, the half-tone process having a tendency to sharpen edges rather monotonously.

In the image featuring the figure in the white tunic from Velazquez's "Surrender of Breda," which is shown here, pay attention to the amazing variety at the edges of the white parts of the coat and the horse's nose. Notice that the most distinct highlights are given to non-essentials like the bows on the tunic and the loose hair on the horse's forehead. Velazquez's edges are exceptional and deserve careful study. He primarily worked in flat tones or planes, but this richness and variety in his edges prevent his work from appearing flat and boring, unlike some of his followers. Unfortunately, this variety doesn't come through as well in the reproduction on page 194 [Transcribers Note: Plate XLIV] as I had hoped, since the half-tone process tends to sharpen edges in a rather monotonous way.

This quality is everywhere to be found in 195nature. If you regard any scene pictorially, looking at it as a whole and not letting your eye focus on individual objects wandering from one to another while being but dimly conscious of the whole, but regarding it as a beautiful ensemble; you will find that the boundaries of the masses are not hard continuous edges but play continually along their course, here melting imperceptibly into the surrounding mass, and there accentuated more sharply. Even a long continuous line, like the horizon at sea, has some amount of this play, which you should always be on the look out for. But when the parts only of nature are regarded and each is separately focussed, hard edges will be found to exist almost everywhere, unless there is a positive mist enveloping the objects. And this is the usual way of looking at things. But a picture that is a catalogue of many little parts separately focussed will not hang together as one visual impression.

This quality can be seen everywhere in 195nature. If you look at any scene as a whole, instead of getting lost in individual details, and appreciate it as a beautiful composition, you'll notice that the edges of the shapes aren’t hard and solid but rather shift along their lines, sometimes blending softly into the surrounding area and other times standing out more sharply. Even a long, straight line, like the horizon at sea, has some variation, which you should always keep an eye out for. However, when you focus on parts of nature individually, hard boundaries tend to appear almost everywhere, unless there's a mist surrounding the objects. This is the typical way people view things. But a picture that is just a collection of many separate details won’t come together as a single visual impression.

Plate XLIV. PART OF THE SURRENDER OF BREDA. BY VELAZQUEZ Note the varied quantity of the edge in white mass of tunic. (The reproduction does not unfortunately show this as well as the original.) Photo Anderson

Plate XLIV.

Plate 44.

PART OF THE SURRENDER OF BREDA. BY VELAZQUEZ

PART OF THE SURRENDER OF BREDA. BY VELAZQUEZ

Note the varied quantity of the edge in white mass of tunic. (The reproduction does not unfortunately show this as well as the original.)

Note the different amounts of the white edge on the tunic. (The reproduction unfortunately doesn’t show this as well as the original.)

Photo Anderson

Photo Anderson

In naturalistic work the necessity for painting to one focal impression is as great as the necessity of painting in true perspective. What perspective has done for drawing, the impressionist system of painting to one all-embracing focus has done for tone. Before perspective was introduced, each individual object in a picture was drawn with a separate centre of vision fixed on each object in turn. What perspective did was to insist that all objects in a picture should be drawn in relation to one fixed centre of vision. And whereas formerly each object was painted to a hard focus, whether it was in the foreground or the distance, impressionism teaches that you cannot have the focus in a picture at the same time on the foreground and the distance.

In naturalistic art, the need to paint with one central impression is just as important as painting in true perspective. Just like perspective changed the way we draw, the impressionist approach of focusing on a single, overall point has transformed how we perceive tone. Before perspective became established, each object in a painting was drawn with its own separate center of vision, focusing on one object at a time. What perspective brought to art was the idea that all objects should be represented in relation to one fixed point of vision. In the past, each object was painted with a sharp focus, regardless of whether it was in the foreground or the background. Impressionism, however, teaches that you can't have sharp focus on both the foreground and background at the same time.

196Of course there are many manners of painting with more primitive conventions in which the consideration of focus does not enter. But in all painting that aims at reproducing the impressions directly produced in us by natural appearances, this question of focus and its influence on the quality of your edges is of great importance.

196There are definitely more basic styles of painting where focus isn’t really taken into account. However, in any painting that seeks to directly capture the impressions we get from natural scenes, the issue of focus and how it affects the quality of your edges is really important.

Something should be said about the serrated edges of masses, like those of trees seen against the sky. These are very difficult to treat, and almost every landscape painter has a different formula. The hard, fussy, cut-out, photographic appearance of trees misses all their beauty and sublimity.

Something needs to be said about the jagged outlines of masses, like those of trees against the sky. These are really challenging to capture, and nearly every landscape artist has a unique approach. The harsh, overly detailed, cut-out, photographic look of trees overlooks all their beauty and majesty.

There are three principal types of treatment that may serve as examples. In the first place there are the trees of the early Italian painters, three examples of which are illustrated on page 197 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XXIII]. A thin tree is always selected, and a rhythmic pattern of leaves against the sky painted. This treatment of a dark pattern on a light ground is very useful as a contrast to the softer tones of flesh. But the treatment is more often applied nowadays to a spray of foliage in the foreground, the pattern of which gives a very rich effect. The poplar trees in Millais' "Vale of Rest" are painted in much the same manner as that employed by the Italians, and are exceptional among modern tree paintings, the trees being treated as a pattern of leaves against the sky. Millais has also got a raised quality of paint in his darks very similar to that of Bellini and many early painters.

There are three main types of treatment that can be considered as examples. First, we have the trees depicted by early Italian painters, with three examples shown on page 197 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XXIII]. A slender tree is always chosen, with a rhythmic arrangement of leaves against the sky. This approach of using a dark pattern on a light background is very effective as a contrast to the softer flesh tones. However, this style is now more often applied to a cluster of foliage in the foreground, which creates a very rich effect. The poplar trees in Millais' "Vale of Rest" are painted in a similar way to that of the Italians and stand out among modern tree paintings, with the trees depicted as a pattern of leaves against the sky. Millais also achieves a raised quality of paint in his dark areas that is very much like that of Bellini and many early painters.

Giorgione added another tree to landscape art: the rich, full, solidly-massed forms that occur in his "Concert Champêtre" of the Louvre, reproduced on page 151 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXIII]. In this picture you may see both types 197of treatment. There are the patterns of leaves variety on the left and the solidly-massed treatment on the right.

Giorgione introduced another kind of tree to landscape art: the rich, full, solid forms found in his "Concert Champêtre" at the Louvre, shown on page 151 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXIII]. In this painting, you can observe both types 197 of treatment. On the left, there are varied leaf patterns, while the right features solid, massed forms.

Diagram XXIII. EXAMPLES OF EARLY ITALIAN TREATMENT OF TREES A. From pictures in Oratorio di S. Ansano. "Il trionfo dell' Amore," attributed to Botticelli. B. From "L'Annunziazione," by Botticelli, Uffizi, Florence. C. From "La Vergine," by Giovanni Bellini in the Accademia, Venice.

Diagram XXIII.

Diagram 23.

EXAMPLES OF EARLY ITALIAN TREATMENT OF TREES

EXAMPLES OF EARLY ITALIAN TREATMENT OF TREES

A. From pictures in Oratorio di S. Ansano. "Il trionfo dell' Amore," attributed to Botticelli.

A. From images in Oratorio di S. Ansano. "The Triumph of Love," attributed to Botticelli.

B. From "L'Annunziazione," by Botticelli, Uffizi, Florence.

B. From "The Annunciation," by Botticelli, Uffizi, Florence.

C. From "La Vergine," by Giovanni Bellini in the Accademia, Venice.

C. From "La Vergine," by Giovanni Bellini in the Accademia, Venice.

Corot in his later work developed a treatment that has been largely followed since. Looking at trees with a very wide focus, he ignored individual leaves, and resolved them into masses of tone, 198here lost and here found more sharply against the sky. The subordinate masses of foliage within these main boundaries are treated in the same way, resolved into masses of infinitely varying edges. This play, this lost-and-foundness at his edges is one of the great distinguishing charms of Corot's trees. When they have been painted from this mass point of view, a suggestion of a few leaves here and a bough there may be indicated, coming sharply against the sky, but you will find this basis of tone music, this crescendo and diminuendo throughout all his later work (see illustration, page 215 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XXVI]).

Corot, in his later work, developed a technique that has been widely adopted since. By observing trees with a broad perspective, he ignored individual leaves and instead depicted them as masses of tone, 198some areas fading away and others standing out more distinctly against the sky. The smaller masses of foliage within these main areas are treated similarly, rendered as collections of infinitely varying edges. This playful quality, this sense of things appearing and disappearing at his edges, is one of the distinctive charms of Corot's trees. When painted from this mass perspective, a suggestion of a few leaves here and a branch there might be depicted, contrasting sharply with the sky, but you will consistently find this foundation of tonal harmony, this crescendo and diminuendo, throughout all his later work (see illustration, page 215 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XXVI]).

These are three of the more extreme types of trees to be met with in art, but the variations on these types are very numerous. Whatever treatment you adopt, the tree must be considered as a whole, and some rhythmic form related to this large impression selected. And this applies to all forms with serrated edges: some large order must be found to which the fussiness of the edges must conform.

These are three of the more extreme types of trees found in art, but there are many variations on these types. No matter which approach you take, the tree needs to be seen as a whole, and a rhythmic shape related to this overall impression must be chosen. This applies to all forms with jagged edges: there should be some larger structure that the intricacies of the edges need to fit into.

The subject of edges generally is a very important one, and one much more worried over by a master than by the average student. It is interesting to note how all the great painters have begun with a hard manner, with edges of little variety, from which they have gradually developed a looser manner, learning to master the difficulties of design that hard contours insist on your facing, and only when this is thoroughly mastered letting themselves develop freely this play on the edges, this looser handling.

The topic of edges is really significant, and it's something that a master thinks about much more than the average student does. It's interesting to see how all the great painters started with a strict approach, using edges that were quite uniform, and over time, they developed a more relaxed style. They learned to tackle the challenges posed by hard edges, and only after fully mastering that did they feel free to experiment with the edges and adopt a more fluid technique.

For under the freest painting, if it be good, there will be found a bed-rock structure of well-constructed 199masses and lines. They may never be insisted on, but their steadying influence will always be felt. So err in your student work on the side of hardness rather than looseness, if you would discipline yourself to design your work well. Occasionally only let yourself go at a looser handling.

For the most free-spirited painting, if it’s good, there will be a solid foundation of well-formed 199shapes and lines. They might not always be obvious, but their stabilizing effect is always present. So, when working as a student, lean towards rigidity rather than slackness if you want to train yourself to design your work effectively. Only occasionally allow yourself a more relaxed approach.

Variety of Gradiation.

Variety of gradation will naturally be governed largely by the form and light and shade of the objects in your composition. But while studying the gradations of tone that express form and give the modelling, you should never neglect to keep the mind fixed upon the relation the part you are painting bears to the whole picture. And nothing should be done that is out of harmony with this large conception. It is one of the most difficult things to decide the amount of variety and emphasis allowable for the smaller parts of a picture, so as to bring all in harmony with that oneness of impression that should dominate the whole; how much of your scale of values it is permissible to use for the modelling of each individual part. In the best work the greatest economy is exercised in this respect, so that as much power may be kept in reserve as possible. You have only the one scale from black to white to work with, only one octave within the limits of which to compose your tone symphonies. There are no higher and lower octaves as in music to extend your effect. So be very sparing with your tone values when modelling the different parts.

The variety of gradation will mainly depend on the shape and light and shadow of the objects in your composition. However, while you're studying the tone gradations that show form and provide depth, you must always keep in mind how the part you're painting relates to the entire picture. Everything you do should align with this broader vision. It can be really challenging to determine how much variety and emphasis are appropriate for the smaller parts of a picture, in order to maintain a sense of unity in the overall impression. You need to decide how much of your value scale you can use for the modeling of each individual section. In the best works, there's a great economy in this regard, so as much strength as possible is kept in reserve. You have just one scale to work with, from black to white—only one octave within which to create your tonal symphonies. Unlike music, there are no higher or lower octaves to expand your effect. So, be very careful with your tonal values when modeling the different parts.


200

XIV
UNITY OF MASS

What has been said about unity of line applies obviously to the outlines bounding the masses, so that we need not say anything further on that subject. The particular quality of which something should be said, is the unity that is given to a picture by means of a well-arranged and rhythmically considered scheme of tone values.

What has been mentioned about the unity of line clearly applies to the outlines that define the shapes, so we don’t need to discuss that further. The specific quality that deserves attention is the unity created in a picture through a well-organized and rhythmically thought-out scheme of tone values.

The modifications in the relative tone values of objects seen under different aspects of light and atmosphere are infinite and ever varying; and this is quite a special study in itself. Nature is the great teacher here, her tone arrangements always possessing unity. How kind to the eye is her attempt to cover the ugliness of our great towns in an envelope of atmosphere, giving the most wonderful tone symphonies; thus using man's desecration of her air by smoke to cover up his other desecration of her country-side, a manufacturing town. This study of values is a distinguishing feature of modern art.

The changes in the colors and tones of objects when seen under different light and atmospheric conditions are endless and always shifting; and this is a fascinating area of study on its own. Nature is the ultimate teacher here, as her color arrangements always achieve harmony. It's amazing how she tries to soften the ugliness of our big cities with a layer of atmosphere, creating stunning color symphonies; in this way, she uses the pollution from smoke to mask humanity's other damage to her landscapes, like in manufacturing towns. This focus on color values is a key aspect of modern art.

But schemes taken from nature are not the only harmonious ones. The older masters were content with one or two well-tried arrangements of tone in their pictures, which were often not at all true to natural appearances but nevertheless harmonious. The chief instance of this is the low-toned sky. The painting of flesh higher in tone than the sky was 201almost universal at many periods of art, and in portraits is still often seen. Yet it is only in strong sunlight that this is ever so in nature, as you can easily see by holding your hand up against a sky background. The possible exception to this rule is a dark storm-cloud, in which case your hand would have to be strongly lit by some bright light in another part of the sky to appear light against it.

But designs inspired by nature aren't the only ones that are harmonious. The older masters were satisfied with one or two well-established arrangements of color in their paintings, which often didn't really reflect natural appearances but still looked harmonious. A prime example of this is the low-toned sky. Painting flesh tones that are brighter than the sky was 201almost universal during many art periods, and it's still commonly seen in portraits. However, this only happens in strong sunlight, as you can easily notice by holding your hand up against a sky background. The only possible exception to this is a dark storm cloud, where your hand would need to be illuminated by a bright light elsewhere in the sky to appear lighter against it.

This high tone of the sky is a considerable difficulty when one wishes the interest centred on the figures. The eye instinctively goes to the light masses in a picture, and if these masses are sky, the figures lose some importance. The fashion of lowering its tone has much to be said for it on the score of the added interest it gives to the figures. But it is apt to bring a heavy stuffy look into the atmosphere, and is only really admissible in frankly conventional treatment, in which one has not been led to expect implicit truth to natural effect. If truth to natural appearances is carried far in the figures, the same truth will be expected in the background; but if only certain truths are selected in the figures, and the treatment does not approach the naturalistic, much more liberty can be taken with the background without loss of verisimilitude.

The bright blue of the sky can be a real challenge when you want to focus attention on the figures. People naturally look at the lighter areas in a picture, and if those areas are the sky, the figures can seem less important. There are good reasons for darkening the sky, as it makes the figures stand out more. However, it can also create a heavy, stuffy feeling in the atmosphere and should only really be used in a clearly stylized way where you don't expect strict adherence to realism. If the figures depict true-to-life details, viewers will expect the same in the background; but if the figures only capture selective truths and don’t strive for a naturalistic approach, there's much more freedom to manipulate the background without losing a sense of realism.

But there is a unity about nature's tone arrangements that it is very difficult to improve upon; and it is usually advisable, if you can, to base the scheme of tone in your picture on a good study of values from nature.

But there is a harmony in nature's arrangements of tones that is really hard to improve on; and it's usually a good idea, if you can, to base the color scheme in your picture on a solid study of values from nature.

Such effects as twilight, moonlight, or even sunlight were seldom attempted by the older painters, at any rate in their figure subjects. All the lovely tone arrangements that nature presents in these more unusual aspects are a new study, and offer 202unlimited new material to the artist. Many artists are content to use this simply for itself, the beauty of a rare tone effect being sufficient with the simplest accessories to make a picture. But in figure composition, what new and wonderful things can be imagined in which some rare aspect of nature's tone-music is combined with a fine figure design.

Such effects as twilight, moonlight, or even sunlight were rarely explored by earlier painters, especially in their figure subjects. All the beautiful color arrangements that nature offers in these less common conditions are a fresh area of study and provide 202endless new material for artists. Many artists are happy to use this simply for its own sake, with the beauty of a unique color effect being enough, along with minimal accessories, to create a compelling picture. But in figure composition, what new and amazing possibilities can be imagined where some unique aspect of nature's color harmony is blended with a great figure design?

These values are not easily perceived with accuracy, although their influence may be felt by many. A true eye for the accurate perception of subtle tone arrangements is a thing you should study very diligently to acquire. How then is this to be done? It is very difficult, if not impossible, to teach anybody to see. Little more can be said than has already been written about this subject in the chapter on variety in mass. Every mass has to be considered in relation to an imagined tone scale, taking black for your darkest and white for your highest light as we have seen. A black glass, by reducing the light, enables you to observe these relationships more accurately; the dazzling quality of strong light making it difficult to judge them. But this should only be used to correct one's eye, and the comparison should be made between nature seen in the glass and your work seen also in the glass. To look in a black glass and then compare what you saw with your work looked at direct is not a fair comparison, and will result in low-toned work with little brilliancy.

These values aren’t easily seen accurately, even though many might feel their impact. Developing a true sense for the subtle arrangements of tone is something you should work hard to master. So how do you go about it? It’s very challenging, if not impossible, to teach someone how to see. There’s little more to add to what’s already been said on this topic in the chapter about variety in mass. Each mass must be considered in relation to an imagined tone scale, using black as your darkest point and white as your brightest, as we’ve discussed. A black glass, by reducing the light, helps you observe these relationships more accurately; the intense glare of strong light makes it hard to evaluate them. However, this tool should only be used to refine your eye, and you should compare nature seen through the glass with your work also viewed through the glass. Comparing what you see in a black glass to your work seen directly is not a fair comparison and will lead to low-toned work lacking brightness.

Now, to represent this scale of tones in painting we have white paint as our highest and black paint as our lowest notes. It is never advisable to play either of these extremes, although you may go very near to them. That is to say, there should never be pure white or pure black masses in a 203picture. There is a kind of screaminess set up when one goes the whole gamut of tone, that gives a look of unrestraint and weakness; somewhat like the feeling experienced when a vocalist sings his or her very highest or very lowest note. In a good singer one always feels he could have gone still higher or still lower, as the case may be, and this gives an added power to the impression of his singing. And in art, likewise, it is always advisable to keep something of this reserve power. Also, the highest lights in nature are never without colour, and this will lower the tone; neither are the deepest darks colourless, and this will raise their tone. But perhaps this is dogmatising, and it may be that beautiful work is to be done with all the extremes you can "clap on," though I think it very unlikely.

Now, to represent this range of tones in painting, we have white paint as our highest note and black paint as our lowest. It's never a good idea to use either of these extremes, although you can get very close to them. In other words, there should never be pure white or pure black areas in a 203picture. There’s a kind of harshness that comes from using the complete spectrum of tones, which creates a sense of lack of restraint and weakness—similar to the feeling you get when a vocalist sings their very highest or very lowest note. With a good singer, you always feel they could have reached even higher or lower, and that adds to the power of their performance. Similarly, in art, it’s always a good idea to maintain some of this restrained power. Also, the brightest highlights in nature are never colorless, which softens the tone; neither are the deepest shadows devoid of color, which elevates their tone. But perhaps that’s too rigid, and it’s possible that stunning work can be created using all the extremes you can "throw on," although I think that’s quite unlikely.

In all the quieter aspects of lighting this range from black to white paint is sufficient. But where strong, brilliantly lit effects are wanted, something has to be sacrificed, if this look of brilliancy is to be made telling.

In all the subtler aspects of lighting, a range from black to white paint is adequate. However, when strong, vividly lit effects are desired, something has to be compromised to achieve that striking brilliance.

In order to increase the relationship between some of the tones others must be sacrificed. There are two ways of doing this. The first, which was the method earliest adopted, is to begin from the light end of the scale, and, taking something very near pure white as your highest light, to get the relationships between this and the next most brilliant tone, and to proceed thus, tone by tone, from the lightest to the darkest. But working in this way you will find that you arrive at the greatest dark you can make in paint before you have completed the scale of relationships as in nature, if the subject happens to be brilliantly lit. 204Another method is to put down the highest light and the darkest dark, and then work your scale of tone relatively between them. But it will be found that working in this way, unless the subject in nature is very quietly lit, you will not get anything like the forceful impression of tone that nature gives.

To enhance the relationship between some tones, others need to be sacrificed. There are two approaches to achieve this. The first, which was the earliest method used, starts from the light end of the scale. You take something very close to pure white as your brightest light, then establish the relationships between this and the next brightest tone, proceeding in this manner, tone by tone, from lightest to darkest. However, by working this way, you’ll find that you reach the darkest dark you can create in paint before you’ve completed the scale of relationships found in nature, especially if the subject is brightly lit. 204The second method involves placing the brightest light and the darkest dark first, and then developing your scale of tones relative to them. Yet, if the subject in nature isn't lit very softly, you may not achieve the impactful impression of tone that nature displays.

The third way, and this is the more modern, is to begin from the dark end of the scale, getting the true relationship felt between the greatest dark and the next darkest tone to it, and so on, proceeding towards the light. By this method you will arrive at your highest light in paint before the highest light in nature has been reached. All variety of tone at the light end of the scale will have to be modified in this case, instead of at the dark end as in the other case. In the painting of sunlight the latter method is much the more effective, a look of great brilliancy and light being produced, whereas in the earlier method, the scale being commenced from the light end, so much of the picture was dark that the impression of light and air was lost and a dark gloomy land took its place, a gloom accentuated rather than dispelled by the streaks of lurid light where the sun struck.

The third approach, which is more contemporary, starts from the darkest part of the spectrum, capturing the true relationship between the deepest dark and the next darkest shade, and so on, moving towards the light. With this technique, you'll achieve your brightest highlights in paint before you’ve reached the brightest light in nature. In this case, all the variety of tones at the light end of the spectrum will need to be adjusted, instead of focusing on the dark end as in the previous method. When painting sunlight, this later technique is much more effective, creating a vibrant and bright look. In contrast, when starting from the light end in the earlier method, so much of the painting ended up being dark that the sense of light and air was lost, resulting in a dark, gloomy landscape—the gloom made worse, not better, by the harsh streaks of light where the sun hit.

Rembrandt is an example of beginning the tone relationships from the light side of the scale, and a large part of his canvas is in consequence always dark.

Rembrandt is an example of starting the tone relationships from the lighter side of the scale, and as a result, a significant portion of his canvas is always dark.

Bastien Lepage is an example of the second method, that of fixing upon two extremes and working-relatively between them. And it will be noticed that he confined himself chiefly to quiet grey day effects of lighting, the rendering of which was well within the range of his palette. 205The method of beginning from the dark side, getting the true relations of tones on this side of the scale, and letting the lights take care of themselves, was perhaps first used by Turner. But it is largely used now whenever a strong impression of light is desired. The light masses instead of the dark masses dominate the pictures, which have great brilliancy.

Bastien Lepage is an example of the second method, which involves focusing on two extremes and working relatively in between them. It's noticeable that he mostly stuck to soft grey daytime lighting effects, which were well within the capabilities of his palette. 205The approach of starting from the darker side, establishing the true relationships of tones on that end of the scale, and allowing the lights to manage themselves, was possibly first implemented by Turner. However, it is widely used today whenever a powerful impression of light is needed. The light areas, rather than the dark areas, dominate the paintings, resulting in high brilliance.

These tone values are only to be perceived in their true relationship by the eye contemplating a wide field of vision. With the ordinary habit of looking only at individual parts of nature, the general impression being but dimly felt, they are not observed. The artist has to acquire the habit of generalising his visual attention over a wide field if he would perceive the true relation of the parts to this scale of values. Half closing the eyes, which is the usual method of doing this, destroys the perception of a great deal of colour. Another method of throwing the eyes out of focus and enabling one to judge of large relationships, is to dilate them widely. This rather increases than diminishes the colour, but is not so safe a method of judging subtle tone relationships.

These tone values can only be truly understood by the eye when taking in a wide view. If we usually focus only on individual parts of nature, the overall impression can feel vague and is often overlooked. An artist needs to develop the skill of generalizing their visual attention across a broad area to grasp the true relationship of the parts to this scale of values. Half-closing the eyes, a common technique, can eliminate a lot of color perception. Another way to lose focus and allow for assessing large relationships is to open the eyes wide. This tends to enhance rather than reduce color, but it's not as reliable for judging subtle tone relationships.

It is easier in approaching this study out of doors to begin with quiet effects of light. Some of those soft grey days in this country are very beautiful in tone, and change so little that careful studies can be made. And with indoor work, place your subject rather away from the direct light and avoid much light and shade; let the light come from behind you.

It's easier to start this outdoor study by focusing on the subtle effects of light. Some of those soft gray days in this country have a beautiful tone and change so little that you can make careful studies. For indoor work, position your subject slightly away from direct light and steer clear of harsh light and shadows; let the light come from behind you.

If very strong light effects, such as sunlight, or a dark interior lit by one brilliant window, are attempted, the values will be found to be much simpler and more harsh, often resolving themselves into two 206masses, a brilliant light contrasted with a dark shadow. This tone arrangement of strong light in contrast with dark shadow was a favourite formula with many schools of the past, since Leonardo da Vinci first used it. Great breadth and splendour is given by it to design, and it is one of the most impressive of tone arrangements. Leonardo da Vinci's "Our Lady of the Rocks," in the National Gallery, is an early example of this treatment. And Correggio's "Venus, Mercury, and Cupid," here reproduced, is another particularly fine example. Reynolds and many of the eighteenth-century men used this scheme in their work almost entirely. This strong light and shade, by eliminating to a large extent the half tones, helps to preserve in highly complete work a simplicity and directness of statement that is very powerful. For certain impressions it probably will never be bettered, but it is a very well-worn convention. Manet among the moderns has given new life to this formula, although he did not derive his inspiration directly from Correggio but through the Spanish school. By working in a strong, rather glaring, direct light, he eliminated still further the half tones, and got rid to a great extent of light and shade. Coming at a time when the realistic and plain air movements were destroying simple directness, his work was of great value, bringing back, as it did with its insistence on large, simple masses, a sense of frank design. His influence has been very great in recent years, as artists have felt that it offered a new formula for design and colour. Light and shade and half tone are the great enemies of colour, sullying, as they do, its purity; and to some extent to design also, destroying, as they do, the flatness of the picture. But with the strong direct 207light, the masses are cut out as simply as possible, and their colour is little sullied by light and shade. The picture of Manet's reproduced is a typical example of his manner. The aggressive shape of the pattern made by the light mass against the dark background is typical of his revolutionary attitude towards all accepted canons of beauty. But even here it is interesting to note that many principles of composition are conformed to. The design is united to its boundaries by the horizontal line of the couch and the vertical line of the screen at the back, while the whole swing hangs on the diagonal from top left-hand corner to right; lower corner, to which the strongly marked edge of the bed-clothes and pillow at the bottom of the picture is parallel.

If you try to create very strong lighting effects, like sunlight, or a dark interior lit by a single bright window, you’ll often find that the results are much simpler and harsher, usually breaking down into two 206masses: a bright light contrasted with a dark shadow. This arrangement of strong light against dark shadow has been a popular approach since Leonardo da Vinci first used it. It gives great breadth and splendor to design and is one of the most striking ways to use tone. An early example of this technique can be seen in Leonardo da Vinci's "Our Lady of the Rocks" at the National Gallery, while Correggio's "Venus, Mercury, and Cupid," featured here, is another outstanding example. Reynolds and many artists from the eighteenth century primarily employed this scheme in their work. This strong light and shadow, by mostly eliminating half tones, help maintain a simplicity and directness in highly finished work that is very impactful. For certain impressions, it’s unlikely to ever be surpassed, though it has become a well-worn convention. Manet, among modern artists, revitalized this formula, although he drew his inspiration indirectly from Correggio through the Spanish school. By working in a strong, somewhat glaring, direct light, he further reduced half tones and largely eliminated the effects of light and shade. At a time when realistic and plein air movements were undermining straightforwardness, his work was invaluable, as it reintroduced a sense of clear design with its emphasis on large, simple forms. His influence has been significant in recent years, with artists seeing it as a new approach to design and color. Light and shade, along with half tones, can heavily compromise color, muddying its purity; they also detract from design by disrupting the flatness of the picture. However, with strong direct 207light, the masses are defined as simply as possible, with their color remaining largely untainted by light and shadow. The image of Manet’s that is reproduced here is a typical example of his style. The bold shape of the pattern created by the light mass against the dark background reflects his revolutionary stance toward established beauty standards. Yet, it’s interesting to observe that many principles of composition are still followed. The design connects to its edges through the horizontal line of the couch and the vertical line of the screen at the back, and the overall flow extends diagonally from the top left corner to the bottom right corner, paralleling the sharply defined edge of the bedclothes and pillow at the bottom of the picture.

Plate XLV. CORREGGIO. VENUS. MERCURY, AND CUPID (NATIONAL GALLERY) A fine example of one of the most effective tone arrangements; a brilliantly-lit, richly-modelled light mass on a dark background. Photo Hanfstaengl

Plate XLV.

Plate 45.

CORREGGIO. VENUS. MERCURY, AND CUPID (NATIONAL GALLERY)

CORREGGIO. VENUS. MERCURY, AND CUPID (NATIONAL GALLERY)

A fine example of one of the most effective tone arrangements; a brilliantly-lit, richly-modelled light mass on a dark background.

A great example of one of the most effective tone compositions; a brightly-lit, well-defined light shape against a dark background.

Photo Hanfstaengl

Photo by Hanfstaengl

Large flat tones give a power and simplicity to a design, and a largeness and breadth of expression that are very valuable, besides showing up every little variety in the values used for your modelling; and thus enabling you to model with the least expenditure of tones. Whatever richness of variation you may ultimately desire to add to your values, see to it that in planning your picture you get a good basic structure of simply designed, and as far as possible flat, tones.

Large flat colors provide strength and simplicity to a design, along with a sense of scale and wide expression that are incredibly valuable. They also highlight every slight difference in the values you use for your modeling, allowing you to model with minimal tonal variation. No matter how much variation you eventually want to incorporate into your values, make sure that in planning your picture, you establish a solid foundation of simply designed, and as flat as possible, colors.

In speaking of variety in mass we saw how the nearer these tones are in the scale of values, the more reserved and quiet the impression created, and the further apart or greater the contrast, the more dramatic and intense the effect. And the sentiment of tone in a picture, like the sentiment of line and colour, should be in harmony with the nature of your subject.

When we talk about variety in mass, we noticed that the closer these tones are in the scale of values, the more subtle and calm the impression created is, and the further apart or greater the contrast, the more dramatic and intense the effect. The sentiment of tone in a picture, just like the sentiment of line and color, should align with the nature of your subject.

Generally speaking more variety of tone and shape 208in the masses of your composition is permissible when a smaller range of values is used than when your subject demands strong contrasts. When strong contrasts of tone or what are called black and white effects are desired, the masses must be very simply designed. Were this not so, and were the composition patterned all over with smaller masses in strong contrast, the breadth and unity of the effect would be lost. While when the difference of relative values between one tone and another is slight, the oneness of effect is not so much interfered with by there being a large number of them. Effects of strong contrasts are therefore far the most difficult to manage, as it is not easy to reduce a composition of any complexity to a simple expressive pattern of large masses.

Generally speaking, you can use a wider variety of tone and shape 208 in the masses of your composition when you employ a smaller range of values than when your subject requires strong contrasts. When you want strong contrasts of tone or what are known as black and white effects, the masses need to be very simply designed. If this weren't the case, and the composition was filled with smaller masses in strong contrast, the overall impact and unity of the effect would be compromised. However, when the difference in relative values between one tone and another is slight, the cohesion of the effect isn't as disrupted, even with a large number of tones. Therefore, effects with strong contrasts are definitely the most challenging to manage, as it’s not easy to simplify a complex composition into a straightforward expressive pattern of large masses.

This principle applies also in the matter of colour. Greater contrasts and variety of colour may be indulged in where the middle range only of tones is used, and where there is little tone contrast, than where there is great contrast. In other words, you cannot with much hope of success have strong contrasts of colour and strong contrasts of tone in the same picture: it is too violent.

This principle also applies to color. You can use greater contrasts and a wider variety of colors when only the mid-range tones are used and there's little tone contrast, compared to when there's a lot of contrast. In other words, it's unlikely you'll achieve a successful combination of strong color contrasts and strong tone contrasts in the same image: it tends to be too jarring.

If you have strong contrasts of colour, the contrasts of tone between them must be small. The Japanese and Chinese often make the most successful use of violent contrasts of colour by being careful that they shall be of the same tone value.

If you have deep color contrasts, the tone contrasts between them should be subtle. The Japanese and Chinese often use bold color contrasts effectively by ensuring they have the same tone value.

And again, where you have strong contrasts of tone, such as Rembrandt was fond of, you cannot successfully have strong contrasts of colour as well. Reynolds, who was fond both of colour and strong tone contrast, had to compromise, as he tells us in 209his lectures, by making the shadows all the same brown colour, to keep a harmony in his work.

And again, where you have strong contrasts in tone, like Rembrandt liked, you can't successfully have strong contrasts in color at the same time. Reynolds, who enjoyed both color and strong tone contrast, had to compromise, as he explains in 209his lectures, by making all the shadows the same brown color to maintain harmony in his work.

Plate XLVI. OLYMPIA. MANET (Louvre) A further development of the composition formula illustrated by Correggio's "Venus". Added force is given by lighting with low direct light elimination half-tones. Photo Neurdein

Plate XLVI.

Plate 46.

OLYMPIA. MANET (Louvre)

OLYMPIA. MANET (Louvre Museum)

A further development of the composition formula illustrated by Correggio's "Venus". Added force is given by lighting with low direct light elimination half-tones.

A further development of the composition formula shown in Correggio's "Venus." The impact is enhanced by using lighting that minimizes half-tones with low direct light.

Photo Neurdein

Neurdein Photo

There is some analogy between straight lines and flat tones, and curved lines and gradated tones. And a great deal that was said about the rhythmic significance of these lines will apply equally well here. What was said about long vertical and horizontal lines conveying a look of repose and touching the serious emotional notes, can be said of large flat tones. The feeling of infinity suggested by a wide blue sky without a cloud, seen above a wide bare plain, is an obvious instance of this. And for the same harmonic cause, a calm evening has so peaceful and infinite an expression. The waning light darkens the land and increases the contrast between it and the sky, with the result that all the landscape towards the west is reduced to practically one dark tone, cutting sharply against the wide light of the sky.

There’s a similarity between straight lines and flat tones, and curved lines and gradated tones. A lot of what was mentioned about the rhythmic importance of these lines also applies here. What was said about long vertical and horizontal lines giving a feeling of calm and touching on serious emotions can also be said about large flat tones. The sense of infinity suggested by a vast blue sky without a cloud above a wide, empty plain is a clear example of this. Similarly, a calm evening has such a peaceful and boundless feel. The fading light darkens the land and enhances the contrast between it and the sky, so that all the landscape towards the west is reduced to almost one dark tone, sharply set against the bright expanse of the sky.

And the graceful charm of curved lines swinging in harmonious rhythm through a composition has its analogy in gradated tones. Watteau and Gainsborough, those masters of charm, knew this, and in their most alluring compositions the tone-music is founded on a principle of tone-gradations, swinging and interlacing with each other in harmonious rhythm throughout the composition. Large, flat tones, with their more thoughtful associations are out of place here, and are seldom if ever used. In their work we see a world where the saddening influences of profound thought and its expression are far away. No deeper notes are allowed to mar the gaiety of this holiday world. Watteau created a dream country of his own, in which a tired humanity has delighted ever since, in which all serious thoughts are far away and the mind takes 211refreshment in the contemplation of delightful things. And a great deal of this charm is due to the pretty play from a crescendo to a diminuendo in the tone values on which his compositions are based—so far removed from the simple structure of flat masses to which more primitive and austere art owes its power.

And the graceful beauty of curved lines moving in a harmonious rhythm throughout a piece is similar to gradated tones. Watteau and Gainsborough, masters of allure, understood this, and in their most captivating works, the tone-music is built on a principle of tone-gradations that swing and intertwine in harmonious rhythm across the composition. Large, flat tones, with their more serious associations, feel out of place here and are rarely, if ever, used. In their art, we find a world where the somber impacts of deep thought and its expression are distant. No heavy notes are permitted to disrupt the joy of this festive realm. Watteau crafted a dreamland of his own, a place where a weary humanity has found happiness for ages, where all serious thoughts are absent, and the mind finds 211refreshment in the appreciation of delightful things. A significant part of this charm comes from the lovely transition from crescendo to diminuendo in the tonal values his compositions are based on—so distinct from the simple structure of flat masses that give more primitive and austere art its strength.

Diagram XXIV. SHOWING THE PRINCIPLE ON WHICH THE MASS OR TONE RHYTHM OF THE COMPOSITION REPRODUCED ON THE OPPOSITE PAGE IS ARRANGED

Diagram XXIV.

Diagram 24.

SHOWING THE PRINCIPLE ON WHICH THE MASS OR TONE RHYTHM OF THE COMPOSITION REPRODUCED ON THE OPPOSITE PAGE IS ARRANGED

SHOWING THE PRINCIPLE ON WHICH THE MASS OR TONE RHYTHM OF THE COMPOSITION REPRODUCED ON THE OPPOSITE PAGE IS ARRANGED

Plate XLVII. L'EMBARQUEMENT POUR CYTHÈRE. WATTEAU (LOUVRE) A typical example of composition founded on gradated tones. (See analysis on opposite page.) Photo Hanfstaengl

Plate XLVII.

Plate 47.

L'EMBARQUEMENT POUR CYTHÈRE. WATTEAU (LOUVRE)

Boarding for Cythera. Watteau (Louvre)

A typical example of composition founded on gradated tones. (See analysis on opposite page.)

A common example of composition based on varying tones. (See analysis on the opposite page.)

Photo Hanfstaengl

Photo Hanfstaengl

But Watteau's great accomplishment was in doing this without degenerating into feeble prettiness, and this he did by an insistence on character in his figures, particularly his men. His draperies also are always beautifully drawn and full of variety, never feeble and characterless. The landscape backgrounds are much more lacking in this respect, nothing ever happened there, no storms have ever bent his graceful tree-trunks, and the incessant gradations might easily become wearisome. But possibly the charm in which we delight would be lost, did the landscape possess more character. At any rate there is enough in the figures to prevent any sickly prettiness, although I think if you removed the figures the landscape would not be tolerable.

But Watteau's greatest achievement was doing this without falling into pointless prettiness, and he accomplished this by focusing on character in his figures, especially his men. His draperies are always beautifully rendered and full of variety, never weak or without character. The landscape backgrounds are much less compelling in this regard; nothing ever happens there, no storms have ever bent his graceful tree trunks, and the constant gradations can easily become dull. But perhaps the charm we enjoy would be lost if the landscape had more character. In any case, there’s enough in the figures to avoid any sickly sweetness, although I think if you took away the figures, the landscape would be unbearable.

But the followers of Watteau seized upon the prettiness and gradually got out of touch with the character, and if you compare Boucher's heads, particularly his men's heads, with Watteau's you may see how much has been lost.

But Watteau's followers focused on the beauty and slowly lost connection with the essence, and if you compare Boucher's portraits, especially his male portraits, with Watteau's, you'll notice how much has been lost.

The following are three examples of this gradated tone composition (see pages 210 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XXIV], 213 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XXV], 215 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XXVI]):

The following are three examples of this detailed tone composition (see pages 210 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XXIV], 213 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XXV], 215 [Transcribers Note: Diagram XXVI]):

Watteau: "Embarquement pour L'Île de Cythère."

Watteau: "Departure for the Island of Cythera."

This is a typical Watteau composition, founded on a rhythmic play of gradated tones and gradated edges. Flat tones and hard edges are avoided. Beginning at the centre of the top with a strongly accented note of contrast, the dark tone of the mass of trees gradates into the ground and on past 212the lower right-hand corner across the front of the picture, until, when nearing the lower left-hand corner, it reverses the process and from dark to light begins gradating light to dark, ending somewhat sharply against the sky in the rock form to the left. The rich play of tone that is introduced in the trees and ground, &c., blinds one at first to the perception of this larger tone motive, but without it the rich variety would not hold together. Roughly speaking the whole of this dark frame of tones from the accented point of the trees at the top to the mass of the rock on the left, may be said to gradate away into the distance; cut into by the wedge-shaped middle tone of the hills leading to the horizon.

This is a typical Watteau composition, based on a rhythmic interplay of layered tones and softened edges. It avoids flat tones and harsh lines. Starting at the center top with a strong contrast, the dark tone of the tree cluster transitions into the ground and continues past 212 the lower right corner across the front of the painting. As it approaches the lower left corner, it reverses the process, shifting from dark to light and then back to dark, ending sharply against the sky with the rock formation on the left. The rich range of tones in the trees and ground initially distracts from noticing this broader tonal theme, but without it, the vibrant variety wouldn’t hold together. Generally, this entire dark frame of tones, from the emphasized area of the trees at the top to the rock mass on the left, can be seen as fading into the distance, interrupted by the wedge-shaped middle tones of the hills leading to the horizon.

Breaking across this is a graceful line of figures, beginning on the left where the mass of rock is broken by the little flight of cupids, and continuing across the picture until it is brought up sharply by the light figure under the trees on the right. Note the pretty clatter of spots this line of figures brings across the picture, introducing light spots into the darker masses, ending up with the strongly accented light spot of the figure on the right; and dark spots into the lighter masses, ending up with the figures of the cupids dark against the sky.

Breaking through this is a smooth line of figures, starting on the left where the rocky mass is interrupted by the small group of cupids, and continuing across the image until it is sharply defined by the bright figure under the trees on the right. Notice the lovely mix of highlights this line of figures adds to the picture, bringing in bright spots into the darker areas, finishing with the prominent light spot of the figure on the right; and dark spots into the lighter areas, culminating with the cupids appearing dark against the sky.

Steadying influences in all this flux of tone are introduced by the vertical accent of the tree-stem and statue in the dark mass on the right, by the horizontal line of the distance on the left, the outline of the ground in the front, and the straight staffs held by some of the figures.

Steadying influences amidst all this change in tone are provided by the vertical lines of the tree trunk and statue in the dark area on the right, by the horizontal line of the background on the left, the outline of the ground in the foreground, and the straight staffs held by some of the figures.

In the charcoal scribble illustrating this composition I have tried carefully to avoid any drawing in the figures or trees to show how the tone-music depends not so much on truth to natural appearances 214as on the abstract arrangement of tone values and their rhythmic play.

In the charcoal sketch that accompanies this piece, I've made a conscious effort not to depict the figures or trees too realistically, to emphasize that the sound of the tones relies more on the abstract arrangement of tone values and their rhythmic interplay rather than on accurately representing natural forms. 214

Diagram XXV. SHOWING THE PRINCIPLE ON WHICH THE MASS OR TONE RHYTHM IS ARRANGED IN TURNER'S PICTURE IN THE NATIONAL GALLERY OF BRITISH ART, "ULYSSES DERIDING POLYPHEMUS"

Diagram XXV.

Diagram 25.

SHOWING THE PRINCIPLE ON WHICH THE MASS OR TONE RHYTHM IS ARRANGED IN TURNER'S PICTURE IN THE NATIONAL GALLERY OF BRITISH ART, "ULYSSES DERIDING POLYPHEMUS"

SHOWING THE PRINCIPLE ON WHICH THE MASS OR TONE RHYTHM IS ARRANGED IN TURNER'S PICTURE IN THE NATIONAL GALLERY OF BRITISH ART, "ULYSSES DERIDING POLYPHEMUS"

Of course nature contains every conceivable variety of tone-music, but it is not to be found by unintelligent copying except in rare accidents. Emerson says, "Although you search the whole world for the beautiful you'll not find it unless you take it with you," and this is true to a greater extent of rhythmic tone arrangements.

Of course, nature has every possible type of music, but you won't find it through mindless imitation, except in rare cases. Emerson says, "Even if you search the entire world for beauty, you won't find it unless you bring it with you," and this is even more true for rhythmic musical arrangements.

Turner: "Ulysses deriding Polyphemus."

Turner: "Ulysses mocking Polyphemus."

Turner was very fond of these gradated tone compositions, and carried them to a lyrical height to which they had never before attained. His "Ulysses deriding Polyphemus," in the National Gallery of British Art, is a splendid example of his use of this principle. A great unity of expression is given by bringing the greatest dark and light together in sharp contrast, as is done in this picture by the dark rocks and ships' prows coming against the rising sun. From this point the dark and light masses gradate in different directions until they merge above the ships' sails. These sails cut sharply into the dark mass as the rocks and ship on the extreme right cut sharply into the light mass. Note also the edges where they are accented and come sharply against the neighbouring mass, and where they are lost, and the pleasing quality this play of edges gives.

Turner was really fond of these gradated tone compositions and elevated them to a lyrical level that hadn't been reached before. His "Ulysses deriding Polyphemus," in the National Gallery of British Art, is a fantastic example of his approach. A strong unity of expression is achieved by placing the deepest dark and the brightest light in sharp contrast, as seen in this painting with the dark rocks and the ship's prows against the rising sun. From there, the dark and light areas gradually blend in different directions until they merge above the ships' sails. These sails stand out sharply against the dark mass, just as the rocks and ship on the far right sharply contrast with the light mass. Also, notice the edges where they are emphasized and sharply meet the neighboring mass, as well as where they fade away, creating a pleasing effect from this interplay of edges.

Stability is given by the line of the horizon and waves in front, and the masts of the ships, the oars, and, in the original picture, a feeling of radiating lines from the rising sun. Without these steadying influences these compositions of gradated masses would be sickly and weak.

Stability comes from the horizon line and the waves in front, along with the ship masts, the oars, and, in the original image, a sense of radiating lines from the rising sun. Without these stabilizing elements, these arrangements of layered shapes would feel feeble and weak.

Corot: 2470 Collection Chauchard, Louvre.

Corot: 2470 Chauchard Collection, Louvre.

This is a typical example of Corot's tone scheme, 216and little need be added to the description already given. Infinite play is got with the simplest means. A dark silhouetted mass is seen against a light sky, the perfect balance of the shapes and the infinite play of lost-and-foundness in the edges giving to this simple structure a richness and beauty effect that is very satisfying. Note how Corot, like Turner, brings his greatest light and dark together in sharp contrast where the rock on the right cuts the sky.

This is a typical example of Corot's tone scheme, 216and not much more needs to be added to the description already provided. He creates endless variations with the simplest tools. A dark silhouette stands out against a light sky, and the perfect balance of shapes along with the endless play of lost and found edges gives this simple structure a richness and beauty that is very satisfying. Notice how Corot, like Turner, brings his brightest light and darkest dark into sharp contrast where the rock on the right meets the sky.

Diagram XXVI. TYPICAL EXAMPLE OF COROT'S SYSTEM OF MASS RHYTHM, AFTER THE PICTURE IN THE LOUVRE, PARIS

Diagram XXVI.

Diagram 26.

TYPICAL EXAMPLE OF COROT'S SYSTEM OF MASS RHYTHM, AFTER THE PICTURE IN THE LOUVRE, PARIS

TYPICAL EXAMPLE OF COROT'S SYSTEM OF MASS RHYTHM, AFTER THE PICTURE IN THE LOUVRE, PARIS

Stability is given by the vertical feeling in the central group of trees and the suggestion of horizontal distance behind the figure.

Stability comes from the vertical presence of the central group of trees and the hint of horizontal space behind the figure.

It is not only in the larger disposition of the masses in a composition that this principle of gradated masses and lost and found edges can be used. Wherever grace and charm are your motive they should be looked for in the working out of the smallest details.

It’s not just in the overall arrangement of large groups in a composition that this idea of varying sizes and blurred edges can be applied. Whenever grace and charm are what you’re aiming for, they should be sought in the development of the smallest details.


In concluding this chapter I must again insist that knowledge of these matters will not make you compose a good picture. A composition may be perfect as far as any rules or principles of composition go, and yet be of no account whatever. The life-giving quality in art always defies analysis and refuses to be tabulated in any formula. This vital quality in drawing and composition must come from the individual artist himself, and nobody can help him much here. He must ever be on the look out for those visions his imagination stirs within him, and endeavour, however haltingly at first, to give them some sincere expression. Try always when your mind is filled with some pictorial idea to get something put down, a mere fumbled expression possibly, but it may contain the germ. Later on the 217same idea may occur to you again, only it will be less vague this time, and a process of development will have taken place. It may be years before it takes sufficiently definite shape to justify a picture; the process of germination in the mind is a slow one. But try and acquire the habit of making some record of what pictorial ideas pass in the mind, and don't wait until you can draw and paint well to begin. Qualities of drawing and painting don't matter a bit here, it is the sensation, the feeling for the picture, that is everything.

As we wrap up this chapter, I want to emphasize again that just knowing these concepts won’t help you create a great picture. A composition might be technically perfect according to established rules, but it can still fall flat. The essential spark in art always resists analysis and can't be neatly categorized. This vital quality in drawing and composition has to come from the artist themselves, and not much outside help will make a difference. You need to constantly search for those visions that your imagination inspires, and try, even if somewhat clumsily at first, to express them sincerely. Whenever you’re struck by a visual idea, make sure to jot it down, even if it’s just a rough version—it might hold the seed of something bigger. Later on, the same idea might come back to you, but this time it will be clearer, and you will have witnessed its development. It might take years for it to form into something concrete enough to become a picture; the creative process in your mind takes time. So, get into the habit of recording your pictorial ideas, and don’t wait until you feel you can draw and paint perfectly to start. The technical aspects of drawing and painting don’t matter here; it’s all about the sensation and feeling for the picture that truly counts.

If knowledge of the rhythmic properties of lines and masses will not enable you to compose a fine picture, you may well ask what is their use? There may be those to whom they are of no use. Their artistic instincts are sufficiently strong to need no direction. But such natures are rare, and it is doubtful if they ever go far, while many a painter might be saved a lot of worry over something in his picture that "won't come" did he but know more of the principle of pictorial design his work is transgressing. I feel certain that the old painters, like the Venetians, were far more systematic and had far more hard and fast principles of design than ourselves. They knew the science of their craft so well that they did not so often have to call upon their artistic instinct to get them out of difficulties. Their artistic instinct was free to attend to higher things, their knowledge of the science of picture-making keeping them from many petty mistakes that a modern artist falls into. The desire of so many artists in these days to cut loose from tradition and start all over again puts a very severe strain upon their intuitive faculties, and keeps them occupied correcting things that more knowledge of 218some of the fundamental principles that don't really alter and that are the same in all schools would have saved them. Knowledge in art is like a railway built behind the pioneers who have gone before; it offers a point of departure for those who come after, further on into the unknown country of nature's secrets—a help not lightly to be discarded.

If understanding the rhythmic qualities of lines and shapes doesn’t help you create a great picture, you might wonder what their purpose is. Some people might find them useless; their artistic instincts are strong enough that they don’t need guidance. But such individuals are uncommon, and it’s debatable whether they achieve much in the long run, while many artists could avoid a lot of frustration over elements in their work that “just don’t fit” if they understood more about the principles of visual design they are ignoring. I’m convinced that old painters, like the Venetians, were much more systematic and adhered to stricter design rules than we do today. They understood their craft so well that they didn’t often rely on their artistic instincts to resolve issues. Their instincts could focus on more complex ideas because their knowledge of picture-making science helped them avoid the minor mistakes that many modern artists make. The tendency of many contemporary artists to break free from tradition and start from scratch puts a lot of pressure on their intuition, keeping them busy fixing things that a better understanding of some fundamental principles—principles that don’t change and are the same across all styles—could have helped them avoid. Knowledge in art is like a railway built by those who came before; it provides a starting point for those who follow, leading them further into the uncharted territory of nature’s mysteries—a resource not to be taken lightly.

But all artifice in art must be concealed, a picture obviously composed is badly composed. In a good composition it is as though the parts had been carefully placed in rhythmic relation and then the picture jarred a little, so that everything is slightly shifted out of place, thus introducing our "dither" or play of life between the parts. Of course no mechanical jogging will introduce the vital quality referred to, which must come from the vitality of the artist's intuition; although I have heard of photographers jogging the camera in an endeavour to introduce some artistic "play" in its mechanical renderings. But one must say something to show how in all good composition the mechanical principles at the basis of the matter are subordinate to a vital principle on which the life in the work depends.

But all tricks in art must be hidden, a picture that is obviously staged is poorly arranged. In a good composition, it feels like the elements have been carefully placed in a rhythmic relationship and then the picture was slightly jostled, causing everything to be just a bit out of alignment, which introduces our "dither" or play of life among the elements. Of course, no mechanical shake can bring in that vital quality, which has to come from the artist's intuitive energy; although I’ve heard of photographers shaking the camera to try to add some artistic "play" to its mechanical results. However, it’s important to note that in all good composition, the mechanical principles at its foundation are secondary to a vital principle that the life in the work depends on.

This concealment of all artifice, this artlessness and spontaneity of appearance, is one of the greatest qualities in a composition, any analysis of which is futile. It is what occasionally gives to the work of the unlettered genius so great a charm. But the artist in whom the true spark has not been quenched by worldly success or other enervating influence, keeps the secret of this freshness right on, the culture of his student days being used only to give it splendour of expression, but never to stifle or suppress its native charm.

This hiding of all tricks, this simplicity and naturalness in how it looks, is one of the best qualities in a piece of work, and any analysis of it is pointless. It’s what sometimes gives the work of an untrained genius such a strong appeal. But the artist who hasn’t let true passion be dimmed by fame or other draining influences keeps this freshness alive; the skills learned in their student days are used only to add brilliance to their expression, never to dampen or hide its inherent charm.


219

XV
BALANCE

There seems to be a strife between opposing forces at the basis of all things, a strife in which a perfect balance is never attained, or life would cease. The worlds are kept on their courses by such opposing forces, the perfect equilibrium never being found, and so the vitalising movement is kept up. States are held together on the same principle, no State seeming able to preserve a balance for long; new forces arise, the balance is upset, and the State totters until a new equilibrium has been found. It would seem, however, to be the aim of life to strive after balance, any violent deviation from which is accompanied by calamity.

There seems to be a conflict between opposing forces at the heart of everything, a conflict in which a perfect balance is never achieved, or else life would come to an end. The worlds are kept on their paths by these opposing forces, the ideal equilibrium never being reached, and so the essential movement continues. Societies are held together by the same principle, with no society able to maintain a balance for long; new forces emerge, the balance gets disrupted, and the society wobbles until a new equilibrium is established. It appears, however, that the goal of life is to strive for balance, as any drastic deviation from it leads to disaster.

And in art we have the same play of opposing factors, straight lines and curves, light and dark, warm and cold colour oppose each other. Were the balance between them perfect, the result would be dull and dead. But if the balance is very much out, the eye is disturbed and the effect too disquieting. It will naturally be in pictures that aim at repose that this balance will be most perfect. In more exciting subjects less will be necessary, but some amount should exist in every picture, no matter how turbulent its motive; as in good tragedy the horror of the situation is never allowed to overbalance the beauty of the treatment.

In art, we see the same interplay of opposing factors—straight lines and curves, light and dark, warm and cool colors clash with each other. If the balance between them were perfect, the outcome would be bland and lifeless. However, if the balance is too skewed, the eye feels uneasy, and the effect can be overwhelming. Pictures that aim for calm will have this balance most perfected. In more dynamic subjects, less balance may be needed, but there should always be some in every piece, no matter how chaotic its theme; just like in a good tragedy, the horror of the situation is never allowed to overshadow the beauty of its execution.

220
Between Straight Lines and Curves

Let us consider in the first place the balance between straight lines and curves. The richer and fuller the curves, the more severe should be the straight lines that balance them, if perfect repose is desired. But if the subject demands excess of movement and life, of course there will be less necessity for the balancing influence of straight lines. And on the other hand, if the subject demands an excess of repose and contemplation, the bias will be on the side of straight lines. But a picture composed entirely of rich, rolling curves is too disquieting a thing to contemplate, and would become very irritating. Of the two extremes, one composed entirely of straight lines would be preferable to one with no squareness to relieve the richness of the curves. For straight lines are significant of the deeper and more permanent things of life, of the powers that govern and restrain, and of infinity; while the rich curves (that is, curves the farthest removed from the straight line) seem to be expressive of uncontrolled energy and the more exuberant joys of life. Vice may be excess in any direction, but asceticism has generally been accepted as a nobler vice than voluptuousness. The rococo art of the eighteenth century is an instance of the excessive use of curved forms, and, like all excesses in the joys of life, it is vicious and is the favourite style of decoration in vulgar places of entertainment. The excessive use of straight lines and square forms may be seen in some ancient Egyptian architecture, but this severity was originally, no doubt, softened by the use of colour, and in any case it is nobler and finer than the vicious cleverness of rococo art.

Let's first look at the balance between straight lines and curves. The more elaborate and fuller the curves, the more intense the straight lines should be to create a sense of calm. However, if the subject calls for a lot of movement and energy, then there's less need for the stabilizing effect of straight lines. Conversely, if the subject needs a sense of stillness and reflection, the emphasis will favor straight lines. A picture made completely of rich, flowing curves can be too unsettling to look at and would quickly become annoying. Among the two extremes, an image entirely of straight lines would be better than one lacking any sharpness to balance out the fullness of the curves. Straight lines represent the deeper, more lasting aspects of life, the forces that govern and control, and they symbolize infinity; while rich curves (meaning those that are farthest from straight lines) indicate unrestrained energy and the more vibrant joys of life. Excess in any direction can be vice, but generally, self-discipline is seen as a more admirable vice than indulgence. The rococo style of the eighteenth century is an example of overly using curved forms, and like all excesses in life’s pleasures, it's negative and tends to be the popular choice in tacky entertainment venues. The heavy use of straight lines and angular shapes can be seen in some ancient Egyptian architecture, but this rigidity was likely softened by the use of color, and in any case, it is more noble and refined than the superficial cleverness of rococo art.

221We have seen how the Greeks balanced the straight lines of their architectural forms with the rich lines of the sculpture which they used so lavishly on their temples. But the balance was always kept on the side of the square forms and never on the side of undue roundness. And it is on this side that the balance would seem to be in the finest art. Even the finest curves are those that approach the straight line rather than the circle, that err on the side of flatnesses rather than roundnesses.

221We have seen how the Greeks balanced the straight lines of their architecture with the elaborate lines of the sculptures they used lavishly on their temples. However, the balance always leaned towards the square shapes and never towards excessive roundness. It seems that true balance lies in this approach to art. Even the best curves are those that come closer to straight lines than to circles, favoring flatness over roundness.

Between Flat and Gradated Tones

What has been said about the balance of straight lines and curves applies equally well to tones, if for straight lines you substitute flat tones, and for curved lines gradated tones. The deeper, more permanent things find expression in the wider, flatter tones, while an excess of gradations makes for prettiness, if not for the gross roundnesses of vicious modelling.

What’s been said about the balance of straight lines and curves applies just as well to tones, if you replace straight lines with flat tones and curved lines with gradated tones. The deeper, more lasting qualities are expressed in the broader, flatter tones, while too many gradations lead to superficiality, if not the unpleasant roundness of poor modeling.

Often when a picture is hopelessly out of gear and "mucked up," as they say in the studio, it can be got on the right road again by reducing it to a basis of flat tones, going over it and painting out the gradations, getting it back to a simpler equation from which the right road to completion can be more readily seen. Overmuch concern with the gradations of the smaller modelling is a very common reason of pictures and drawings getting out of gear. The less expenditure of tone values you can express your modelling with, the better, as a general rule. The balance in the finest work is usually on the side of flat tones rather than on the side of gradated tones. Work that errs on the side of gradations, like that of Greuze, however popular its appeal, is much poorer stuff 222than work that errs on the side of flatness in tone, like Giotto and the Italian primitives, or Puvis de Chavannes among the moderns.

Often when a painting is completely off track and “messed up,” as they say in the studio, it can be set back on the right path by simplifying it to flat tones, going over it and painting out the gradations, returning it to a clearer foundation from which the way to finish can be more easily seen. Being overly focused on the gradations in finer details is a common reason why paintings and drawings go off course. Generally, the fewer tonal values you use to express your modeling, the better. The balance in the best work usually favors flat tones over gradated tones. Work that leans too much toward gradations, like that of Greuze, no matter how popular, is often of much lower quality than work that favors flatness in tone, such as Giotto and the Italian primitives, or Puvis de Chavannes among the moderns. 222

Between Light and Dark Tones.

There is a balance of tone set up also between light and dark, between black and white in the scale of tone. Pictures that do not go far in the direction of light, starting from a middle tone, should not go far in the direction of dark either. In this respect note the pictures of Whistler, a great master in matters of tone; his lights seldom approach anywhere near white, and, on the other hand, his darks never approach black in tone. When the highest lights are low in tone, the darkest darks should be high in tone. Painters like Rembrandt, whose pictures when fresh must have approached very near white in the high lights, also approach black in the darks, and nearer our own time, Frank Holl forced the whites of his pictures very high and correspondingly the darks were very heavy. And when this balance is kept there is a rightness about it that is instinctively felt. We do not mean that the amount of light tones in a picture should be balanced by the amount of dark tones, but that there should be some balance between the extremes of light and dark used in the tone scheme of a picture. The old rule was, I believe, that a picture should be two-thirds light and one-third dark. But I do not think there is any rule to be observed here: there are too many exceptions, and no mention is made of half tones.

There’s a balance of tone established between light and dark, between black and white on the tonal scale. Images that don’t lean heavily towards light starting from a mid-tone shouldn’t lean too much towards dark either. In this context, consider the works of Whistler, a master of tone; his light areas rarely come close to white, and his dark areas never really reach black. When the brightest lights are low in tone, the darkest darks should be high in tone. Artists like Rembrandt, whose fresh paintings must have been very close to white in the highlights, also reach black in their shadows. More recently, Frank Holl pushed the whites in his paintings very high, and correspondingly, the darks became very heavy. When this balance is maintained, it creates a sense of correctness that we instinctively recognize. We're not saying that the quantity of light tones in a painting must be matched by the quantity of dark tones, but rather that there should be some equilibrium between the extremes of light and dark used in the tonal scheme of a piece. The traditional guideline was that a painting should consist of two-thirds light and one-third dark. However, I don’t think there’s a strict rule here; there are too many exceptions, and half tones aren’t accounted for.

Like all so-called laws in art, this rule is capable of many apparent exceptions. There is the white picture in which all the tones are high. But in some of the most successful of these you will generally 223find spots of intensely dark pigment. Turner was fond of these light pictures in his later manner, but he usually put in some dark spot, such as the black gondolas in some of his Venetian pictures, that illustrate the law of balance we are speaking of, and are usually put in excessively dark in proportion as the rest of the picture is excessively light.

Like all so-called rules in art, this guideline has many apparent exceptions. There are light images where all the tones are bright. However, in many of the most successful examples, you will generally 223 find areas of very dark pigment. Turner liked these bright images in his later style, but he usually added some dark element, like the black gondolas in some of his Venetian paintings, which illustrate the principle of balance we're discussing, and are typically rendered much darker in proportion to how light the rest of the picture is.

The successful one-tone pictures are generally painted in the middle tones, and thus do not in any way contradict our principle of balance.

The successful one-tone pictures are usually painted in the midtones, so they definitely align with our principle of balance.

Between Warm and Cold Colours.

One is tempted at this point to wander a little into the province of colour, where the principle of balance of which we are speaking is much felt, the scale here being between warm and cold colours. If you divide the solar spectrum roughly into half, you will have the reds, oranges, and yellows on one side, and the purples, blues, and greens on the other, the former being roughly the warm and the latter the cold colours. The clever manipulation of the opposition between these warm and cold colours is one of the chief means used in giving vitality to colouring. But the point to notice here is that the further your colouring goes in the direction of warmth, the further it will be necessary to go in the opposite direction, to right the balance. That is how it comes about that painters like Titian, who loved a warm, glowing, golden colouring, so often had to put a mass of the coldest blue in their pictures. Gainsborough's "Blue Boy," although done in defiance of Reynolds' principle, is no contradiction of our rule, for although the boy has a blue dress all the rest of the picture is warm brown and so the balance is kept. It is the failure to observe this 224balance that makes so many of the red-coated huntsmen and soldiers' portraits in our exhibitions so objectionable. They are too often painted on a dark, hot, burnt sienna and black background, with nothing but warm colours in the flesh, &c., with the result that the screaming heat is intolerable. With a hot mass of red like a huntsman's coat in your picture, the coolest colour should be looked for everywhere else. Seen in a November landscape, how well a huntsman's coat looks, but then, how cold and grey is the colouring of the landscape. The right thing to do is to support your red with as many cool and neutral tones as possible and avoid hot shadows. With so strong a red, blue might be too much of a contrast, unless your canvas was large enough to admit of its being introduced at some distance from the red.

One might feel inclined to explore the realm of color here, where the balance we're discussing is quite evident, particularly between warm and cool colors. If you roughly divide the solar spectrum in half, you'll find reds, oranges, and yellows on one side, and purples, blues, and greens on the other; the former are generally considered warm, while the latter are cold. Skillfully playing with the contrast between these warm and cool colors is one of the main ways to add vibrancy to color choices. It’s important to note that the more you lean toward warm colors, the more you need to compensate with cool colors to maintain balance. That explains why painters like Titian, who cherished warm, glowing golden tones, often included a lot of cool blue in their works. Gainsborough’s "Blue Boy," despite going against Reynolds’ principle, doesn’t contradict our rule because even though the boy wears a blue dress, the rest of the painting is warm brown, which keeps the balance. The lack of attention to this balance is what makes many portraits of red-coated huntsmen and soldiers in our exhibitions so unappealing. They are frequently set against a dark, hot burnt sienna and black background, featuring only warm colors in the skin tones, resulting in an overwhelming heat effect. When you have a vibrant red like a huntsman's coat in your painting, you should look for the coolest color everywhere else. Just think about how well a huntsman’s coat contrasts with a November landscape — the coat stands out beautifully against the cold and gray hues of the scenery. The best approach is to complement your red with as many cool and neutral tones as possible and to avoid warm shadows. With such a strong red, blue might create too much contrast unless your canvas is large enough to place it at a distance from the red.

Most painters, of course, are content to keep to middle courses, never going very far in the warm or cold directions. And, undoubtedly, much more freedom of action is possible here, although the results may not be so powerful. But when beauty and refinement of sentiment rather than force are desired, the middle range of colouring (that is to say, all colours partly neutralised by admixture with their opposites) is much safer.

Most painters, of course, prefer to stick to a moderate approach, not venturing too far into warm or cool tones. And while there is definitely more freedom to experiment here, the results might not be as impactful. However, when beauty and a refined sentiment are prioritized over intensity, sticking to the middle range of color (meaning all colors slightly muted by mixing with their opposites) is much safer.

Between Interest and Mass.

There is another form of balance that must be although it is connected more with the subject matter of art, as it concerns the mental significance of objects rather than rhythmic qualities possessed by lines and masses; I refer to the balance there is between interest and mass. The all-absorbing interest of the human figure makes it often when quite minute in scale balance the weight and interest of a great 225mass. Diagram XXVII is a rough instance of what is meant. Without the little figure the composition would be out of balance. But the weight of interest centred upon that lonely little person is enough to right the balance occasioned by the great mass of trees on the left. Figures are largely used by landscape painters in this way, and are of great use in restoring balance in a picture.

There’s another type of balance that needs to be considered, which relates more to the subject of art. This balance pertains to the mental significance of objects rather than the rhythmic qualities of lines and shapes; I’m talking about the balance between interest and mass. The captivating interest of the human figure often allows it to balance the weight and interest of a large mass, even when it's quite small in scale. Diagram XXVII illustrates this point roughly. Without the small figure, the composition would feel imbalanced. However, the strong interest focused on that solitary figure is enough to restore balance against the large mass of trees on the left. Landscape painters frequently use figures in this way, as they play a significant role in restoring balance in a painting.

Diagram XXVII. ILLUSTRATING HOW INTEREST MAY BALANCE MASS

Diagram XXVII.

Diagram 27.

ILLUSTRATING HOW INTEREST MAY BALANCE MASS

ILLUSTRATING HOW INTEREST MAY BALANCE MASS

Between Variety and Unity.

And lastly, there must be a balance struck between variety and unity. A great deal has already been said about this, and it will only be necessary to recapitulate here that to variety is due all the expression or the picturesque, of the joyous energy of life, and all that makes the world such a delightful place, but that to unity belongs the relating of this variety to the underlying bed-rock principles that support it in nature and in all good art. It will depend on the nature of the artist and on the nature of his theme how far this underlying unity will dominate the expression in his work; and how far it will be overlaid and hidden behind a rich garment of variety.

And finally, there needs to be a balance between variety and unity. A lot has already been said about this, and it's just necessary to summarize here that variety brings all the expression and beauty of life’s joyful energy, and everything that makes the world such a wonderful place. In contrast, unity connects this variety to the fundamental principles that support it both in nature and in all great art. How much this underlying unity will influence the expression in an artist’s work depends on both the artist's nature and the nature of their theme; it may be prominent or be overshadowed by a rich tapestry of variety.

226But both ideas must be considered in his work. If the unity of his conception is allowed to exclude variety entirely, it will result in a dead abstraction, and if the variety is to be allowed none of the restraining influences of unity, it will develop into a riotous extravagance.

226But both ideas need to be taken into account in his work. If his vision completely shuts out variety, it will turn into a lifeless abstraction. On the other hand, if variety is given free rein without any guiding principles of unity, it will spiral into chaotic excess.


227

XVI
RHYTHM: PROPORTION

Rules and canons of proportion designed to reduce to a mathematical formula the things that move us in beautiful objects, have not been a great success; the beautiful will always defy such clumsy analysis. But however true it is that beauty of proportion must ever be the result of the finer senses of the artist, it is possible that canons of proportion, such as those of the human body, may be of service to the artist by offering some standard from which he can depart at the dictates of his artistic instinct. There appears to be no doubt that the ancient sculptors used some such system. And many of the renaissance painters were interested in the subject, Leonardo da Vinci having much to say about it in his book.

Rules and guidelines for proportion aimed at creating a mathematical formula for what we find beautiful in objects have not been very successful; beauty will always resist such clumsy analysis. However true it is that beauty of proportion ultimately comes from the artist's refined senses, it’s possible that proportional guidelines, like those for the human body, can help the artist by providing a standard from which they can diverge based on their artistic intuition. There’s no doubt that ancient sculptors used some kind of system. Many Renaissance painters were also interested in this topic, with Leonardo da Vinci discussing it extensively in his book.

Like all scientific knowledge in art, it fails to trap the elusive something that is the vital essence of the whole matter, but such scientific knowledge does help to bring one's work up to a high point of mechanical perfection, from which one's artistic instinct can soar with a better chance of success than if no scientific scaffolding had been used in the initial building up. Yet, however perfect your system, don't forget that the life, the "dither," will still have to be accounted for, and no science will help you here.

Like all scientific knowledge in art, it can't capture the elusive quality that is the vital essence of the whole subject. However, this scientific knowledge does help elevate your work to a high level of mechanical perfection, allowing your artistic instinct to flourish with a better chance of success than if you hadn't used any scientific framework in the initial creation. Still, no matter how perfect your system is, remember that the life, the "dither," must still be acknowledged, and no science will assist you with that.

The idea that certain mathematical proportions 228or relationships underlie the phenomena we call beauty is very ancient, and too abstruse to trouble us here. But undoubtedly proportion, the quantitative relation of the parts to each other and to the whole, forms a very important part in the impression works of art and objects give us, and should be a subject of the greatest consideration in planning your work. The mathematical relationship of these quantities is a subject that has always fascinated scholars, who have measured the antique statues accurately and painstakingly to find the secret of their charm. Science, by showing that different sounds and different colours are produced by waves of different lengths, and that therefore different colours and sounds can be expressed in terms of numbers, has certainly opened the door to a new consideration of this subject of beauty in relation to mathematics. And the result of such an inquiry, if it is being or has been carried on, will be of much interest.

The idea that certain mathematical proportions 228 or relationships are behind the phenomena we call beauty is really old and too complex to discuss here. However, it's clear that proportion—the quantitative relationship of parts to each other and to the whole—plays a significant role in the impressions that works of art and objects leave on us, and should be a key focus when planning your work. The mathematical relationship of these quantities has always intrigued scholars, who have meticulously measured ancient statues to uncover the secret of their appeal. Science, by demonstrating that different sounds and colors are produced by waves of various lengths, and that these can therefore be quantified, has certainly opened the door to a fresh exploration of beauty in relation to mathematics. The outcome of such an inquiry, whether it's currently happening or has already taken place, will be of great interest.

But there is something chilling to the artist in an array of dead figures, for he has a consciousness that the life of the whole matter will never be captured by such mechanical means.

But there’s something eerie to the artist in a collection of dead figures, because he knows that the essence of the whole thing can never be captured by such mechanical methods.

The question we are interested to ask here is: are there particular sentiments connected with the different relations of quantities, their proportions, as we found there were in connection with different arrangements of lines and masses? Have abstract proportions any significance in art, as we found abstract line and mass arrangements had? It is a difficult thing to be definite about, and I can only give my own feeling on the matter; but I think in some degree they have.

The question we're interested in here is: are there specific feelings linked to different relationships of quantities and their proportions, similar to what we observed with different arrangements of lines and shapes? Do abstract proportions hold any significance in art, just like abstract line and shape arrangements do? It's challenging to be precise about this, and I can only share my personal perspective on the topic; however, I believe they do have some significance.

Proportion can be considered from our two points of view of unity and variety. In so far as 229the proportions of any picture or object resolve themselves into a simple, easily grasped unity of relationship, a sense of repose and sublimity is produced. In so far as the variety of proportion in the different parts is assertive and prevents the eye grasping the arrangement as a simple whole, a sense of the lively restlessness of life and activity is produced. In other words, as we found in line arrangements, unity makes for sublimity, while variety makes for the expression of life. Of course the scale of the object will have something to do with this. That is to say, the most sublimely proportioned dog-kennel could never give us the impression of sublimity produced by a great temple. In pictures the scale of the work is not of so great importance, a painting or drawing having the power of giving the impression of great size on a small scale.

Proportion can be seen from our two perspectives of unity and variety. When the proportions of any image or object create a simple, easily understood unity of relationship, it evokes a feeling of calmness and grandeur. Conversely, when the variety of proportion in different parts is bold and prevents the eye from seeing the arrangement as a cohesive whole, it conveys a sense of the vibrant energy of life and movement. In other words, as we observed in line arrangements, unity leads to grandeur, while variety expresses life. Naturally, the scale of the object plays a role in this. For example, the most beautifully proportioned doghouse could never evoke the same sense of grandeur as a magnificent temple. In artworks, scale is less critical; a painting or drawing can create the impression of significant size even when it's small.

The proportion that is most easily grasped is the half—two equal parts. This is the most devoid of variety, and therefore of life, and is only used when an effect of great repose and aloofness from life is wanted; and even then, never without some variety in the minor parts to give vitality. The third and the quarter, and in fact any equal proportions, are others that are easily grasped and partake in a lesser degree of the same qualities as the half. So that equality of proportion should be avoided except on those rare occasions when effects remote from nature and life are desired. Nature seems to abhor equalities, never making two things alike or the same proportion if she can help it. All systems founded on equalities, as are so many modern systems of social reform, are man's work, the products of a machine-made age. For this is the difference between nature and the 230machine: nature never produces two things alike, the machine never produces two things different. Man could solve the social problem to-morrow if you could produce him equal units. But if all men were alike and equal, where would be the life and fun of existence? it would depart with the variety. And in proportion, as in life, variety is the secret of vitality, only to be suppressed where a static effect is wanted. In architecture equality of proportion is more often met with, as the static qualities of repose are of more importance here than in painting. One meets it on all fine buildings in such things as rows of columns and windows of equal size and distances apart, or the continual repetition of the same forms in mouldings, &c. But even here, in the best work, some variety is allowed to keep the effect from being quite dead, the columns on the outside of a Greek pediment being nearer together and leaning slightly inwards, and the repeated forms of windows, columns, and mouldings being infinitely varied in themselves. But although you often find repetitions of the same forms equidistant in architecture, it is seldom that equality of proportion is observable in the main distribution of the large masses.

The easiest proportion to understand is half—two equal parts. This proportion lacks variety and thus life, and it’s only used when a feeling of calmness and detachment from life is needed; even then, it’s never without some variation in the smaller parts to add energy. The third and the quarter, along with any equal proportions, are also straightforward to grasp and share some of the same qualities as the half, but to a lesser degree. As a result, equal proportions should generally be avoided, except on those rare occasions when effects that feel disconnected from nature and life are intended. Nature seems to dislike equalities, never making two things exactly alike or in the same proportion if it can avoid it. All systems based on equalities, like many modern social reform systems, are human creations, products of a machine-driven era. The difference between nature and the machine is this: nature never produces two identical things, while the machine never produces two different things. Man could solve the social issue tomorrow if he could generate equal units. But if all men were the same and equal, where would the life and excitement of existence be? It would vanish with the lack of variety. As in life, variety is the key to vitality, only suppressed when a static effect is desired. In architecture, equal proportions are more commonly seen since the static qualities of calmness are more important here than in painting. You find it in many fine buildings through elements like rows of columns and windows of equal size and spacing, or the continuous repetition of the same shapes in moldings, etc. But even in the best work, some variety is incorporated to prevent the effect from feeling completely lifeless; for instance, the columns on the edge of a Greek pediment are closer together and slightly lean inward, and the repeated forms of windows, columns, and moldings are infinitely varied. Although you often see repetitions of the same forms spaced equally in architecture, it’s rare to find equality of proportion in the main layout of the large masses.

Let us take our simple type of composition, and in Diagram XXVIII, A, put the horizon across the centre and an upright post cutting it in the middle of the picture. And let us introduce two spots that may indicate the position of birds in the upper spaces on either side of this.

Let’s take our basic type of composition, and in Diagram XXVIII, A, place the horizon across the center with a vertical post cutting through the middle of the image. Now, let’s add two dots to represent the position of birds in the upper area on either side of this.

Here we have a maximum of equality and the deadest and most static of results.

Here we have the highest level of equality and the most lifeless and unchanging outcomes.

To see these diagrams properly it is necessary to cover over with some pieces of notepaper all but 231the one being considered, as they affect each other when seen together, and the quality of their proportion is not so readily observed.

To properly view these diagrams, you need to cover up all but 231the one you're looking at with some pieces of notepaper, as they influence each other when displayed together, making it harder to notice the quality of their proportions.

Plate XLVIII. THE ANSIDEI MADONNA. BY RAPHAEL (NATIONAL GALLERY) A typical example of static balance in composition. Photo Hanfstaengl

Plate XLVIII.

Plate 48.

THE ANSIDEI MADONNA. BY RAPHAEL (NATIONAL GALLERY)

THE ANSIDEI MADONNA. BY RAPHAEL (NATIONAL GALLERY)

A typical example of static balance in composition.

A common example of static balance in composition.

Photo Hanfstaengl

Photo Hanfstaengl

In many pictures of the Madonna, when a hush and reverence are desired rather than exuberant life, the figure is put in the centre of the canvas, equality of proportion existing between the spaces on either side of her. But having got the repose this centralisation gives, everything is done to conceal this equality, and variety in the contours on either side, and in any figures there may be, is carefully sought. Raphael's "Ansidei Madonna," in the National Gallery, is an instance of this (p. 230). You have first the centralisation of the figure of the Madonna with the throne on which she sits, exactly in the middle of the picture. Not only is the throne in the centre of the picture, but its width is exactly that of the spaces on either side of it, giving us three equal proportions across the picture. Then you have the circular lines of the arches behind, curves possessed of the least possible amount of variety and therefore the calmest and most reposeful; while the horizontal lines of the steps and the vertical lines of the throne and architecture, and also the rows of hanging beads give further emphasis to this infinity of calm. But when we come to the figures this symmetry has been varied everywhere. All the heads swing towards the right, while the lines of the draperies swing freely in many directions. The swing of the heads towards the right is balanced and the eye brought back to equilibrium by the strongly-insisted-upon staff of St. Nicholas on the right. The staff of St. John necessary to balance this line somewhat, is very slightly insisted on, being represented transparent 235as if made of glass, so as not to increase the swing to the right occasioned by the heads. It is interesting to note the fruit introduced at the last moment in the right-hand lower corner, dragged in, as it were, to restore the balance occasioned by the figure of the Christ being on the left. In the writer's humble opinion the extremely obvious artifice with which the lines have been balanced, and the severity of the convention of this composition generally, are out of harmony with the amount of naturalistic detail and particularly of solidity allowed in the treatment of the figures and accessories. The small amount of truth to visual nature in the work of earlier men went better with the formality of such compositions. With so little of the variety of life in their treatment of natural appearances, one was not led to demand so much of the variety of life in the arrangement. It is the simplicity and remoteness from the full effect of natural appearances in the work of the early Italian schools that made their painting such a ready medium for the expression of religious subjects. This atmosphere of other-worldliness where the music of line and colour was uninterrupted by any aggressive look of real things is a better convention for the expression of such ideas and emotions.

In many depictions of the Madonna, when a sense of calm and reverence is preferred over lively expression, the figure is placed in the center of the canvas, creating equal spacing on either side. However, after achieving the tranquility that this central positioning provides, artists take care to disguise this balance, actively seeking variety in the shapes and any figures present on either side. Raphael's "Ansidei Madonna" in the National Gallery illustrates this (p. 230). The Madonna’s figure, along with the throne she sits on, is positioned right in the middle of the painting. The throne not only sits at the center but is also as wide as the spaces on either side, creating three equal sections across the artwork. The circular lines of the arches behind her have minimal variation, contributing to a serene and calm atmosphere; meanwhile, the horizontal lines of the steps and the vertical lines of the throne and architecture, along with the rows of hanging beads, further enhance this stillness. However, when we examine the figures, this symmetry is varied throughout. All the heads tilt to the right, while the draped garments swirl in numerous directions. The tilt of the heads to the right is balanced and brought back to a sense of equilibrium by the prominently featured staff of St. Nicholas on the right. The staff of St. John, which helps balance this line slightly, is only subtly highlighted, appearing transparent 235 as if made of glass, so it doesn’t amplify the rightward tilt caused by the heads. Interestingly, fruit appears in the lower right corner, seemingly added last to restore balance disrupted by Christ’s figure on the left. In my opinion, the stark and obvious balance of lines, along with the rigid structure of this composition, clash with the amount of realistic detail, particularly the solidity in the treatment of the figures and accessories. The earlier artists’ minimal connection to visual nature complemented the formality of their compositions better. With their less varied portrayal of natural elements, there wasn't an expectation for a diverse arrangement. The simplicity and detachment from the full effect of natural appearances in the early Italian schools made their paintings an effective medium for expressing religious themes. This otherworldly atmosphere, where the harmony of lines and colors remained unbroken by the bluntness of reality, serves as a more fitting convention for expressing such ideas and emotions.

Diagram XXVIII(1). A, D, G

Diagram XXVIII(1).

Diagram XXVIII(1).

A, D, G

A, D, G

Diagram XXVIII(2). B, E, H

Diagram XXVIII(2).

Diagram XXVIII(2).

B, E, H

B, E, H

Diagram XXVIII(3). C, F, I

Diagram XXVIII(3).

Diagram XXVIII(3).

C, F, I

C, F, I

In B and C the proportions of the third and the quarter are shown, producing the same static effect as the half, although not so completely.

In B and C, the proportions of the third and the quarter are displayed, creating a similar static effect as the half, although not as fully.

At D, E, F the same number of lines and spots as we have at A, B, C have been used, but varied as to size and position, so that they have no obvious mechanical relationship. The result is an expression of much more life and character.

At D, E, F, the same number of lines and dots that we have at A, B, C have been used, but they've varied in size and position, so they don't show any clear mechanical connection. The result is an expression of much more life and character.

At G, H, I more lines and spots have been 236added. At G they are equidistant and dead from lack of variety, while at H and I they are varied to a degree that prevents the eye grasping any obvious relationship between them. They have consequently a look of liveliness and life very different from A, B, C, or G. It will be observed that as the amount of variety increases so does the life and liveliness of the impression.

At G, H, and I, more lines and spots have been 236added. At G, they are evenly spaced and dull due to a lack of variety, while at H and I, they vary enough that it’s hard for the eye to see any clear connection between them. This gives them a vibrant and lively appearance, which is quite different from A, B, C, or G. It’s noticeable that as the variety increases, so does the liveliness and energy of the impression.

In these diagrams a certain static effect is kept up throughout, on account of our lines being vertical and horizontal only, which lines, as we saw in an earlier chapter, are the calmest we have. But despite this, I think the added life due to the variety in the proportions is sufficiently apparent in the diagrams to prove the point we wish to make.

In these diagrams, a consistent static effect is maintained because our lines are only vertical and horizontal, which, as we discussed in an earlier chapter, are the calmest types we have. However, I believe the additional energy from the variety in the proportions is clearly visible in the diagrams, supporting the point we want to make.

As a contrast to the infinite calm of Raphael's "Madonna," we have reproduced Tintoretto's "Finding of the Body of St. Mark," in the Brera Gallery, Milan. Here all is life and movement. The proportions are infinitely varied, nowhere does the eye grasp any obvious mathematical relationship. We have the same semi-circular arches as in the Raphael, but not symmetrically placed, and their lines everywhere varied, and their calm effect destroyed by the flickering lights playing about them. Note the great emphasis given to the outstretched hand of the powerful figure of the Apostle on the left by the lines of the architecture and the line of arm of the kneeling figure in the centre of the picture converging on this hand and leading the eye immediately to it. There is here no static symmetry, all is energy and force. Starting with this arresting arm, the eye is led down the majestic figure of St. Mark, past the recumbent figure, and across the picture by means of the band of light on the ground, to the 237important group of frightened figures on the right. And from them on to the figures engaged in lowering a corpse from its tomb. Or, following the direction of the outstretched arm of St. Mark, we are led by the lines of the architecture to this group straight away, and back again by means of the group on the right and the band of light on the ground. The quantities are not placed in reposeful symmetry about the canvas, as was the case in the Raphael, but are thrown off apparently haphazard from lines leading the eye round the picture. Note also the dramatic intensity given by the strongly contrasted light and shade, and how Tintoretto has enjoyed the weird effect of the two figures looking into a tomb with a light, their shadows being thrown on the lid they hold open, at the far end of the room. This must have been an amazingly new piece of realism at the time, and is wonderfully used, to give an eerie effect to the darkened end of the room. With his boundless energy and full enjoyment of life, Tintoretto's work naturally shows a strong leaning towards variety, and his amazing compositions are a liberal education in the innumerable and unexpected ways in which a panel can be filled, and should be carefully studied by students.

In contrast to the endless calm of Raphael's "Madonna," we have showcased Tintoretto's "Finding of the Body of St. Mark," in the Brera Gallery, Milan. Here, everything is alive and dynamic. The proportions are varied to the extreme, and there’s no clear mathematical relationship for the eye to grasp. We see the same semi-circular arches as in Raphael's work, but they're not symmetrically arranged; their lines are all different, and their tranquil effect is disrupted by the flickering lights around them. Pay attention to how much focus is placed on the outstretched hand of the powerful Apostle on the left, accentuated by the lines of the architecture and the arm of the kneeling figure in the center of the scene converging on this hand, drawing the eye directly to it. There’s no static symmetry here; everything is about energy and force. Starting with this striking arm, the eye follows down the majestic figure of St. Mark, past the reclining figure, and across the canvas guided by the band of light on the ground, leading to the important group of frightened figures on the right. From there, it moves to the figures involved in lowering a corpse from its tomb. Alternatively, if we follow the direction of St. Mark's outstretched arm, the lines of the architecture direct us right to that group, and then back again through the group on the right and the band of light on the ground. The elements are not arranged in restful symmetry like in Raphael’s work, but seem to be randomly scattered around the canvas, led by lines that guide the eye throughout the scene. Notice the dramatic intensity created by the strong contrast between light and shadow, and how Tintoretto plays with the eerie effect of two figures looking into a tomb with a light, their shadows cast on the lid they’re holding open at the far end of the room. This was likely an astonishingly new form of realism at that time, masterfully used to enhance the spooky effect at the darkened end of the room. With his boundless energy and zest for life, Tintoretto's work naturally displays a strong inclination towards variety, and his fascinating compositions provide valuable lessons on the countless and unexpected ways a panel can be filled, making them essential study material for students.

Plate XLIX. THE FINDING OF THE BODY OF ST. MARK TINTORETTO (BREDA, MILAN) Compare with Raphael's Ansidei Madonna, and note how energy and movement take the place of static calm in the balance of this composition. Photo Anderson

Plate XLIX.

Plate 49.

THE FINDING OF THE BODY OF ST. MARK TINTORETTO (BREDA, MILAN)

THE FINDING OF THE BODY OF ST. MARK TINTORETTO (BREDA, MILAN)

Compare with Raphael's Ansidei Madonna, and note how energy and movement take the place of static calm in the balance of this composition.

Compare it to Raphael's Ansidei Madonna, and notice how energy and movement replace the still calmness in the balance of this composition.

Photo Anderson

Anderson Photo

A pleasing proportion that often occurs in nature and art is one that may be roughly stated in figures as that between 5 and 8. In such a proportion the eye sees no mathematical relationship. Were it less than 5, it would be too near the proportion of 4 to 8 (or one-third the total length), a dull proportion; or were it more, it would be approaching too near equality of proportion to be quite satisfactory.

A pleasing proportion that frequently appears in nature and art can be roughly expressed in numbers as that between 5 and 8. In this proportion, the eye doesn’t perceive any mathematical relationship. If it were less than 5, it would be too close to the proportion of 4 to 8 (or one-third of the total length), which is a dull proportion; or if it were more, it would be getting too close to equality in proportion to be completely satisfying.

I have seen a proportional compass, imported from Germany, giving a relationship similar to this 238and said to contain the secret of good proportion. There is certainly something remarkable about it, and in the Appendix, page 289, you will find some further interesting facts about this.

I have seen a proportional compass, imported from Germany, that shows a relationship similar to this 238 and is said to hold the secret of good proportion. There is definitely something impressive about it, and in the Appendix, page 289, you will find some additional interesting details about this.

The variety of proportions in a building, a picture, or a piece of sculpture should always be under the control of a few simple, dominant quantities that simplify the appearance and give it a unity which is readily grasped except where violence and lack of repose are wanted. The simpler the proportion is, the more sublime will be the impression, and the more complicated, the livelier and more vivacious the effect. From a few well-chosen large proportions the eye may be led on to enjoy the smaller varieties. But in good proportion the lesser parts are not allowed to obtrude, but are kept in subordination to the main dispositions on which the unity of the effect depends.

The different proportions in a building, a painting, or a sculpture should always be guided by a few straightforward, dominant elements that simplify the look and create a unity that’s easy to understand, unless chaos and instability are desired. The more straightforward the proportions, the more powerful the impression will be, while more complex ones create a more dynamic and vibrant effect. From a few well-chosen large proportions, the eye can then appreciate the smaller details. However, in good proportion, the smaller elements shouldn’t overshadow the main ones, but rather support the overall unity of the effect.


239

XVII
PORTRAIT DRAWING

There is something in every individual that is likely for a long time to defy the analysis of science. When you have summed up the total of atoms or electrons or whatever it is that goes to the making of the tissues and also the innumerable complex functions performed by the different parts, you have not yet got on the track of the individual that governs the whole performance. The effect of this personality on the outward form, and the influence it has in modifying the aspect of body and features, are the things that concern the portrait draughtsman: the seizing on and expressing forcefully the individual character of the sitter, as expressed by his outward appearance.

There’s something in every person that will likely remain beyond the reach of scientific analysis for a long time. When you count all the atoms or electrons or whatever makes up the tissues and consider the countless complex functions carried out by the different parts, you still haven’t captured the essence of the individual who directs the entire process. The impact of this personality on outward appearance and the way it influences the body and features are what matter to the portrait artist: capturing and powerfully expressing the unique character of the sitter as shown by their outward look.

This character expression in form has been thought to be somewhat antagonistic to beauty, and many sitters are shy of the particular characteristics of their own features. The fashionable photographer, knowing this, carefully stipples out of his negative any striking characteristics in the form of his sitter the negative may show. But judging by the result, it is doubtful whether any beauty has been gained, and certain that interest and vitality have been lost in the process. Whatever may be the nature of beauty, it is obvious that what makes one object more beautiful than another 240is something that is characteristic of the appearance of the one and not of the other: so that some close study of individual characteristics must be the aim of the artist who would seek to express beauty, as well as the artist who seeks the expression of character and professes no interest in beauty.

This expression of character in form is often seen as somewhat opposed to beauty, and many subjects feel self-conscious about their unique features. The trendy photographer, aware of this, carefully edits out any striking characteristics in the subject's appearance that the photo might reveal. However, judging by the outcome, it’s questionable whether any beauty has been achieved, and it's clear that interest and vitality have been lost in the process. Whatever beauty may be, it's clear that what makes one object more beautiful than another 240 is tied to the unique appearance of each. Therefore, close examination of individual traits must be the goal of the artist aiming to convey beauty, as well as the artist who seeks to express character and has no interest in beauty.

Catching the likeness, as it is called, is simply seizing on the essential things that belong only to a particular individual and differentiate that individual from others, and expressing them in a forceful manner. There are certain things that are common to the whole species, likeness to a common type; the individual likeness is not in this direction but at the opposite pole to it.

Catching the likeness, as it’s called, is simply grabbing the essential traits that belong uniquely to a specific person and set that person apart from others, and expressing them powerfully. There are certain traits that are common to the whole species, resembling a general type; the individual likeness doesn’t go in this direction but is at the opposite end of the spectrum.

It is one of the most remarkable things connected with the amazing subtlety of appreciation possessed by the human eye, that of the millions of heads in the world, and probably of all that have ever existed in the world, no two look exactly alike. When one considers how alike they are, and how very restricted is the range of difference between them, is it not remarkable how quickly the eye recognises one person from another? It is more remarkable still how one sometimes recognises a friend not seen for many years, and whose appearance has changed considerably in the meantime. And this likeness that we recognise is not so much as is generally thought a matter of the individual features. If one sees the eye alone, the remainder of the face being covered, it is almost impossible to recognise even a well-known friend, or tell whether the expression is that of laughing or crying. And again, how difficult it is to recognise anybody when the eyes are masked and only the lower part of the face visible.

It's truly remarkable that despite the millions of faces in the world, and probably all the ones that have ever existed, no two are exactly alike. When you think about how similar they can be and how limited the differences are, it’s surprising how quickly we can tell one person from another. Even more astonishing is how sometimes we can recognize a friend we haven't seen in many years, even if their appearance has changed a lot. The similarities we notice aren’t just about individual features. If you only see someone’s eye while the rest of their face is covered, it’s nearly impossible to recognize even a close friend or to tell if they’re laughing or crying. Similarly, it’s really hard to recognize anyone when their eyes are covered and only the lower part of their face is visible.

Plate L. FROM A DRAWING IN RED CHALK BY HOLBEIN IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM PRINT ROOM Note how every bit of variety is sought for, the difference in the eyes and on either side of the mouth, etc.

Plate L.

Plate L.

FROM A DRAWING IN RED CHALK BY HOLBEIN IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM PRINT ROOM

FROM A DRAWING IN RED CHALK BY HOLBEIN IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM PRINT ROOM

Note how every bit of variety is sought for, the difference in the eyes and on either side of the mouth, etc.

Note how every bit of variety is sought after, the difference in the eyes and on either side of the mouth, etc.

241If you try and recall a well-known head it will not be the shape of the features that will be recollected so much as an impression, the result of all these combined, a sort of chord of which the features will be but the component elements. It is the relation of the different parts to this chord, this impression of the personality of a head, that is the all-important thing in what is popularly called "catching the likeness." In drawing a portrait the mind must be centred on this, and all the individual parts drawn in relation to it. The moment the eye gets interested solely in some individual part and forgets the consideration of its relationship to this whole impression, the likeness suffers.

241When you try to remember a familiar face, it’s not really the shape of the features that stands out, but rather the overall impression created by all those features together—a kind of harmony where the features are just the individual parts. What really matters in what we commonly refer to as "capturing a likeness" is how those different parts relate to that overall impression, that essence of a person's identity. When drawing a portrait, the focus must be on this essence, ensuring that all the individual parts are connected to it. The moment you start focusing only on one specific part and lose sight of how it relates to the overall image, the likeness gets lost.

Where there is so much that is similar in heads, it is obvious that what differences there are must be searched out and seized upon forcefully, if the individuality of the head is to be made telling. The drawing of portraits should therefore be approached from the direction of these differences; that is to say, the things in general disposition and proportion in which your subject differs from a common type, should be first sought for, the things common to all heads being left to take care of themselves for a bit. The reason for this is that the eye, when fresh, sees these differences much more readily than after it has been working for some time. The tendency of a tired eye is to see less differentiation, and to hark back to a dull uniformity; so get in touch at once with the vital differences while your eye is fresh and your vision keen.

Where there are so many similarities in people's faces, it's clear that we need to identify and emphasize the differences to highlight each person's uniqueness. When drawing portraits, we should focus on these differences first; in other words, look for the features in general shape and proportions that set your subject apart from a typical face, while letting the common traits sort themselves out for now. The reason for this is that a fresh eye can spot these differences much more easily than a tired one. When your eyes are fatigued, you tend to see less distinction and revert to a monotonous uniformity, so connect with those essential differences right away while your eye is still fresh and your vision is sharp.

Look out first for the character of the disposition of the features, note the proportions down an imagined centre line, of the brows, the base of the nose, the mouth and chin, and get the character 242of the shape of the enclosing line of the face blocked out in square lines. The great importance of getting these proportions right early cannot be over-emphasised, as any mistake may later on necessitate completely shifting a carefully drawn feature. And the importance of this may be judged from the fact that you recognise a head a long way off, before anything but the general disposition of the masses surrounding the features can be seen. The shape of the skull, too, is another thing of which to get an early idea, and its relation to the face should be carefully noted. But it is impossible to lay down hard and fast rules for these things.

First, pay attention to the arrangement of the facial features. Observe the proportions along an imaginary center line for the brows, the base of the nose, the mouth, and the chin, and capture the outline of the face with strong, angular lines. It's crucial to get these proportions right early on, as any errors may require you to completely adjust a carefully drawn feature later. The significance of this can be seen in how you can recognize a head from a distance, even when only the general placement of the features is visible. Additionally, understanding the shape of the skull and how it relates to the face is important. However, there are no strict rules for these aspects.

Some artists begin in point drawing with the eyes, and some leave the eyes until the very last. Some draughtsmen are never happy until they have an eye to adjust the head round, treating it as the centre of interest and drawing the parts relatively to it. While others say, with some truth, that there is a mesmeric effect produced when the eye is drawn that blinds one to the cold-blooded technical consideration of a head as line and tone in certain relationships; that it is as well to postpone until the last that moment when the shapes and tones that represent form in your drawing shall be lit up by the introduction of the eye to the look of a live person. One is freer to consider the accuracy of one's form before this disturbing influence is introduced. And there is a good deal to be said for this.

Some artists start drawing the eyes first, while others save them for last. Some sketch artists feel incomplete until they can adjust the eye, using it as the focal point and drawing everything else in relation to it. Others argue, with some merit, that drawing the eye creates a captivating effect that distracts from the objective technical aspects of a head as lines and tones in specific relationships; it's often better to wait until the end to add the eye, which brings the shapes and tones representing the form in your drawing to life. You have more freedom to focus on the accuracy of your form before this distracting element is introduced. There’s a lot to support this approach.

Although in point drawing you can, without serious effect, begin at any part that interests you, in setting out a painting I think there can be no two opinions as to the right way to go about it. The character of the general disposition of the 243masses must be first constructed. And if this general blocking in has been well done, the character of the sitter will be apparent from the first even in this early stage; and you will be able to judge of the accuracy of your blocking out by whether or not it does suggest the original. If it does not, correct it before going any further, working, as it were, from the general impression of the masses of the head as seen a long way off, adding more and more detail, and gradually bringing the impression nearer, until the completed head is arrived at, thus getting in touch from the very first with the likeness which should dominate the work all along.

While in point drawing you can start at any part that catches your interest without much consequence, when it comes to setting up a painting, there’s no doubt about the right approach. You first need to establish the overall composition of the masses. If this initial framework is well executed, you'll see the sitter's character from the beginning, even at this early stage. You can gauge the accuracy of your layout by whether it resembles the subject. If it doesn’t, make corrections before moving on, working from the general impression of the head as if viewed from a distance, then gradually adding details and refining your work until you achieve the final look, keeping the likeness that should be the focus throughout the process.

Plate LI. SIR CHARLES DILKE, BART. From the drawing in the collection of Sir Robert Essex, M.P., in red conté chalk rubbed, the high lights being picked out with rubber.

Plate LI.

Plate 51.

SIR CHARLES DILKE, BART.

SIR CHARLES DILKE, BART.

From the drawing in the collection of Sir Robert Essex, M.P., in red conté chalk rubbed, the high lights being picked out with rubber.

From the drawing in Sir Robert Essex's collection, M.P., in red chalk, with highlights emphasized using an eraser.

There are many points of view from which a portrait can be drawn—I mean, mental points of view. And, as in a biography, the value of the work will depend on the insight and distinction of the author or artist. The valet of a great man might write a biography of his master that could be quite true to his point of view; but, assuming him to be an average valet, it would not be a great work. I believe the gardener of Darwin when asked how his master was, said, "Not at all well. You see, he moons about all day. I've seen him staring at a flower for five or ten minutes at a time. Now, if he had some work to do, he would be much better." A really great biography cannot be written except by a man who can comprehend his subject and take a wide view of his position among men, sorting what is trivial from what is essential, what is common to all men from what is particular to the subject of his work. And it is very much the same in portraiture. It is only the painter who possesses the intuitive faculty for seizing on the significant things in the form expression of his subject, of 244disentangling what is trivial from what is important; and who can convey this forcibly to the beholder on his canvas, more forcibly than a casual sight of the real person could do—it is only this painter who can hope to paint a really fine portrait.

There are many ways to approach a portrait—I mean, different mental perspectives. Just like in a biography, the quality of the work depends on the insight and skill of the author or artist. The servant of a great person might write a biography that accurately reflects his viewpoint; however, if he's just an average servant, it probably won't be a remarkable piece. I remember Darwin's gardener was asked how his boss was doing and replied, "Not great at all. You see, he just wanders around all day. I've seen him staring at a flower for five or ten minutes at a time. If he had some work to do, he'd be much better off." A truly great biography can only be written by someone who understands his subject deeply and views their place in the world broadly, distinguishing what's unimportant from what's essential, and what's universal from what's unique to the person being discussed. The same goes for portrait painting. Only a painter with the insight to capture the significant aspects of their subject’s expression—who can separate the trivial from the important—and convey this powerfully on canvas—more effectively than a casual glance at the real person could—can hope to create a truly remarkable portrait.

It is true, the honest and sincere expression of any painter will be of some interest, just as the biography written by Darwin's gardener might be; but there is a vast difference between this point of view and that of the man who thoroughly comprehends his subject.

It’s true that the genuine and heartfelt expression of any artist will be somewhat interesting, like a biography written by Darwin’s gardener might be; but there’s a huge difference between this perspective and that of someone who fully understands their subject.

Not that it is necessary for the artist to grasp the mind of his sitter, although that is no disadvantage. But this is not his point of view, his business is with the effect of this inner man on his outward appearance. And it is necessary for him to have that intuitive power that seizes instinctively on those variations of form that are expressive of this inner man. The habitual cast of thought in any individual affects the shape and moulds the form of the features, and, to the discerning, the head is expressive of the person; both the bigger and the smaller person, both the larger and the petty characteristics everybody possesses. And the fine portrait will express the larger and subordinate the petty individualities, will give you what is of value, and subordinate what is trivial in a person's appearance.

It's not essential for the artist to fully understand the mind of the person being portrayed, although that could be helpful. This isn't his main focus; his job is to capture how this inner self affects the person's outward look. He needs to have an intuitive ability to instinctively recognize those changes in form that represent this inner self. A person's usual way of thinking influences the shape and structure of their features, and for those who can see it, the head reflects the individual; this applies to everyone, regardless of their stature, showcasing both significant and minor traits. A great portrait will highlight the prominent aspects while downplaying the less important details of a person's appearance.

The pose of the head is a characteristic feature about people that is not always given enough attention in portraits. The habitual cast of thought affects its carriage to a very large degree. The two extreme types of what we mean are the strongly emotional man who carries his head high, drinking 245in impressions as he goes through the world; and the man of deep thought who carries his head bent forward, his back bent in sympathy with it. Everybody has some characteristic action in the way that should be looked out for and that is usually absent when a sitter first appears before a painter on the studio throne. A little diplomacy and conversational humouring is necessary to produce that unconsciousness that will betray the man in his appearance.

The way someone holds their head is a key aspect of their character that often doesn’t get enough attention in portraits. Our usual way of thinking influences how we carry our heads quite a bit. The two extremes we’re talking about are the highly emotional person who keeps their head held high, absorbing experiences as they navigate the world; and the deep thinker who tilts their head forward, with their back bending in alignment. Everyone has some unique mannerism to look out for, which is usually missing when a sitter first faces an artist in the studio. A bit of finesse and light-hearted conversation is needed to create a relaxed atmosphere that reveals the true self in their appearance.

How the power to discover these things can be acquired, it is, of course, impossible to teach. All the student can do is to familiarise himself with the best examples of portraiture, in the hope that he may be stimulated by this means to observe finer qualities in nature and develop the best that is in him. But he must never be insincere in his work. If he does not appreciate fine things in the work of recognised masters, let him stick to the honest portrayal of what he does see in nature. The only distinction of which he is capable lies in this direction. It is not until he awakens to the sight in nature of qualities he may have admired in others' work that he is in a position honestly to introduce them into his own performances.

How to gain the ability to discover these things is, of course, impossible to teach. All the student can do is become familiar with the best examples of portraiture, hoping that this will inspire him to notice finer qualities in nature and bring out the best in himself. However, he must never be insincere in his work. If he doesn’t appreciate the fine aspects of recognized masters' work, he should focus on honestly portraying what he sees in nature. The only distinction he can achieve lies in this area. It’s only when he begins to see qualities in nature that he may have admired in others' work that he can genuinely incorporate them into his own creations.


Probably the most popular point of view in portraiture at present is the one that can be described as a "striking presentment of the live person." This is the portrait that arrests the crowd in an exhibition. You cannot ignore it, vitality bursts from it, and everything seems sacrificed to this quality of striking lifelikeness. And some very wonderful modern portraits have been painted from this point of view. But have we not sacrificed too much to this quality of vitality? Here is a lady 246hurriedly getting up from a couch, there a gentleman stepping out of the frame to greet you, violence and vitality everywhere. But what of repose, harmony of colour and form, and the wise ordering and selecting of the materials of vision that one has been used to in the great portraiture of the past? While the craftsman in one is staggered and amazed at the brilliant virtuosity of the thing, the artist in one resents the sacrifice of so much for what is, after all, but a short-lived excitement. Age may, no doubt, improve some of the portraits of this class by quieting them in colour and tone. And those that are good in design and arrangement will stand this without loss of distinction, but those in which everything has been sacrificed to this striking lifelike quality will suffer considerably. This particular quality depends so much on the freshness of the paint that when this is mellowed and its vividness is lost, nothing will remain of value, if the quieter qualities of design and arrangement have been sacrificed for it.

Nowadays, the most popular perspective in portrait painting is often described as a "compelling representation of a real person." This is the type of portrait that catches everyone’s attention at an exhibition. You can't overlook it; it radiates energy, and everything seems to be focused on this aspect of striking realism. Some truly remarkable modern portraits have been created from this viewpoint. But have we sacrificed too much for this sense of vitality? Here’s a woman 246hastily getting up from a couch, and there’s a man stepping out of the frame to greet you—energy and excitement all around. But what about calm, harmony in color and form, and the thoughtful arrangement and selection of visual elements that were hallmarks of great portraiture in the past? While the craftsman in us is impressed by the brilliant technical skill on display, the artist within feels resentful at how much has been given up for what is ultimately just a fleeting thrill. Time may enhance some of these portraits by softening their colors and tones. Those with strong design and composition will endure this without losing their uniqueness, but those where everything has been sacrificed for that striking lifelike quality will suffer greatly. This particular trait relies heavily on the freshness of the paint, so when it ages and its vibrancy fades, there will be little of value left if the quieter aspects of design and composition were compromised for it.

Frans Hals is the only old master I can think of with whom this form of portrait can be compared. But it will be noticed that besides designing his canvases carefully, he usually balanced the vigour and vitality of his form with a great sobriety of colour. In fact, in some of his later work, where this restless vitality is most in evidence, the colour is little more than black and white, with a little yellow ochre and Venetian red. It is this extreme reposefulness of colour that opposes the unrest in the form and helps to restore the balance and necessary repose in the picture. It is interesting to note the restless variety of the edges in Frans Hal's work, how he never, if he can help it, lets an edge 247run smoothly, but keeps it constantly on the move, often leaving it quite jagged, and to compare this with what was said about vitality depending on variety.

Frans Hals is the only old master I can think of that this type of portrait can be compared to. You’ll notice that, besides carefully planning his canvases, he often balanced the energy and liveliness of his forms with a lot of restraint in color. In fact, in some of his later works, where this restless energy is most evident, the colors are mostly just black and white, with a bit of yellow ochre and Venetian red. It’s this extreme calmness in color that counters the restlessness in the form and helps restore balance and necessary tranquility in the painting. It's interesting to note the restless variety of the edges in Frans Hals’s work; he never, if he can avoid it, allows an edge 247to run smoothly but keeps it constantly moving, often leaving it quite jagged, and to compare this with what was said about vitality depending on variety.

Plate LII. JOHN REDMOND, M.P. From the drawing in the collection of Sir Robert Essex, M.P., in red conté chalk rubbed, the high lights being picked out with rubber.

Plate LII.

Plate 52.

JOHN REDMOND, M.P.

JOHN REDMOND, M.P.

From the drawing in the collection of Sir Robert Essex, M.P., in red conté chalk rubbed, the high lights being picked out with rubber.

From the drawing in the collection of Sir Robert Essex, M.P., in red conté chalk rubbed, with the highlights picked out using an eraser.


Another point of view is that of the artist who seeks to give a significant and calm view of the exterior forms of the sitter, an expressive map of the individuality of those forms, leaving you to form your own intellectual judgments. A simple, rather formal, attitude is usually chosen, and the sitter is drawn with searching honesty. There is a great deal to be said for this point of view in the hands of a painter with a large appreciation of form and design. But without these more inspiring qualities it is apt to have the dulness that attends most literal transcriptions. There are many instances of this point of view among early portrait painters, one of the best of which is the work of Holbein. But then, to a very distinguished appreciation of the subtleties of form characterisation he added a fine sense of design and colour arrangement, qualities by no means always at the command of some of the lesser men of this school.

Another perspective is that of the artist who aims to present a meaningful and calm view of the sitter's outer appearance, creating an expressive representation of their individuality, allowing you to form your own intellectual judgments. A straightforward, somewhat formal approach is typically taken, and the sitter is portrayed with genuine honesty. This viewpoint has a lot to offer when in the hands of a painter who has a deep appreciation for form and design. However, without those more inspiring qualities, it can tend to be as dull as most literal representations. There are numerous examples of this perspective among early portrait painters, one of the best being Holbein's work. However, he not only had a distinguished appreciation for the subtleties of form characterization but also possessed a strong sense of design and color arrangement, qualities that are not always found in some of the lesser artists from this school.

Every portrait draughtsman should make a pilgrimage to Windsor, armed with the necessary permission to view the wonderful series of portrait drawings by this master in the library of the castle. They are a liberal education in portrait drawing. It is necessary to see the originals, for it is only after having seen them that one can properly understand the numerous and well-known reproductions. A study of these drawings will, I think, reveal the fact that they are not so literal as is usually thought. Unflinchingly and unaffectedly 248honest they are, but honest not to a cold, mechanically accurate record of the sitter's appearance, but honest and accurate to the vital impression of the live sitter made on the mind of the live artist. This is the difference we were trying to explain that exists between the academic and the vital drawing, and it is a very subtle and elusive quality, like all artistic qualities, to talk about. The record of a vital impression done with unflinching accuracy, but under the guidance of intense mental activity, is a very different thing from a drawing done with the cold, mechanical accuracy of a machine. The one will instantly grip the attention and give one a vivid sensation in a way that no mechanically accurate drawing could do, and in a way that possibly the sight of the real person would not always do. We see numbers of faces during a day, but only a few with the vividness of which I am speaking. How many faces in a crowd are passed indifferently—there is no vitality in the impression they make on our mind; but suddenly a face will rivet our attention, and although it is gone in a flash, the memory of the impression will remain for some time.

Every portrait artist should make a trip to Windsor, equipped with the necessary permission to see the amazing collection of portrait drawings by this master in the castle's library. They provide a rich education in portrait drawing. It's essential to view the originals because only after seeing them can one truly grasp the many well-known reproductions. I believe that studying these drawings will show that they aren't as literal as people often think. They are unflinchingly and genuinely honest, but not in a cold, mechanically precise way that records the sitter's appearance. Instead, they are honest and accurate to the vital impression that the live sitter leaves on the mind of the live artist. This is the difference we were trying to clarify between academic and vital drawing, and it's a very subtle and elusive quality, like all artistic qualities, that's difficult to describe. The record of a vital impression created with unyielding accuracy, guided by intense mental engagement, is very different from a drawing made with the cold, mechanical precision of a machine. The former will immediately grab your attention and provide a vivid sensation in a way that no mechanically accurate drawing can, and in a way that perhaps even the sight of the real person might not always achieve. We see numerous faces throughout the day, but only a few with the vividness I’m referring to. How many faces in a crowd go by without leaving an impact on our minds? There’s no vitality in the impression they make; then suddenly, a face will catch our attention, and although it's gone in an instant, the memory of that impression will linger for a while.

The best of Holbein's portrait drawings give one the impression of having been seen in one of these flashes and rivet the attention in consequence. Drawings done under this mental stimulus present subtle differences from drawings done with cold accuracy. The drawing of the Lady Audley, here reproduced, bears evidence of some of this subtle variation on what are called the facts, in the left eye of the sitter. It will be noticed that the pupil of this eye is larger than the other. Now I do not suppose that as a matter of mechanical accuracy this was so, 249but the impression of the eyes seen as part of a vivid impression of the head is seldom that they are the same size. Holbein had in the first instance in this very carefully wrought drawing made them so, but when at the last he was vitalising the impression, "pulling it together" as artists say, he has deliberately put a line outside the original one, making this pupil larger. This is not at all clearly seen in the reproduction, but is distinctly visible in the original. And to my thinking it was done at the dictates of the vivid mental impression he wished his drawing to convey. Few can fail to be struck in turning over this wonderful series of drawings by the vividness of their portraiture, and the vividness is due to their being severely accurate to the vital impression on the mind of Holbein, not merely to the facts coldly observed.

The best of Holbein's portrait drawings give the impression of having been created in a flash, capturing attention as a result. Drawings made under this kind of mental inspiration show subtle differences compared to ones made with cold precision. The drawing of Lady Audley, reproduced here, demonstrates some of these nuanced variations from what are known as the facts, particularly in the left eye of the sitter. You'll notice that the pupil of this eye is larger than the other. I don't believe this was a matter of mechanical precision, but rather, when observing the eyes as part of a vivid impression of the whole head, they often aren't the same size. Holbein originally depicted them as equal in this carefully crafted drawing, but as he finalized the impression—what artists call “pulling it together”—he intentionally placed a line outside the original one to make this pupil larger. This isn't easily seen in the reproduction, but is distinctly visible in the original. To me, this was done to express the vibrant mental impression he wanted his drawing to convey. Anyone flipping through this amazing collection of drawings can’t help but be impressed by the vividness of their portraits, which is a result of their strict accuracy to the vital impression in Holbein's mind, not just a cold observation of the facts.

Plate LIII. THE LADY AUDLEY. HOLBEIN (WINDSOR) Note the different sizes of pupils in the eyes, and see letterpress on the opposite page. Copyright photo Braun & Co.

Plate LIII.

Plate 53.

THE LADY AUDLEY. HOLBEIN (WINDSOR)

LADY AUDLEY. HOLBEIN (WINDSOR)

Note the different sizes of pupils in the eyes, and see letterpress on the opposite page.

Note the different sizes of pupils in the eyes, and see the print on the opposite page.

Copyright photo Braun & Co.

Copyright photo Braun & Co.


Another point of view is that of seeking in the face a symbol of the person within, and selecting those things about a head that express this. As has already been said, the habitual attitude of mind has in the course of time a marked influence on the form of the face, and in fact of the whole body, so that—to those who can see—the man or woman is a visible symbol of themselves. But this is by no means apparent to all.

Another perspective is that the face symbolizes the person inside, highlighting features that express this. As mentioned before, a person's usual mindset over time significantly affects the shape of their face and body, making them a visible representation of themselves to those who can perceive it. However, this isn't obvious to everyone.

The striking example of this class is the splendid series of portraits by the late G.F. Watts. Looking at these heads one is made conscious of the people in a fuller, deeper sense than if they were before one in the flesh. For Watts sought to discover the person in their appearance and to paint a picture that should be a living symbol of them. He took pains to find out all he could about the mind of 250his sitters before he painted them, and sought in the appearance the expression of this inner man. So that whereas with Holbein it was the vivid presentation of the impression as one might see a head that struck one in a crowd, with Watts it is the spirit one is first conscious of. The thunders of war appear in the powerful head of Lord Lawrence, the music of poetry in the head of Swinburne, and the dry atmosphere of the higher regions of thought in the John Stuart Mill, &c.

A striking example of this group is the impressive series of portraits by the late G.F. Watts. When you look at these faces, you become aware of the individuals in a more complete and deeper way than if they were right in front of you. Watts aimed to uncover the essence of his subjects' personalities and create a painting that would serve as a living symbol of them. He took great care to learn as much as possible about the minds of his sitters before he painted them, searching for the expression of their inner selves in their appearances. So while Holbein presented a vivid portrayal of an impression that you might catch in a crowd, Watts focuses first on the spirit of the person. The intensity of war resonates in the powerful depiction of Lord Lawrence, the rhythm of poetry in the portrayal of Swinburne, and the cerebral atmosphere of high-level thought in John Stuart Mill, etc.

In the National Portrait Gallery there are two paintings of the poet Robert Browning, one by Rudolph Lehmann and one by Watts. Now the former portrait is probably much more "like" the poet as the people who met him casually saw him. But Watts's portrait is like the man who wrote the poetry, and Lehmann's is not. Browning was a particularly difficult subject in this respect, in that to a casual observer there was much more about his external appearance to suggest a prosperous man of business, than the fiery zeal of the poet.

In the National Portrait Gallery, there are two portraits of the poet Robert Browning, one by Rudolph Lehmann and one by Watts. The first portrait is likely more similar to how casual acquaintances perceived him. However, Watts's portrait captures the essence of the man who wrote the poetry, while Lehmann's does not. Browning was a particularly challenging subject because, to a casual observer, his outward appearance suggested a successful businessman rather than the passionate spirit of a poet.

These portraits by Watts will repay the closest study by the student of portraiture. They are full of that wise selection by a great mind that lifts such work above the triviality of the commonplace to the level of great imaginative painting.

These portraits by Watts deserve careful examination by anyone studying portraiture. They embody a thoughtful choice by a brilliant mind that elevates this work beyond the trivialities of the ordinary to the realm of remarkable imaginative art.


Another point of view is that of treating the sitter as part of a symphony of form and colour, and subordinating everything to this artistic consideration. This is very fashionable at the present time, and much beautiful work is being done with this motive. And with many ladies who would not, I hope, object to one's saying that their principal characteristic was the charm of their appearance, 251this point of view offers, perhaps, one of the best opportunities of a successful painting. A pose is selected that makes a good design of line and colour—a good pattern—and the character of the sitter is not allowed to obtrude or mar the symmetry of the whole considered as a beautiful panel. The portraits of J. McNeill Whistler are examples of this treatment, a point of view that has very largely influenced modern portrait painting in England.

Another perspective is treating the sitter as part of a harmonious blend of form and color, prioritizing this artistic intention above all else. This approach is quite trendy right now, and a lot of beautiful work is being created with this mindset. For many women who probably wouldn't mind being described as primarily defined by their lovely appearance, 251this perspective offers one of the best chances for a successful painting. A pose is chosen that creates an appealing design of lines and colors—a nice pattern—and the sitter's character isn't allowed to interfere or disrupt the overall harmony, which is viewed as a beautiful piece. The portraits of J. McNeill Whistler are examples of this technique, a perspective that has greatly influenced modern portrait painting in England.


Then there is the official portrait in which the dignity of an office held by the sitter, of which occasion the portrait is a memorial, has to be considered. The more intimate interest in the personal character of the sitter is here subordinated to the interest of his public character and attitude of mind towards his office. Thus it happens that much more decorative pageantry symbolic of these things is permissible in this kind of portraiture than in that of plain Mr. Smith; a greater stateliness of design as befitting official occasions.

Then there's the official portrait, which has to reflect the dignity of the position held by the person being portrayed, as the portrait serves as a memorial to that occasion. The focus on the sitter's personal character is less important here than their public persona and their attitude towards their role. As a result, a lot more decorative elements that symbolize these aspects can be used in this type of portrait than in one of an ordinary person like Mr. Smith; a more grand design is appropriate for official settings.

It is not contended that this forms anything like a complete list of the numerous aspects from which a portrait can be considered, but they are some of the more extreme of those prevalent at the present time. Neither is it contended that they are incompatible with each other: the qualities of two or more of these points of view are often found in the same work. And it is not inconceivable that a single portrait might contain all and be a striking lifelike presentment, a faithful catalogue of all the features, a symbol of the person and a symphony of form and colour. But the chances are against such a composite affair being a success. One or other quality will dominate in a successful work; 252and it is not advisable to try and combine too many different points of view as, in the confusion of ideas, directness of expression is lost. But no good portrait is without some of the qualities of all these points of view, whichever may dominate the artist's intention.

It’s not claimed that this is a complete list of the many ways a portrait can be viewed, but these are some of the more prominent perspectives today. It’s also not claimed that they can't work together; the qualities of two or more of these viewpoints are often found in the same piece. It’s entirely possible for a single portrait to capture all of these elements and be a strikingly lifelike representation, a faithful inventory of features, a symbol of the individual, and a harmonious blend of form and color. However, it’s unlikely that such a mixed approach would be successful. In a successful piece, one quality will usually take precedence; 252and it’s not wise to try to blend too many different perspectives, as doing so can muddle the ideas and lose clarity in expression. Yet no great portrait lacks some of the qualities from all these viewpoints, regardless of which one leads the artist's vision.

Expression.

The camera, and more particularly the instantaneous camera, has habituated people to expect in a portrait a momentary expression, and of these momentary expressions the faint smile, as we all know, is an easy first in the matter of popularity. It is no uncommon thing for the painter to be asked in the early stages of his work when he is going to put in the smile, it never being questioned that this is the artist's aim in the matter of expression.

The camera, especially the instant camera, has made people expect a brief expression in a portrait, and among these fleeting expressions, the subtle smile is undoubtedly the most popular. It's quite common for the painter to be asked early in their work when they will add the smile, with the assumption that this is the artist's goal regarding expression.

The giving of lifelike expression to a painting is not so simple a matter as it might appear to be. Could one set the real person behind the frame and suddenly fix them for ever with one of those passing expressions on their faces, however natural it might have been at the moment, fixed for ever it is terrible, and most unlifelike. As we have already said, a few lines scribbled on a piece of paper by a consummate artist would give a greater sense of life than this fixed actuality. It is not ultimately by the pursuit of the actual realisation that expression and life are conveyed in a portrait. Every face has expression of a far more interesting and enduring kind than these momentary disturbances of its form occasioned by laughter or some passing thought, &c. And it must never be forgotten that a portrait is a panel painted to remain for centuries without movement. So that a large amount of the quality of repose must 253enter into its composition. Portraits in which this has not been borne in mind, however entertaining at a picture exhibition, when they are seen for a few moments only, pall on one if constantly seen, and are finally very irritating.

Capturing lifelike expression in a painting is not as straightforward as it seems. Imagine placing a real person behind the frame and trying to freeze one of their fleeting expressions, no matter how natural it was at that moment; it ends up feeling unnatural and troubling. As we've mentioned before, a few lines jotted down by a skilled artist can convey more life than this fixed representation. Expression and life in a portrait aren't ultimately achieved by focusing solely on realism. Every face holds a far more captivating and lasting expression than those brief shifts caused by laughter or fleeting thoughts, and so on. It's important to remember that a portrait is meant to last for centuries without moving. Therefore, a significant portion of its essence must include a sense of calmness. Portraits that overlook this aspect, while entertaining at an art show for just a few moments, can become tiresome with constant viewing and eventually quite annoying.

But the real expression in a head is something more enduring than these passing movements: one that belongs to the forms of a head, and the marks left on that form by the life and character of the person. This is of far more interest than those passing expressions, the results of the contraction of certain muscles under the skin, the effect of which is very similar in most people. It is for the portrait painter to find this more enduring expression and give it noble expression in his work.

But the true expression of a face is something more lasting than those fleeting movements; it reflects the features of the face and the impressions left by a person's life and character. This is much more interesting than those temporary expressions, which come from the contraction of certain muscles under the skin and are quite similar in most people. It is the portrait painter's job to capture this more lasting expression and portray it beautifully in their art.

Treatment of Clothes.

It is a common idea among sitters that if they are painted in modern clothes the picture will look old-fashioned in a few years. If the sitter's appearance were fixed upon the canvas exactly as they stood before the artist in his studio, without any selection on the part of the painter, this might be the result, and is the result in the case of painters who have no higher aim than this.

It’s a common belief among people being painted that if they wear modern clothes, the painting will look dated in a few years. If the subject were captured on the canvas exactly as they appeared before the artist in the studio, with no choices made by the painter, this could happen, and it does happen with artists who only aim for that.

But there are qualities in dress that do not belong exclusively to the particular period of their fashion. Qualities that are the same in all ages. And when these are insisted upon, and the frivolities of the moment in dress not troubled about so much, the portrait has a permanent quality, and will never in consequence look old-fashioned in the offensive way that is usually meant. In the first place, the drapery and stuffs of which clothes are made follow laws in the manner in which they fold 254and drape over the figure, that are the same in all times. If the expression of the figure through the draperies is sought by the painter, a permanent quality will be given in his work, whatever fantastic shapes the cut of the garments may assume.

But there are qualities in clothing that aren't tied to a specific fashion era. These qualities are the same across all ages. When these are emphasized and the fleeting trends of the moment in fashion are overlooked, the portrait has a timeless quality and won’t appear outdated in the negative sense that’s usually implied. First of all, the fabrics and materials that make up clothes adhere to certain principles in how they fold and drape over the body, which remain constant throughout time. If the artist aims to express the figure through the fabrics, their work will possess a timeless quality, no matter how unusual the cuts of the garments may be.

And further, the artist does not take whatever comes to hand in the appearance of his sitter, but works to a thought-out arrangement of colour and form, to a design. This he selects from the moving and varied appearance of his sitter, trying one thing after another, until he sees a suggestive arrangement, from the impression of which he makes his design. It is true that the extremes of fashion do not always lend themselves so readily as more reasonable modes to the making of a good pictorial pattern. But this is not always so, some extreme fashions giving opportunities of very piquant and interesting portrait designs. So that, however extreme the fashion, if the artist is able to select some aspect of it that will result in a good arrangement for his portrait, the work will never have the offensive old-fashioned look. The principles governing good designs are the same in all times; and if material for such arrangement has been discovered in the most modish of fashions, it has been lifted into a sphere where nothing is ever out of date.

Moreover, the artist doesn’t just grab whatever they notice about their subject; they create a thoughtfully planned arrangement of color and form, following a design. They choose from the dynamic and varied appearances of their sitter, experimenting with different elements until they find a meaningful composition, from which they create their design. It’s true that extreme fashion doesn’t always lend itself as easily to creating a strong visual pattern as more moderate styles do. However, that’s not always the case—some extreme fashions offer very intriguing and interesting portrait designs. So, regardless of how extreme the fashion is, if the artist can identify a portion that will lead to a good composition for their portrait, the work will never look outdated. The principles of good design remain consistent through time, and if the materials for such arrangements are found in the trendiest fashions, they are elevated to a realm where nothing ever feels old-fashioned.

It is only when the painter is concerned with the trivial details of fashion for their own sake, for the making his picture look like the real thing, and has not been concerned with transmuting the appearance of fashionable clothes by selection into the permanent realms of form and colour design, that his work will justify one in saying that it will look stale in a few years.

It’s only when the painter focuses on the petty details of fashion just for the sake of it, trying to make their artwork resemble reality, and isn’t interested in transforming the look of fashionable clothing into lasting elements of form and color design, that you can say their work will seem outdated in a few years.

255The fashion of dressing sitters in meaningless, so-called classical draperies is a feeble one, and usually argues a lack of capacity for selecting a good arrangement from the clothes of the period in the artist who adopts it. Modern women's clothes are full of suggestions for new arrangements and designs quite as good as anything that has been done in the past. The range of subtle colours and varieties of texture in materials is amazing, and the subtlety of invention displayed in some of the designs for costumes leads one to wonder whether there is not something in the remark attributed to an eminent sculptor that "designing ladies' fashions is one of the few arts that is thoroughly vital to-day."

255The trend of dressing subjects in irrelevant, so-called classical drapes is weak and usually shows that the artist lacks the ability to choose a good arrangement from contemporary clothing. Modern women's fashion offers plenty of ideas for new styles and designs that are just as impressive as anything from the past. The variety of subtle colors and textures in materials is incredible, and the creativity seen in some costume designs makes you wonder if there’s truth to the saying from a famous sculptor that "designing women’s fashion is one of the few arts that is truly vital today."


256

XVIII
THE VISUAL MEMORY

The memory is the great storehouse of artistic material, the treasures of which the artist may know little about until a chance association lights up some of its dark recesses. From early years the mind of the young artist has been storing up impressions in these mysterious chambers, collected from nature's aspects, works of art, and anything that comes within the field of vision. It is from this store that the imagination draws its material, however fantastic and remote from natural appearances the forms it may assume.

The memory is the huge reservoir of artistic material, the treasures of which the artist might not even be aware until a random association brings some of its hidden parts to light. From a young age, the mind of the budding artist has been gathering impressions in these mysterious spaces, collected from nature, works of art, and everything that falls within sight. It is from this reservoir that the imagination pulls its material, no matter how fantastical and distant from natural appearances the forms may be.

How much our memory of pictures colours the impressions of nature we receive is probably not suspected by us, but who could say how a scene would appear to him, had he never looked at a picture? So sensitive is the vision to the influence of memory that, after seeing the pictures of some painter whose work has deeply impressed us, we are apt, while the memory of it is still fresh in our minds, to see things as he would paint them. On different occasions after leaving the National Gallery I can remember having seen Trafalgar Square as Paolo Veronese, Turner, or whatever painter may have impressed me in the Gallery, would have painted it, the memory of their work colouring the impression the scene produced.

How much our memory of images affects how we perceive nature is probably something we don't even realize, but who can say how a scene would look to them if they had never seen a picture? Our vision is so influenced by memory that after viewing the works of a painter who has made a strong impact on us, we tend to see things the way they would have painted them, especially while the memory is still fresh. On different occasions after leaving the National Gallery, I can remember seeing Trafalgar Square in the style of Paolo Veronese, Turner, or any other artist who left an impression on me there, the memory of their work shaping my perception of the scene.

257But, putting aside the memory of pictures, let us consider the place of direct visual memory from nature in our work, pictures being indirect or second-hand impressions.

257However, if we set aside our recollections of images, let’s focus on the role of direct visual memory from nature in our work, since pictures are just indirect or second-hand impressions.

We have seen in an earlier chapter how certain painters in the nineteenth century, feeling how very second-hand and far removed from nature painting had become, started a movement to discard studio traditions and study nature with a single eye, taking their pictures out of doors, and endeavouring to wrest nature's secrets from her on the spot. The Pre-Raphaelite movement in England and the Impressionist movement in France were the results of this impulse. And it is interesting, by the way, to contrast the different manner in which this desire for more truth to nature affected the French and English temperaments. The intense individualism of the English sought out every detail, every leaf and flower for itself, painting them with a passion and intensity that made their painting a vivid medium for the expression of poetic ideas; while the more synthetic mind of the Frenchman approached this search for visual truth from the opposite point of view of the whole effect, finding in the large, generalised impression a new world of beauty. And his more logical mind led him to inquire into the nature of light, and so to invent a technique founded on scientific principles.

We saw in an earlier chapter how some painters in the nineteenth century, realizing how outdated and disconnected from nature painting had become, began a movement to abandon traditional studio practices and study nature directly. They took their artwork outdoors, trying to capture nature’s secrets right at the source. The Pre-Raphaelite movement in England and the Impressionist movement in France emerged from this impulse. Interestingly, it’s worth noting how this desire for greater truth to nature impacted the French and English temperaments differently. The strong individualism of the English artists focused on every detail, every leaf and flower, painting them with a passion that made their work a vibrant medium for expressing poetic ideas. In contrast, the more holistic approach of the French artists sought visual truth from the perspective of the overall effect, discovering a new world of beauty in the broader, generalized impression. Their more analytical mindset led them to explore the nature of light, ultimately inventing techniques based on scientific principles.

But now the first blush of freshness has worn off the new movement, painters have begun to see that if anything but very ordinary effects are to be attempted, this painting on the spot must give place to more reliance on the memory.

But now that the initial excitement of the new movement has faded, painters have started to realize that if they want to achieve anything beyond very basic effects, they need to rely more on their memory instead of just painting on the spot.

Memory has this great advantage over direct vision: it retains more vividly the essential things, 258and has a habit of losing what is unessential to the pictorial impression.

Memory has this great advantage over direct vision: it keeps the important things much clearer, 258and tends to overlook what’s not essential to the image.

But what is the essential in a painting? What is it makes one want to paint at all? Ah! Here we approach very debatable and shadowy ground, and we can do little but ask questions, the answer to which will vary with each individual temperament. What is it that these rays of light striking our retina convey to our brain, and from our brain to whatever is ourselves, in the seat of consciousness above this? What is this mysterious correspondence set up between something within and something without, that at times sends such a clamour of harmony through our whole being? Why do certain combinations of sound in music and of form and colour in art affect us so profoundly? What are the laws governing harmony in the universe, and whence do they come? It is hardly trees and sky, earth, or flesh and blood, as such, that interest the artist; but rather that through these things in memorable moments he is permitted a consciousness of deeper things, and impelled to seek utterance for what is moving him. It is the record of these rare moments in which one apprehends truth in things seen that the artist wishes to convey to others. But these moments, these flashes of inspiration which are at the inception of every vital picture, occur but seldom. What the painter has to do is to fix them vividly in his memory, to snapshot them, as it were, so that they may stand by him during the toilsome procedure of the painting, and guide the work.

But what’s really essential in a painting? What makes someone want to paint at all? Ah! We're stepping into quite debatable and murky territory, and all we can really do is ask questions, which will have different answers depending on each person’s temperament. What do these rays of light hitting our eyes communicate to our brains, and from our brains to whatever makes us who we are, in the seat of consciousness above this? What’s this mysterious connection between something inside us and something outside, that sometimes sends a wave of harmony through our entire being? Why do certain musical sounds and combinations of shapes and colors in art move us so deeply? What are the laws of harmony in the universe, and where do they come from? It’s hardly trees and sky, the earth, or flesh and blood, as such, that captivate the artist; rather, it's that through these things, in memorable moments, he gains insight into deeper truths that drive him to express what he feels. It’s the record of these rare moments, where one grasps truth in the things they observe, that the artist wants to share with others. But these moments, these bursts of inspiration that spark every significant piece of art, happen infrequently. What the painter needs to do is to capture them vividly in his memory, to snapshot them, so they can support him throughout the challenging process of painting and guide his work.

This initial inspiration, this initial flash in the mind, need not be the result of a scene in nature, 259but may of course be purely the work of the imagination; a composition, the sense of which flashes across the mind. But in either case the difficulty is to preserve vividly the sensation of this original artistic impulse. And in the case of its having been derived from nature direct, as is so often the case in modern art, the system of painting continually on the spot is apt to lose touch with it very soon. For in the continual observation of anything you have set your easel before day after day, comes a series of impressions, more and more commonplace, as the eye becomes more and more familiar with the details of the subject. And ere long the original emotion that was the reason of the whole work is lost sight of, and one of those pictures or drawings giving a catalogue of tired objects more or less ingeniously arranged (that we all know so well) is the result—work utterly lacking in the freshness and charm of true inspiration. For however commonplace the subject seen by the artist in one of his "flashes," it is clothed in a newness and surprise that charm us, be it only an orange on a plate.

This initial inspiration, this first spark in the mind, doesn’t have to come from a scene in nature, 259 but can also be purely a product of the imagination; a creation, the essence of which suddenly appears in the mind. But in either case, the challenge is to keep the feeling of this original artistic impulse alive. And when it comes from nature directly, as is often the case in modern art, the practice of painting on-site can easily lose touch with it very quickly. When you observe something with your easel set up day after day, you end up with a series of impressions that become more and more ordinary, as your eye becomes increasingly familiar with the subject's details. Before long, the original emotion that inspired the entire work fades away, and what results is one of those images or drawings that merely presents a collection of tired objects arranged with varying degrees of creativity (which we all know too well)—a creation completely devoid of the freshness and charm of true inspiration. For no matter how ordinary the subject looked to the artist in one of those "flashes," it carries an element of newness and surprise that captivates us, even if it’s just an orange on a plate.

Now a picture is a thing of paint upon a flat surface, and a drawing is a matter of certain marks upon a paper, and how to translate the intricacies of a visual or imagined impression to the prosaic terms of masses of coloured pigment or lines and tones is the business with which our technique is concerned. The ease, therefore, with which a painter will be able to remember an impression in a form from which he can work, will depend upon his power to analyse vision in this technical sense. The more one knows about what may be called the anatomy of picture-making—how certain forms produce certain 260effects, certain colours or arrangements other effects, &c.—the easier will it be for him to carry away a visual memory of his subject that will stand by him during the long hours of his labours at the picture. The more he knows of the expressive powers of lines and tones, the more easily will he be able to observe the vital things in nature that convey the impression he wishes to memorise.

Now a picture is simply paint on a flat surface, and a drawing consists of various marks on paper. How to translate the complexities of a visual or imagined impression into the basic elements of colored pigment or lines and shades is what our technique focuses on. Therefore, the ease with which a painter can recall an impression in a usable form depends on their ability to analyze vision in this technical way. The more someone understands the "anatomy" of picture-making—how certain shapes create specific effects, how certain colors or arrangements produce different effects, etc.—the easier it will be for them to retain a visual memory of their subject that will support them through the long hours of working on the painting. The more they understand the expressive capabilities of lines and tones, the easier it will be for them to observe the essential aspects of nature that convey the impression they want to remember.

It is not enough to drink in and remember the emotional side of the matter, although this must be done fully, but if a memory of the subject is to be carried away that will be of service technically, the scene must be committed to memory in terms of whatever medium you intend to employ for reproducing it—in the case of a drawing, lines and tones. And the impression will have to be analysed into these terms as if you were actually drawing the scene on some imagined piece of paper in your mind. The faculty of doing this is not to be acquired all at once, but it is amazing of how much development it is capable. Just as the faculty of committing to memory long poems or plays can be developed, so can the faculty of remembering visual things. This subject has received little attention in art schools until just recently. But it is not yet so systematically done as it might be. Monsieur Lecoq de Boisbaudran in France experimented with pupils in this memory training, beginning with very simple things like the outline of a nose, and going on to more complex subjects by easy stages, with the most surprising results. And there is no doubt that a great deal more can and should be done in this direction than is at present attempted. What students should do is to form a habit of making every day in their sketch-book 261a drawing of something they have seen that has interested them, and that they have made some attempt at memorising. Don't be discouraged if the results are poor and disappointing at first—you will find that by persevering your power of memory will develop and be of the greatest service to you in your after work. Try particularly to remember the spirit of the subject, and in this memory-drawing some scribbling and fumbling will necessarily have to be done. You cannot expect to be able to draw definitely and clearly from memory, at least at first, although your aim should always be to draw as frankly and clearly as you can.

It's not enough to just absorb and recall the emotional aspect of the situation—although that's important too. If you want to take away a memory that's useful technically, you need to really commit the scene to memory based on the medium you'll use to reproduce it. For instance, when drawing, think about lines and tones. You should break down the impression into these terms as if you were actually sketching the scene on an imaginary piece of paper in your mind. This skill won't come overnight, but it's incredible how much it can develop. Just like you can learn to memorize long poems or plays, you can also strengthen your ability to remember visual things. This topic hasn't been given much attention in art schools until recently, and even now, it's not being addressed as systematically as it could be. Monsieur Lecoq de Boisbaudran in France worked with students on this memory training, starting with very simple tasks like drawing the outline of a nose, and gradually moving to more complex subjects, achieving surprising results. There's no doubt that much more can and should be done in this area than what is currently attempted. Students should develop a habit of making a daily drawing in their sketchbook of something they've seen that sparked their interest and that they've tried to memorize. Don't be discouraged if the results are poor and disappointing at first—by sticking with it, your memory skills will improve and become extremely helpful in your future work. Make an effort to remember the essence of the subject, and in this memory-drawing, you will need to do some scribbling and rough sketches. You can't expect to draw perfectly from memory right away, but your goal should always be to draw as clearly and confidently as possible.

Plate LIV. STUDY ON BROWN PAPER IN BLACK AND WHITE CONTÉ CHALK Illustrating a simple method of studying drapery forms.

Plate LIV.

Plate 54.

STUDY ON BROWN PAPER IN BLACK AND WHITE CONTÉ CHALK

STUDY ON BROWN PAPER IN BLACK AND WHITE CONTÉ CHALK

Illustrating a simple method of studying drapery forms.

Illustrating an easy way to study drapery shapes.

Let us assume that you have found a subject that moves you and that, being too fleeting to draw on the spot, you wish to commit to memory. Drink a full enjoyment of it, let it soak in, for the recollection of this will be of the utmost use to you afterwards in guiding your memory-drawing. This mental impression is not difficult to recall; it is the visual impression in terms of line and tone that is difficult to remember. Having experienced your full enjoyment of the artistic matter in the subject, you must next consider it from the material side, as a flat, visual impression, as this is the only form in which it can be expressed on a flat sheet of paper. Note the proportions of the main lines, their shapes and disposition, as if you were drawing it, in fact do the whole drawing in your mind, memorising the forms and proportions of the different parts, and fix it in your memory to the smallest detail.

Let’s say you’ve come across a topic that truly inspires you, and since it’s too brief to capture right away, you want to remember it. Take it all in and enjoy it fully, because this experience will be incredibly helpful later when you’re trying to recall it. Remembering this mental image isn’t hard; it’s the visual details—like lines and tones—that are tough to keep in mind. After you’ve fully appreciated the subject's artistic value, you need to think about it from a practical angle, as a flat visual representation, since that’s the only way it can be captured on a sheet of paper. Pay attention to the proportions of the main lines, their shapes and layout, as if you were actually drawing it. Go ahead and visualize the entire drawing in your mind, memorizing the shapes and proportions of each part, and lock it in your memory down to the smallest detail.

If only the emotional side of the matter has been remembered, when you come to draw it you will be hopelessly at sea, as it is remarkable how 262little the memory retains of the appearance of things constantly seen, if no attempt has been made to memorise their visual appearance.

If only the emotional part of the situation has been considered, when you try to recreate it, you'll feel completely lost. It's surprising how little our memory holds onto the look of things we see all the time, especially if we haven't tried to remember how they look.

The true artist, even when working from nature, works from memory very largely. That is to say, he works to a scheme in tune to some emotional enthusiasm with which the subject has inspired him in the first instance. Nature is always changing, but he does not change the intention of his picture. He always keeps before him the initial impression he sets out to paint, and only selects from nature those things that play up to it. He is a feeble artist, who copies individually the parts of a scene with whatever effect they may have at the moment he is doing them, and then expects the sum total to make a picture. If circumstances permit, it is always as well to make in the first instance a rapid sketch that shall, whatever it may lack, at least contain the main disposition of the masses and lines of your composition seen under the influence of the enthusiasm that has inspired the work. This will be of great value afterwards in freshening your memory when in the labour of the work the original impulse gets dulled. It is seldom that the vitality of this first sketch is surpassed by the completed work, and often, alas! it is far from equalled.

The true artist, even when drawing from nature, relies heavily on memory. In other words, they work according to a vision connected to the emotional passion the subject evoked in them initially. Nature is always in flux, but the artist doesn’t change the purpose of their artwork. They consistently recall the initial impression they intended to capture and only choose elements from nature that enhance it. A weak artist simply copies parts of a scene based on how they look at that moment, hoping the total will create a cohesive picture. If circumstances allow, it's beneficial to quickly create a sketch that, despite any flaws, at least captures the main arrangement of shapes and lines in your composition influenced by the enthusiasm that sparked the work. This will be incredibly helpful later in refreshing your memory when the original inspiration starts to fade during the creation process. It’s rare for the energy of this initial sketch to be surpassed by the finished piece, and often, unfortunately, it falls short.

In portrait painting and drawing the memory must be used also. A sitter varies very much in the impression he gives on different days, and the artist must in the early sittings, when his mind is fresh, select the aspect he means to paint and afterwards work largely to the memory of this.

In portrait painting and drawing, memory is essential as well. A sitter can present a completely different impression on different days, so the artist needs to choose the expression to capture during the initial sessions, when their mind is clear, and then largely rely on that memory as they continue to work.

Always work to a scheme on which you have decided, and do not flounder on in the hope of something 263turning up as you go along. Your faculties are never so active and prone to see something interesting and fine as when the subject is first presented to them. This is the time to decide your scheme; this is the time to take your fill of the impression you mean to convey. This is the time to learn your subject thoroughly and decide on what you wish the picture to be. And having decided this, work straight on, using nature to support your original impression, but don't be led off by a fresh scheme because others strike you as you go along. New schemes will do so, of course, and every new one has a knack of looking better than your original one. But it is not often that this is so; the fact that they are new makes them appear to greater advantage than the original scheme to which you have got accustomed. So that it is not only in working away from nature that the memory is of use, but actually when working directly in front of nature.

Always stick to a plan you've created, and don’t get sidetracked hoping something will just pop up as you go. Your mind is never as alert and ready to see something interesting and beautiful as it is when the topic is first introduced. This is the moment to finalize your plan; this is when you should soak in the impression you want to convey. This is the time to thoroughly learn your subject and decide what you want the picture to be. Once you’ve made that decision, keep moving forward, using nature to enhance your initial impression, but don’t get distracted by new ideas just because they seem appealing as you progress. New ideas will come up, of course, and each one has a way of seeming better than your first one. But that’s not usually the case; their novelty makes them look more appealing than the original plan you’ve grown used to. So, the memory is useful not just when you’re stepping away from nature, but also when you’re working directly in front of it.

To sum up, there are two aspects of a subject, the one luxuriating in the sensuous pleasure of it, with all of spiritual significance it may consciously or unconsciously convey, and the other concerned with the lines, tones, shapes, &c., and their rhythmic ordering, by means of which it is to be expressed—the matter and manner, as they may be called. And, if the artist's memory is to be of use to him in his work, both these aspects must be memorised, and of the two the second will need the most attention. But although there are these two aspects of the subject, and each must receive separate attention when memorising it, they are in reality only two aspects of the same thing, which in the act of painting or drawing must be 264united if a work of art is to result. When a subject first flashes upon an artist he delights in it as a painted or drawn thing, and feels instinctively the treatment it will require. In good draughtsmanship the thing felt will guide and govern everything, every touch will be instinct with the thrill of that first impression. The craftsman mind, so laboriously built up, should by now have become an instinct, a second nature, at the direction of a higher consciousness. At such times the right strokes, the right tones come naturally and go on the right place, the artist being only conscious of a fierce joy and a feeling that things are in tune and going well for once. It is the thirst for this glorious enthusiasm, this fusing of matter and manner, this act of giving the spirit within outward form, that spurs the artist on at all times, and it is this that is the wonderful thing about art.

To sum up, there are two aspects of a subject: one that revels in its sensory pleasure, along with all the spiritual significance it may express, whether intentionally or not, and the other that focuses on the lines, tones, shapes, etc., and their rhythmic arrangement that allows it to be expressed—the content and the form, as they might be called. For the artist's memory to be helpful in their work, both of these aspects must be remembered, with the second requiring the most attention. However, despite these two aspects of the subject, each needing separate focus when memorizing it, they are essentially just two sides of the same coin, which must be united in the act of painting or drawing if an artwork is to emerge. When a subject first strikes an artist, they enjoy it as a painted or drawn entity and instinctively sense how it should be treated. In good drawing, the feeling experienced will guide and dictate everything; every stroke will be filled with the excitement of that initial impression. The skilled craftsmanship, built up through hard work, should have become instinctive by now, a second nature led by a higher awareness. In such moments, the right strokes and tones come naturally and fall into place, with the artist only aware of a profound joy and a sense that everything is harmonious and going well for once. It is the desire for this thrilling enthusiasm, this merging of content and form, this act of giving inner spirit an outward expression that drives the artist forward always, and this is what makes art so extraordinary.


265

XIX
PROCEDURE

In commencing a drawing, don't, as so many students do, start carelessly floundering about with your chalk or charcoal in the hope that something will turn up. It is seldom if ever that an artist puts on paper anything better than he has in his mind before he starts, and usually it is not nearly so good.

When you start a drawing, don't be like so many students who just mess around with your chalk or charcoal, hoping something will come together. An artist rarely creates anything on paper that's better than what they had in their mind before they began, and most of the time, it's not nearly as good.

Don't spoil the beauty of a clean sheet of paper by a lot of scribble. Try and see in your mind's eye the drawing you mean to do, and then try and make your hand realise it, making the paper more beautiful by every touch you give instead of spoiling it by a slovenly manner of procedure.

Don't ruin the beauty of a clean sheet of paper with a bunch of scribbles. Imagine in your mind's eye the drawing you want to create, and then make your hand bring it to life, enhancing the paper's beauty with every touch instead of messing it up with a careless approach.

To know what you want to do and then to do it is the secret of good style and technique. This sounds very commonplace, but it is surprising how few students make it their aim. You may often observe them come in, pin a piece of paper on their board, draw a line down the middle, make a few measurements, and start blocking in the drawing without having given the subject to be drawn a thought, as if it were all there done before them, and only needed copying, as a clerk would copy a letter already drafted for him.

To know what you want to do and then actually do it is the key to good style and technique. This may sound very basic, but it's surprising how few students focus on it. You can often see them come in, pin a piece of paper to their board, draw a line down the middle, take a few measurements, and start filling in the drawing without having thought about the subject they’re drawing, as if it was all laid out in front of them, only needing to be copied, like a clerk would copy a letter that’s already been written for them.

Now, nothing is being said against the practice of drawing guide lines and taking measurements 266and blocking in your work. This is very necessary in academic work, if rather fettering to expressive drawing; but even in the most academic drawing the artistic intelligence must be used, although that is not the kind of drawing this chapter is particularly referring to.

Now, there's nothing wrong with using guidelines and taking measurements 266 and outlining your work. This is essential in academic work, even though it can be limiting for expressive drawing; however, even in the most technical drawing, artistic insight should be applied, although that’s not the focus of this chapter.

Look well at the model first; try and be moved by something in the form that you feel is fine or interesting, and try and see in your mind's eye what sort of drawing you mean to do before touching your paper. In school studies be always unflinchingly honest to the impression the model gives you, but dismiss the camera idea of truth from your mind. Instead of converting yourself into a mechanical instrument for the copying of what is before you, let your drawing be an expression of truth perceived intelligently.

Take a good look at the model first; let yourself be inspired by something in the form that you find beautiful or intriguing, and try to visualize in your mind what kind of drawing you want to create before you start on your paper. In your school studies, always be completely honest about the impression the model gives you, but forget about the camera-like idea of truth. Rather than turning yourself into a mechanical tool for copying what you see, let your drawing be an expression of truth that you understand.

Be extremely careful about the first few strokes you put on your paper: the quality of your drawing is often decided in these early stages. If they are vital and expressive, you have started along lines you can develop, and have some hope of doing a good drawing. If they are feeble and poor, the chances are greatly against your getting anything good built upon them. If your start has been bad, pull yourself together, turn your paper over and start afresh, trying to seize upon the big, significant lines and swings in your subject at once. Remember it is much easier to put down a statement correctly than to correct a wrong one; so out with the whole part if you are convinced it is wrong. Train yourself to make direct, accurate statements in your drawings, and don't waste time trying to manoeuvre a bad drawing into a good one. Stop as soon as you feel you have gone wrong and correct the work 267in its early stages, instead of rushing on upon a wrong foundation in the vague hope that it will all come right in the end. When out walking, if you find you have taken a wrong road you do not, if you are wise, go on in the hope that the wrong way will lead to the right one, but you turn round and go back to the point at which you left the right road. It is very much the same in drawing and painting. As soon as you become aware that you have got upon the wrong track, stop and rub out your work until an earlier stage that was right is reached, and start along again from this point. As your eye gets trained you will more quickly perceive when you have done a wrong stroke, and be able to correct it before having gone very far along the wrong road.

Be very careful with the first few strokes you make on your paper: the quality of your drawing often hinges on these initial stages. If they are bold and expressive, you're on the right path and have a chance of creating a good drawing. If they are weak and poor, it's likely you won't be able to build something good from them. If your beginning has been bad, regroup, flip your paper over, and start fresh, focusing on the big, significant lines and movements in your subject right away. Remember, it’s much easier to put down a statement correctly than to fix a wrong one; so erase the whole part if you believe it’s wrong. Train yourself to make direct, accurate statements in your drawings, and don’t waste time trying to force a bad drawing into a good one. Stop as soon as you feel you've gone off track and correct the work 267in its early stages, instead of continuing on a shaky foundation with the vague hope that it will eventually work out. When you're out walking and realize you've taken a wrong turn, you don't, if you're sensible, keep going in hopes that the wrong path will eventually lead to the right one; you turn around and go back to the point where you left the right path. It’s very similar in drawing and painting. As soon as you notice you’re on the wrong track, stop and erase your work back to a point that was right, and start again from there. As you train your eye, you'll quickly recognize when you've made a mistake and be able to correct it before you venture too far down the wrong path.

Do not work too long without giving your eye a little rest; a few moments will be quite sufficient. If things won't come, stop a minute; the eye often gets fatigued very quickly and refuses to see truly, but soon revives if rested a minute or two.

Don’t work for too long without giving your eyes a break; just a few moments will be enough. If you’re struggling to see clearly, take a minute to pause; the eyes can get tired quickly and may stop focusing properly, but they usually recover if you rest them for a minute or two.

Do not go labouring at a drawing when your mind is not working; you are not doing any good, and probably are spoiling any good you have already done. Pull yourself together, and ask what it is you are trying to express, and having got this idea firmly fixed in your mind, go for your drawing with the determination that it shall express it.

Don't try to work on a drawing when you're not focused; it's not going to turn out well, and you might ruin what you've already created. Get yourself together, figure out what you want to express, and once you have that idea clear in your mind, approach your drawing with the commitment that you will convey it.

All this will sound very trite to students of any mettle, but there are large numbers who waste no end of time working in a purely mechanical, lifeless way, and with their minds anywhere but concentrated upon the work before them. And if the mind is not working, the work of the hand will be of no account. My own experience is that one 268has constantly to be making fresh effort during the procedure of the work. The mind is apt to tire and needs rousing continually, otherwise the work will lack the impulse that shall make it vital. Particularly is this so in the final stages of a drawing or painting, when, in adding details and small refinements, it is doubly necessary for the mind to be on fire with the initial impulse, or the main qualities will be obscured and the result enfeebled by these smaller matters.

All this might sound cliché to dedicated students, but there are many who waste a lot of time working in a mechanical, uninspired way, with their minds focused anywhere but on the task at hand. If the mind isn’t engaged, the hand’s work won’t amount to much. From my own experience, one 268 needs to continually make fresh efforts throughout the work process. The mind can easily get tired and needs to be stimulated regularly, otherwise, the work will lack the energy that makes it feel alive. This is especially true in the final stages of a drawing or painting, when adding details and small touches; it’s crucial for the mind to be ignited by the original inspiration, or the core qualities will be lost, and the end result will suffer from these minor distractions.

Do not rub out, if you can possibly help it, in drawings that aim at artistic expression. In academic work, where artistic feeling is less important than the discipline of your faculties, you may, of course, do so, but even here as little as possible. In beautiful drawing of any facility it has a weakening effect, somewhat similar to that produced by a person stopping in the middle of a witty or brilliant remark to correct a word. If a wrong line is made, it is left in by the side of the right one in the drawing of many of the masters. But the great aim of the draughtsman should be to train himself to draw cleanly and fearlessly, hand and eye going together. But this state of things cannot be expected for some time.

Avoid erasing, if you can help it, in drawings that focus on artistic expression. In academic work, where artistic feeling is less important than the discipline of your skills, you may do so, but even then, try to limit it as much as possible. In good drawing, excessive erasing weakens the overall effect, similar to how someone stopping mid-witty remark to correct a word disrupts the punchline. If an incorrect line is drawn, many masters leave it next to the correct one in their works. The primary goal for the artist should be to train themselves to draw clearly and confidently, with hand and eye working together. However, achieving this skill takes time.

Let painstaking accuracy be your aim for a long time. When your eye and hand have acquired the power of seeing and expressing on paper with some degree of accuracy what you see, you will find facility and quickness of execution will come of their own accord. In drawing of any expressive power this quickness and facility of execution are absolutely essential. The waves of emotion, under the influence of which the eye really sees in any artistic sense, do not last long enough to allow of 269a slow, painstaking manner of execution. There must be no hitch in the machinery of expression when the consciousness is alive to the realisation of something fine. Fluency of hand and accuracy of eye are the things your academic studies should have taught you, and these powers will be needed if you are to catch the expression of any of the finer things in form that constitute good drawing.

Let careful accuracy be your goal for a long time. When your eye and hand have learned to see and express on paper with a certain level of precision what you observe, you'll find that ease and speed in execution will come naturally. In drawing with any expressive power, this ease and speed are absolutely essential. The feelings that help the eye see artistically don’t last long enough to allow for a slow, painstaking approach. There shouldn’t be any hiccup in the process of expression when you’re fully aware of something beautiful. Your academic studies should have taught you to have a fluid hand and a keen eye, and these skills will be necessary if you want to capture the expression of the finer aspects of form that make up good drawing.

Try and express yourself in as simple, not as complicated a manner as possible. Let every touch mean something, and if you don't see what to do next, don't fill in the time by meaningless shading and scribbling until you do. Wait awhile, rest your eye by looking away, and then see if you cannot find something right that needs doing.

Try to express yourself as simply as possible. Let every touch have meaning, and if you’re unsure of what to do next, don’t waste time with pointless shading and scribbling. Take a break, look away for a moment, and then see if you can find something important that needs to be done.

Before beginning a drawing, it is not a bad idea to study carefully the work of some master draughtsman whom the subject to be drawn may suggest. If you do this carefully and thoughtfully, and take in a full enjoyment, your eye will unconsciously be led to see in nature some of the qualities of the master's work. And you will see the subject to be drawn as a much finer thing than would have been the case had you come to it with your eye unprepared in any way. Reproductions are now so good and cheap that the best drawings in the world can be had for a few pence, and every student should begin collecting reproductions of the things that interest him.

Before starting a drawing, it's a good idea to take time to study the work of a master artist that relates to your subject. If you do this with care and appreciation, your eye will naturally begin to notice some of the qualities present in the master's work when you look at nature. You'll see the subject you're drawing in a much richer way than if you approached it without any preparation. Reproductions are now so high-quality and affordable that you can get some of the best drawings in the world for just a few cents, and every student should start collecting reproductions of pieces that inspire them.

This is not the place to discuss questions of health, but perhaps it will not be thought grandmotherly to mention the extreme importance of nervous vitality in a fine draughtsman, and how his life should be ordered on such healthy lines that he has at his command the maximum instead of the 270minimum of this faculty. After a certain point, it is a question of vitality how far an artist is likely to go in art. Given two men of equal ability, the one leading a careless life and the other a healthy one, as far as a healthy one is possible to such a supersensitive creature as an artist, there can be no doubt as to the result. It is because there is still a lingering idea in the minds of many that an artist must lead a dissipated life or he is not really an artist, that one feels it necessary to mention the subject. This idea has evidently arisen from the inability of the average person to associate an unconventional mode of life with anything but riotous dissipation. A conventional life is not the only wholesome form of existence, and is certainly a most unwholesome and deadening form to the artist; and neither is a dissipated life the only unconventional one open to him. It is as well that the young student should know this, and be led early to take great care of that most valuable of studio properties, vigorous health.

This isn't the right place to talk about health matters, but it’s worth mentioning how crucial nervous vitality is for a great draftsman. His life should be organized in such a way that he can maintain the maximum amount of this quality instead of the 270minimum. After a certain point, how far an artist can go in their craft depends on their vitality. If you compare two people with the same talent, one living carelessly and the other living healthily—considering how healthy is possible for a sensitive artist—there’s no doubt about the outcome. The reason this topic comes up is that many people still believe an artist must live a reckless lifestyle to be considered a real artist. This belief likely comes from the average person's struggle to connect an unconventional lifestyle with anything other than wild excess. A conventional life isn’t the only healthy way to live, and it’s often toxic and stifling for an artist; likewise, a reckless lifestyle isn’t the only unconventional option available to them. It’s important for young students to understand this and to start taking good care of that most valuable studio asset: their health.


271

XX
MATERIALS

The materials in which the artist works are of the greatest importance in determining what qualities in the infinite complexity of nature he selects for expression. And the good draughtsman will find out the particular ones that belong to whatever medium he selects for his drawing, and be careful never to attempt more than it is capable of doing. Every material he works with possesses certain vital qualities peculiar to itself, and it is his business to find out what these are and use them to the advantage of his drawing. When one is working with, say, pen and ink, the necessity for selecting only certain things is obvious enough. But when a medium with the vast capacity of oil paint is being used, the principle of its governing the nature of the work is more often lost sight of. So near can oil paint approach an actual illusion of natural appearances, that much misdirected effort has been wasted on this object, all enjoyment of the medium being subordinated to a meretricious attempt to deceive the eye. And I believe a popular idea of the art of painting is that it exists chiefly to produce this deception. No vital expression of nature can be achieved without the aid of the particular vitality possessed by the medium with which one is working. If this is lost sight of and the eye is 272tricked into thinking that it is looking at real nature, it is not a fine picture. Art is not a substitute for nature, but an expression of feeling produced in the consciousness of the artist, and intimately associated with the material through which it is expressed in his work—inspired, it may be, in the first instance, by something seen, and expressed by him in painted symbols as true to nature as he can make them while keeping in tune to the emotional idea that prompted the work; but never regarded by the fine artist as anything but painted symbols nevertheless. Never for one moment does he intend you to forget that it is a painted picture you are looking at, however naturalistic the treatment his theme may demand.

The materials an artist uses are crucial in deciding which aspects of nature's endless complexity they choose to express. A skilled draftsman will discover the specific characteristics of whatever medium they select for their drawing and will be careful not to attempt more than that medium can handle. Each material has unique qualities, and it's the artist's job to identify and leverage these to enhance their work. When using something like pen and ink, it’s clear that only certain elements can be selected. However, when working with oil paint—which has a vast range of possibilities—the principle of how it influences the artwork can often be overlooked. Oil paint can create a near-illusion of natural appearances, leading to plenty of misguided effort aimed at tricking the eye. Many people think the purpose of painting is primarily to create this illusion. Yet, no true expression of nature can happen without tapping into the specific vibrancy of the medium in use. If artists forget this and mislead the eye into believing it’s viewing real nature, then it’s not a great painting. Art isn't a substitute for nature; it's an expression of emotion crafted from the artist's consciousness and deeply connected to the materials used. Their work may initially be inspired by something observed and conveyed through painted symbols that are as true to nature as possible while remaining aligned with the emotional idea that sparked the creation. Still, a fine artist never considers these symbols anything other than painted representations. They never intend for you to forget that you’re looking at a painted picture, no matter how realistic the portrayal may be.

In the earlier history of art it was not so necessary to insist on the limitations imposed by different mediums. With their more limited knowledge of the phenomena of vision, the early masters had not the same opportunities of going astray in this respect. But now that the whole field of vision has been discovered, and that the subtlest effects of light and atmosphere are capable of being represented, it has become necessary to decide how far complete accuracy of representation will help the particular impression you may intend your picture or drawing to create. The danger is that in producing a complete illusion of representation, the particular vitality of your medium, with all the expressive power it is capable of yielding, may be lost.

In the early days of art, it wasn't as crucial to focus on the limitations of different mediums. The early masters, with their more limited understanding of how vision works, didn't have the same chances to go wrong in this area. But now that we've uncovered the entire spectrum of vision and can capture the most delicate effects of light and atmosphere, we need to determine how much achieving complete accuracy in representation will enhance the specific impression you want your picture or drawing to convey. The risk is that in striving for a perfect illusion of representation, the unique qualities of your medium, along with the expressive potential it holds, could be lost.

Perhaps the chief difference between the great masters of the past and many modern painters is the neglect of this principle. They represented nature in terms of whatever medium they worked in, and 273never overstepped this limitation. Modern artists, particularly in the nineteenth century, often attempted to copy nature, the medium being subordinated to the attempt to make it look like the real thing. In the same way, the drawings of the great masters were drawings. They did not attempt anything with a point that a point was not capable of expressing. The drawings of many modern artists are full of attempts to express tone and colour effects, things entirely outside the true province of drawing. The small but infinitely important part of nature that pure drawing is capable of conveying has been neglected, and line work, until recently, went out of fashion in our schools.

Perhaps the main difference between the great masters of the past and many modern painters is the disregard for this principle. They depicted nature according to the medium they used, and 273never exceeded this limitation. Modern artists, especially in the nineteenth century, often tried to replicate nature, with the medium taking a back seat to making it appear lifelike. Similarly, the drawings of the great masters were simply drawings. They didn’t try to express anything that a drawing couldn't convey. The drawings of many modern artists are filled with attempts to capture tone and color effects—things that fall outside the true scope of drawing. The small yet incredibly important aspect of nature that pure drawing can convey has been overlooked, and line work has, until recently, fallen out of favor in our schools.

There is something that makes for power in the limitations your materials impose. Many artists whose work in some of the more limited mediums is fine, are utterly feeble when they attempt one with so few restrictions as oil paint. If students could only be induced to impose more restraint upon themselves when they attempt so difficult a medium as paint, it would be greatly to the advantage of their work. Beginning first with monochrome in three tones, as explained in a former chapter, they might then take for figure work ivory black and Venetian red. It is surprising what an amount of colour effect can be got with this simple means, and how much can be learned about the relative positions of the warm and cold colours. Do not attempt the full range of tone at first, but keep the darks rather lighter and the lights darker than nature. Attempt the full scale of tone only when you have acquired sufficient experience with the simpler range, and gradually add more colours as you learn to master a few. But restraints are 274not so fashionable just now as unbridled licence. Art students start in with a palette full of the most amazing colours, producing results that it were better not to discuss. It is a wise man who can discover his limitations and select a medium the capacities of which just tally with his own. To discover this, it is advisable to try many, and below is a short description of the chief ones used by the draughtsman. But very little can be said about them, and very little idea of their capacities given in a written description; they must be handled by the student, and are no doubt capable of many more qualities than have yet been got out of them.

There’s a certain power that comes from the limitations imposed by your materials. Many artists who excel in some of the more restricted mediums struggle when they try something with as few restrictions as oil paint. If students could be encouraged to exercise more self-restraint when they tackle such a challenging medium like paint, it would significantly benefit their work. Starting with monochrome in three tones, as discussed in a previous chapter, they could then use ivory black and Venetian red for figure work. It's surprising how much color effect can be achieved with this simple method and how much one can learn about the relationships between warm and cool colors. Don’t try to capture the full range of tones right away; instead, keep the darks a bit lighter and the lights a bit darker than they appear in nature. Only attempt to manage the full scale of tones after you've gained enough experience with the simpler range, gradually introducing more colors as you learn to control a few. But restraint is not as trendy these days as wild freedom. Art students often start out with a palette full of astonishing colors, producing results better left unexamined. A wise person knows how to recognize their limitations and choose a medium that aligns with their strengths. To figure this out, it’s advisable to experiment with various mediums, and below is a brief overview of the main ones used by artists. However, very little can be conveyed about them, and any description will barely hint at their potential; they need to be experienced hands-on by the student, and they likely possess many more qualities than have been discovered so far.

Lead Pencil

This well-known medium is one of the most beautiful for pure line work, and its use is an excellent training to the eye and hand in precision of observation. Perhaps this is why it has not been so popular in our art schools lately, when the charms of severe discipline are not so much in favour as they should be. It is the first medium we are given to draw with, and as the handiest and most convenient is unrivalled for sketch-book use.

This well-known medium is one of the most beautiful for pure line work, and using it is excellent training for the eye and hand in precision of observation. Maybe that's why it hasn't been as popular in our art schools lately, since the appeal of strict discipline isn't as favored as it should be. It’s the first medium we’re taught to draw with, and as the most handy and convenient option, it’s unmatched for sketchbook use.

It is made in a large variety of degrees, from the hardest and greyest to the softest and blackest, and is too well known to need much description. It does not need fixing.

It comes in many different levels of hardness, from the hardest and grayest to the softest and blackest, and is so well-known that it doesn’t require much explanation. It doesn’t need any repairs.

For pure line drawing nothing equals it, except silver point, and great draughtsmen, like Ingres, have always loved it. It does not lend itself so readily to any form of mass drawing. Although it is sometimes used for this purpose, the offensive shine that occurs if dark masses are introduced is against its use in any but very lightly shaded work.

For pure line drawing, nothing compares to it, except silver point, and great artists like Ingres have always appreciated it. It doesn’t adapt easily to any kind of mass drawing. Even though it's sometimes used for this purpose, the unpleasant shine that appears when dark masses are added makes it unsuitable for anything other than very lightly shaded work.

Plate LV. FROM A SILVER-POINT DRAWING

Plate LV.

Plate 55.

FROM A SILVER-POINT DRAWING

FROM A SILVER-POINT SKETCH

275Its charm is the extreme delicacy of its grey-black lines.

275Its appeal lies in the fine delicacy of its grey-black lines.

Silver and Gold Point.

Similar to lead pencil, and of even greater delicacy, is silver-point drawing. A more ancient method, it consists in drawing with a silver point on paper the surface of which has been treated with a faint wash of Chinese white. Without this wash the point will not make a mark.

Similar to a lead pencil, and even more delicate, is silver-point drawing. This is an older technique that involves drawing with a silver point on paper that has been lightly washed with Chinese white. Without this wash, the point won't leave a mark.

For extreme delicacy and purity of line no medium can surpass this method. And for the expression of a beautiful line, such as a profile, nothing could be more suitable than a silver point. As a training to the eye and hand also, it is of great value, as no rubbing out of any sort is possible, and eye and hand must work together with great exactness. The discipline of silver-point drawing is to be recommended as a corrective to the picturesque vagaries of charcoal work.

For extreme delicacy and clarity of line, no medium can match this method. And for capturing a beautiful line, like a profile, nothing is better than a silver point. It’s also valuable for training the eye and hand, as there's no erasing allowed, so they must work together with great precision. The discipline of silver-point drawing is highly recommended as a remedy for the artistic freedom often found in charcoal work.

A gold point, giving a warmer line, can also be used in the same way as a silver point, the paper first having been treated with Chinese white.

A gold point, which provides a warmer line, can also be used in the same way as a silver point, with the paper first treated with Chinese white.

Charcoal.

Two extreme points of view from which the rendering of form can be approached have been explained, and it has been suggested that students should study them both separately in the first instance, as they each have different things to teach. Of the mediums that are best suited to a drawing combining both points of view, the first and most popular is charcoal.

Two extreme viewpoints for approaching the representation of form have been discussed, and it’s been recommended that students examine them both individually at first, as each offers unique lessons. Among the mediums that are best suited for a drawing that combines both perspectives, the most popular is charcoal.

Charcoal is made in many different degrees of hardness and softness, the harder varieties being capable of quite a fine point. A chisel-shaped point is the most convenient, as it does not wear away so quickly. And if the broad side of the chisel point 276is used when a dark mass is wanted, the edge can constantly be kept sharp. With this edge a very fine line can be drawn.

Charcoal comes in various levels of hardness and softness, with the harder types able to achieve a fine point. A chisel-shaped point is the most practical, as it doesn't wear down as quickly. If you use the broad side of the chisel point 276when you need a dark area, you can keep the edge sharp. This edge allows you to draw a very fine line.

Charcoal works with great freedom, and answers readily when forceful expression is wanted. It is much more like painting than any other form of drawing, a wide piece of charcoal making a wide mark similar to a brush. The delicacy and lightness with which it has to be handled is also much more like the handling of a brush than any other point drawing. When rubbed with the finger, it sheds a soft grey tone over the whole work. With a piece of bread pressed by thumb and finger into a pellet, high lights can be taken out with the precision of white chalk; or rubber can be used. Bread is, perhaps, the best, as it does not smudge the charcoal but lifts it readily off. When rubbed with the finger, the darks, of course, are lightened in tone. It is therefore useful to draw in the general proportions roughly and rub down in this way. You then have a middle tone over the work, with the rough drawing showing through. Now proceed carefully to draw your lights with bread or rubber, and your shadows with charcoal, in much the same manner as you did in the monochrome exercises already described.

Charcoal allows for a lot of creativity and responds well when you need bold expression. It resembles painting more than any other drawing technique, with a thick piece of charcoal leaving a broad mark like a brush. The finesse and light touch required to use it is also more similar to using a brush than any other drawing method. When you rub it with your finger, it creates a soft gray tone across the entire artwork. You can use a piece of bread shaped into a small ball with your thumb and finger to lift highlights as precisely as white chalk, or you can use a rubber eraser. Bread might be the best option since it doesn’t smudge the charcoal and easily lifts it off. When you rub it with your finger, the darker areas will get lighter. Therefore, it’s helpful to sketch the basic proportions roughly and smooth them out this way. You’ll end up with a middle tone on the paper while the rough drawing is still visible underneath. Then carefully define your highlights with bread or rubber and your shadows with charcoal, much like you did in the previous monochrome exercises.

All preliminary setting out of your work on canvas is usually done with charcoal, which must of course be fixed with a spray diffuser. For large work, such as a full-length portrait, sticks of charcoal nearly an inch in diameter are made, and a long swinging line can be done without their breaking.

All initial outlines of your work on canvas are typically made with charcoal, which should definitely be set with a spray fixative. For larger pieces, like a full-length portrait, charcoal sticks almost an inch thick are used, allowing for long sweeping lines without breaking.

For drawings that are intended as things of beauty in themselves, and are not merely done as a preparatory study for a painting, charcoal is per277haps not so refined a medium as a great many others. It is too much like painting to have the particular beauties of a drawing, and too much like drawing to have the qualities of a painting. However, some beautiful things have been done with it.

For drawings that are meant to be beautiful on their own and aren’t just preparatory sketches for a painting, charcoal is probably not as refined a medium as many others. It resembles painting too closely to showcase the unique beauty of a drawing, yet it’s too similar to drawing to possess the qualities of a painting. Still, some stunning works have been created with it.

It is useful in doing studies where much finish is desired, to fix the work slightly when drawn in and carried some way on. You can work over this again without continually rubbing out with your hand what you have already drawn. If necessary you can rub out with a hard piece of rubber any parts that have already been fixed, or even scrape with a pen-knife. But this is not advisable for anything but an academic study, or working drawings, as it spoils the beauty and freshness of charcoal work. Studies done in this medium can also be finished with Conté chalk.

It’s helpful in studies where a polished finish is desired to lightly set the work once it’s partially drawn. This way, you can refine it again without constantly erasing what you’ve already created. If needed, you can erase any sections that are already set with a hard piece of rubber or even scrape them with a penknife. However, this isn't recommended except for academic studies or working drawings, as it can ruin the beauty and freshness of charcoal work. Studies in this medium can also be completed with Conté chalk.

There is also an artificial charcoal put up in sticks, that is very good for refined work. It has some advantages over natural charcoal, in that there are no knots and it works much more evenly. The best natural charcoal I have used is the French make known as "Fusain Rouget." It is made in three degrees, No. 3 being the softest, and, of course, the blackest. But some of the ordinary Venetian and vine charcoals sold are good. But don't get the cheaper varieties: a bad piece of charcoal is worse than useless.

There’s also an artificial charcoal sold in sticks that’s great for detailed work. It has some benefits over natural charcoal since it doesn’t have any knots and it works much more smoothly. The best natural charcoal I’ve used is the French brand called "Fusain Rouget." It comes in three grades, with No. 3 being the softest and, naturally, the darkest. However, some of the regular Venetian and vine charcoals available are decent too. Just avoid the cheaper options: a bad piece of charcoal is more trouble than it's worth.

Charcoal is fixed by means of a solution of white shellac dissolved in spirits of wine, blown on with a spray diffuser. This is sold by the artists' colourmen, or can be easily made by the student. It lightly deposits a thin film of shellac over the work, acting as a varnish and preventing its rubbing off.

Charcoal is set using a solution of white shellac dissolved in alcohol, applied with a spray diffuser. This can be purchased from art suppliers or easily made by the student. It lightly coats the drawing with a thin layer of shellac, acting as a varnish and preventing it from smudging.

278Charcoal is not on the whole the medium an artist with a pure love of form selects, but rather that of the painter, who uses it when his brushes and paints are not handy.

278Charcoal isn't usually the medium chosen by artists who have a true passion for form; instead, it's typically used by painters when their brushes and paints aren't available.

Red Chalk (Sanguine).

A delightful medium that can be used for either pure line work or a mixed method of drawing, is red chalk. This natural red earth is one of the most ancient materials for drawing. It is a lovely Venetian red in colour, and works well in the natural state, if you get a good piece. It is sold by the ounce, and it is advisable to try the pieces as they vary very much, some being hard and gritty and some more soft and smooth. It is also made by Messrs. Conté of Paris in sticks artificially prepared. These work well and are never gritty, but are not so hard as the natural chalk, and consequently wear away quickly and do not make fine lines as well.

A great medium that can be used for either pure line work or a mixed drawing style is red chalk. This natural red earth is one of the oldest drawing materials. It has a beautiful Venetian red color and performs well in its natural state, especially if you find a good piece. It’s sold by the ounce, and it’s a good idea to test the pieces since they vary a lot—some are hard and gritty, while others are softer and smoother. It’s also made by Conté in Paris in sticks that are artificially prepared. These work well and are never gritty, but they aren’t as hard as natural chalk, so they wear down faster and don’t create fine lines as effectively.

Red chalk when rubbed with the finger or a rag spreads evenly on paper, and produces a middle tone on which lights can be drawn with rubber or bread. Sticks of hard, pointed rubber are everywhere sold, which, cut in a chisel shape, work beautifully on red chalk drawings. Bread is also excellent when a softer light is wanted. You can continually correct and redraw in this medium by rubbing it with the finger or a rag, thus destroying the lights and shadows to a large extent, and enabling you to draw them again more carefully. For this reason red chalk is greatly to be recommended for making drawings for a picture where much fumbling may be necessary before you find what you want. Unlike charcoal, it hardly needs fixing, and much more intimate study of the forms can be got into it.

Red chalk, when smudged with your finger or a cloth, spreads evenly on paper and creates a mid-tone that you can highlight with an eraser or bread. Hard, pointed erasers shaped like chisels are widely available and work great for red chalk drawings. Bread is also a good option when you want a softer light. You can constantly adjust and rework your drawing by rubbing it with your finger or a cloth, which can erase the lights and shadows, allowing you to redraw them more precisely. Because of this, red chalk is highly recommended for creating sketches for a picture where you might need to experiment a lot before achieving the desired effect. Unlike charcoal, it rarely requires fixing, allowing for a more in-depth study of the forms.

279Most of the drawings by the author reproduced in this book are done in this medium. For drawings intended to have a separate existence it is one of the prettiest mediums. In fact, this is the danger to the student while studying: your drawing looks so much at its best that you are apt to be satisfied too soon. But for portrait drawings there is no medium to equal it.

279Most of the illustrations by the author included in this book are created using this medium. For drawings meant to stand alone, it's one of the most beautiful mediums out there. In fact, this is the challenge for students during their studies: your drawing appears so impressive that you might become satisfied too quickly. But for portrait drawings, there’s no medium that compares.

Additional quality of dark is occasionally got by mixing a little of this red chalk in a powdered state with water and a very little gum-arabic. This can be applied with a sable brush as in water-colour painting, and makes a rich velvety dark.

Additional quality of dark can sometimes be achieved by mixing a small amount of this powdered red chalk with water and a tiny bit of gum arabic. This can be applied with a sable brush like in watercolor painting, creating a rich, velvety dark.

It is necessary to select your paper with some care. The ordinary paper has too much size on it. This is picked up by the chalk, and will prevent its marking. A paper with little size is best, or old paper where the size has perished. I find an O.W. paper, made for printing etchings, as good as any for ordinary work. It is not perfect, but works very well. What one wants is the smoothest paper without a faced and hot-pressed surface, and it is difficult to find.

It's important to choose your paper carefully. Regular paper has too much sizing, which the chalk picks up and prevents it from marking properly. A paper with minimal sizing is the best choice, or you could use old paper where the sizing has worn off. I’ve found that O.W. paper, designed for printing etchings, works great for general use. It's not perfect but performs quite well. What you really want is the smoothest paper that isn't faced and hot-pressed, and that's hard to find.

Occasionally black chalk is used with the red to add strength to it. And some draughtsmen use it with the red in such a manner as to produce almost a full colour effect.

Sometimes black chalk is used with red to enhance its strength. Some artists combine it with red in a way that creates nearly a full color effect.

Holbein, who used this medium largely, tinted the paper in most of his portrait drawings, varying the tint very much, and sometimes using zinc white as a wash, which enabled him to supplement his work with a silver-point line here and there, and also got over any difficulty the size in the paper might cause. His aim seems to have been to select the few essential things 280in a head and draw them with great finality and exactness. In many of the drawings the earlier work has been done with red or black chalk and then rubbed down and the drawing redone with either a brush and some of the chalk rubbed up with water and gum or a silver-point line of great purity, while in others he has tinted the paper with water-colour and rubbed this away to the white paper where he wanted a light, or Chinese white has been used for the same purpose.

Holbein, who predominantly used this medium, colored the paper in most of his portrait drawings, varying the tint significantly. He sometimes applied zinc white as a wash, which allowed him to add a silver-point line here and there, and also addressed any issues that the paper's texture might present. His goal appears to have been to identify the few essential features in a face and depict them with great clarity and precision. In many of the drawings, he initially worked with red or black chalk, then smoothed it out and redrew with either a brush using some of the chalk mixed with water and gum, or with a pure silver-point line. In other instances, he tinted the paper with watercolors and scraped away areas to reveal the white paper where he wanted to create highlights, or he used Chinese white for the same effect.

Black Conté and Carbon Pencil.

Black Conté is a hard black chalk made in small sticks of different degrees. It is also put up in cedar pencils. Rather more gritty than red chalk or charcoal, it is a favourite medium with some, and can be used with advantage to supplement charcoal when more precision and definition are wanted. It has very much the same quality of line and so does not show as a different medium. It can be rubbed like charcoal and red chalk and will spread a tone over the paper in very much the same way.

Black Conté is a type of hard black chalk that comes in small sticks of various hardness. It's also available in cedar pencils. It's a bit more textured than red chalk or charcoal, and many artists prefer it because it can enhance charcoal work when they need more precision and detail. It has a similar line quality and doesn’t look like a different medium when used. Like charcoal and red chalk, it can be blended and spreads tone on the paper in much the same way.

Carbon pencils are similar to Conté, but smoother in working and do not rub.

Carbon pencils are similar to Conté but work more smoothly and don't smudge.

White chalk.

White chalk is sometimes used on toned paper to draw the lights, the paper serving as a half tone while the shadows and outlines are drawn in black or red. In this kind of drawing the chalk should never be allowed to come in contact with the black or red chalk of the shadows, the half tone of the paper should always be between them.

White chalk is sometimes used on toned paper to highlight the light areas, with the paper acting as a mid-tone while the shadows and outlines are drawn in black or red. In this type of drawing, the chalk should never touch the black or red chalk of the shadows; the mid-tone of the paper should always be in between them.

For rubbed work white pastel is better than the ordinary white chalk sold for drawing, as it is not so hard. A drawing done in this method with white pastel and red chalk is reproduced on 281page 46 [Transcribers Note: Plate IV], and one with the hard white chalk, on page 260 [Transcribers Note: Plate LIV].

For rubbed work, white pastel is better than regular white chalk used for drawing because it's softer. A drawing made using this technique with white pastel and red chalk is shown on 281page 46 [Transcribers Note: Plate IV], and one made with the hard white chalk is on page 260 [Transcribers Note: Plate LIV].

This is the method commonly used for making studies of drapery, the extreme rapidity with which the position of the lights and shadows can be expressed being of great importance when so unstable a subject as an arrangement of drapery is being drawn.

This is the method usually used for studying drapery, as it's crucial to quickly capture the position of lights and shadows when drawing something as unpredictable as drapery arrangements.

Lithography.

Lithography as a means of artistic reproduction has suffered much in public esteem by being put to all manner of inartistic trade uses. It is really one of the most wonderful means of reproducing an artist's actual work, the result being, in most cases, so identical with the original that, seen together, if the original drawing has been done on paper, it is almost impossible to distinguish any difference. And of course, as in etching, it is the prints that are really the originals. The initial work is only done as a means of producing these.

Lithography, as a way of reproducing art, has lost a lot of its respect because it's been used for various unartistic commercial purposes. In truth, it’s one of the most amazing methods for replicating an artist's actual work, resulting in images that are often so similar to the original that, when placed side by side, it's nearly impossible to tell them apart if the original drawing is on paper. And just like in etching, the prints are what truly count as the originals. The initial artwork is created just to make these prints.

A drawing is made on a lithographic stone, that is, a piece of limestone that has been prepared with an almost perfectly smooth surface. The chalk used is a special kind of a greasy nature, and is made in several degrees of hardness and softness. No rubbing out is possible, but lines can be scratched out with a knife, or parts made lighter by white lines being drawn by a knife over them. A great range of freedom and variety is possible in these initial drawings on stone. The chalk can be rubbed up with a little water, like a cake of water-colour, and applied with a brush. And every variety of tone can be made with the side of the chalk.

A drawing is created on a lithographic stone, which is a piece of limestone that has been prepared with an almost perfectly smooth surface. The chalk used is a special type that has a greasy texture and comes in different levels of hardness and softness. You can’t erase it, but you can scratch out lines with a knife or lighten areas by drawing white lines over them. There’s a lot of freedom and variety in these initial drawings on stone. The chalk can be mixed with a little water, like a watercolor cake, and applied with a brush. You can create a wide range of tones using the side of the chalk.

Some care should be taken not to let the warm finger touch the stone, or it may make a greasy mark that will print.

Some care should be taken not to let the warm finger touch the stone, or it might leave a greasy mark that will show up.

282When this initial drawing is done to the artist's satisfaction, the most usual method is to treat the stone with a solution of gum-arabic and a little nitric acid. After this is dry, the gum is washed off as far as may be with water; some of the gum is left in the porous stone, but it is rejected where the greasy lines and tones of the drawing come. Prints may now be obtained by rolling up the stone with an inked roller. The ink is composed of a varnish of boiled linseed oil and any of the lithographic colours to be commercially obtained.

282Once the initial drawing meets the artist's approval, the common approach is to treat the stone with a mixture of gum arabic and a bit of nitric acid. After it dries, the gum is rinsed off as much as possible with water; some of the gum remains in the porous stone, but it's removed where the greasy lines and shades of the drawing are. You can now make prints by rolling the stone with an inked roller. The ink consists of a varnish made from boiled linseed oil and any commercially available lithographic colors.

The ink does not take on the damp gummed stone, but only where the lithographic chalk has made a greasy mark, so that a perfect facsimile of the drawing on stone is obtained, when a sheet of paper is placed on the stone and the whole put through the press.

The ink doesn't stick to the damp, glued stone, but only where the lithographic chalk has left a greasy mark, allowing a perfect replica of the drawing on the stone to be made when a sheet of paper is placed on it and run through the press.

The medium deserves to be much more popular with draughtsmen than it is, as no more perfect means of reproduction could be devised.

The medium should be way more popular with artists than it is, as there couldn't be a better way to reproduce their work.

The lithographic stone is rather a cumbersome thing to handle, but the initial drawing can be done on paper and afterwards transferred to the stone. In the case of line work the result is practically identical, but where much tone and playing about with the chalk is indulged in, the stone is much better. Lithographic papers of different textures are made for this purpose, but almost any paper will do, provided the drawing is done with the special lithographic chalk.

The lithographic stone is pretty heavy and awkward to work with, but you can start the drawing on paper and then transfer it to the stone. For line work, the result is almost the same, but if you want to use a lot of shading and play around with the chalk, the stone works much better. There are different types of lithographic paper made for this, but really, any paper will work as long as you use the special lithographic chalk for the drawing.

Pen and Ink.

Pen and ink was a favourite means of making studies with many old masters, notably Rembrandt. Often heightening the effect with a wash, he conveyed marvellous suggestions with the simplest scribbles. But it is a difficult medium for the young 283student to hope to do much with in his studies, although for training the eye and hand to quick definite statement of impressions, there is much to be said for it. No hugging of half tones is possible, things must be reduced to a statement of clear darks—which would be a useful corrective to the tendency so many students have of seeing chiefly the half tones in their work.

Pen and ink was a favorite medium for many old masters, especially Rembrandt. He often enhanced the effect with a wash, creating stunning impressions with just simple scribbles. However, it's a challenging medium for the young 283student to work with in their studies. Still, it’s great for training the eye and hand to express quick, clear impressions. There’s no room for soft gradients; everything has to be distilled into clear darks, which can be a useful correction for the tendency many students have to focus mostly on the gray areas in their work.

Plate LVI. STUDY IN PEN AND INK AND WASH FOR TREE IN "THE BOAR HUNT" RUBENS (LOUVRE) Photo Giraudon

Plate LVI.

Plate 56.

STUDY IN PEN AND INK AND WASH FOR TREE IN "THE BOAR HUNT" RUBENS (LOUVRE)

STUDY IN PEN AND INK AND WASH FOR TREE IN "THE BOAR HUNT" RUBENS (LOUVRE)

Photo Giraudon

Photo Giraudon

The kind of pen used will depend on the kind of drawing you wish to make. In steel pens there are innumerable varieties, from the fine crow-quills to the thick "J" nibs. The natural crow-quill is a much more sympathetic tool than a steel pen, although not quite so certain in its line. But more play and variety is to be got out of it, and when a free pen drawing is wanted it is preferable.

The type of pen you use will depend on the kind of drawing you want to create. There are countless types of steel pens, ranging from fine crow quills to thick "J" nibs. The natural crow quill is a much more flexible tool than a steel pen, even though it isn’t as precise in its lines. However, you can get more variety and expression from it, making it a better choice for freehand drawing.

Reed pens are also made, and are useful when thick lines are wanted. They sometimes have a steel spring underneath to hold the ink somewhat in the same manner as some fountain pens.

Reed pens are also made and are helpful when you need thick lines. They sometimes have a steel spring underneath to help keep the ink, similar to some fountain pens.

There is even a glass pen, consisting of a sharp-pointed cone of glass with grooves running down to the point. The ink is held in these grooves, and runs down and is deposited freely as the pen is used. A line of only one thickness can be drawn with it, but this can be drawn in any direction, an advantage over most other shapes.

There’s even a glass pen, which is a sharp-tipped cone made of glass with grooves leading to the point. The ink sits in these grooves and flows down, making it easy to use as you write. You can create a line of just one thickness with it, but you can draw in any direction, which is a benefit compared to most other shapes.

Etching.

Etching is a process of reproduction that consists in drawing with a steel point on a waxed plate of copper or zinc, and then putting it in a bath of diluted nitric acid to bite in the lines. The longer the plate remains in the bath the deeper and darker the lines become, so that variety in thickness is got by stopping out with a varnish the light lines when they are sufficiently 284strong, and letting the darker ones have a longer exposure to the acid.

Etching is a reproduction process that involves drawing with a steel point on a waxed copper or zinc plate, and then placing it in a bath of diluted nitric acid to etch the lines. The longer the plate stays in the bath, the deeper and darker the lines get, so you can vary the thickness by using varnish to cover the lighter lines when they're strong enough and allowing the darker ones to stay in the acid longer.

Many wonderful and beautiful things have been done with this simple means. The printing consists in inking the plate all over and wiping off until only the lines retain any ink, when the plate is put in a press and an impression taken. Or some slight amount of ink may be left on the plate in certain places where a tint is wanted, and a little may be smudged out of the lines themselves to give them a softer quality. In fact there are no end of tricks a clever etching printer will adopt to give quality to his print.

Many amazing and beautiful things have been created with this simple method. Printing involves inking the plate completely and then wiping it off until only the lines hold any ink, after which the plate is placed in a press to make an impression. Alternatively, some ink may be intentionally left on the plate in specific areas where a tint is desired, and a bit may be smudged out of the lines themselves to create a softer effect. In fact, there are countless techniques a skilled etching printer will use to enhance the quality of their prints.

Paper.

The varieties of paper on the market at the service of the artist are innumerable, and nothing need be said here except that the texture of your paper will have a considerable influence on your drawing. But try every sort of paper so as to find what suits the particular things you want to express. I make a point of buying every new paper I see, and a new paper is often a stimulant to some new quality in drawing. Avoid the wood-pulp papers, as they turn dark after a time. Linen rag is the only safe substance for good papers, and artists now have in the O.W. papers a large series that they can rely on being made of linen only.

There are countless types of paper available for artists, and it's worth noting that the texture of your paper will significantly affect your drawing. Make sure to experiment with different types of paper to discover what best expresses your ideas. I always buy every new paper I come across, as a new paper can inspire a fresh quality in drawing. Stay away from wood-pulp papers, as they tend to darken over time. Linen rag is the only reliable material for quality papers, and artists now have access to a wide range of O.W. papers that are guaranteed to be made from linen only.

It is sometimes advisable, when you are not drawing a subject that demands a clear hard line, but where more sympathetic qualities are wanted, to have a wad of several sheets of paper under the one you are working on, pinned on the drawing-board. This gives you a more sympathetic surface to work upon and improves the quality of your work. In redrawing a study with which you are not quite satisfied, it is a good plan to use a thin paper, 285pinning it over the first study so that it can be seen through. One can by this means start as it were from the point where one left off. Good papers of this description are now on the market. I fancy they are called "bank-note" papers.

Sometimes it's a good idea, when you're not working on a subject that requires a sharp, clear line but instead needs softer qualities, to place a wad of several sheets of paper under the one you're drawing on, pinned to the drawing board. This gives you a more inviting surface to work on and enhances the quality of your work. When redrawing a study that you're not completely happy with, it's a smart move to use a thin paper, 285and pin it over the original study so that it shows through. This way, you can essentially pick up right where you left off. Good quality papers like this are available now. I believe they're called "bank-note" papers.


286

XXI
CONCLUSION

Mechanical invention, mechanical knowledge, and even a mechanical theory of the universe, have so influenced the average modern mind, that it has been thought necessary in the foregoing pages to speak out strongly against the idea of a mechanical standard of accuracy in artistic drawing. If there were such a standard, the photographic camera would serve our purpose well enough. And, considering how largely this idea is held, one need not be surprised that some painters use the camera; indeed, the wonder is that they do not use it more, as it gives in some perfection the mechanical accuracy which is all they seem to aim at in their work. There may be times when the camera can be of use to artists, but only to those who are thoroughly competent to do without it—to those who can look, as it were, through the photograph and draw from it with the same freedom and spontaneity with which they would draw from nature, thus avoiding its dead mechanical accuracy, which is a very difficult thing to do. But the camera is a convenience to be avoided by the student.

Mechanical invention, mechanical knowledge, and even a mechanical theory of the universe have so shaped the average modern mindset that it felt necessary in the previous pages to strongly argue against the idea of a mechanical standard of accuracy in artistic drawing. If such a standard existed, the photographic camera would be sufficient for our needs. Considering how widely accepted this idea is, it’s not surprising that some painters use the camera; in fact, it’s surprising they don’t use it more since it provides a certain type of mechanical accuracy that seems to be their main goal in their work. There might be occasions when the camera can help artists, but only for those who are fully capable of working without it—those who can look, in a way, through the photograph and draw from it with the same freedom and spontaneity they would use when drawing from nature, thus avoiding its lifeless mechanical accuracy, which is quite challenging to achieve. However, the camera is a convenience that students should avoid.

Now, although it has been necessary to insist strongly on the difference between phenomena mechanically recorded and the records of a living individual consciousness, I should be very sorry if 287anything said should lead students to assume that a loose and careless manner of study was in any way advocated. The training of his eye and hand to the most painstaking accuracy of observation and record must be the student's aim for many years. The variations on mechanical accuracy in the work of a fine draughtsman need not be, and seldom are, conscious variations. Mechanical accuracy is a much easier thing to accomplish than accuracy to the subtle perceptions of the artist. And he who cannot draw with great precision the ordinary cold aspect of things cannot hope to catch the fleeting aspect of his finer vision.

Now, while it's important to emphasize the difference between phenomena that are mechanically recorded and the records of a living individual consciousness, I would be very disappointed if anything said led students to think that a careless and sloppy approach to study is in any way encouraged. The goal for students must be to train their eyes and hands to achieve the utmost accuracy in observation and recording over many years. The variations in mechanical accuracy seen in the work of a skilled draftsman need not be, and often are not, conscious variations. Achieving mechanical accuracy is much easier than capturing the subtle perceptions of the artist. Those who cannot draw with great precision the ordinary, straightforward aspects of things cannot expect to capture the fleeting qualities of their more refined vision.

Those artists who can only draw in some weird fashion remote from nature may produce work of some interest; but they are too much at the mercy of a natural trick of hand to hope to be more than interesting curiosities in art.

Artists who can only draw in an unusual way that's far from nature might create work that's somewhat intriguing; however, they're too dependent on a natural skill to expect to be anything more than interesting oddities in art.

The object of your training in drawing should be to develop to the uttermost the observation of form and all that it signifies, and your powers of accurately portraying this on paper.

The goal of your drawing training should be to fully enhance your ability to observe form and everything it represents, as well as your skill in accurately depicting this on paper.

Unflinching honesty must be observed in all your studies. It is only then that the "you" in you will eventually find expression in your work. And it is this personal quality, this recording of the impressions of life as felt by a conscious individual that is the very essence of distinction in art.

Complete honesty is essential in all your studies. Only then will the true "you" be reflected in your work. This personal touch, this capturing of life experiences as felt by a aware individual, is what makes art truly unique.

The "seeking after originality" so much advocated would be better put "seeking for sincerity." Seeking for originality usually resolves itself into running after any peculiarity in manner that the changing fashions of a restless age may throw up. One of the most original men who ever lived did not trouble to invent the plots of more than three 288or four of his plays, but was content to take the hackneyed work of his time as the vehicle through which to pour the rich treasures of his vision of life. And wrote:

The idea of "searching for originality" would be better expressed as "searching for sincerity." Seeking originality often ends up being just chasing after whatever oddities the ever-changing trends of our restless age might bring. One of the most original individuals to ever exist didn’t bother inventing the plots of more than three 288 or four of his plays, but was happy to use the well-worn works of his time as a way to share the rich treasures of his perspective on life. And wrote:

"What custom wills in all things do you do it."

"What customs do you follow in everything you do?"

Individual style will come to you naturally as you become more conscious of what it is you wish to express. There are two kinds of insincerity in style, the employment of a ready-made conventional manner that is not understood and that does not fit the matter; and the running after and laboriously seeking an original manner when no original matter exists. Good style depends on a clear idea of what it is you wish to do; it is the shortest means to the end aimed at, the most apt manner of conveying that personal "something" that is in all good work. "The style is the man," as Flaubert says. The splendour and value of your style will depend on the splendour and value of the mental vision inspired in you, that you seek to convey; on the quality of the man, in other words. And this is not a matter where direct teaching can help you, but rests between your own consciousness and those higher powers that move it.

Your personal style will develop naturally as you become more aware of what you want to express. There are two types of insincerity in style: using a generic, conventional approach that doesn’t resonate with the content, and desperately trying to find an original style when there’s no genuine material to support it. Good style relies on having a clear understanding of your intent; it’s the most effective way to convey that personal "something" found in all great work. As Flaubert said, "The style is the man." The beauty and significance of your style will reflect the clarity and value of the ideas you wish to express; it reflects the quality of the person, in other words. This isn’t something that can be taught directly; it lies within your own awareness and the higher insights that drive it.


289

APPENDIX

If you add a line of 5 inches to one of 8 inches you produce one 13 inches long, and if you proceed by always adding the last two you arrive at a series of lengths, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55 inches, &c. Mr. William Schooling tells me that any two of these lines adjoining one another are practically in the same proportion to each other; that is to say, one 8 inches is 1.600 times the size of one 5 inches, and the 13-inch line is 1.625 the size of the 8-inch, and the 21-inch line being 1.615 times the 13-inch line, and so on. With the mathematician's love of accuracy, Mr. Schooling has worked out the exact proportion that should exist between a series of quantities for them to be in the same proportion to their neighbours, and in which any two added together would produce the next. There is only one proportion that will do this, and although very formidable, stated exactly, for practical purposes, it is that between 5 and a fraction over 8. Stated accurately to eleven places of decimals it is (1 + sqrt(5))/2 = 1.61803398875 (nearly).

If you add a 5-inch line to an 8-inch line, you get a 13-inch line, and if you keep adding the last two lines together, you create a series of lengths: 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55 inches, etc. Mr. William Schooling tells me that any two of these lines next to each other are nearly in the same proportion to one another; for example, an 8-inch line is 1.600 times the size of a 5-inch line, the 13-inch line is 1.625 times the size of the 8-inch, and the 21-inch line is 1.615 times the 13-inch line, and so on. With a mathematician's love for precision, Mr. Schooling has calculated the exact proportion that should exist between a series of quantities for them to be proportional to their neighbors, where any two added together produce the next one. There is only one proportion that satisfies this condition, and while it may seem complicated, for practical purposes, it lies between 5 and just over 8. Stated accurately to eleven decimal places, it is (1 + sqrt(5))/2 = 1.61803398875 (approximately).

We have evidently here a very unique proportion. Mr. Schooling has called this the Phi proportion, and it will be convenient to refer to it by this name.

We clearly have a very unique proportion here. Mr. Schooling has named it the Phi proportion, and it will be useful to refer to it by this name.

THE PHI PROPORTION EC is 1.618033, &c., times size of AB, CD " " " " BC, DE " " " " CD, &c., AC=CD BD=DE, &c.

THE PHI PROPORTION

THE GOLDEN RATIO

EC is 1.618033, &c., times size of AB,
CD BC,
DE CD, &c.,
AC=CD
BD=DE, &c.

290Testing this proportion on the reproductions of pictures in this book in the order of their appearing, we find the following remarkable results:

290When we test this proportion using the reproductions of pictures in this book as they appear, we discover the following noteworthy results:

"Los Meninas," Velazquez, page 60 [Transcribers Note: Plate IX].—The right-hand side of light opening of door at the end of the room is exactly Phi proportion with the two sides of picture; and further, the bottom of this opening is exactly Phi proportion with the top and bottom of canvas.

"Las Meninas," Velazquez, page 60 [Transcribers Note: Plate IX].—The light coming through the door on the right side of the room is perfectly in proportion with the two sides of the picture; additionally, the bottom of this opening is perfectly in proportion with the top and bottom of the canvas.

It will be noticed that this is a very important point in the "placing" of the composition.

It’s important to note that this is a critical aspect of the arrangement of the composition.

"Fête Champêtre," Giorgione, page 151 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXIII].—Lower end of flute held by seated female figure exactly Phi proportion with sides of picture, and lower side of hand holding it (a point slightly above the end of flute) exactly Phi proportion with top and bottom of canvas. This is also an important centre in the construction of the composition.

"Fête Champêtre," Giorgione, page 151 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXIII].—The lower end of the flute held by the seated female figure is precisely in the Phi proportion with the sides of the picture, and the lower part of her hand holding it (a bit above the end of the flute) is also in the exact Phi proportion with the top and bottom of the canvas. This point is also a key center in the composition's structure.

"Bacchus and Ariadne," Titian, page 154 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXIV].—The proportion in this picture both with top and bottom and sides of canvas comes in the shadow under chin of Bacchus; the most important point in the composition being the placing of this head.

"Bacchus and Ariadne," Titian, page 154 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXIV].—The balance in this painting, regarding the top, bottom, and sides of the canvas, is found in the shadow beneath Bacchus's chin; the most significant aspect of the composition is the positioning of this head.

"Love and Death," by Watts, page 158 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXV].—Point from which drapery radiates on figure of Death exactly Phi proportion with top and bottom of picture.

"Love and Death," by Watts, page 158 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXV].—The point where the drapery spreads out from the figure of Death is perfectly proportionate to the top and bottom of the picture.

Point where right-hand side of right leg of Love cuts dark edge of steps exactly Phi proportion with sides of picture.

Point where the right-hand side of the right leg of Love meets the dark edge of the steps in perfect Phi proportion with the sides of the picture.

"Surrender of Breda," by Velazquez, page 161 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXVI].—First spear in upright row on the right top of picture, exactly Phi proportion with sides of canvas. Height of gun carried horizontally by man in middle distance above central group, exactly Phi proportion 291with top and bottom of picture. This line gives height of group of figures on left, and is the most important horizontal line in the picture.

"Surrender of Breda," by Velazquez, page 161 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXVI].—The first spear in the upright row on the top right of the picture is in perfect Phi proportion with the sides of the canvas. The height of the gun held horizontally by the man in the middle distance above the central group is also in perfect Phi proportion 291with the top and bottom of the picture. This line indicates the height of the group of figures on the left, making it the most important horizontal line in the artwork.

"Birth of Venus," Botticelli, page 166 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXVII].—Height of horizon line Phi proportion with top and bottom of picture. Height of shell on which Venus stands Phi proportion with top and bottom of picture, the smaller quantity being below this time. Laterally the extreme edge of dark drapery held by figure on right that blows towards Venus is Phi proportion with sides of picture.

"Birth of Venus," Botticelli, page 166 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXVII].—The height of the horizon line follows the Phi proportion with the top and bottom of the image. The height of the shell that Venus stands on also follows the Phi proportion with the top and bottom of the picture, with the smaller dimension being below this time. Laterally, the far edge of the dark drapery held by the figure on the right, which blows toward Venus, is in Phi proportion with the sides of the picture.

"The Rape of Europa," by Paolo Veronese, page 168 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXVIII].—Top of head of Europa exactly Phi proportion with top and bottom of picture. Right-hand side of same head slightly to left of Phi proportion with sides of picture (unless in the reproduction a part of the picture on the left has been trimmed away, as is likely, in which case it would be exactly Phi proportion).

"The Rape of Europa," by Paolo Veronese, page 168 [Transcribers Note: Plate XXXVIII].—The top of Europa's head is exactly at the Phi proportion with the top and bottom of the image. The right side of the same head is slightly to the left of the Phi proportion with the sides of the image (unless the reproduction has trimmed part of the image on the left, which is likely, in which case it would be exactly at the Phi proportion).

I have taken the first seven pictures reproduced in this book that were not selected with any idea of illustrating this point, and I think you will admit that in each some very important quantity has been placed in this proportion. One could go on through all the illustrations were it not for the fear of becoming wearisome; and also, one could go on through some of the minor relationships, and point out how often this proportion turns up in compositions. But enough has been said to show that the eye evidently takes some especial pleasure in it, whatever may eventually be found to be the physiological reason underlying it.

I have taken the first seven pictures featured in this book, which were not chosen with the intention of illustrating this point, and I think you'll agree that in each, a significant quantity has been placed in this proportion. One could continue through all the illustrations, but that might become tedious; additionally, one could examine some of the smaller relationships and highlight how frequently this proportion appears in compositions. But enough has been said to demonstrate that the eye clearly takes a special pleasure in it, regardless of the eventual physiological reason behind it.


292

INDEX

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W

A

Absorbent canvas, 192

Absorbent canvas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Academic drawing, 34

Academic drawing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Academic and conventional, 68

Academic and traditional, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Academic students, 68

Students, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Accuracy, scientific and artistic, 36

Accuracy, scientific and artistic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Anatomy, study of, its importance, 36, 122

Anatomy, the study of it, its significance, 36, 122

"Ansidei Madonna," Raphael's, 231

"Ansidei Madonna," by Raphael, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Apelles and his colours, 31

Apelles and his paints, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Architecture, proportion in, 230

Proportion in architecture, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Art, some definitions of, 18

Art, some definitions of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Artist, the, 27

Artist, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Atmosphere indicated by shading, 102

Shading indicates atmosphere, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Atmospheric colours, 39

Vibrant colors, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Audley, Lady, Holbein's portrait of, 248

Lady Audley, Holbein's portrait of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

B

"Bacchus and Ariadne," Titian's, 154, 193

"Bacchus and Ariadne" by Titian, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Backgrounds, 93, 141

Backgrounds, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Balance, 219

Balance, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Balance between straight lines and curves, 220

Balance between straight lines and curves, 220

Balance between flat and gradated tones, 221

Balance between flat and gradual tones, 221

Balance between light and dark tones, 222

Balance between light and dark tones, 222

Balance between warm and cold colours, 223

Balance between warm and cool colors, 223

Balance between interest and mass, 224

Balance between interest and mass, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Balance between variety and unity, 225

Balance between variety and unity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"Bank-note" papers, 285

"Banknote" papers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bastien Lepage, 204

Bastien Lepage, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bath for etching, 283

Etching bath, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Beauty, definition of, 23

Beauty, definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Beauty and prettiness, 135

Beauty and attractiveness, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Beauty and truth, 22

Beauty and truth, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"Birth of Venus, the," Botticelli's, 163

"The Birth of Venus," Botticelli's, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Black chalk, 179

Black chalk, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Black Conté, 280

Black Conté, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Black glass, the use of a, 120, 202

Black glass, the use of a, 120, 202

Blake, example of parallelism, 145

Blake, example of parallelism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Blake's designs, 51, 169

Blake's designs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Blake's use of the vertical, 155

Blake's use of the vertical, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Blocking in the drawing, 90

Blocking in the sketch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Blocking out with square lines, 85, 120

Blocking out with square lines, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

"Blue Boy," Gainsborough's, 223

"Blue Boy," Gainsborough's painting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Botany, the study of, 36

Botany, the study of plants, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Botticelli's work, 34, 51, 145, 163

Botticelli's work, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Boucher's heads compared with Watteau's, 211

Boucher's heads vs. Watteau's, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Boundaries of forms, 93

Forms and boundaries, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Boundaries of masses in Nature, 195

Boundaries of masses in nature, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bread, use of, in charcoal drawing, 276

Bread, using it for charcoal drawing, 276

Browning, R., portraits of, 250

Browning, R., portraits of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Brush, manipulation of the, 114

Brush manipulation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Brush strokes, 115

Brush strokes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Brushes, various kinds of, 115

Various types of brushes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Burke on "The Sublime and the Beautiful," 135

Burke on "The Sublime and the Beautiful," 135

Burne-Jones, 55, 71, 125, 177

Burne-Jones, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

C

Camera, use of the, 286

Camera usage, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Carbon pencils, 180

Carbon pencils, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Carlyle, 64

Carlyle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Circle, perfect curve of, to be avoided, 138

Circle, perfect curve to dodge, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chalks, drawing in, 125

Chalk, drawing in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Charcoal drawing, 54, 111, 113, 192, 275;

Charcoal sketch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__;

fixing solution, 277

repair solution, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chavannes, Peuvis de, 55, 103

Chavannes, Peuvis de, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Chiaroscuro, 53

Chiaroscuro, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chinese art, 21

Chinese art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

293

China and Japan, the art of, 59

China and Japan, the art of, 59

Colour, contrasts of, 208

Color contrasts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Colours for figure work, 273

Colors for figure work, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Colours, a useful chart of, 191

Color chart, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Classic architecture, 148

Classic architecture, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Claude Monet, 62, 190

Claude Monet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Clothes, the treatment of, 253

Clothing care, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Composition of a picture, the, 216

Composition of a picture, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Constable, 149

Constable, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Conté crayon, 192, 277

Conté crayon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

"Contrasts in Harmony," 136

"Contrasts in Harmony," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Conventional art, 74

Traditional art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Conventional life, deadness of the, 270

Conventional life, the dullness of it, 270

Corners of the panel or canvas, the, 160

Corners of the panel or canvas, the, 160

Corot, his masses of foliage, 197, 214

Corot, with his clusters of leaves, 197, 214

Correggio, 206

Correggio, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Crow-quill pen, the, 283

Crow-quill pen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Curves, how to observe the shape of, 90, 162, 209

Curves, how to look at the shape of, 90, 162, 209

Curves and straight lines, 220

Curves and straight lines, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

D

Darwin, anecdote of, 243

Darwin's anecdote, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Deadness, to avoid, 132, 193

Avoid deadness, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Decorative work, 183

Decorative design, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Degas, 66

Degas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"Dither," 71

"Dither," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Diagonal lines, 160

Diagonal lines, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Discord and harmony, 173

Discord and harmony, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Discordant lines, 172

Discordant lines, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Draperies of Watteau, the, 211

Watteau's Draperies, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Drapery studies in chalks, 125

Drapery studies in chalk, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Drapery in portrait-drawing, 253

Drapery in portrait drawing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Draughtsmanship and impressionism, 66

Drafting and impressionism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Drawing, academic, 35

Drawing, scholarly, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Drawing, definition of, 31

Drawing, definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

E

East, arts of the, 57

arts of the East, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Edges, variety of, 192

Types of edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Edges, the importance of the subject of, 198

Edges, the significance of the topic of, 198

Egg and dart moulding, 138

Egg and dart molding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Egyptian sculpture, 135

Egyptian sculpture, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Egyptian wall paintings, 51

Egyptian wall art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

El Greco, 169

El Greco, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Elgin Marbles, the, 135

Elgin Marbles, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ellipse, the, 138

Ellipse, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"Embarquement pour l'Île de Cythère," Watteau's, 211

"Embarquement pour l'Île de Cythère," Watteau's, 211

Emerson on the beautiful, 214

Emerson on beauty, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Emotional power of the arts, 20

Emotional impact of the arts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Emotional significance of objects, 31

Emotional value of objects, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Erechtheum, moulding from the, 138

Erechtheum, molding from the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Etching, 283

Etching, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Exercises in mass drawing, 110

Mass drawing exercises, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Exhibitions, 57

Exhibitions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Expression in portrait-drawing, 242

Expression in portrait drawing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Eye, anatomy of the, 105

Eye anatomy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Eye, the, in portrait-drawing, 242

Eye in portrait drawing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Eyebrow, the, 105

Eyebrow, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Eyelashes, the, 108

Eyelashes, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Eyelids, the, 106

Eyelids, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

F

"Fête Champêtre," Giorgioni's, 151

"Country Party," Giorgioni's, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Figure work, colours for, 273

Figure work, colors for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"Finding of the Body of St. Mark," 123, 236

"Finding of the Body of St. Mark," 123, 236

Fixing positions of salient points, 86

Fixing the locations of important points, 86

Flaubert, 68

Flaubert, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Foliage, treatment of, 196

Foliage treatment, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Foreshortenings, 93

Foreshortenings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Form and colour, 18

Form and color, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Form, the influence of, 32

Form, the impact of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Form, the study of, 81

Form study, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Frans Hals, 246

Frans Hals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

French Revolution, Carlyle's, 64

French Revolution, Carlyle's, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

French schools, 68

French schools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Fripp, Sir Alfred, 91

Fripp, Sir Alfred, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Fromentin's definition of art, 23

Fromentin's definition of art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Fulness of form indicated by shading, 102, 124

Fulness of form shown by shading, 102, 124

G

Gainsborough, the charm of, 209, 223

Gainsborough, the appeal of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Genius and talent, 17

Genius and talent, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Geology, the study of, 36

Geology, the study of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Giorgioni, 151, 196

Giorgioni, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

"Giorgioni, The School of," Walter Pater's, 29

"Giorgioni, The School of," Walter Pater's, 29

Giotto, 222

Giotto, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Glass pens, 283

Glass pens, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Goethe, 64

Goethe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gold point, 275

Gold point, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gold and silver paint for shading, 125

Gold and silver paint for shading, 125

Gothic architecture, 148, 150

Gothic architecture, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Gradation, variety of, 199

Gradation of variety, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Greek architecture, 221

Greek architecture, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Greek art in the Middle Ages, 130

Greek art in the Middle Ages, 130

Greek art, variety in, 133

Greek art, diverse in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Greek vivacity of moulding, 134

Greek vibrancy of shaping, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Greek and Gothic sculpture, 147

Greek and Gothic art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

294

Greek type of profile, 140

Greek-style profile, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Greuze, 221

Greuze, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

H

Hair, the treatment of, 77, 102

Hair treatment, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Hair, effect of style upon the face, 180

Hair, the impact of style on the face, 180

Half tones, 98

Half tones, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"Hannibal crossing the Alps," Turner's, 163

"Hannibal crossing the Alps," Turner’s, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hardness indicated by shading, 102

Hardness shown by shading, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Harsh contrasts, effect of, 171

Harsh contrasts, impact of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hatching, 118

Hatching, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Health, questions of, 269

Health issues, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Henner, the work of, 124

Henner, the work of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

High lights, 94

Highlights, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hogarth's definition, 136

Hogarth's definition, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Holbein's drawings, 99, 179, 247

Holbein's drawings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Holl, Frank, 222

Holl, Frank, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Horizontal, calm and repose of the, 150

Horizontal, calm, and restful of the, 150

Horizontal and vertical, the, 149

Horizontal and vertical, the __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Human Anatomy for Art Students, 91

Human Anatomy for Art Students, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Human figure, the outline of the, 52

Human figure, the outline of the, 52

I

Impressionism, 195, 257

Impressionism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Impressionist vision, 61

Impressionist vision, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ingres, studies of, 73, 274

Ingres studies, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Ink used in lithography, 282

Ink used in lithography, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Intellect and feeling, 19

Mind and emotions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Intuitions, 17

Intuitions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Italian Renaissance, the, 51

Italian Renaissance, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Italian work in the fifteenth century, 34

Italian work in the fifteenth century, 34

J

Japanese art, 21

Japanese art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Japanese method, a, 47

Japanese method, a, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Japanese and Chinese use of contrasts of colour, 208

Japanese and Chinese use of contrasts of color, 208

K

Keats' definition of beauty, 22

Keats' definition of beauty, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

L

Landscapes of Watteau, the, 211

Watteau's Landscapes, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lang, Andrew, his definition of art, 19

Lang, Andrew, his definition of art, 19

Lawrence, Lord, portrait of, 250

Lawrence, Lord, portrait, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lead pencil, 192, 274

Mechanical pencil, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Lecoq de Boisbaudran, M., 260

Lecoq de Boisbaudran, M., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lehmann, R., portraits by, 250

Lehmann, R., portraits by, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Leonardo da Vinci, 51, 206, 227

Leonardo da Vinci, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Light, 38

Light, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Light and shade, principles of, 51, 95

Light and shadow, fundamentals of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Lighting and light effects, 202

Lighting and light effects, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Likeness, catching the, 240

Likeness, catching the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Line and the circle, the, 137

Line and the circle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Line drawing and mass drawing, 48, 50

Line drawing and mass drawing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Lines expressing repose or energy, 163

Lines conveying calm or excitement, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Line, the power of the, 50, 80

Line, the power of the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Lines, value of, in portrait-painting, 138

Lines, the importance of, in portrait painting, 138

Lines of shading, different, 102, 123

Lines of shading, different, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Lithographic chalk, 192

Litho chalk, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lithography, 281

Lithography, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"Love and Death," Watts', 156

"Love and Death," Watts', __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

M

Manet, 206

Manet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mass drawing, 49, 58, 80, 81, 110

Mass drawing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__

Masters, past and modern, 272

Masters, past and present, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Materials, 271

Materials, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mathematical proportions, 228

Math ratios, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Measuring comparative distances, 88

Measuring relative distances, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Measurements, vertical and horizontal, 88

Measurements, up and down, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Medium, the use of, 111

Medium, the usage of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Michael Angelo, the figures of, 33, 53, 56

Michael Angelo, the figures of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Michael Angelo and Degas, 66

Michael Angelo and Degas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Millais, 196

Millais, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mist, effect of a, on the tone of a picture, 188

Mist, its effect on the tone of a picture, 188

Model, the, 61, 81

Model, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Monet, Claude, 118

Monet, Claude, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Morris's definition of art, 19

Morris's definition of art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

N

Nature, variety of forms in, 187

Nature, various forms in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nature's tendency to pictorial unity of arrangement, 186

Nature's tendency to create a unified arrangement, 186

Newspaper as a background, 99

Newspaper backdrop, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Norman architecture, 148

Norman architecture, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

O

Oil, surplus in paint, 191

Paint overspill, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Originality, 76

Originality, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"Our Lady of the Rocks," L. da Vinci's, 206

"Our Lady of the Rocks," L. da Vinci's, 206

Outline drawing, 50

Outline sketch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Outline studies and models, 81

Outline studies and models, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

P

Paint, the vitality of, 114

Paint, its vibrancy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Paint, the consistency of, 117

Paint, the consistency of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Paint, effect of oil in thick, 191

Paint, the effect of thick oil, 191

"Painted Poetry," 46

"Painted Poetry," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Painter's training, the object of the, 29

Painter's training, the focus of the, 29

295

Painting and drawing, 110

Art and illustration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Panel or canvas, the, 159

Panel or canvas, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Paolo Uccello, 171

Paolo Uccello, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Paolo Veronese, 145, 163

Paolo Veronese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Paper for drawing, 279, 284

Drawing paper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Parallel shading, 100

Parallel shading, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Parallelism of lines, 145

Parallel lines, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Parthenon, the, 55

Parthenon, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pater, Walter, 29

Pater, Walter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pen-and-ink drawing, 101, 282

Pen and ink drawing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Pens for pen-and-ink drawing, 283

Pens for ink drawing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Perspective, the study of, 36, 195

Perspective, studying, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Philip IV, Velazquez' portrait of, 194

Philip IV, Velázquez's portrait of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Photograph, failure of the, 72

Photo, the failure of the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Picture galleries, the influence of, 33

The impact of picture galleries, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pictures, small and large, treatment of, 183

Pictures, big and small, how to deal with, 183

Planes of tone, painting in the, 122

Planes of tone, painting in the, 122

Pre-Raphaelite paintings, 46

Pre-Raphaelite art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pre-Raphaelite movement, the, 257

Pre-Raphaelite movement, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Preparatory drawings, disadvantage of, 121

Preparatory sketches, downside of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Primitive art, 55, 128

Primitive art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Primitive emotions, 21

Basic emotions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Procedure, in commencing a drawing, 265

Procedure for starting a drawing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Profiles, beauty of, 140

Beauty profiles, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Proportions, 228

Proportions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Poppy oil and turpentine, the use of, 119

Poppy oil and turpentine, the use of, 119

Portrait-drawing, 99, 239

Portrait drawing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

"Portrait of the Artist's Daughter," Sir E. Burne-Jones's, 177

"Portrait of the Artist's Daughter," Sir E. Burne-Jones's, 177

Pose, the, 251

Pose, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Peuvis de Chavannes, 55, 103

Peuvis de Chavannes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Q

Quality and texture, variety in, 189

Quality, texture, and variety in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

R

Radiating lines, 171

Radiating lines, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"Rape of Europa, The," Paul Veronese's, 163

"Rape of Europa, The," Paul Veronese's, 163

Raphael, 53, 231

Raphael, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Red rays, 39, 192, 278

Red rays, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Reed pens, 283

Reed pens, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rembrandt and his colours, 31, 204, 208

Rembrandt and his colors, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Reproduction, advantages of up-to-date, 104, 269

Reproduction, benefits of being up-to-date, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Retina, effect of light on the, 38

Retina, effect of light on the, 38

Reynolds' contrasts of colour, 208

Reynolds' color contrasts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rhythm, definition of, 27, 127, 227

Rhythm, definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Right angle, power of the, 156

Right angle, power of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Roman sculpture, lack of vitality in, 133

Roman sculpture, lacking vitality in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rossetti, 55

Rossetti, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Royal Academy Schools, 69

Royal Academy Schools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rubens, 162

Rubens, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ruskin, 17

Ruskin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

S

Schools of Art, 68

Art Schools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Scientific and artistic accuracy, 36

Scientific and artistic accuracy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Scientific study, necessity for, 36

Need for scientific study, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Scumbling, 111

Scumbling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Shading, 51, 93, 101, 124

Shading, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Shape, variety of, 185

Type, variety of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Silhouette, the, 66

Silhouette, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Silver-point, 275

Silver-point, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Silver-point work, shading in, 101

Silverpoint drawing, shading in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sitter, the, 249

Sitter, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Softness indicated by shading, 102, 123

Softness shown through shading, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Solar spectrum, the, 38

Solar spectrum, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Solids as flat copy, 84

Solids as flat copies, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Spanish school, the, 62

Spanish school, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Straight lines indicative of strength, 148

Strong, straight lines, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Straight lines and flat tones, analogy between, 209

Straight lines and flat tones, analogy between, 209

Strong light in contrast with dark shadow, 206

Strong light contrasting with dark shadow, 206

Study of drawing, the, 80

Drawing study, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stump, the, 54

Stump, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Style, 288

Style, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"Sublime and the Beautiful, The," Burke's, 135

"Sublime and the Beautiful, The," Burke's, 135

"Surrender of Breda, The," Velazquez', 161, 194

"Surrender of Breda, The," Velázquez', __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Sympathetic lines, 173

Sympathetic messages, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

T

Talent and genius, 17

Talent and genius, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Teachers in Art Schools, 69

Art School Teachers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Technical side of an art, the, 21

Technical side of an art, the, 21

Thickness and accent, variety of, 143

Thickness and accent, variety of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tintoretto, 123, 237

Tintoretto, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Titian, 53, 154

Titian, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Tolstoy's definition of art, 19

Tolstoy's view on art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tone, meaning of the word, 121, 187, 208

Tone, word meaning, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Tone values, variety of, 187

Tone values, variety of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Toned paper, drawing on, 125

Toned paper, drawing on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

296

Tones, large flat, the effect of, 207

Tones, large and flat, the effect of, 207

Touch, the sense of, 40

Touch, the sense of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Trafalgar Square lions, the, 78

Trafalgar Square lions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Trees, the masses of, 196

Trees, the crowd of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Turner, 163, 205, 214, 223

Turner, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Types, lifelessness of, 134

Types, lack of vitality, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

U

"Ulysses deriding Polyphemus," Turner's, 214

"Ulysses mocking Polyphemus," Turner's, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Unity and variety, 132

Unity and diversity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Unity of line, 144

Unity of line, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

V

"Vale of Best," Millais', 196

"Vale of Best," Millais, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Value, meaning of the word as applied to a picture, 188

Value, in terms of how it relates to a picture, 188

Values of tone drawing, the, 122

Values of tone drawing, the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Van Dyck, his use of the straight line, 151

Van Dyck, his use of the straight line, 151

Variety in symmetry, 142

Variety in symmetry, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"Variety in Unity," 136

"Unity in Diversity," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

"Varying well," 136

"Doing well," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Velazquez, 53, 60, 161

Velazquez, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Venetian painters, and the music of edges, 193

Venetian painters and the music of edges, 193

Venetians, the, their use of straight lines, 151

Venetians, their use of straight lines, 151

Venetians, system and principles of design of the, 217

Venetians, system and principles of design of the, 217

"Venus, Mercury, and Cupid," Correggio's, 206

"Venus, Mercury, and Cupid" by Correggio, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Vertical, the, associated with the sublime, 149

Vertical, related to the sublime, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Vertical lines, feeling associated with, 182

Vertical lines, associated feelings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Vision, 38

Vision, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Visual blindness, 47

Visual impairment, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Visual memory, the, 256

Visual memory, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

W

Ward, the animal painter, 124

Ward, the animal artist, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Warm colours, 224

Warm colors, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Watteau, the charm of, 209

Watteau's charm, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Watts, G.F., portraits by, 249

Watts, G.F., portraits by, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Watts' use of the right angle, 156

Watts' use of the right angle, 156

Windsor, Holbein's portraits at, 247

Holbein's portraits at Windsor, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Whistler, a master of tone, 190, 222, 251

Whistler, a tone master, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

White casts, drawing from, 99

White casts, drawing from, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

White chalk, 180

White chalk, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

White paint, 191

White paint, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

White pastel, 280

White pastel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!